100% Construction Documents Specifications City ... - DN Higgins, Inc.

100% Construction Documents Specifications City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 803 Elkcam Circle East Marco Island, FL 34145 Astorino Project No. N001039.00 December 7, 2010

Owner City of Marco Island 803 Elkcam Circle E. Marco Island, FL 34145 Phone (239) 389-5184

Mechanical/Plumbing/ Electrical Engineers OCI Associates, Inc. 9728 Commerce Center Court Fort Myers, FL 33908 Phone (239) 454 5117

Architects Astorino 2400 1st Street, Suite 103 Fort Myers, FL 33901 Phone (239) 339-6440

Civil/Structural Engineers American Engineering 573 Bald Eagle Drive Marco Island, FL 34145 Phone (239) 394-1697

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00

December 7, 2010

SECTION 000108 - PROJECT DIRECTORY

Project: City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 803 Elkcam Circle East Marco Island, Florida 34145 Owner: The City of Marco Island 803 Elkcam Circle E Marco Island, FL 34145 Phone (239) 389-5184

Architect: Astorino 2400 1st Street, Suite 103 Fort Myers, FL 33901 Phone (239) 339-6440

Mechanical/Plumbing/Electrical Engineers:

Structural Engineers:

OCI Associates, Inc. 9728 Commerce Center Court Fort Myers, FL 33908 Phone (239) 454-5117

American Engineering 573 Bald Eagle Drive Marco Island, FL 34145 Phone (239) 394-1697

END OF SECTION 000108

PROJECT DIRECTORY

000108 - 1


December 7, 2010

TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION 000001 000108 000110 000115

Title Page Project Directory Table of Contents List of Drawings

BIDDING REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 012600 012900 013100 013200 013300 014000 014200 015000 016000 017300 017329 017419 017700 017839 017900

Summary Contract Modification Procedures Payment Procedures Project Management and Coordination Construction Progress Documentation Submittal Procedures Quality Requirements References Temporary Facilities and Controls Product Requirements Execution Cutting and Patching Construction Waste Management and Disposal Closeout Procedures Project Record Documents Demonstration and Training

DIVISION 2- EXISTING CONDITIONS 024113

Demolition

DIVISION 3- CONCRETE 031000 032000 033053

Concrete Formwork Concrete Reinforcement Cast-in-Place Concrete

DIVISION 4- MASONRY - (NOT USED)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

000110 - 1


December 7, 2010

DIVISION 5- METALS 051200 052100 053100 055213 057000

Structural Steel Framing Steel Joist Framing Steel Decking Pipe and Tube Railings Miscellaneous Metals

DIVISION 6- WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061000 064023

Rough Carpentry Interior Architectural Woodwork

DIVISION 7- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 072100 079200

Thermal Insulation Joint Sealants

DIVISION 8- OPENINGS 081113 083323 085113 087100 089000

Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Overhead Coiling Doors Aluminum Windows Door Hardware Louvers and Vents

DIVISION 9- FINISHES 092216 092900 093000 095113 096513 099123

Non-Structural Metal Framing Gypsum Board Tiling Acoustical Tile Ceiling Resilient Base and Accessories Interior Painting

DIVISION 10- SPECIALTIES 101400 102800 104413 104416 105113

Signage Toilet and Bath Accessories Fire Extinguisher Cabinet’s Fire Extinguishers Metal Lockers

DIVISION 11- EQUIPMENT - (NOT USED) DIVISION 12- FURNISHINGS - (NOT USED)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

000110 - 2


December 7, 2010

DIVISION 13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 131200

Pre-Engineered Buildings

DIVISION 14- CONVEYING EQUIPMENT - (NOT USED) DIVISION 21- FIRE SUPPRESSION 211000

Fire Protection

DIVISION 22- PLUMBING 220001 220700 221119 221316 221317 221319 223330 224005

Plumbing, General Requirements Insulation for Plumbing Systems Domestic Water Piping Sanitary Sewer, Storm Water and Sanitary Vent Piping Cleanouts and Cleanout Access Covers Floor and Shower Drains Domestic Water Heaters, Electric Plumbing Fixtures and Trim

DIVISION 23- HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230100 230500 230515 230518 230529 230548 230553 230594 230700 230925 232313 233100 233300 233423 233425 233713 233725 238127

General Mechanical Provisions Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Instruction and Maintenance Manuals Piping: Condensate Drain Hangers and Supports Vibration Isolation Equipment Identification of Piping Systems and Equipment Performance Verification, Final Thermal Insulation Variable Frequency Drives Refrigeration Piping System Ductwork Duct System Accessories HVAC Power Ventilators Fans: In-Line Centrifugal, Light Duty Air Distribution Devices Louvers Split Package Air Conditioning Equipment

DIVISION 26- ELECTRICAL 260500 260519 260526

Common Work Results for Electrical Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

TABLE OF CONTENTS

000110 - 3

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 260529 260533 260543 260553 260923 262200 262416 262726 262816 264113 265100 265600

December 7, 2010

Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems Identification for Electrical Systems Lighting Control Devices Low-Voltage Transformers Panelboards Wiring Devices Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Lightning Protection for Structures Interior Lighting Exterior Lighting

DIVISION 27- COMMUNICATIONS - (NOT USED) DIVISION 28- ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280500 280513 283100

Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System

DIVISION 31- EARTHWORK 311000 312000 312319 313116 315000

Site Clearing Earth Moving Dewatering Termite Control Excavation Support and Protection

DIVISION 32- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS - (NOT USED) DIVISION 33-UTILITIES 330500 331116 333100

Common Work Results for Utilities Site Water Utility Distribution Piping Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping

DIVISION 44 POLUTION CONTROL EQUIPMENT 444253

Oil/Water Separators

END OF SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS

000110 - 4


December 7, 2010

SECTION 000115- LIST OF DRAWINGS SHEET NUMBER

SHEET TITLE

DATE

COVER SHEET G-000

Cover Sheet

CIVIL C101 C102 C511

Index, Notes, and Legend Site Plan Details

ARCHITECTURAL A001 A003 A101 A301 A401 A701 A801 A901

Architectural Site Plan Life Safety Plan Floor Plans and Wall Types Building Elevations Building Section and Details Interior Elevations, Sections and Mounting Heights Door, Window and Louver Schedules and Details Reflected Ceiling and Finish Plans

STRUCTURAL S111 S511 S512 S513

Foundation Plan and Sections Sections Storage Loft Plans and Sections Storage Loft Details

FIRE PROTECTION F100 F101

Schedules Details and Notes Plan Floor Plan Fire Protection

MECHANICAL M001 M101

Legend, Notes, Schedules, Details and Abbreviations – HVAC Floor Plan - HVAC

LIST OF DRAWINGS

000015 - 1


December 7, 2010

ELECTRICAL E001 E101 E102 E103 E104 E201 E202 E301

Symbols, Legend, and Notes – Electrical Floor Plan – Electrical Floor Plan – Power/Systems Mezzanine Plan – Electrical Roof Plan - Lightning Protection Plan Schedules – Electrical Schedules, Risers, and Details – Electrical Details - Electrical

PLUMBING P100 P101 P301 P302

Index, Legend, and General Notes – Plumbing Floor Plan – Plumbing Risers & Details – Plumbing Schedules – Plumbing

FIRE PROTECTION F001 F002 F101

Schedules and Notes – Fire Protection Details – Fire Protection Floor Plan – Fire Protection

END OF SECTION

LIST OF DRAWINGS

000015 - 2


December 7, 2010

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1.

1.3

Work covered by the Contract Documents. Work phases. Use of premises. Owner's completion requirements. Work restrictions. Specification formats and conventions.

Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A.

Description of Work: The project consists of two pre-engineered structures the first an approximately 4,500sf warehouse building with shop, office, restroom and storage areas. The office, locker room and restroom spaces will occupy approximately 800sf of the first floor with the mezzanine storage being provided directly above. The second structure an approximately 7,200 sf. pre-engineer metal structure to be utilized as a storage building. Both structures will include concrete slabs and primary utilities with the work shop also including conditioned spaces and a restroom.

B.

Project Identification: City of Marco Island, Instrumentation Building. 1.

Project Location: 803 Elkcam Circle East, Marco Island, FL 34145

C.

Owner:

Facilities 50 Bald Eagle Drive, Marco Island, FL 34145

D.

Architect:

Astorino; 2400 1st Street

SUMMARY

011000 - 1


December 7, 2010

Fort Myers, Florida 33901 E.

Structural Engineer:

F.

Mechanical/ Plumbing/ Electrical Engineer: OCI Associates, Inc. 9728 Commerce Center Court, Fort Myers, FL.33908

G.

Civil Engineers and Landscape Architects: American Engineering 573 Bald Eagle Drive, Marco Island, Florida 34145

1.4

American Engineering 573 Bald Eagle Drive, Marco Island, Florida 34145

TYPE OF CONTRACT A.

1.5

Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. WORK PHASES

A.

1.6

The Work shall be conducted in One Phase.

USE OF PREMISES A.

General: The Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and agreed to by the Owner.

A.

Use of Site: Limit use of premises to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1.

B.

Limits: Confine constructions operations as described below:

Limit site disturbance, including earthwork and clearing of vegetation, to 40 feet beyond building perimeter; 10 feet beyond surface walkways, patios, surface parking, and utilities less than 12 inches in diameter; 15 feet beyond primary roadway curbs and main utility branch trenches; and 25 feet beyond constructed areas with permeable surfaces (such as pervious paving areas, stormwater detention facilities, and playing fields) that require additional staging areas in order to limit compaction in the constructed area. 1.

Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a.

SUMMARY

Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.

011000 - 2

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 b.

1.7

December 7, 2010

Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.

OWNER'S COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS A.

Owner Completion Requirements: The work of the first phase shall be completed and coordinated with the required completion dates to maintain the overall project construction completion schedule. All underground utility work, excavation, backfilling, compacting and other site preparation required by the Phase #1 Construction Documents shall be completed, AsBuilt conditions recorded and final approved by the Design professionals, and the Owner prior to release of Final Payment.

B.

Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.

1.8

WORK RESTRICTIONS A.

On-Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed during normal business working hours of 7:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, except otherwise indicated. 1. 2.

A.

Weekend Hours: To be coordinated with the Owner and the authority having jurisdiction. Early Morning Hours: To be coordinated with the Owner and the authority having jurisdiction.

Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1.

Notify Architect, and Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

B.

Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission.

C.

Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within 25 feet of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes.

1.9

SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A.

Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 50-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.

SUMMARY

011000 - 3

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1.

2. B.

Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help crossreferencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents. Division 01: Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1.

2.

Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a.

1.10

December 7, 2010

The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 011000

SUMMARY

011000 - 4


December 7, 2010

SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.

B.


1.3

Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award.

MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A.

1.4

Architect will issue to the Contractor supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A.

Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. 2.

Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. Within 15 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a.

b. c.

Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

012600 - 1

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 d.

B.

2.

3. 4. 5.

6.

1.5

Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Owner through the Architect. 1.

C.

December 7, 2010

Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests. CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A.

1.6

On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures on AIA Document G701. CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A.

Change Directive: Architect may issue a Change Directive on AIA Document G714 Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1.

B.

Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Change Directive.


012600 - 2


December 7, 2010

After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.



012600 - 3


December 7, 2010

SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2.

1.3

Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule.

DEFINITIONS A.

1.4

Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A.

Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1.

Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. b. c.

2.

Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. Submittals Schedule. Contractor's Construction Schedule.

The Schedule of Values shall be submitted to the Architect by the Contractor at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of the initial Application for Payment.

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

012900 - 1

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 B.

December 7, 2010

Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1.

Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. b. c. d. e.

2. 3.

Project name and location. Name of Architect. Architect's project number. Contractor's name and address. Date of submittal.

Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

Related Specification Section or Division. Description of the Work. Name of subcontractor. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. Name of supplier. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. Dollar value. 1)

4.

5. 6.

Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a.

7. 8.

Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing.

Include

Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a.

Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

012900 - 2


1.5

December 7, 2010

Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A.

Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and Construction Manager and paid for by Owner. 1.

Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B.

Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Construction Manager. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C.

Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Architect by the 15th day of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the previous month.

D.

Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.

E.

Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. 2.

F.

Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments. 1.

G.

Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. 2. 3.

Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

012900 - 3

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 4. H.

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

List of subcontractors. Schedule of Values. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). Products list. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). List of Contractor's staff assignments. List of Contractor's principal consultants. Copies of building permits. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. Initial progress report. Report of preconstruction conference. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. Performance and payment bonds. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required.

Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. 2.

J.

Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner.

Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

I.

December 7, 2010

Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

9.

Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." Evidence that claims have been settled. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.

PAYMENT PROCEDURES

012900 - 4


December 7, 2010


PAYMENT PROCEDURES

012900 - 5


December 7, 2010

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Coordination Drawings. Administrative and supervisory personnel. Project meetings. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).

B.

The Contractor shall coordinate with all subcontractors to provide a drawing document depicting all system installations. The document shall include installation elevations and structural members. Areas of conflict should be noted with a proposed resolution provided for review by the Design professional.

C.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3.

1.3

Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule. Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

DEFINITIONS A.

1.4

RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents. COORDINATION

A.

Coordination: The Contractor shall coordinate all project operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

013100 - 1


2. 3. 4.

B.

1.5

Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.

Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

C.

December 7, 2010

Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. Delivery and processing of submittals. Progress meetings. Preinstallation conferences. Project closeout activities. Startup and adjustment of systems. Project closeout activities.

Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. SUBMITTALS

A.

Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings for efficient installation of different components. Coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. 1.

Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. b. c.

2.

Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. Indicate required installation sequences. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

Sheet Size: 24”x36”


013100 - 2


Number of Copies: Submit two opaque copies of each submittal. Architect, will return one copy with notes for distribution to the subcontractors. a.

4. B.

Submit five print copies where Coordination Drawings are required for operation and maintenance manuals, and certification documents. The Architect will retain one copy; Contractor shall submit two copies as a Project Record Drawing.

Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections.

Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of Notice to Proceed, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1.

1.6

December 7, 2010

Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL A.

General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. 1.

1.7

Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors.

PROJECT MEETINGS A.

General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1.

2. 3.

B.

Attendees: The Contractor will inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. Agenda: The Contractor will prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. Minutes: The Contractor will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.

Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner, and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1.

Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned


013100 - 3


2.

parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t. u. v.

3. C.

December 7, 2010

Tentative construction schedule. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. Designation of key personnel and their duties. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. Procedures for RFIs. Procedures for testing and inspecting. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. Distribution of the Contract Documents. Submittal procedures. Preparation of Record Documents. Use of the premises. Work restrictions. Owner's occupancy requirements. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. Construction waste management and recycling. Parking availability. Office, work, and storage areas. Equipment deliveries and priorities. First aid. Security. Progress cleaning. Working hours.

Minutes: The Contractor will record and distribute meeting minutes.

Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1.

2.

Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. The Contractor will advise Architect and Owner of scheduled meeting dates. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.

The Contract Documents. Options. Related RFIs. Related Change Orders. Purchases. Deliveries. Submittals. Review of mockups. Possible conflicts.


013100 - 4

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t. u. v. w. x. y. 3. 4. 5.

D.

December 7, 2010

Compatibility problems. Time schedules. Weather limitations. Manufacturer's written recommendations. Warranty requirements. Compatibility of materials. Acceptability of substrates. Temporary facilities and controls. Space and access limitations. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Testing and inspecting requirements. Installation procedures. Coordination with other work. Required performance results. Protection of adjacent work. Protection of construction and personnel.

The Contractor will record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. Reporting: The Contractor will distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1.

2.

Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Contractor, and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a.

Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1)

b.

Review schedule for next period.

Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1)

Interface requirements.


013100 - 5

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) 19) 20) 3. 4.

Sequence of operations. Status of submittals. Deliveries. Off-site fabrication. Access. Site utilization. Temporary facilities and controls. Work hours. Hazards and risks. Progress cleaning. Quality and work standards. Status of correction of deficient items. Field observations. RFIs. Status of proposal requests. Pending changes. Status of Change Orders. Pending claims and disputes. Documentation of information for payment requests.

Minutes: The Contractor will record the meeting minutes. Reporting: The Contractor will distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. a.

E.

December 7, 2010

Schedule Updating: The Contractor will revise the schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at bi-weekly intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences. 1.

2.

Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a.

Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.


013100 - 6

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 b.

c.

Schedule Updating: Revise Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13)

3.

1.8

December 7, 2010

Interface requirements. Sequence of operations. Status of submittals. Deliveries. Off-site fabrication. Access. Site utilization. Temporary facilities and controls. Work hours. Hazards and risks. Progress cleaning. Quality and work standards. Change Orders.

Reporting: The Contractor will record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.

REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs) A.

Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. 2.

B.

RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than the Contractor will be returned with no response. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Project name. Date. Name of Contractor. Name of Architect. RFI number, numbered sequentially. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. Contractor's signature.


013100 - 7


Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a.

C.

D.

Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments.

Software-Generated RFIs: sequential page number. 1.

December 7, 2010

Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and

Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1.

The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. b. c. d. e. f.

2. 3.

Requests for approval of submittals. Requests for approval of substitutions. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.

Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." a.

If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

E.

On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

F.

RFI Log: The Contractor will prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Project name. Name and address of Contractor. Name and address of Architect. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. RFI description. Date the RFI was submitted.


013100 - 8

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 7. 8. 9.

December 7, 2010

Date Architect's response was received. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.



013100 - 9


December 7, 2010

SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

B.

1.3

Preliminary Construction Schedule. Contractor's Construction Schedule. Submittals Schedule. Daily construction reports. Material location reports. Field condition reports. Special reports.

Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting construction photographs. 4. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 5. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. DEFINITIONS

A.

Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. 2. 3.

Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

013200 - 1


December 7, 2010

B.

Cost Loading: The allocation of the Schedule of Values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum, unless otherwise approved by Architect.

C.

CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.

D.

Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

E.

Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.

F.

Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1.

2. 3.

Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.

G.

Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail.

H.

Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element.

I.

Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.

J.

Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity relationships.

K.

Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A.

Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.

B.

Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Scheduled date for first submittal. Specification Section number and title. Submittal category (action or informational). Name of subcontractor.


013200 - 2

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 5. 6. C.

Approval of cost-loaded preliminary construction schedule will not constitute approval of Schedule of Values for cost-loaded activities.

Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit three copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. 1.

E.

Description of the Work covered. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.

Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit three copies. 1.

D.

December 7, 2010

Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, on CD-R, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated) and date on label.

CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit three copies of each of the following computer-generated reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. 1. 2. 3.

Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.

F.

Daily Construction Reports: Submit electronic copy in “Word” format weekly to the Architect and Owner.

G.

Special Reports: Submit three copies at time of unusual event.

1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

1.6

Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Architect's request. COORDINATION

A.

Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.

B.

Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.


013200 - 3

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1. 2.

December 7, 2010

Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A.

Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. 2.

Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary bar-chart schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. a.

3.

2.2

At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary Construction Schedule, instead of tabulating them separately.

Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A.

Procedures: Scheduling."

B.

Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Final Completion. 1.

C.

Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning &

Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. 2.

Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 45 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule.


013200 - 4


4. 5.

D.

December 7, 2010

Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 7 days for startup and testing. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. b. c. 2.

Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l.

3.

Coordination with existing construction. Uninterruptible services. Use of premises restrictions.

Subcontract awards. Submittals. Purchases. Mockups. Fabrication. Sample testing. Deliveries. Installation. Tests and inspections. Adjusting. Curing. Startup and placement into final use and operation.

Area Separations: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. b. c. d. e.

Structural completion. Permanent space enclosure. Completion of mechanical installation. Completion of electrical installation. Substantial Completion.

E.

Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion.

F.

Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for preparation of payment requests.


013200 - 5

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1. 2. 3. 4.

December 7, 2010

Refer to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures. Contractor shall assign cost to construction activities on the CPM schedule. Each activity cost shall reflect an accurate value subject to approval by Architect. Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum.

G.

Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.

H.

Computer Software: Prepare schedules using a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

2.3

PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A.

Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule no later than 30 days prior to the date established for Commencement of the Work.

B.

Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.

2.4

CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A.

General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.

B.

CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a computerized, cost- and resource-loaded, time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1.

2. 3. 4.

C.

Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. Use "one workday" as the unit of time. Include list of nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule.

CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.


013200 - 6


Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.

2.

3.

4. D.

Preparation and processing of submittals. Mobilization and demobilization. Purchase of materials. Delivery. Fabrication. Utility interruptions. Installation. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. Testing and commissioning.

Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges.

Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start-total float" sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

E.

December 7, 2010

Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. Description of activity. Principal events of activity. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. Early and late start dates. Early and late finish dates. Activity duration in workdays. Total float or slack time. Average size of workforce. Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the Schedule of Values).

Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Identification of activities that have changed. Changes in early and late start dates. Changes in early and late finish dates. Changes in activity durations in workdays. Changes in the critical path. Changes in total float or slack time. Changes in the Contract Time.


013200 - 7

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 2.5

December 7, 2010

REPORTS A.

Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

List of subcontractors at Project site. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. Equipment at Project site. Material deliveries. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. Accidents. Meetings and significant decisions. Unusual events (refer to special reports). Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. Meter readings and similar recordings. Emergency procedures. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. Change Orders received and implemented. Change Directives received and implemented. Services connected and disconnected. Equipment or system tests and startups. Partial Completions and occupancies. Substantial Completions authorized.

B.

Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site.

C.

Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for interpretation. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

2.6

SPECIAL REPORTS A.

General: Submit special reports directly to Architect within one day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.

B.

Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.


013200 - 8


December 7, 2010

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A.

Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling. 1.

2. B.

Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting reviewing an application for payment. 1.

2. 3. C.

In-House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact.

Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.

Distribution: The Contractor will distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified with a need-toknow schedule responsibility. 1. 2.

Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.



013200 - 9


December 7, 2010

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

1.3

Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the Schedule of Values. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting construction photographs and construction videotapes. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and for mockup requirements. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting videotapes of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those Sections.

DEFINITIONS A.

Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's and Construction Manager's responsive action.

B.

Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

013300 - 1


December 7, 2010

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A.

General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings may at the Architect’s discretion be provided for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

B.

Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. 2.

Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a.

Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C.

Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for scheduled performance of related construction activities.

D.

Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals, except due to errors or changes in design. 1.

2. 3. 4. E.

Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.

Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. 2. 3.

Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

Project name. Date. Name and address of Architect. Name and address of Contractor. Name and address of subcontractor. Name and address of supplier. Name of manufacturer.


013300 - 2

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 h.

Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1)

i. j. k. l.

December 7, 2010

Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A).

Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. Other necessary identification.

F.

Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

G.

Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect or Construction Manager observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

H.

Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Construction Manager. 1.

Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m.

2.

I.

Project name. Date. Destination (To:). Source (From:). Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. Category and type of submittal. Submittal purpose and description. Specification Section number and title. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. Remarks. Signature of transmitter.

On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as related submittal.

Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1.

Note date and content of previous submittal.


013300 - 3


December 7, 2010

Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. Resubmit submittals until they are marked “No Exception Taken”.

J.

Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

K.

Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating “No Exception Taken” by Architect.

1.5

CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES A.

General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files may be provided at the Architect’s discretion to the Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project.


ACTION SUBMITTALS A.

General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.

B.

Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. 2. 3.

If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. Include the following information, as applicable: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n.

4.

Manufacturer's written recommendations. Manufacturer's product specifications. Manufacturer's installation instructions. Standard color charts. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. Printed performance curves. Operational range diagrams. Mill reports. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. Compliance with specified referenced standards. Testing by recognized testing agency. Application of testing agency labels and seals. Notation of coordination requirements.

Submit Product Data concurrent with Samples.


013300 - 4


C.

Number of Copies: Submit three copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1.

Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. following information, as applicable: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o.

2. 3. 4.

D.

December 7, 2010

Include the

Dimensions. Identification of products. Fabrication and installation drawings. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. Templates and patterns. Schedules. Design calculations. Compliance with specified standards. Notation of coordination requirements. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches. Number of Copies: For drawings submit two opaque copies of each submittal. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return one copy. Number of Copies: For product information submit three copies of each submittal, unless copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit five copies where copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Construction Manager will retain one Mark up and return a copy as a Project Record Drawing.

Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. 2.

Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. b. c. d.

Generic description of Sample. Product name and name of manufacturer. Sample source. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.


013300 - 5


Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a.

b. 4.

Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a.

5.

Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return submittal with options selected.

Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a.

Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect and Owner will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned 1)

2)

E.

December 7, 2010

Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. Number and name of room or space. Location within room or space. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return two copies. a.

Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.


013300 - 6


December 7, 2010

F.

Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for Architects action.

G.

Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

H.

Application for Payment: "Payment Procedures."

I.

Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."

J.

Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. 2. 3. 4.

2.2

Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section

Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.

General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. 2.

3.

Number of Copies: Submit three copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect and Construction Manager will not return copies. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

B.

Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

C.

Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

D.

Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

E.

Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure


013300 - 7


December 7, 2010

Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. names of firms and personnel certified.

Include

F.

Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

G.

Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

H.

Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

I.

Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

J.

Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

K.

Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

L.

Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Name of evaluation organization. Date of evaluation. Time period when report is in effect. Product and manufacturers' names. Description of product. Test procedures and results. Limitations of use.

M.

Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

N.

Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

O.

Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.


013300 - 8


December 7, 2010

P.

Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q.

Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."

R.

Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

S.

Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

T.

Preparation of substrates. Required substrate tolerances. Sequence of installation or erection. Required installation tolerances. Required adjustments. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.

Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. Statement weather conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

U.

Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.

V.

Construction Photographs and Videotapes: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation."


013300 - 9

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 W.

Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to the Owner; do not submit to Architect. 1.

2.3

December 7, 2010

Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return the entire submittal for resubmittal.

DELEGATED DESIGN A.

Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1.

B.

If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit three copies of the required documents, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional registered in the State of Florida, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.


CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A.

Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B.

Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2

ARCHITECT'S ACTION A.

General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractors approval stamp and will return them without action.

B.

Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it.

C.

Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.


013300 - 10


December 7, 2010

D.

Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review.

E.

Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.



013300 - 11


December 7, 2010

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B.

Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1.

2.

3.

C.


1.3

Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other qualityassurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

DEFINITIONS A.

Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B.

Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the work and completed

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

014000 - 1


December 7, 2010

construction comply with requirements. Required testing services shall be included in the contractors cost of construction. C.

Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples.

D.

Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics.

E.

Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

F.

Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.

G.

Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

H.

Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

I.

Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

J.

Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1.

K.

1.4

Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to trades people of the corresponding generic name.

Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A.

General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.


014000 - 2


1.5

December 7, 2010

Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. SUBMITTALS

A.

Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

B.

Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

C.

Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

D.

Specification Section number and title. Description of test and inspection. Identification of applicable standards. Identification of test and inspection methods. Number of tests and inspections required. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. Requirements for obtaining samples. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

Date of issue. Project title and number. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. Identification of product and Specification Section. Complete test or inspection data. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


014000 - 3


December 7, 2010


General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B.

Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C.

Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D.

Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

E.

Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

F.

Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1.

G.

Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work.

Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. 2.

NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program.

H.

Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I.

Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1.

Contractor responsibilities include the following:


014000 - 4

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 a. b. c.

d. e. f. 2.

J.

2. 3. 4.

Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, through Construction Manager, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect or Construction Manager. Notify Architect and Construction Manager seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. Obtain Architect's and Construction Manager's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a.

5. 6.

1.7

Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project.

Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1.

K.

December 7, 2010

Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.

Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in individual Sections in Divisions 02 through 49. QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated the contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1.

The Contractor will furnish to the Owner names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and authorize to perform testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform for review and approval.


014000 - 5

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 2. 3. B.

December 7, 2010

Payment for these services will be made from the Project construction budget as line item included in project general conditions. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.

Tests and inspections are the Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

C.

Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."

D.

Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

E.

Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Owner, and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

F.

Notify Architect, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1.

Access to the Work.


014000 - 6

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. G.

Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

Schedule of Tests and Inspections: The Contractor will prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. 1.

1.8

Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.

Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1.

H.

December 7, 2010

Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.

SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A.

Special Tests and Inspections: Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

ACCEPTABLE TESTING AGENCIES A.

3.2

The approved testing agency must have a minimum of 5 years experience and hold State, Local licenses and certifications required by the authority having jurisdiction. TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A.

Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. 2. 3.

Date test or inspection was conducted. Description of the Work tested or inspected. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.


014000 - 7

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 4. B.

3.3

December 7, 2010

Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's and Owner’s reference during normal working hours. REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A.

General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1.

2.

Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching."

B.

Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C.

Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.



014000 - 8


December 7, 2010

SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. DEFINITIONS

A.

General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B.

"No Exception Taken": Is used to convey to the contractor that the submittal meets the project requirements. This marking does not relive the contractor of the responsibility to provide a coordinated code compliant installation.

C.

"Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D.

"Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E.

"Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F.

"Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G.

"Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

H.

"Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I.

"Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

1.3

INDUSTRY STANDARDS A.

Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if

REFERENCES

014200 - 1


December 7, 2010

bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B.

Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1.

1.4

Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A.

Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S."

B.

Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

AA

Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) www.aluminum.org

(703) 358-2960

AAADM

American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers www.aaadm.com

(216) 241-7333

AABC

Associated Air Balance Council www.aabchq.com

(202) 737-0202

AAMA

American Architectural Manufacturers Association www.aamanet.org

(847) 303-5664

AASHTO

American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials www.transportation.org

(202) 624-5800

AATCC

American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) www.aatcc.org

(919) 549-8141

ABAA

Air Barrier Association of America www.airbarrier.org

(866) 956-5888

REFERENCES

014200 - 2


December 7, 2010

ABMA

American Bearing Manufacturers Association www.abma-dc.org

(202) 367-1155

ACI

ACI International (American Concrete Institute) www.aci-int.org

(248) 848-3700

ACPA

American Concrete Pipe Association www.concrete-pipe.org

(972) 506-7216

AF&PA

American Forest & Paper Association www.afandpa.org

(800) 878-8878 (202) 463-2700

AGA

American Gas Association www.aga.org

(202) 824-7000

AGC

Associated General Contractors of America (The) www.agc.org

(703) 548-3118

AHA

American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA)

AHAM

Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers www.aham.org

(202) 872-5955

AI

Asphalt Institute www.asphaltinstitute.org

(859) 288-4960

AIA

American Institute of Architects (The) www.aia.org

(800) 242-3837 (202) 626-7300

AISC

American Institute of Steel Construction www.aisc.org

(800) 644-2400 (312) 670-2400

AISI

American Iron and Steel Institute www.steel.org

(202) 452-7100

AITC

American Institute of Timber Construction www.aitc-glulam.org

(303) 792-9559

ALSC

American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated www.alsc.org

(301) 972-1700

AMCA

Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. www.amca.org

(847) 394-0150

REFERENCES

014200 - 3


December 7, 2010

ANSI

American National Standards Institute www.ansi.org

(202) 293-8020

APA

Architectural Precast Association www.archprecast.org

(239) 454-6989

APA

APA - The Engineered Wood Association www.apawood.org

(253) 565-6600

API

American Petroleum Institute www.api.org

(202) 682-8000

ARI

Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute www.ari.org

(703) 524-8800

ARMA

Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association www.asphaltroofing.org

(202) 207-0917

ASCE

American Society of Civil Engineers www.asce.org

(800) 548-2723 (703) 295-6300

ASCE/SEI

American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute (See ASCE)

ASHRAE

American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and AirConditioning Engineers www.ashrae.org

(800) 527-4723

ASME

ASME International (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) www.asme.org

(800) 843-2763 (973) 882-1170

ASTM

ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org

(610) 832-9585

AWCI

AWCI International (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry International) www.awci.org

(703) 534-8300

AWI

Architectural Woodwork Institute www.awinet.org

(571) 323-3636

AWPA

American Wood-Preservers' Association www.awpa.com

(205) 733-4077

AWS

American Welding Society

(800) 443-9353

REFERENCES

(404) 636-8400

014200 - 4


December 7, 2010

www.aws.org

(305) 443-9353

AWWA

American Water Works Association www.awwa.org

(800) 926-7337 (303) 794-7711

BHMA

Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association www.buildershardware.com

(212) 297-2122

BIA

Brick Industry Association (The) www.bia.org

(703) 620-0010

BICSI

BICSI www.bicsi.org

(800) 242-7405 (813) 979-1991

BIFMA

BIFMA International (616) 285-3963 (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) www.bifma.com

CCC

Carpet Cushion Council www.carpetcushion.org

(610) 527-3880

CGA

Compressed Gas Association www.cganet.com

(703) 788-2700

CIMA

Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association www.cellulose.org

(888) 881-2462 (937) 222-2462

CISCA

Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association www.cisca.org

(630) 584-1919

CISPI

Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute www.cispi.org

(423) 892-0137

CLFMI

Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute www.chainlinkinfo.org

(301) 596-2583

CRRC

Cool Roof Rating Council www.coolroofs.org

(866) 465-2523 (510) 485-7175

CPPA

Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association www.cppa-info.org

(800) 510-2772 (202) 462-9607

CRI

Carpet & Rug Institute (The) www.carpet-rug.com

(800) 882-8846 (706) 278-3176

CRSI

Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute www.crsi.org

(847) 517-1200

REFERENCES

014200 - 5


December 7, 2010

CSA

CSA International (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) www.csa-international.org

(866) 797-4272 (416) 747-4000

CSI

Cast Stone Institute www.caststone.org

(717) 272-3744

CSI

Construction Specifications Institute (The) www.csinet.org

(800) 689-2900 (703) 684-0300

CTI

Cooling Technology Institute (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org

(281) 583-4087

DHI

Door and Hardware Institute www.dhi.org

(703) 222-2010

EIA

Electronic Industries Alliance www.eia.org

(703) 907-7500

EIMA

EIFS Industry Members Association www.eima.com

(800) 294-3462 (770) 968-7945

EJMA

Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. www.ejma.org

(914) 332-0040

ESD

ESD Association www.esda.org

(315) 339-6937

FM Approvals

FM Approvals www.fmglobal.com

(781) 762-4300

FM Global

FM Global (Formerly: FMG - FM Global) www.fmglobal.com

(401) 275-3000

FRSA

Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc. www.floridaroof.com

(407) 671-3772

FSA

Fluid Sealing Association www.fluidsealing.com

(610) 971-4850

FSC

Forest Stewardship Council www.fsc.org

49 228 367 66 0

GA

Gypsum Association www.gypsum.org

(202) 289-5440

REFERENCES

014200 - 6


December 7, 2010

GANA

Glass Association of North America www.glasswebsite.com

GRI

(Now GSI)

GS

Green Seal www.greenseal.org

(202) 872-6400

GSI

Geosynthetic Institute www.geosynthetic-institute.org

(610) 522-8440

HI

Hydraulic Institute www.pumps.org

(888) 786-7744 (973) 267-9700

HI

Hydronics Institute www.gamanet.org

(908) 464-8200

HMMA

Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM)

HPVA

Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association www.hpva.org

(703) 435-2900

ICEA

Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. www.icea.net

(770) 830-0369

ICRI

International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. www.icri.org

(847) 827-0830

IEC

International Electrotechnical Commission www.iec.ch

41 22 919 02 11

IEEE

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) www.ieee.org

(212) 419-7900

IESNA

Illuminating Engineering Society of North America www.iesna.org

(212) 248-5000

IEST

Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology www.iest.org

(847) 255-1561

IGCC

Insulating Glass Certification Council www.igcc.org

(315) 646-2234

IGMA

Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance www.igmaonline.org

(613) 233-1510

REFERENCES

(785) 271-0208

014200 - 7

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 ISO

December 7, 2010

International Organization for Standardization www.iso.ch

41 22 749 01 11

Available from ANSI www.ansi.org

(202) 293-8020

ISSFA

International Solid Surface Fabricators Association www.issfa.net

(877) 464-7732 (702) 567-8150

LPI

Lightning Protection Institute www.lightning.org

(800) 488-6864

MFMA

Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. www.metalframingmfg.org

(312) 644-6610

MHIA

Material Handling Industry of America www.mhia.org

(800) 345-1815 (704) 676-1190

MPI

Master Painters Institute www.paintinfo.com

(888) 674-8937

MSS

Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings (703) 281-6613 Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com

NAAMM

National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers www.naamm.org

(312) 332-0405

NADCA

National Air Duct Cleaners Association www.nadca.com

(202) 737-2926

NAIMA

North American Insulation Manufacturers Association www.naima.org

(703) 684-0084

NCMA

National Concrete Masonry Association www.ncma.org

(703) 713-1900

NCTA

National Cable & Telecommunications Association www.ncta.com

(202) 775-3550

NEBB

National Environmental Balancing Bureau www.nebb.org

(301) 977-3698

NECA

National Electrical Contractors Association www.necanet.org

(301) 657-3110

NeLMA

Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association www.nelma.org

(207) 829-6901

REFERENCES

014200 - 8


December 7, 2010

NEMA

National Electrical Manufacturers Association www.nema.org

(703) 841-3200

NETA

InterNational Electrical Testing Association www.netaworld.org

(888) 300-6382 (303) 697-8441

NFPA

NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) www.nfpa.org

(800) 344-3555 (617) 770-3000

NFRC

National Fenestration Rating Council www.nfrc.org

(301) 589-1776

NGA

National Glass Association www.glass.org

(866) 342-5642 (703) 442-4890

NHLA

National Hardwood Lumber Association www.natlhardwood.org

(800) 933-0318 (901) 377-1818

NLGA

National Lumber Grades Authority www.nlga.org

(604) 524-2393

NOFMA

NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association) www.nofma.com

(901) 526-5016

NRCA

National Roofing Contractors Association www.nrca.net

(800) 323-9545 (847) 299-9070

NRMCA

National Ready Mixed Concrete Association www.nrmca.org

(888) 846-7622 (301) 587-1400

NSSGA

National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association www.nssga.org

(800) 342-1415 (703) 525-8788

NTMA

National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) www.ntma.com

(800) 323-9736 (540) 751-0930

NWWDA

National Wood Window and Door Association (Now WDMA)

OPL

Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (Now ITS)

PCI

Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute www.pci.org

REFERENCES

(312) 786-0300

014200 - 9


December 7, 2010

PDCA

Painting & Decorating Contractors of America www.pdca.com

(800) 332-7322 (314) 514-7322

PDI

Plumbing & Drainage Institute www.pdionline.org

(800) 589-8956 (978) 557-0720

PLANET

Professional Landcare Network (Formerly: ACLA - Associated Landscape Contractors of America) www.landcarenetwork.org

(800) 395-2522 (703) 736-9666

PTI

Post-Tensioning Institute www.post-tensioning.org

(602) 870-7540

RCSC

Research Council on Structural Connections www.boltcouncil.org

RFCI

Resilient Floor Covering Institute www.rfci.com

(301) 340-8580

SAE

SAE International www.sae.org

(877) 606-7323 (724) 776-4841

SDI

Steel Deck Institute www.sdi.org

(847) 458-4647

SDI

Steel Door Institute www.steeldoor.org

(440) 899-0010

SEFA

Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association www.sefalabs.com

(516) 294-5424

SEI/ASCE

Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers (See ASCE)

SGCC

Safety Glazing Certification Council www.sgcc.org

(315) 646-2234

SIA

Security Industry Association www.siaonline.org

(703) 683-2075

SIGMA

Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (Now IGMA)

SJI

Steel Joist Institute www.steeljoist.org

REFERENCES

(843) 626-1995

014200 - 10


December 7, 2010

SMACNA

Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association www.smacna.org

(703) 803-2980

SPIB

Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) www.spib.org

(850) 434-2611

SPRI

Single Ply Roofing Industry www.spri.org

(781) 647-7026

SSINA

Specialty Steel Industry of North America www.ssina.com

(800) 982-0355 (202) 342-8630

SSPC

SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings www.sspc.org

(877) 281-7772 (412) 281-2331

SWI

Steel Window Institute www.steelwindows.com

(216) 241-7333

SWRI

Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute www.swrionline.org

(816) 472-7974

TCA

Tile Council of America, Inc. www.tileusa.com

(864) 646-8453

TIA/EIA

Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance www.tiaonline.org

(703) 907-7700

TMS

The Masonry Society www.masonrysociety.org

(303) 939-9700

TPI

Turfgrass Producers International www.turfgrasssod.org

(800) 405-8873 (847) 649-5555

UL

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. www.ul.com

(877) 854-3577 (847) 272-8800

UNI

Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association www.uni-bell.org

(972) 243-3902

USGBC

U.S. Green Building Council www.usgbc.org

(202) 828-7422

WASTEC

Waste Equipment Technology Association www.wastec.org

(800) 424-2869 (202) 244-4700

WCLIB

West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau

(800) 283-1486

REFERENCES

014200 - 11


December 7, 2010

www.wclib.org

(503) 639-0651

WCSC

Window Covering Safety Council (Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association) www.windowcoverings.org

(800) 506-4636 (212) 297-2109

WDMA

Window & Door Manufacturers Association (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association) www.wdma.com

(800) 223-2301 (847) 299-5200

WI

Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California) www.wicnet.org

(916) 372-9943

WMMPA

Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association www.wmmpa.com

(800) 550-7889 (530) 661-9591

C.

Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and upto-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

BOCA

BOCA International, Inc. (See ICC)

FBC

Florida Building Code www.floridabuilding.org

(850) 487-1824

IAPMO

International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials www.iapmo.org

(909) 472-4100

ICBO

International Conference of Building Officials (See ICC)

ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. (See ICC-ES) ICC

International Code Council www.iccsafe.org

SBCCI

Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (See ICC)

REFERENCES

(888) 422-7233 (703) 931-4533

014200 - 12

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 UBC D.

December 7, 2010

Uniform Building Code (See ICC) Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

CPSC

Consumer Product Safety Commission www.cpsc.gov

(800) 638-2772 (301) 504-7923

DOE

Department of Energy www.energy.gov

(202) 586-9220

EPA

Environmental Protection Agency www.epa.gov

(202) 272-0167

FCC

Federal Communications Commission www.fcc.gov

(888) 225-5322

OSHA

Occupational Safety & Health Administration www.osha.gov

(800) 321-6742 (202) 693-1999

E.

Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

ADAAG

Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Architectural Barriers Act (ABA)

(800) 8722253 (202) 2720080

Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 014200

REFERENCES

014200 - 13


December 7, 2010

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

1.3

Division 01 Section "Summary" for limitations on utility interruptions and other work restrictions. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. Division 31 Section "Dewatering" for disposal of ground water at Project site. Division 31 Section "Termite Control" for pest control. Division 32 Section "Asphalt Paving" for construction and maintenance of asphalt paving for temporary roads and paved areas. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for construction and maintenance of cement concrete pavement for temporary roads and paved areas.

DEFINITIONS A.

1.4

Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. TEMPORARY UTILITIES

A.

Sewer Service: The Contractor shall provide stand alone code compliant containers for office trailers and service agreement for regular maintenance of the containers. The Contractor shall also provide all require portable restroom facilities and required service for the construction personnel.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

015000 - 1


December 7, 2010

B.

Water Service: Water service will be provided by the owner at no cost to the contractor for use. The contactor shall be responsible for all material, labor, and permit/inspection cost associated with the connection to the temporary water service. The contractor shall coordinate all proposed connections to existing service with the owner’s staff and the architect.

C.

Electric Power Service: Electrical service will be provided by the owner at no cost to the contractor for use. The contactor shall be responsible for all material, labor, and permit/inspection cost associated with the connection to the temporary Electrical service. The contractor shall coordinate all proposed connections to existing service with the owner’s staff and the architect.

1.5

SUBMITTALS A.

1.6

Site Plan: Show all site fencing, temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. Coordinate all temporary facility requirements with the Owner’s representative and submit plan for final approval by the Owner. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B.

Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.7

PROJECT CONDITIONS A.

Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.


MATERIALS A.

Pavement: Comply with Division 32 pavement Sections.

B.

Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top rails.

C.

Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line


015000 - 2


December 7, 2010

posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized steel bases for supporting posts. D.

Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry."

E.

Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch thick by 48 inches wide by maximum available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36/C 36M.

F.

Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

G.

Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections.

2.2

TEMPORARY FACILITIES A.

Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

B.

Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1. 2.

3. 4. 5. 6. C.

Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1.

2.3

Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with not less than 1 receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- square tack board. Drinking water and private toilet. Coffee machine and supplies. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height.

Store combustible materials apart from building.

EQUIPMENT A.

Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.


015000 - 3


December 7, 2010


INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.

Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1.

B.

3.2

Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."

Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A.

General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1.

B.

Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1.

Connect temporary sewers to municipal system, private system, or storage tanks as directed by authorities having jurisdiction.

C.

Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction.

D.

Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

E.

Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

F.

Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

G.

Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1.

Install electric power service overhead, unless otherwise indicated.


015000 - 4

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 H.

Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. 2.

I.

Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. Install lighting for Project identification sign.

Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line for each field office. 1.

Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. b.

2.

3.

3.3

Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer in each field office. Provide one telephone line for Owner's use.

At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

J.

December 7, 2010

Police and fire departments. Ambulance service. Contractor's home office. Architect's office. Engineers' offices. Owner's office. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.

Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office.

Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service, including electronic mail, in field office facilities. SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A.

General: Comply with the following: 1. 2.

B.

Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits and as coordinated with the Owner and Architect. 1.

Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust.


015000 - 5

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 C.

December 7, 2010

Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. 2.

Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

D.

Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel within the limits designated for construction.

E.

Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1.

F.

Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs. Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. 2.

Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.

G.

Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

H.

Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

I.

Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1.

Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.

J.

Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate.

K.

Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance.

3.4

SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A.

Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1.

Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."


015000 - 6


December 7, 2010

Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.

Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

C.

Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.

D.

Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.

E.

Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

F.

Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. 2.

Extent of Fence: Enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Provide Owner with one set of keys.

G.

Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.

H.

Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

I.

Covered Walkway: Erect structurally adequate, protective, covered walkway for passage of individuals along adjacent to areas under construction. Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and obstructions. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. 2.

3. 4.

Construct covered walkways using scaffold or shoring framing. Provide wood-plank overhead decking, protective plywood enclosure walls, handrails, barricades, warning signs, lights, safe and well-drained walkways, and similar provisions for protection and safe passage. Extend back wall beyond the structure to complete enclosure fence. Paint and maintain in a manner approved by Owner and Architect.


015000 - 7

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 J.

Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1.

K.

Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks. Protect air-handling equipment. Weather strip openings. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.

Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. 2. 3.

4.

3.5

Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures.

Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas. 1. 2. 3. 4.

L.

December 7, 2010

Prohibit smoking in construction areas. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A.

Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B.

Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1.

Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C.

Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight.

D.

Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

E.

Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may


015000 - 8


December 7, 2010

have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. 2.

3.

Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."



015000 - 9


December 7, 2010

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.

B.


1.3

Division 01 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted.

DEFINITIONS A.

Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1.

2.

3.

B.

Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

016000 - 1


1.4

December 7, 2010

Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product. 1. 2.

Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

3.

Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. a.

4.

5.

B.

Specification Section number and title. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. Manufacturer's name and address. Supplier's name and address. Installer's name and address. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery date.

At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and designations that must be established early in Contract period.

Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the Contract Documents.

Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.If retaining last option in first subparagraph below, insert a sample of the form to be used at end of Section.


016000 - 2


Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. b.

c.

d. e. f. g. h.

i.

j. k. l.

2.

Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. Samples, where applicable or requested. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. b.

C.

December 7, 2010

Form of Acceptance: Change Order. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.

Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1.

Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product


016000 - 3


December 7, 2010

request. Architect will notify the Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. b.

1.5

Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated.


Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. 2.

1.6

Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.

PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Delivery and Handling: 1. 2.

3.

4. C.

Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

Storage: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment.


016000 - 4


1.7

December 7, 2010

Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

PRODUCT WARRANTIES A.

Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.

2.

B.

Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. 2. 3.

C.

Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.

Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."


PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A.

General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and that are new at time of installation. 1. 2.

3.

Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.


016000 - 5


B.

December 7, 2010

Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

Product Selection Procedures: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. a.

10.

If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product.

Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements.


016000 - 6

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 a.

b.

2.2

December 7, 2010

Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A.

Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.

B.

Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

2.3

Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A.

Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1.

Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.


016000 - 7


3. 4. 5.

December 7, 2010

Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. Samples, if requested.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 016000


016000 - 8


December 7, 2010

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.3

Construction layout. Field engineering and surveying. General installation of products. Coordination of Owner-installed products. Progress cleaning. Starting and adjusting. Protection of installed construction. Correction of the Work.

Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

SUBMITTALS A.

Qualification Data: For land surveyor.

B.

Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.

C.

Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.

EXECUTION

017300 - 1


December 7, 2010

D.

Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor.

E.

Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data.

1.4


Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.


EXAMINATION A.

Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. 1.

B.

Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.

Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1.

Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: a. b. c. d.

2. 3. 4.

EXECUTION

Description of the Work. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. Recommended corrections.

Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

017300 - 2


December 7, 2010

PREPARATION A.

Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B.

Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C.

Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D.

Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

3.3

CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A.

Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B.

General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. Notify Architect and Construction Manager when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction.

C.

Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.

D.

Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

EXECUTION

017300 - 3

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 E.

3.4

December 7, 2010

Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. FIELD ENGINEERING

A.

Identification: Contractor shall identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.

B.

Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1.

2. C.

Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of the Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. 2. 3.

Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition.

D.

Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.

E.

Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1.

2.

EXECUTION

Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."

017300 - 4


December 7, 2010

INSTALLATION A.

General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling.

B.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C.

Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D.

Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E.

Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

F.

Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

G.

Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. 2. 3.

Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

H.

Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

I.

Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

EXECUTION

017300 - 5


December 7, 2010

PROGRESS CLEANING A.

General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. 2. 3.

Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

B.

Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C.

Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. 2.

Remove liquid spills promptly. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate.

D.

Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E.

Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F.

Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G.

Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.

H.

During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I.

Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J.

Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

EXECUTION

017300 - 6


December 7, 2010

STARTING AND ADJUSTING A.

Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B.

Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation.

C.

Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D.

Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

3.8

Remove

PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A.

Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.9

CORRECTION OF THE WORK A.

Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching." 1.

Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B.

Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C.

Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.

D.

Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.

E.

Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.


EXECUTION

017300 - 7


December 7, 2010

SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.

B.


1.3

Division 02 Section "Selective Site Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for patching fire-rated construction.

DEFINITIONS A.

Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work.

B.

Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A.

Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 15 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: 1. 2.

3. 4. 5.

Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be

CUTTING AND PATCHING

017329 - 1


6.

7.

December 7, 2010

relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.

B.

Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

C.

Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Primary operational systems and equipment. Air or smoke barriers. Fire-suppression systems. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. Control systems. Communication systems. Conveying systems. Electrical wiring systems. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections.

D.

Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

E.

Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace at no additional cost to the project construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

F.

Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

1.5

WARRANTY A.

Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.


017329 - 2


December 7, 2010


MATERIALS A.

General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B.

In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1.

If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.


EXAMINATION A.

Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. 2.

3.2

Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

PREPARATION A.

Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B.

Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C.

Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D.

Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.

3.3

PERFORMANCE A.

General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.


017329 - 3


B.

Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1.

2. 3. 4. 5.

6. C.

December 7, 2010

In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Concrete Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamondcore drill. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1. 2.

Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. b.

3.

Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a.

Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.


017329 - 4

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 4. 5. D.

December 7, 2010

Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition.

Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.



017329 - 5


December 7, 2010

SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

1.3

Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.

Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for environmental-protection measures during construction. Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for disposal requirements for masonry waste. Division 04 Section "Stone Masonry" for disposal requirements for excess stone and stone waste. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements.

DEFINITIONS A.

Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B.

Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.

C.

Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D.

Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

017419 - 1


December 7, 2010

E.

Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.

F.

Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work.

1.4


Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: program.

Certified by EPA-approved certification

B.

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.


IMPLEMENTATION A.

Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. 2.

3.2

Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for containers. Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.

RECYCLING WASTE, GENERAL A.

General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.

B.

Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical. 1.

Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. a.

2.

Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.


017419 - 2


3.3

December 7, 2010

Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor.

RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE A.

Packaging: 1. 2. 3.

4. B.

Site-Clearing Wastes: Chip brush, branches, and trees. 1.

C.

Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

Comply with requirements in Division 32 Section "Plants" for use of chipped organic waste as organic mulch.

Wood Materials: 1. 2.

Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood. a.

3.4

Comply with requirements in Division 32 Section "Plants." for use of clean sawdust as organic mulch.

DISPOSAL OF WASTE A.

General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. 2.

Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B.

Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C.

Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.



017419 - 3


December 7, 2010

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

1.3

Inspection procedures. Warranties. Cleaning.

Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting Final Completion construction photographs and negatives. Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections.

SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A.

Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining Phase Completion, perform the following requirements. 1. 2. 3.

Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. Submit specific warranties, releases of lien, workmanship bonds, final certifications, and similar documents. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

017700 - 1

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 4. 5. 6. 7. B.

Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. Terminate and remove temporary facilities no longer required from Project site, along construction tools, and similar elements. Complete cleaning requirements, and prepare the site for the next phase of construction. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.

Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. 2.

1.4

December 7, 2010

Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.

FINAL COMPLETION 1.

1.5

Final Completion will not be provided until all phases of the work have been completed.

LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A.

Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. 2. 3.

Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. b. c. d. e.

1.6

Project name. Date. Name of Architect. Name of Contractor. Page number.

WARRANTIES A.

Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

017700 - 2


Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1.

2.

3. C.

December 7, 2010

Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation in CSI format. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


MATERIALS A.

Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.


FINAL CLEANING A.

General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances, Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B.

Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1.

Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a.

b. c.

Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, weeds and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

017700 - 3

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 d. e.

f.

Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1)

g.

h. i. j.

December 7, 2010

Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.

Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. Leave Project clean and ready for the next phase of construction.

C.

Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.

D.

Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.


CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

017700 - 4


December 7, 2010

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: 1. 2. 3.

B.


1.3

Record Drawings. Record Specifications. Record Product Data.

Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections.

SUBMITTALS A.

Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1.

Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows: a.

b. c.

Initial Submittal: Submit one set of corrected Record Transparencies plots from corrected Record CAD Drawings and one set of marked-up Record Prints. Architect will initial and date each transparency and mark whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. Architect will return transparencies and prints for organizing into sets, printing, binding, and final submittal. Final Submittal: Submit two set(s) of marked-up Record Prints, one set of Record Transparencies. Electronic Media: Provide Duplicate copy of all Record Drawings on CD-R.

B.

Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C.

Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal.

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

017839 - 1


December 7, 2010

Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data.


RECORD DRAWINGS A.

Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1.

Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. b. c.

2.

Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n.

3.

4. 5.

Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

Dimensional changes to Drawings. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. Depths of foundations below first floor. Locations and depths of underground utilities. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. Revisions to electrical circuitry. Actual equipment locations. Duct size and routing. Locations of concealed internal utilities. Changes made by Change Order or Change Directive. Changes made following Architect's written orders. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.


017839 - 2

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 6. B.

Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

Record Transparencies: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up Record Prints with Architect . When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected transparencies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. 2. 3. 4.

C.

Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints. Erase, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect through Construction Manager for resolution. Owner will furnish Contractor one set of transparencies of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information. Print the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings for use as Record Transparencies. Architect will make the Contract Drawings available to Contractor's print shop.

Record CAD Drawings: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up Record Prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Format: Same CAD program, version, and operating system as the original Contract Drawings. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints. Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect through Construction Manager for resolution. Architect at his discretion may furnish Contractor one set of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information. a.

D.

Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of CAD Drawings as they relate to the Contract Drawings.

Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing Record Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation. 1.

E.

December 7, 2010

New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification.

Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location and remove Architects name from the title block. 1.

2.

Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. Record Transparencies: Organize into unbound sets matching Record Prints. Place transparencies in durable tube-type drawing containers with end caps. Mark end cap of each container with identification. If container does not include a complete set, identify Drawings included.


017839 - 3


4.

Record CAD Drawings: Organize CAD information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each CAD file. Identification: As follows: a. b. c. d. e.

2.2

December 7, 2010

Project name. Date. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." Name of Architect. Name of Contractor.

RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A.

Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

2.3

Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable.

RECORD PRODUCT DATA A.

Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. 2. 3.

2.4

Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable.

MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A.

Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.


017839 - 4


December 7, 2010


RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A.

Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

B.

Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours.



017839 - 5


December 7, 2010

SECTION 017900-DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2

SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Demonstration and training videotapes. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements for preinstruction conferences. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training for products in those Sections.

1.3

SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use. B. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time. C. Demonstration and Training Documentation: Submit copies within 10 days of end of each training module. 1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information: a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of photographer/videographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of General Contractor. e. Name of relevant SubContractor(s). f. Date training was recorded. g. Description of vantage point, indicating location, and direction (by compass point).

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

017900 - 1


December 7, 2010

whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance. B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. C. Photographer/Videographer Qualifications: A photographer/videographer who is experienced in videotaping demonstration and training sessions for building equipment and systems D. Pre-instruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials, instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. 3. Review required content of instruction. 4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable. 1.5

COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations. B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content. C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect and Engineer-of-Record.


INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 1. Refrigeration systems, including chillers, cooling towers, pumps, and distribution piping. 2. HVAC systems, including air-handling equipment, air distribution systems, and terminal equipment and devices. 3. HVAC instrumentation and controls. 4. Lighting equipment and controls. B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following: 1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.


017900 - 2


2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

December 7, 2010

c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project Record Documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.


017900 - 3


December 7, 2010

f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools. 8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual. B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2

INSTRUCTION A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location. B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements. 2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. 3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants. C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner through the Architect with at least ten days' advance notice. D. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and remove from Project site. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.

3.3

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEOTAPES A. General: Engage a qualified photographer to record demonstration and training videotapes. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice. 1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline. B. Video Format: Provide high-quality color DVD. C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to show area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time.


017900 - 4


December 7, 2010

D. Narration: Describe scenes by audio narration by microphone while training module is recorded. Include description of items being viewed. Describe vantage point, indicating location, and direction (by compass point).



017900 - 5


December 7, 2010

SECTION 024113 - DEMOLITION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY A.

B.

1.2

The WORK of this Section includes furnishing materials, equipment and labor necessary to perform and complete demolition of pavements, sidewalks, curbs, storm drain structures, and other facilities existing in the construction area. The WORK also includes coordination with public utilities for the demolition or relocation of applicable utility structures or underground facilities. In areas indicated to be remodeled, cut back flush and seal any pipe stub-outs remaining, and remove exposed piping, conduits, fixtures, junction boxes, light fixtures, water fixtures, and supports. Switches, receptacles, and boxes shall also be removed. Concealed piping and conduits shall be removed or capped and abandoned as necessary to facilitate the remodeling work. All other items shall be removed as shown.

RELATED SECTIONS A.

The WORK of the following Sections applies to the WORK of this Section. Other Sections of the Specifications, not referenced below, shall also apply to the extent required for proper performance of this WORK. 1. Section 31100 - Site Preparation 2. Section 312300 - Earthwork

1.3

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS A.

1.4

Except as otherwise indicated in this Section of the Specifications, the CONTRACTOR shall comply with the FDOT Standard Specification, as specified in Section 014219 - REFERENCE STANDARDS.

CODES A.

The WORK of this Section shall comply with the current editions of the following codes as adopted by the City of Marco Island Municipal Code: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.5

Florida Building Code – 2007 Florida Plumbing Code – 2007 Florida Mechanical Code – 2007 National Electric Code – 2007

SUBMITTALS

DEMOLITION

024113 - 1

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 A.

December 7, 2010

The following shall be submitted in compliance with Section 01310: 1. Demolition Schedule: The CONTRACTOR shall submit a complete coordination schedule for demolition work including shut-off and continuation of utility services prior to start of the WORK. The schedule shall indicate proposed methods and operations of facility demolition, and provide a detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted operation of occupied areas.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1

GENERAL A.

3.2

Structures shall be demolished and removed in compliance with FDOT, Section 110, and the requirements indicated herein.

POLLUTION CONTROL A.

Water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, chutes, and other suitable methods shall be used for dust suppression Water shall not be used when it creates hazardous or objectionable conditions such as flooding, erosion, sedimentation, or pollution.

B.

3.3

DISCONNECTIONS A. Prior to starting demolition, check underground and exposed existing utilities, piping, and equipment within the limits of demolition. Prior to starting demolition, check underground and exposed existing utilities, piping, wiring, and equipment connected to and associated with buildings, structures, equipment, materials, piping, wiring, pavement, fences, guardrails, and other existing improvements to be removed. Verify the following: 1. 2. 3. B.

Piping is inactive (abandoned); Electrical power to equipment, lighting, controls, and other facilities has been permanently disconnected; Utilities have been permanently disconnected.

Notify the Architect and Owner if piping is active, electrical power has not been disconnected, or utilities have not been disconnected. Do not proceed with salvage or demolition if piping is active, electrical power has not been disconnected, or utilities have not been disconnected.

DEMOLITION

024113 - 2


PROTECTION A.

Safe passage of persons around the area of demolition shall be provided. Operations shall be conducted to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings, structures, and other facilities. Interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or supports shall be provided to prevent movement, settlement or collapse of structures to be demolished. Existing landscaping materials, structures, and appurtenances, which are not to be demolished, shall be protected and maintained as necessary. Unless otherwise indicated, the CONTRACTOR shall protect and maintain all utilities in the proximity of the facilities to be demolished.

B. C. D.

3.5

STRUCTURE DEMOLITION A.

Building structures and appurtenances shall be demolished, as shown and required to complete work, in compliance with governing regulations. Small structures may be removed intact when approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Demolition shall proceed in a systematic manner, from top of structure to ground. Concrete and masonry shall be demolished in small sections. Use bracing and shoring to prevent collapse. Dust Control

B. C. D. E. 1.

2.

Control dust resulting from demolition so that dust does not spread to occupied portions of buildings and to facilities in service. Control dust resulting from demolition so that no nuisance is created in areas surrounding the project site. Protect mechanical and electrical equipment in service from dust resulting from demolition.

F. 1.

2.

3.6

December 7, 2010

Asbestos and Other Hazardous Material If asbestos or other hazardous material is observed, immediately stop work in connection with observed hazard, or take emergency measures, make notifications and take actions as specified in the General Conditions. Should special measures be required for handling of asbestos or other hazardous material, the cost and time of performance for providing such special measures will be addressed by an appropriate Change Order, by separate contact, or by separate subcontract with the Owner as provided in the General Conditions.

BELOW-GRADE DEMOLITION A. B. C.

DEMOLITION

Below-grade construction and concrete slabs on grade shall be demolished and removed to a depth, which will not interfere with new construction. Below-grade areas and voids resulting from demolition of structures shall be completely filled to a minimum compaction of 95%. All fill and compaction shall be in accordance with Section 02200.

024113 - 3

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 D.

3.7

December 7, 2010

After fill and compaction, surfaces shall be graded to meet adjacent contours and to provide flow to surface drainage structures, or as indicated.

PIPING, CONDUIT, WIRING, AND UTILITIES

A. Completely remove piping, conduit, and wiring in structures and buildings to be demolished. When structures and buildings are to be partially demolished, completely remove piping, conduit, and wiring in parts of structures and buildings to be demolished. Completely remove other piping, conduit, and wiring designated to be removed. B. Completely remove exposed piping, conduit, and wiring to be demolished. Remove supports, hangers, clips, and fasteners for exposed piping, conduit, and wiring to be demolished. C. Underground piping, duct banks, conduit, and wiring to be abandoned which do not interfere with new work and which are more than two feet below finish grade may be left in place, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Remove abandoned underground piping, duct banks, conduit, and wiring which interferes with new work. 1. 2.

Plug and seal cut ends of underground piping and conduit to be abandoned. Do not leave abandoned branches of piping and wiring "live". a.

b.

3.

Isolate abandoned piping branches by closing branch valve at main or by disconnecting branch at main. Plug, or cap, and seal active branch at isolating valve or point of disconnection. Disconnect abandoned wiring branches at distribution panel, or panels, and remove disconnected wiring from panel, or panels. Remove wire from abandoned conduit.

Do not damage grounding systems to remain.

D. Properly disconnect, seal, and plug utility services to structures and buildings designated to be completely demolished. When structures, buildings, or structures and buildings are to be partially demolished, properly disconnect, seal, and plug utility lines to the part of the structure or building designated to be demolished. 3.8

PAVEMENT, SIDEWALKS, CURBS, AND GUTTERS A. Completely remove pavement, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters designated to be removed. B. Remove pavement, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters by methods that will assure clean uniform breaks at pavement, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters not removed are along straight lines. Leave faces of remaining pavement, sidewalk, curb, and gutter surfaces approximately vertical.

DEMOLITION

024113 - 4


3.9

DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A.

B.

3.10

Demolition and removal of debris shall be conducted to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities which shall not be closed or obstructed without permission from the OWNER. Alternate routes shall be provided around closed or obstructed traffic ways. Site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations shall be removed and disposed of in compliance all laws and regulations. Burning of removed materials from demolished structures shall not be permitted.

PATCHING AND REPAIRING A.

B. C.

3.11

December 7, 2010

The CONTRACTOR shall provide patching, replacing, repairing, and refinishing of damaged areas involved in demolition as necessary to match the existing adjacent surfaces. The CONTRACTOR shall repair all damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition at no additional cost to the OWNER. After patching and repairing has been completed, the CONTRACTOR shall carefully clean adjoining work and repair any damage caused by such cleaning operations.

CLEANING A.

B. C.

During and upon completion of work, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove unused tools and equipment, surplus materials, rubbish, debris, and dust and shall leave areas affected by work in a clean condition. Clean adjacent structures and facilities of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition and return adjacent areas to condition existing prior to start of work. The CONTRACTOR shall clean and sweep the affected portions of roads, streets, sidewalks and passageways daily.

END OF SECTION

DEMOLITION

024113 - 5


December 7, 2010

SECTION 031000-CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes, but is not limited to, the design, engineering, construction and removal of formwork required for cast-in-place concrete as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

B.

Related Sections include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.

C.

1.3

Division 3 Section “Cast-In-Place Concrete” for finishes.

Work Installed and Furnished by Others: 1. Install built-in anchors, inserts, and bolts for connection of other materials; sleeves, thimbles, and dovetail anchor slots, plates, frames, seats and all other embedded items including Owner furnished items. 2. Coating of forms and other surfaces as required by this Section. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: Submit, for record only, not for approval, data for each type of product and material indicated including others as requested by Architect. Substitutions for specified items or manufacturers are to be submitted in accordance with Division 1 and will be subject to approval, rejection or other appropriate action.

B.

Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepare shop drawings in compliance with ACI 347R. If requested by the Architect, submit shop drawings showing general construction of forms for concrete permanently exposed to view; including jointing, special form joints or reveals, location and pattern of form tie placement, and other items that visually affect exposed concrete. Architect’s review is for general architectural applications and features only. Formwork design for safety, structural adequacy and efficiency is Contractor’s responsibility.

C.

Shoring and reshoring shop drawings, including for precast prestressed concrete framing: Submit signed and sealed shop drawings prepared by a Delegated Engineer experienced in such work and licensed in the State of Florida. The drawings shall conform to ACI 347R and contain, as a minimum, the location, size and type of all shoring, reshoring, mud sills, blocking, temporary lateral bracing and other accessories necessary to safely support and brace the structure during construction. The drawings shall also show the sequence of installation, load

CONCRETE FORMWORK

031000 - 1


December 7, 2010

relief and removal. Use a safety factor of 2 for metal shores and 3 for wood shores. Submit drawings to the Architect, Engineer, Special Inspector and Building Official for record only. Shoring and reshoring design and construction is the sole responsibility of the Contractor and his Engineer. 1.

2.

1.4

Design structural members to support form facing materials without deflection. Design camber into formwork as required to compensate for anticipated deflections due to weight and pressures of fresh concrete and construction loads for longspan members without intermediate supports. Prior to each concrete pour, the Delegated Engineer who prepares the shoring and reshoring drawings or his authorized representative shall inspect the shoring and reshoring. He shall provide a field report of each inspection to the Contractor and Special Inspector prior to leaving the site. Upon completion of the project, he shall submit a signed and sealed statement to the Architect and Special Inspector that this work was performed in accordance with his plans and specifications.


Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B.

Delegated Engineer Qualifications: A licensed engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the State of Florida and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for formwork and shoring and reshoring installations that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

C.

Codes and Standards: indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

1.5

Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are

Florida Building Code, 2004 Edition with Applicable Supplements. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings.” ACI-318, “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.” ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." ACI 347, “Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.” ACI SP-4, “Formwork for Concrete.” National Forest Products Association (NFPA), “National Design Specifications for Stress Grade Lumber and its Fastenings.” American Plywood Association (APA): “Plywood Design Specification” (Form Y-510); “Concrete Forming: (Form V345) and “ Voluntary Product Standard PS 1-95 for Construction and Industrial Plywood” (Form V995).

JOB CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION OF TRADES A.

General: It is the Contractor’s sole responsibility to coordinate with all trades for the setting of sleeves, anchor bolts, dovetail slots, inserts, frames, flashing, reglets, pipes, ducts and other

CONCRETE FORMWORK

031000 - 2


December 7, 2010

embedded items and provide all openings required for installation of other work in accordance with the Contractor’s shop drawings and the Contract Documents. B.

Structural Integrity: Provide no sleeves or openings in structural members unless shown on the structural drawings or approved by the Architect.

C.

Inspection: Architect may inspect formwork at any time and may reject formwork if forms do not conform to the lines, levels, and tolerances as required in this Section, the shop drawings or the Design Drawings. If formwork is rejected, the Contractor must repair or replace the rejected portion with no additional cost to the Owner.


FORMWORK MATERIALS A.

Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

B.

Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. 2.

Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. Exterior-grade plywood panels, minimum 5/8” thickness, suitable for concrete forms, complying with VPS PS 1 (Form V995), and as follows: a. b. c. d.

High-density overlay, Class 1, or better. Medium-density overlay, Class 1, or better, mill-release agent treated and edge sealed. Structural 1, B-B, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed.

C.

Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide paper or fiber tubes of laminated plies with water resistant adhesive and wax impregnated exterior for weather and moisture protection. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

D.

Special Forms: Forms for column strengthening shall be 2 piece or hinged steel such as “Deslauriers Forms”. Forms shall contain weep holes and a bottom coupler for pump connection. See details on Structural Drawings.

E.

Stable Soil: In the event stable soil is encountered and straight-line embankments can be maintained, concrete foundations may be placed into accurately excavated earth trenches, free from water, debris, or loose dirt. Excavations shall be minimum 2” wider and longer than specified.

CONCRETE FORMWORK

031000 - 3


December 7, 2010

F.

Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch.

G.

Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

H.

Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. 2.

I.

Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 1/2 inches to the plane of the exposed concrete surface. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 1/4 inches in diameter in concrete surface.

Accessories: Provide necessary anchors, form ties, shores, construction joints, scaffolds, and bracing as required to install forms. Provide construction joints, control joints, expansion joints and waterstops where indicated on the drawings. 1. 2.

Form Joint Gasket: Closed cell rubber sponge. Take care that form joints are sealed from leakage of cement paste and moisture. Material to form drips, reveals, rustification strips or weep holes shall be extruded plastic.


FORMWORK A.

Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 347, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads.

B.

Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C.

Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Class A, 1/8 inch: Surfaces prominently exposed to public view. Class B, 1/4 inch: Coarse-textured concrete intended to receive plaster. Class C, 1/2 inch: Other permanently exposed surfaces. Class D, 1 inch: Permanently concealed surfaces.

D.

Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E.

Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for

CONCRETE FORMWORK

031000 - 4


December 7, 2010

forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. F.

Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G.

Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H.

Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I.

Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J.

Set anchor rods to required tolerance.

K.

Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

L.

Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

M.

Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2

REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A.

General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.

B.

Leave formwork, for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved the strength and age listed in the Structural Notes. 1. 2.

C.

Determine compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing representative field- or laboratory-cured test specimens according to ACI 301. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.

Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. The

CONCRETE FORMWORK

031000 - 5


December 7, 2010

Architect’s approval is required for reusing forms for exposed surfaces. Apply new formrelease agent. D.

3.3

Reuse forms to greatest extent possible without damaging structural integrity of concrete and without damaging aesthetics of exposed concrete. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. SHORES AND RESHORES

A.

Comply with ACI 318, ACI 301, and recommendations in ACI 347R for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.

B.

In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.

C.

Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshores to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection. Shores must be readily adjustable so that settlement during concrete placement may be taken up at once.


CONCRETE FORMWORK

031000 - 6


December 7, 2010

SECTION 032000-CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A. 1.3

This Section includes, but is not limited to, concrete reinforcement, and necessary accessories. SUBMITTALS

A.

Do not reproduce Structural Drawings for use as shop or placement drawings without prior approval of the Architect.

B.

Product Data: Submit, for record only, not for approval, data for each type of product and material indicated including others as requested by Architect. Indicate manufacturing process used for steel reinforcing. Substitutions for specified items or manufacturers are to be submitted in accordance with Division 1 and will be subject to approval, rejection or other appropriate action.

C.

Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Complete details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement" and ACI SP-66 “Detailing Manual”. Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement.

D.

Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers and contractor certifying that the steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories comply with requirements of the Contract Documents. Unidentifiable steel is prohibited.

E.

Environmental Objective Documentation: Provide documentation of level of compliance with the following: 1.

1.4

Provide data indicating post-consumer and post-industrial recycling percentages of steel reinforcing.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

032000 - 1


December 7, 2010

A.

Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B.

Codes and Standards: indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

1.5

Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are

Florida Building Code, 2004 Edition with Applicable Supplements. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings.” ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." ACI 315, “Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.” ACI-318, “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.” “CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.”

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. 1.

1.6

Deliver reinforcement to the job site bundled, tagged and marked. Use durable metal or embossed plastic tags indicating bar size, lengths, and reference information corresponding to markings shown on placement drawings.

ENVIRONMENTAL OBJECTIVES A. Manufacturer/Fabricator to supply documentation of level of compliance or noncompliance with the following requirements before consideration as an “Acceptable Manufacturer”. 1.

All steel reinforcing shall use steel made in an electric arc furnace (EAF).


STEEL REINFORCEMENT A.

Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.

B.

Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. Rolls are not acceptable.


032000 - 2


December 7, 2010

REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A.

Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. 2. 3.

For concrete surfaces where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports. For welded wire fabric in slabs on grade use precast slab bolsters, concrete brick or sand plate chairs spaced no farther than 3’-0” c/c.

B.

Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60.

C.

Mechanical Splicers for Reinforcing Steel: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

D.

Reinforcing Dowel Replacement: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

2.3

Lenton threaded Couplers. Dayton Bar Grip or Dayton Grip Twist. Dywidag Extruded Coupler Splice. Bar-Lock Coupler System.

Dayton Dowel Bar Replacement. Richmond Dowel Bar Substitution. Lenton Form Saver Plus. Williams Rebar Flange Coupler

FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A.

Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

B.

Shop bend and fabricate reinforcing bars to conform with shapes and dimensions indicated on drawings. In case of errors, do not bend or straighten reinforcement without prior approval of Architect. Make all bends cold.


032000 - 3


December 7, 2010


STEEL REINFORCEMENT A.

General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1.

Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B.

Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials.

C.

Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover specified on the drawings. Tie bars and bar supports together with 16 gauge wire and set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

D.

Splices: Locate only where indicated on the drawings or approved shop drawings except with prior approval of Architect. 1. 2.

For standard splices, lap ends, placing bars in contact, and tightly wire tie. See drawings for lap lengths. Do not weld splices.

E.

Provide template for all column dowels.

F.

Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging (3’-0”o.c. max.). Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing plus 2”. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with 16 gauge wire.

G.

Do not bend bars embedded in hardened or partially hardened concrete without approval from the Architect.

H.

Do not weld reinforcing bars unless specifically shown. Where shown comply with AWS D1.4. Bars to be welded shall conform to ASTM A706.



032000 - 4


December 7, 2010

SECTION 033000-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, concrete, concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, curing and finishes.

B.

Related Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. 2.

1.3

Division 31 Section 31200 "Earthmoving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade, including grade beams and pile caps. Division 03 Section 033100 “Concrete Formwork”.

DEFINITIONS A.

1.4

Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume. SUBMITTALS

A.

The concrete mix supplied has a minimum cement substitution specified in section 2.11 Concrete Mixes.

B.

Product Data: Submit, for record only, not for approval, data for each type of product and material indicated including admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, and others as requested by Architect. Substitutions for specified items or manufacturers are to be submitted in accordance with Division 1 and will be subject to approval, rejection or other appropriate action.

C.

Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. Substantiating data to be no older than one year from date of submittal for each mix design.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

033000 - 1


Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers and contractor certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements of the Contract Documents: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

1.5

December 7, 2010

Cementitious materials and aggregates. Admixtures. Floor and slab treatments. Waterstops. Curing materials. Bonding agents. Adhesives. Vapor retarders. Repair materials. Epoxy joint filler. Joint filler strips.


Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. Submit written evidence of at least ten such projects.

B.

Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in the successful manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production and delivery, facilities and equipment. 1.

Manufacturer must be F.D.O.T. certified.

C.

Source Limitations: For each placement, obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the same manufacturer.

D.

Codes and Standards: Comply with the following, unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Florida Building Code, 2004 Edition with Applicable Supplements. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." ACI 211.1 “Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass Concrete.” ACI 211.2 “Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete.” ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings.” ACI-304, “Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete.” ACI-305, “Hot Weather Concreting.” ACI-308, “Recommended Practice for Curing Concrete.” ACI-309, “Recommended Practice for Consolidation.” ACI-311, “Guide for Concrete Inspection.”


033000 - 2


December 7, 2010

ACI-318, “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.”


MANUFACTURERS A.

In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. 2. 3.

4.

2.2

Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

CONCRETE MATERIALS A.

Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:

B.

Portland Cement: 1. 2.

General: ASTM C 150, Type I. Slabs on Grade: Type I or Type II with a C3A content less than 8%.

C.

Other Cementitious Materials: Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: Grade 100 or 120.

D.

Pozzolans: 1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.

E.

Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595, Type I (PM), pozzolan-modified portland cement.

F.

Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595, Type I (SM), slag-modified portland cement.

G.

Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica. Provide liquid slurry or dry densified.

H.

Normal-Weight Aggregate: Provide aggregates from a single source. 1.

ASTM C 989,

Fine Aggregate: Natural quartz sand or manufactured sand from local stone aggregates conforming to ASTM C33, produced from Florida approved sources, with fineness modulus not less than 2.4, and having a proven service record.


033000 - 3


3. 4.

I. 2.3

December 7, 2010

Coarse Aggregate: Clean, washed, sound, crushed natural stone products produced from Florida approved sources. Free from salt, clay, mud, loam or other foreign matter. Conform to ASTM C33; sizes No. 67 (3/4 inch) or No. 57 (1 inch), No. 8 or No. 89 (3/8 inch), and No. 467 (1 1/2 inch). Use largest size practical for members being cast. Class: Negligible weathering region, class per ASTM C33. [1N] Combined Aggregate Gradation: Well graded from coarsest to finest with not more than 18 percent and not less than 8 percent retained on an individual sieve, except that less than 8 percent may be retained on coarsest sieve and on No. 50 sieve, and less than 8 percent may be retained on sieves finer than No. 50.

Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94. CONCRETE ADMIXTURES

A.

General: Provide admixtures produced by acceptable manufacturers and used in compliance with the manufacturer’s printed directions. Use only admixtures which have been incorporated and tested in the accepted mixes, unless otherwise authorized in writing by the Architect. Do not use admixtures which increase the shrinkage properties of concrete. Submit substantiating data, if requested.

B.

Air-entraining admixture: Conform to ASTM C260.

C.

Water-reducing admixture: Conform to ASTM C494, Type A, D or E free of chlorides, fluorides, or nitrates, except for those attributable to the water used in manufacturing. Use in all structural concrete.

D.

High Range Water Reducing Admixture: Conform to ASTM C494, Type F or Type G and ASTM C1017. Formulate HRWR from sulfonated melamine formaldehyde condensates or sulfonated naphthalene formaldehyde condensate or carboxylated polyether. The admixture is to be added to the concrete mix after initial mixing has taken place. If added at the batch plant HRWR to have an effective life without redosing (third generation HRWR) of at least 2 Hours. If added at the jobsite, the addition shall be by certified technicians employed by the concrete supplier or an authorized representative of the admixture manufacturer. This admixture is in addition to and not a substitute for any other admixtures specified elsewhere.

E.

Calcium Chloride: Do not use calcium chloride in concrete. Do not use any admixtures which contribute free chloride ions to the concrete mix.

2.4

WATERSTOPS A.

Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip bentonite for adhesive bonding to concrete. 1.

Available Products: a.

Volclay Waterstop-RX; Colloid Environmental Technologies Co.


033000 - 4


December 7, 2010

VAPOR RETARDERS A.

Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. 1.

Available Products: a. b. c.

2.6

Include manufacturer's recommended

Fortifiber Corporation; Moistop Ultra A. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 10. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn Type-65G

FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS A.

Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; colorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces. 1.

Available Products: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o.

2.7

Burke by Edoco; Titan Hard. ChemMasters; Chemisil Plus. ChemTec International; ChemTec One. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; Intraseal. Curecrete Distribution Inc.; Ashford Formula. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Sure Hard. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Euco Diamond Hard. Kaufman Products, Inc.; SureHard. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Seal Hard. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Liqui-Hard. Metalcrete Industries; Floorsaver. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Duranox. Symons Corporation, a Dayton Superior Company; Buff Hard. US Mix Products Company; US Spec Industraseal. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Vexcon StarSeal PS.

CURING MATERIALS A.

Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, or Type 2 Class B, dissipating. 1.

Available Products: a. b. c. d.

Aqua Kure-Clear; Lambert Corp. Resin Cure-E; Nox-crete, Inc. Kurez D.R. Vox; Euclid Chemical Company Burke; Edoco


033000 - 5

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 e. f. g. B.

1100 Clear; W.R. Meadows, Inc. Day Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W) ; Dayton Superior Corporation L&M Cure R ; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.

Liquid Membrane-Forming Cure and Seal Compound: VOC Compliant, conforming to ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B and ASTM C1315, Type 1, Class A or B. The compound shall be a clear styrene acrylate type, 25% solids content minimum, and have test data from an independent testing laboratory indicating to a maximum moisture loss of .040 grams per square cm. When applied at a coverage rate of 200 sq. ft. per gallon. 1.

Available Products: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

2.8

December 7, 2010

Kure 1315; Sonneborn Building Products Day-Chem Cure & Seal 1315; Dayton Superior Corporation Super Aqua-Cure VOX or Super Diamond Clear VOX; Euclid Chemical Company Crystal Gard 0800; Lambert Corp. Cure & Seal 250E; Nox-crete, Inc. Spartan Cote 30%; Burke Dress & Seal 25; L&M Construction Chemicals CS 309-25 or VOCOMP-25; W.R. Meadows, Inc.

RELATED MATERIALS A.

Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

B.

Bonding Agent: butadiene. 1.

Available Producrts: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

C.

ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene

Acrylbond; Lambert Corp. J-40 Bonding Agent; Dayton Superior Corp. Admix 101; Larsen Products Acryl-60; Std. Drywall AcrylSet; Master Builders Sonocrete; Sonneborn-Contech SBR Latex; Euclid Chemical Co. Sika Latex; Sika Corp.

Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component, 100% solid, epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements. Use Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. Available Products: a. Epiweld 58; Lambert Corp.


033000 - 6

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 b. c. d. e. f.

December 7, 2010

Epogrout 758; L&M Construction Chemicals Sikadur Hi-Mod; Sika Chemical Corp. Euco Epoxy 452; Euclid Chemical Co. Concresive 1440 SBA; Master Builders Nitrobond Epoxy; Fosroc

D.

Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.0217-inch thick galvanized steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

E.

Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.0336 inch thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

2.9

CEMENT GROUT AND DRYPACK A.

Prepackaged Non-Shrink Non-Metallic Non-Gaseous Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B or C at a fluid consistency (flow cone) of 20 to 30 seconds. Grout shall be bleed free and attain 7500 psi compressive strength in 28 days at fluid consistency. Use for structural repairs. 1.

Available Products: a. Masterflow 928; Master Builders b. Crystex; L & M Construction Chemicals c. Five Star Fluid Grout 100; U.S. Grout d. Euco N-S; Euclid Chemical Co. e. Sikagrout; Sika Corp. f. Conbextra HF; Fosroc g. Vibropruf #20; Lambert Corp.

B.

Cement Grout: Mix one part Portland cement, 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate, and enough water and liquid bonding agent in a 50/50 mix for required consistency depending on use. Consistency may range from mortar consistency to a mixture that will flow under its own weight. Use for leveling, preparing setting pads of beds, for filling non-structural voids, and similar uses. Do not use for grouting under bearing plates or structural members in place.

C.

Drypack: Mix one part Portland cement, 2 parts fine aggregate, and enough water and liquid bonding agent in a 50/50 mix to hydrate cement and provide a mixture that can be molded with hands into a stable ball (a stiff mix). Do not mix more than can be used in 30 minutes. Use for patching tie holes and large surface defects in concrete.

2.10 A.

SLAB REPAIR MATERIALS Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. For use on slabs not receiving finishes. 1.

Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, Portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.


033000 - 7


B.

Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

Repair Topping: Traffic-bearing, cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. For use on slabs not receiving finishes. 1. 2. 3. 4.

2.11

December 7, 2010

Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

CONCRETE MIXES

A.

Concrete for all parts of the concrete work shall be homogenous, and when hardened, possess the required strength, durability, watertightness, appearance, resistance to deterioration and abrasion, and other qualities as specified or required.

B.

Mix proportioning: Proportion concrete according to ACI 211.1. Trial mixes shall be designed by the testing laboratory approved by Architect or designed by the producer and witnessed and tested by the testing laboratory, in accordance with ACI 318 Chapter 5.3. Proportioning on the basis of field experience with complete statistical data, not more than one year old from date of submittal, to confirm mixes is acceptable.

C.

Provide concrete which will develop ultimate compressive strength at 28 days equal to that noted on drawings and listed below.

D.

Concrete Grades:

.

Mix No. 1 2 3 4

Strength 3000 3500 4000 4000


Air Yes/No N Y Y Y

Max. Aggregate Size 1” 1” 3/4” 3/8”

W/C or W/C&P 0.62 0.58 0.52 0.50

033000 - 8


Concrete Use: Element 1. Footings 2. Wall Footings 3. Slab on Grade 4. Columns and Poured Walls 5. Elevated Slabs and Beams 6. Pumped Elements, Tie Beams, Tie Columns 7. Slabs on Steel Deck

F.

Mix No. 1 1 2 3 3 4 3

Design Slump: 1. 2. 3. 4.

G.

December 7, 2010

General: 4 inches. Concrete Containing High Range Water Reducer: 2 to 3 inches before addition of HRWR, 9 inches after. Slump Tolerance: Plus/minus 1 inch. Slump Of Corrosion Inhibited Concrete: 7 ±2, inch with the use of HRWR.

Cementitious Materials: Minimum Portland cement content of any concrete mix containing Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag is 305 lbs., for all other concrete mixes, minimum portland cement content is 423 lbs. Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent. Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1.

Provide concrete mixes having a fly ash content of 15% to 20%, by weight, of cementitious material.

2.

Provide concrete mixes having a Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag content of 40% to 50 %, by weight, of cementitious material.

3.

Provide concrete mixes having a Combined Fly Ash and Ground Granulated BlastFurnace Slag: 50 percent portland cement minimum, with fly ash or slag not exceeding 25 percent.

Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Fly Ash: 20 percent. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent. Combined Fly Ash and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent portland cement minimum, with fly ash or slag not exceeding 25 percent. Silica Fume: 8 percent. Combined Fly Ash, , and Silica Fume: 30 percent with fly ash not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 8 percent.


033000 - 9


December 7, 2010

Silica Fume: 8 percent +/- 1%. Combined Fly Ash, , and Silica Fume: 35 percent with fly ash not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 9 percent.

H.

Air Content: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content of 3 to 5 percent, except 2 +/- 1 percent for concrete for trowel finished, floor slabs, unless otherwise indicated.

O.

Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. 3.

P.

2.12

Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in all structural concrete. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when ambient temperature is 85 degrees F or higher and/or low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions exist. Use high range water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, walls 8” thick and less, at areas of reinforcing steel congestion, and as required for placement and workability, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.40.

Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant; at no additional cost to Owner and as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in work. CONCRETE MIXING

A.

Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94.

B.

Mixing and Delivery Time: When air temperature is between 85 and 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

C.

Provide batch ticket for each ready-mixed batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mix type and number, batch time, mix time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.


EMBEDDED ITEMS A.

Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.


033000 - 10


2.

3. 4.

3.2

December 7, 2010

Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in section 7.5 of AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges”. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated. Do not provide sleeves or openings in structural members unless shown on the structural drawings or approved by the Architect.

VAPOR RETARDERS A.

Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarders according to ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. Use below interior floor slabs only. 1.

B. C.

Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

Bituminous Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to manufacturer's written instructions. JOINTS

B.

General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

C.

Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Provide dowels as shown on drawings or as required by Architect. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of slabs. For members 5” thick or more, form keys from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. Submit detail to Architect for review. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. Allow 4 hours (minimum) between when column or wall is cast and when concrete supported by column or wall is cast. Space vertical joints in walls at 80’ o.c. U.O.N. on drawings. Place control joints at 40’ o.c. between construction joints U.O.N. on drawings. If locations are not shown, locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. In beams and girders use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations when fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.


033000 - 11


Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated on drawings. If requested, the contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a joint layout. Construct contraction joints as follows: 1.

2.

E.

2.

3.

3.3

Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at joints where indicated. 1.

G.

Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades using the “Soff-Cut” early entry dry-cut saws. Cut 1/8 inch wide and 1 inch deep joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. This is usually within 2 hours of final finish at each control joint but not more than 8 hours after completion of concrete pour. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1.

F.

December 7, 2010

Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

Coordinate construction and control joints with requirements of finish material joints. WATERSTOPS

A.

3.4

Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding or mechanically fastening and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable. CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A.

Complete the following before placing concrete: 1.

Excavate and compact subgrade, arrange for compaction testing, place vapor barrier and remove excess water.


033000 - 12


4. 5. 6.

December 7, 2010

Secure all formwork. Verify that shoring and reshoring has been inspected and accepted by Delegated Engineer. Moisten wood forms except where form coatings are used. Accurately locate all steel reinforcement, conduits, outlet boxes, anchors, hangers, sleeves, bolts, expansion joint materials and other embedded items and secure against shifting during concrete placement or consolidation. Cooperate with other trades and verify that their work is installed. Notify testing agency to test concrete. Ensure that all required inspections are performed.

B.

Comply with ACI 301, ACI 304, ACI 308 and ACI 318.

C.

Jobsite Tempering: Place concrete within 1-1/2 hours after introduction of water to mix. Submit time stamped batching tickets upon delivery of concrete to job site. 1.

2. D.

Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1.

E.

Do not add water to ready-mix concrete except as provided in ASTM C 94, Paragraph 11.7. When so allowed, limit addition of water to maximum of one (1) gallon per cubic yard. Addition of water may only be authorized by Architect, the concrete producer’s quality control representative, a preapproved representative of Contractor, or the Special Inspector. Concrete produced with high range water reducer may only be tempered with additional high range water reducer.

Maximum height of concrete free fall is 4 feet. Columns up to 8 (10) feet in height may be poured in one lift. Concrete in columns and walls over 8 (10) feet may be poured full height with the use of drop chutes or tremies or up to a maximum of 16 feet if HRWR admix concrete is used.

Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, to avoid cold joints. 1. 2.

3.

Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix constituents to segregate. Concrete in columns and walls shall be cast at least twenty four (24) hours before horizontal members they support are cast. Exception: Concrete in tie columns and grout in masonry cells shall be cast at least four (4) hours before beams or slabs are cast on top of masonry.


033000 - 13

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 F.

December 7, 2010

Deposit and consolidate concrete for slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

G.

Pumping: Slumps in excess of six (6) inches at the pump will not be permitted except for concrete produced with HRWR. If placing by means of pump, a specifically designed concrete mix shall be submitted to the Architect for review. No pumps smaller than 4 inches will be permitted. Exception: A 3” pump may be used for 8” wide beams and columns cast on top of or between masonry walls or for filling masonry cells.

H.

Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows, except concrete temperature shall not exceed 95 degrees F: 1. 2. 3. 4.

I.

3.5

Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 95 degrees F at time of placement. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. Use Type D water reducing admixtures when ambient temperature exceeds 85 degrees F or other adverse placing conditions exist.

Do not place concrete in exposed conditions when it is raining unless adequate protection is provided. FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A.

Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/4” rubbed down or chipped off. Use for concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finished work.

B.

Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch in height. 1.

Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or staining.


033000 - 14


December 7, 2010

Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished concrete: 1.

2.

3.

Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and onehalf parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part portland cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.

D.

Wall Surfaces Exposed to Public: Provide elastomeric form liner or steel forms for cast-in-place concrete wall surfaces exposed to the general public.

E.

Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.6

FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A.

General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. Slope surfaces to drains.

B.

Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. When concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

C.

Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1.

D.

Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

Floor Flatness and Levelness: Finish surfaces to the following tolerances according to ASTM E 1155 for a randomly trafficked floor surface and measured within 72 hours and before supporting formwork or shoring is removed:


033000 - 15


2. 3. 4.

5. E.

3.7

December 7, 2010

Scratch finish or Non-Critical Floors, such as Mechanical Rooms, Non-Public Unfinished Areas, Parking Slabs: Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 20; and levelness, F(L) 15; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 15; and levelness, F(L) 10. Float Finish: Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 20; and levelness, F(L) 15. Carpeted Slabs: Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 20; and levelness, F(L) 15. Thin or No Floor Covering: Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 17; for suspended slabs. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 45; and levelness, F(L) 35; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 30; and levelness, F(L) 24.

Floor Flatness and Levelness Acceptance: The Architect may authorize the testing agency to verify that the specified F(F) and F(L) numbers have been achieved for any slab pours except for unshored or sloped construction. F(F) and F(L) Minimum Local Area is defined as any bay delineated by columns. Slabs that do not meet the specified F(F) or F(L) numbers shall be removed and replaced. Alternatively, the Contractor may propose repairs to the slab or a credit to the Project. MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A.

Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work.

B.

Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C.

Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

D.

Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel-finish concrete surfaces.

E.

Base Plates and Foundations: Grout using specified non-shrink, non-metallic grout. Where applicable, grout at least 3 days prior to casting concrete on supported structure.

3.8

CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A.

General: Comply with ACI 308 “Recommended Practice for Curing Concrete” and ACI 301. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.


033000 - 16


December 7, 2010

Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing. B.

Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a combination of the following methods:

C.

Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a combination of the following methods:

3.9

1.

Curing Compound: Apply to all concrete surfaces that are not permanently exposed. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide a second coat applied at 90 degrees to initial application within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

2.

Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply to permanently exposed concrete surfaces. Apply uniformly in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A.

Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. 3.

3.10 A.

JOINT FILLING Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.

B.

Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs. Do not apply to concrete that is less than 14 days old. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.

Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry.


033000 - 17


3.11

December 7, 2010

Install semirigid epoxy joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A.

Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B.

Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1.

2.

3. C.

Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. If reinforcing steel is exposed, remove concrete to provide a minimum of 3/4” clearance all around. Prior to patching allow the Architect and Threshold Inspector adequate time to review prepared areas. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat prepared surfaces with bonding agent or slurry coat. Fill and compact with dry pack grout or non-shrink non-metallic grout before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with cement grout, dry pack grout or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.

Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1.

2. 3.

4.

5.

Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to


033000 - 18


6.

7.

December 7, 2010

manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with dry pack grout or non-shrink non-metallic grout. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

D.

Perform structural repairs of concrete, not covered herein, only with Architect's and Structural Engineer’s approval, using repair procedures they recommend.

E.

Other repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.

3.12

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article.

B.

Testing Services: Sample concrete after all water and admixtures have been added. Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1.

2. 3.

4.

5.

Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. For slabs 6” or thinner, increase frequency to each 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F and below and when 85 degrees F and above, and one test for each composite sample. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix.


033000 - 19


December 7, 2010

6.

Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; cast and laboratory cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. For pumped concrete, take sample at point of placement. a. Cast and field cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

7.

Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test one specimen at 7 days for information and three at 28 days for acceptance. If one of the first two 28 day tests fall below specified strength, test the remaining specimen at 56 days. a. Test two of field cured specimens at 7 days and two specimens at 28 days. b.

When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

C.

Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests (3 sets of 2 cylinders each) equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test (1 set of 2 cylinders) value falls below specified compressive strength by 10% or 500 psi, whichever is less.

D.

Strength tests that are not satisfactory indicate questionable concrete. The testing agency and Contractor shall submit to the Architect a report of the questionable concrete plus the two test reports immediately prior to and after (5 reports total) for evaluation. 1.

2.

If the questionable concrete is not accepted by the Architect, the testing agency shall take core tests per ACI 301 and ASTM C42 minimum diameter of cores -4 inches. Concrete will be considered structurally adequate if average of 3 cores is at least 85% f’c and no single core is less than 75% f’c. Concrete not considered adequate by core testing shall be removed and replaced or load tested per ACI 318, Chapter 20.

E.

Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for each test.

F.

Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect.

G.

The contractor may be required to pay all costs of additional testing or evaluation of questionable concrete and provide a credit to the Owner for acceptance of questionable concrete.


033000 - 20


December 7, 2010

Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate dos not comply with the Contract Documents.



033000 - 21


December 7, 2010

SECTION 051200-STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

The work specified in this section includes all labor, materials, equipment, permits, and services necessary for the fabrication and erection of structural steel and related work, complete, in accordance with the Drawings and as specified herein, including the detailing of all connections.

B.

Structural steel is that work defined in AISC “Code of Standard Practice” and as otherwise shown on Drawings.

1.3

RELATED SECTIONS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A.

Division 3 Section “Cast-In-Place Concrete” for Grouting Base Plates.

B.

Division 3 Section “Concrete Formwork” for Placing Anchor Rods.

C.

Division 5 Section “Steel Joists.”

D.

Division 5 Section “Steel Deck.”

E.

Division 5 Section “Miscellaneous Metal Fabrication.”

F.

Division 7 Section “Thermal and Moisture Protection.”

1.4

RESPONSIBILITIES A.

The Engineer of Record is responsible for the design of the steel framing and connections as presented in the Contract Documents. No changes to the requirements of the Contract Documents will be considered without complying with the applicable requirements for substitutions. This includes, but is not limited to, connection details, member sizes or steel grades.

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

051200 - 1


December 7, 2010

B.

The fabricator is responsible for the preparation of Shop and Erection Drawings pursuant to the requirements of the Contract Documents. These drawings shall be prepared by or under the direct supervision and control of a Florida Licensed Engineer, who shall submit a letter to the Architect stating such. The fabricator’s Engineer shall, where necessary, complete the details presented on the Contract Documents and adapt those details to accommodate the atypical conditions. These drawings do not require his signature and seal. Acceptance of the Shop and Erection Drawings by the Architect/Engineer does not relieve the fabricator of the responsibility for accuracy of detail dimensions on the shop drawings and the general fit-up of parts to be assembled in the field.

C.

Environmental Objective Documentation: For each steel product specified a document signed by the manufacturer/fabricator stating compliance with the requirements of the environmental objectives.

D.

The fabricator is responsible for the design and detailing of all substitutions, which shall be prepared by or under the direct supervision and control of a Delegated Engineer as defined in the Contract Documents.

E.

The fabricator is responsible for the coordination of all surveyed field conditions and field measurements necessary for the detailing, fabrication and erection of their work. All field measurements shall be provided on the shop drawings prior to submittal.

F.

The Engineer of Record is responsible for the structural adequacy of the structure in the completed project. The erector is responsible for the means, methods and safety of the erection, including all temporary guys, beams, falsework, cribbing or other elements required for the erection operation. If the erector is unsure of these requirements, he shall retain a Florida Licensed Engineer to determine and design all temporary requirements.

1.5

SUBMITTALS A.

Submit in accordance with conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B.

Qualifications: Include lists of Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the “Quality Assurance” Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

C.

Product Data for each type of product specified, including the following: 1. 2. 3.

D.

Bolts, nuts, and washers, including mechanical properties. Shear stud connectors. Structural steel coatings.

Fabricator’s certification that the chemical and physical properties of the following materials comply with the Project requirements: 1. 2.

Structural steel Bolts, nuts and washers.


051200 - 2


December 7, 2010

Shear studs. Welding electrodes.

E.

Welder’s certification. Submit to Owner’s inspection agency.

F.

Letter from Florida Licensed Engineer responsible for shop drawings.

G.

The fabricator shall submit details and complete calculations that clearly identify proposed substitutions for Engineer’s review prior to preparation of detailed shop drawings. Proposed variations to details shown on the Contract Drawings will be considered and such variations must have preliminary acceptance prior to the preparation of detailed shop drawings. The details and calculations shall clearly show the capacity of the connections designed by the fabricator. The calculations shall show details of the assembled joint with all bolts and welds required. All design calculations, drawings and details shall be signed, sealed and dated by the Delegated Engineer.

H.

Submit to the Architect for acceptance shop and erection drawings prepared by or under the direct supervision and control of a Florida Licensed Engineer. See “Shop Drawings and Other Submittals” notes regarding the possible reproduction of Structural Drawings for use as shop or erection drawings. Drawings shall include complete details, dimensions, schedules and procedures for the fabrication, assembly, and sequence of erection. 1.

2.

3.

Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, threaded fasteners and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS A2.4 symbols and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show shop welds on shop drawings and field welds on erection drawings. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor rods, embeds and other anchorages to be installed by others. Indicate surface preparation, such as primed, galvanized, etc., of each surface of each piece.

I.

Before welding is started, the steel fabricator and erector, as applicable, shall submit to the Architect a signed and sealed statement by a Florida Licensed Engineer, who specializes in the design of weldments, that he/she has provided written welding procedures for this Project, establishing the welding process, sequence of assembly, preheat, interpass and postheat requirements in general if high residual stresses are present, and in particular for all members requiring partial or complete penetration groove welding.

J.

Fabricator’s Quality Control Program.

K.

Fabricator’s shop inspection and test reports.

L.

Substantiating data for primer on Class A faying surface.

1.6

CODES AND STANDARDS A.

Florida Building Code, 2004 Edition with Applicable Supplements.


051200 - 3


December 7, 2010

AISC “Codes of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges”. 1.

Paragraph 4.4. “Approval” is modified such that the Structural Engineer will return submittals to the Architect within ten working days from time of receipt.

C.

AISC “Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings”, including “Commentary” and Supplements thereto as issued.

D.

“Specification for Structural Steel Buildings 1999”, including Commentary and Supplements thereto as issued.

E.

AISC “Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A490 Bolts” approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections of the Engineering Foundation.

F.

“Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts”. Approved June 30, 2004.

G.

AWS D1.1 “Structural Welding Code”.

H.

ASTM A 6 “General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use”.

I.

S.S.P.C. Society for Protective Coatings.

J.

Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), as amended to date.

1.7


Fabricator Qualifications: Fabricator shall have an AISC Quality Certification in the category of Conventional Steel Buildings (Sbd) with a minimum five years of documented successful experience on equivalent projects. Submit copy of AISC Certifications, SSPC Certification and résumé demonstrating equivalent project experience.

B.

Erector Qualifications: Erector shall be an AISC Certified Steel Erector (CSE) with a minimum five years of documented successful experience on equivalent projects. Submit copy of AISC Certification and résumé demonstrating equivalent project experience.

C.

Qualifications for welding work: Qualify welding procedures and operators in accordance with AWS “Standard Qualification Procedure”. 1. 2.

The Fabricator and Erector, as applicable, shall conduct all necessary tests required by ANSI/AWS D1.1 to qualify the WPS. Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for the welding process and position used and have been continuously employed as a welder since certification. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be Contractor’s responsibility.


051200 - 4


December 7, 2010

D.

The Fabricator shall ultrasonically inspect for laminations all joints where material is subjected to tension in the though thickness direction. Ultrasonic inspection shall extend for a distance of six times the material thickness subject to the through thickness tension, either side of the element delivering the tension.

E.

The Fabricator shall provide a system of quality control, including shop welding inspections and testing, to ensure that the minimum standards specified herein are attained. Submit to Owner, Architect, Engineer and Owner’s Testing and Inspection Agency complete details of the quality control program to be used and all testing and inspection reports. Visually inspect 100% of shop welds. Also, as a minimum, perform non-destructive tests of welds in conformance with AWS D1.1 as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.

F.

The fabricator may use the following examination methods, in descending order of importance. When a particular examination method for a joint is unfeasible, the highest order method that is practicable shall be used. Standard of acceptance shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1. 1. 2.

3.

4. G. 1.8

Splices: 100%. Full penetration welds: 100% of cantilevered members, 50% for all others. Partial penetration welds: 25%. Fillet welds: 10%.

Ultrasonic Method: In accordance with AWS D1.1. Radiographic Method: In accordance with ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142, with a minimum quality level of “2-2T”. This procedure is limited to the inspection of groove welds in butt joints only and is not to be used for fillet welds. Magnetic Particle Method: In accordance with ASTM E109. Use for examining partial penetration welds. Percentage of examinations is defined elsewhere in these specifications. The Yoke method may be used only for supplementary surface examination. Dye Penetrant Examination Method: In accordance with ASTM E165.

Turn-of-nut method of bolt tightening is not acceptable. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Deliver materials to site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of work

B.

Deliver anchor rods and anchorage devices which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete or masonry in ample time to not delay work.

C.

Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground, using plates, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

D.

Store fasteners components in sealed containers until ready to use. Reseal open containers to prevent contamination by moisture or other deleterious substances. Store closed containers in a protective shelter to protect fasteners from dirt and moisture. Only as many fastener


051200 - 5


December 7, 2010

components as are anticipated to be installed during the work shift shall be taken from protective storage. Fastener components that are not incorporated into the work shall be returned to protective storage at the end of the work shift. Fasteners from open containers and fasteners that accumulate rust or dirt shall not be used and shall be immediately and permanently removed from the project site. E.

Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.


MATERIALS A.

Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 50 percent.

B.

Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

C.

D.

W-Shapes: 60 percent. Channels, Angles, M , S-Shapes: 60 percent. Plate and Bar: 25 percent. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: 25 percent. Steel Pipe: 25 percent. All Other Steel Materials: 25 percent.

Structural steel rolled W and WT shapes: ASTM A 992, Fy=50 ksi. 1.

Requirements for Group 4 and 5 Members. a. Steel shall be fine, grained killed steel. b. Charpy V-notch impact tests shall be performed according to ASTM A673, “Sampling Procedure for Impact Testing of Structural Steel”: The frequency of testing shall be as prescribed in A673; the test temperature shall be 70 F; the absorbed energy shall be 20 ft.-lb. c. The Fabricator shall submit evidence to the Architect that the mill has complied with the above requirements.

2.

Mill Inspection: All structural shapes in Group 4 and 5 shall conform to the requirements of ASTM 898, “Straight Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Rolled Steel Structural Shapes” to assure delivery of shapes free of gross internal discontinuities such as pipe, ruptures, or laminations. The Fabricator shall submit to the Architect evidence of compliance by the mill with this requirement.

Structural steel rolled M, S, C and MC shapes and Angles: ASTM A 36, Fy=36 ksi.


051200 - 6


Structural steel plates and bars: ASTM A 36, Fy=36 ksi. 1.

F.

December 7, 2010

All steel plates exceeding 2” in thickness shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A435, “Straight-Beam Ultrasonic Examination of Steel Plates”, to assure delivery of steel plates free of gross internal discontinuities such as pipe, ruptures, or laminations. Plates shall be identified by stamping or stenciling “UT 435” adjacent to marking required by the material specification. The Fabricator shall submit to the Architect evidence of compliance by the mill with this requirement.

Cold-formed hollow structural sections (HSS): 1. 2.

Round sections: Square and Rectangular sections:

ASTM A500, Grade C, Fy=46 ksi. ASTM A500, Grade B, Fy=46 ksi.

G.

Steel pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B, Fy=35 ksi.

H.

Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 55 with Supplementary Requirement S1, hooked.

I.

Anchor Rods: ASTM A449 Type 1 threaded, with nuts and washers each end.

J.

Unfinished threaded fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular low-carbon steel bolts and nuts. 1.

Provide square head and nuts.

K.

Bolt Lubrication: All bolts shall be well lubricated at time of installation, dry, rusty bolts will not be allowed. Bolts or nuts shall be wax dipped by the bolt supplier or “Johnson’s Stick Wax 140” shall be used with all bolts in the shop or field. Cleaning and lubrication of ASTM 1852 twist-off type tension-control bolts is not permitted.

L.

Electrodes for welding: Comply with AWS D1.1-98, Table 3.1. 1.

M.

Structural steel primer paint: SSPC – Paint 11 lead and chromate free, V.O.C. complaint, minimum solids 55% by volume. Use for steel not receiving special coatings or fireproofing. Refer to Architectural Drawings and Division 9. 1.

2. 3. N.

For complete-joint penetration groove welds, weld metal shall have a charpy V-notch impact strength of 20 ft./lbs. –20°F.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Steel spec Heavy Duty Primer; Sherwin Williams. b. Tnemec – Series 10; Tnemec. c. Primatite; Devoe. Provide shop primer and shop applied top coat paint in accordance with Division 9 Section “Special Coatings” where shown on the Architectural Drawings. Steel permanently exposed to the elements that does not receive a coating, such as cooling tower supports, shall be hot dip galvanized.

Non-metallic shrinkage-resistant grout: Provide in accordance with Section 03300.


051200 - 7


December 7, 2010

FABRICATION A.

Shop fabrication and assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members where indicated.

B.

Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials.

C.

Splices in Structural Steel: Splicing of structural steel members in the shop or the field is prohibited without prior approval of the Architect. Any member having a splice not shown and detailed on approved shop drawings will be rejected.

D.

Compression Joints: Compression joints which depend on contact bearing as part of the splice capacity shall have the bearing surfaces of individual fabricated pieces prepared to a common plane by milling, sawing, or other suitable means.

E.

Connections: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Weld shop connections, as indicated. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections are indicated. Provide high-strength, threaded fasteners except for temporary bracing to facilitate erection or otherwise indicated. Faying surfaces, including coatings, for slip-critical connections shall have a minimum Class A slip coefficient. At welded beam-column flange joints, weld backing and run-off tabs shall be removed and repaired, including a 5/16” reinforcing fillet weld on the edge below the completejoint-penetration groove weld. The exception that the top-flange backing is permitted to remain if it is attached to the column flange with a continuous fillet weld on the edge below the complete-joint-penetration groove weld.

F.

Bearing and Fit-Up of Column Compression Joints: Compression joints of all columns shall have bearing surfaces finished to a common plane by milling, sawing, or other suitable means. Lack of contact bearing must not exceed 1/16”, or corrective measures as defined by AISC Section M4.4 shall be required.

G.

Struts and Braces: Connect struts and braces to resist 50% of the allowable tensile strength of the members, unless otherwise specified.

H.

Compression members composed of two or more rolled shapes separated from one another by intermittent fillers shall be connected to one another at such fillers spaced at intervals so that the least slenderness ratio, l/r, of either shape, between the fasteners, does not exceed the governing slenderness ratio of the built-up member.

I.

High-strength bolted construction: Install high-strength threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC “Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts” (RCSC June 30, 2004).


051200 - 8


December 7, 2010

J.

Welded construction: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and method used in correcting welding work.

K.

Holes for other work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing, and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on final shop drawings.

L.

Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as indicated to receive other work.

M.

Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes, or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.

N.

Provide weep hole in any confined steel surface capable of retaining water during erection or service. Seal weld as required to prevent migration of water into confined region.

2.3

SHOP PAINTING A.

Surface preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steel work to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with SSPC: the Society for Protective Coatings. For LEED projects include the VOC complaint statement below.

B.

Priming: Unless specified otherwise in Division 9 “Special Coatings” comply with the following: Immediately after surface preparation, apply VOC compliant structural steel primer paint in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and at a rate to provide dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils. Use painting methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and exposed surfaces. Refer to Division 9 Section “Special Coatings” for priming and painting of members to receive coatings. Shop prime structural steel, except do not prime: 1.

2. 3. 4. 5.

6. C.

Members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or mortar. Prime embedded steel that is partially exposed on exposed portions and initial 2” of embedded areas only. Surfaces that are scheduled to receive sprayed-on fireproofing. Members that are to be hot dip galvanized. Surfaces within 2” of welds. The faying surfaces of slip-critical bolted connections. The exception is for members that receive a coating system. There the faying surfaces should receive a primer providing a Class A surface, with a slip coefficient of 0.33. Submit substantiating data in conformance with Appendix A of the AISC “Specification for Structural Joints”. Mask off and do not prime a strip 2” wide on any surfaces to receive a row of headed studs or puddle welds.

Steel members which cannot be readily painted after fabrication, such as back-to-back angles and tees, shall be primed and finish coated prior to fabrication.


051200 - 9


December 7, 2010

D.

Hot dip galvanize members permanently exposed to the elements, such as cooling tower support steel.

E.

Do not print or emboss the name of the fabricator on exposed steel unless it is completely concealed by the finish painting.


ERECTION A.

Surveys: Check elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces and locations of anchor bolts and similar devices, before erection work proceeds, and report discrepancies to Architect. Do not proceed with erection until corrections have been made, or until compensating adjustments to structural steel work have been agreed upon with Architect.

B.

Temporary shoring and bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members and connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads from steel self weight and erection procedures or any other loads created by other contractors on a temporary basis. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guidelines to achieve proper alignment of structures as erection proceeds.

C.

Temporary planking: Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively complete work.

D.

Anchor rods and bolts: Furnish anchor rods, bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in-place work. 1. 2.

E.

Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for pre-setting rods, bolts and other anchors to accurate locations. Refer to Division 3 of these specifications for anchor rod installation requirements in concrete, and Division 4 for masonry installation.

Setting bases and bearing plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and clean bottom of base and bearing plate. 1. 2.

3. 4. 5.

Set base or bearing plate wedge or other adjusting devices. Tighten anchor rods after structural steel frame has been plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. Pack or pour non-shrink grout solidly between bearing surface and base or plate. Ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect grout and allow to cure. For proprietary grout materials, comply with manufacturer’s instructions. Base plates must be grouted a minimum of 72 hours prior to placing concrete slabs on supporting steel structure.


051200 - 10


December 7, 2010

Field assembly: Set structural members accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various members forming a part of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. Comply with AISC Code of Standard Practice except where more stringent requirements are contained herein. 1.

Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances.

2.

Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating temperature of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be when completed and in service.

G.

Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop drawings.

H.

Erection bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.

I.

Comply with AISC Specification for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

J.

Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by use of drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts as permitted by Architect.

K.

Tighten bearing-type bolts (A-325N, A-325X, A-490N, and A-490X) to the snug tight condition as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.

L.

Bolts shall be placed in all holes, with washers positioned as required and nuts threaded to complete the assembly. Compacting the joint to the snug-tight condition shall progress systematically from the most rigid part of the joint. The snug-tightened condition is the tightness that is attained with a few impacts of an impact wrench or the full effort of an ironworker using an ordinary spud wrench. More than one cycle through the bolt pattern may be required to achieve the snugtightened joint.

Tighten slip-critical bolts (A-325SC and A-490SC) to the minimum fastener tension indicated in Table 8.1 of the “Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A-325 or ASTM A-490 Bolts” as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Begin final tightening of slip-critical bolts only after a snug-tight joint as described above is achieved. Progress systematically from the most rigid part of the joint. If splined end of tension-control bolts is severed prior to achieving snug-tight joint, remove and replace the fastener assembly. Progress systematically from the most rigid part of the joint. Determine tension using either load indicator washers or tension-control bolts.


051200 - 11


December 7, 2010

At the Contractor’s option, slip-critical bolts may be installed in either standard, oversize, or short slotted holes. Design of connections using slip-critical bolts is based on a Class A faying surface and oversized holes. M.

Provide hardened washers conforming to ASTM F436 and place under the part being turned.

N.

Do not reuse or retighten bolts which have been fully tightened. Use only non-galvanized nuts and bolts that are clean, rust-free, and well lubricated. Bolts and nuts shall be wax dipped by the bolt supplier or lubricated with Johnson’s Stick Wax 140. Cleaning and lubrication of ASTM F1852 twist-off-type tension-control bolts is not permitted.

O.

Where slotted holes are used to accommodate thermal movement, notify the Architect if bolt is expected to hit the end of slot, based on temperature at time of installation.

P.

Store fastener components in sealed containers until ready for use. Reseal open containers to prevent contamination by moisture or other deleterious substances. Store closed containers from dirt and moisture in a protective shelter. Take from protective storage only as many fastener components as are anticipated to be installed during the work shift. Fastener components that are not incorporated into the work shall be returned to protective storage at the end of the work shift. Fasteners from open containers and fasteners that accumulate rust or dirt shall not be used and shall be immediately and permanently removed from the project site.

Q.

Gas cutting: Do not use gas-cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in primary structural framing. When permitted, finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared appearance by grinding or reaming. Do not use gas cutting to fabricate bolt holes.

R.

Touch-up painting: Immediately after erection, slag field welds and clean bolted connections and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using original shop primer or cold galvanizing compound. For exposed steel having special coatings system, reapply both primer and top coat per Division 9 Section, “Special Coatings”. For galvanized steel, apply Zinc Clad Cold Galvanizing by Sherwin-Williams or Cold Galvanizing by ZRC Chemical by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 3 mils.

3.2

QUALITY CONTROL A.

Shop testing and inspection by the Owner is to evaluate the effectiveness of the Fabricator’s required Quality Control and Assurance Program.

B.

Owner will engage a testing agency to perform shop inspections, shop testing, field-testing, and to prepare test and inspection reports.

C.

Testing agency shall conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test specimens comply with requirements, and specifically state any deviations therefrom.

D.

Provide access for testing agency to places where structural steel work is being fabricated or produced and unobstructed views to all members in nearby storage so that required inspection and testing can be accomplished.


051200 - 12


December 7, 2010

E.

Testing agency may inspect structural steel at plant before shipment; however, Architect reserves the right, at any time before final acceptance, to reject material not complying with specified requirement.

F.

Correct deficiencies in structural steel work which inspections or laboratory test reports have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Perform additional tests, at Contractor’s expense, as may be necessary to reconfirm any noncompliance of original work, and as may be necessary to show compliance of corrected work.

G.

Shop Inspection and Tests: Testing Agency is to inspect and test during fabrication of structural steel assemblies, as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

12.

Review shop drawings and shop procedures with Fabricator’s supervisory personnel. Request and obtain necessary mill certifications of steel and verify proper material throughout the duration of the job. Verify welding procedure qualifications, either by prequalifications or by witnessing qualification tests. Verify welder qualifications, either by certification and/or by retesting. Obtain welder certificates. Spot check layout and dimensions of jigs and fixtures for joint preparation, and fit up of members. Verify welding electrodes to be used and other welding consumables as the job progresses. Check preheating procedures for conformance to AWS D1.1. Verify procedures for welding in accordance with applicable portions of section 4, “Technique”, AWS D1.1. Verify that quality of welds meet the requirements of Paragraph B.15, “Quality of Welds”, AWS D1.1. Provide inspection of surface preparation for coating and coating operations in accordance with SSPC VIS 1 and 2. Perform visual inspection of all welds for compliance with Contract Documents. Provide random non-destructive tests of welds in conformance with Section 6 of AWS D1.1, as may be required by Architect, but not less than: a. Full penetration welds: 25%. b. Partial penetration welds: 15%. c. Fillet Welds: 10%. Testing laboratory may use the following examination methods, in descending order of importance. When a particular examination method for a joint is unfeasible, the highest order method that is practicable shall be used. Standard of acceptance shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1. a. Ultrasonic Method: In accordance with AWS D1.1. b. Radiographic Method: In accordance with ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142, with a minimum quality level of “2-2T”. This procedure is limited to the inspection of groove welds in butt joints only and is not to be used for fillet welds. c. Magnetic Particle Method: In accordance with ASTM E109. Use for examining partial penetration welds. Percentage of examinations is defined elsewhere in these specifications. The Yoke method may be used only for supplementary surface examination. d. Dye Penetrant Examination Method: In accordance with ASTM E165.


051200 - 13

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 13. 14. 15. H.

December 7, 2010

Interpret, record, and report all results of the non-destructive tests. Mark for repair, any area not meeting Specification requirements. Correction of rejected welds shall be made in accordance with Paragraph 3.7, “Corrections”, AWS D1.1 Re-examine all repair areas and interpret, record, and report the results of examinations of repair welds.

Field Inspection and Tests: Inspect and Test during the erection of structural steel assemblies as directed by the Engineer of Record, but not less than the following 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6.

7. 8. 9.

Verify field welding procedures and obtain welder certificates. Check joint preparation and fit up, backing strips, and runout plates. Check preheating to assure proper temperature, uniformity, and thoroughness through the full material thickness. Review welding sequence. Perform visual inspection of all welds for compliance with Contract Documents. Perform non-destructive tests of welds in conformance with Section 6 of AWS S1.1 as may be required by Architect, but not less than: a. Splices: 100%. Full Penetration Welds: 50% except 100% of cantilever members. b. Partial Penetration Welds: 25%. c. Fillet Welds: 10%. Check 100% of bolted connections according to inspection procedures outlined in the “Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts” and as required elsewhere in these specifications. Interpret, record, and report all results of the non-destructive tests. Mark for repair any area not meeting Specification requirements. Correction of rejected welds shall be made in accordance with Paragraph 3.7, “Corrections”, AWS D1.1. Re-examine all repair areas and interpret, record, and report the results of examinations of repair welds.



051200 - 14


December 7, 2010

SECTION 052100-STEEL JOISTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes the following: 1. 2.

B.


1.3

Open-web K-series steel joists. Joist accessories.

Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing bearing plates in concrete. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for installing bearing plates in unit masonry. Division 5 Section “Structural Steel” for Steel Joist support framing. Division 5 Section “Steel Deck” for fastening requirements to Steel Joists. Division 5 Section “Metal Fabrications” for miscellaneous steel framing used with Steel Joists. Division 7 Section " Applied Fireproofing".

DEFINITIONS A.

1.4

Special Joists: Joists requiring modification by the manufacturer to support wind net uplift pressures, concentrated loads, nonuniform loads, or other special loading conditions that invalidate SJI's "Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders." PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A.

Structural Performance: Provide joists, special joists and connections capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated on drawings, including joists subject to wind net uplift. 1.

STEEL JOISTS

Chord and web tension and compression forces are reversed in joists subject to wind net uplift. Modify joist elements if required by analysis, possibly including increasing

052100- 1


2. B.

1.5

December 7, 2010

bottom chord, reducing bridging spacing, and/or increasing the size or quantity of web elements. Refer to SJI Technical Digest No. 6, “Structural Design of Steel Roof Joists to Resist Uplift Loads.” Carefully investigate the design of seats of joists subject to wind net uplift. Standard joist seats are often inadequate to resist wind uplift forces.

Design joists to withstand design loads, with live and wind load deflections each no greater than 1/360 of the span. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product indicated.

B.

Shop Drawings: Show layout, mark, number, type, location, and spacings of joists. Include joist length, camber, joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, accessories; splice and connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction. 1. 2. 3.

Indicate locations and details of anchorage devices and bearing plates to be embedded in other construction. Indicate loads on all special joists, including loading diagrams and wind net uplift pressures. Do not fabricate or erect joists prior to the approval of shop drawings.

C.

Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. Submit to General Contractor and Special Inspector.

D.

Mill certificates signed by manufacturers of bolts certifying that their products comply with specified requirements.

E.

Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

F.

Design Letter: The Fabricator is responsible for designing and detailing all joists and seats, particularly special joists, in accordance with the Contract Documents and SJI requirements. This work shall be done by a Florida Licensed Engineer experienced in similar work and retained by the Fabricator. Prior to the first submittal, this Engineer shall submit a signed and sealed letter stating that the Engineer accepts responsibility for design and detailing of all joists on the Project. The drawings do not require signature and seal.

1.6


Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing joists similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

STEEL JOISTS

052100- 2


December 7, 2010

Manufacturer must be certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with SJI standard specifications and load tables. Manufacturer assumes responsibility for designing special joists and seats to comply with performance requirements in compliance with SJI requirements.

B.

SJI Specifications: Comply with SJI's "Standard Specifications” and “Standard Load Tables", applicable to types of joists indicated. Comply with “Recommended Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Joist Girders”.

C.

Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel"; and SJI Technical Digest #8, “Welding of Open Web Steel Joists”.

D.

Inspection: Members shall be inspected by the manufacturer before shipment to insure compliance of materials and workmanship with the requirements of these specifications.

1.7


Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications."

B.

Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

1.8

SEQUENCING A.

Deliver steel bearing plates and other devices to be built into concrete and masonry construction.


MATERIALS A.

Steel: Comply with SJI's "Specifications" for chord and web members.

B.

Steel Bearing Plates: ASTM A 36.

C.

Bedding Grout: For joist ends bearing on concrete or masonry, provide bedding grout as follows: 1.

2.

STEEL JOISTS

Non-metallic shrinkage-resistant grout; pre-mixed, non-corrosive, non-staining product containing selected silica sands, Portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water reducing agents, complying with CRD-C621. Products: Provide non-metallic, shrinkage resistant mortar as manufactured by one of following:

052100- 3

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 a. b. c. d. e. f. D.

2.2

Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50.

High-Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts, heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers. 1.

F.

Euco N.S.; Euclid Chemical Co. Crystex; L&M Construction Chemicals Masterflow 928; Master Builders Five Star 100 Grout; U.S. Grout Corp. Conbextra HF; Fosroc Sikagrout 212; Sika Corp.

Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers. 1.

E.

December 7, 2010

Finish: Plain, uncoated.

Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. PRIMERS

A.

Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, Type I, red oxide; FS TT-P-636, red oxide; or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance requirements of either of these red-oxide primers. Primer must be compatible with fireproofing, where applicable.

B.

Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer with good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664. Primer must be compatible with fireproofing, where applicable.

2.3

OPEN-WEB STEEL JOISTS AND JOIST GIRDERS A.

Manufacture steel joists according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, KSeries," in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top and bottom-chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord; of joist type indicated. 1.

Joist Type: K-series steel joists.

B.

Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

C.

Top-Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI's Type S top-chord extensions where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications."

D.

Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI's Type R extended ends where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications."

STEEL JOISTS

052100- 4


December 7, 2010

E.

Header Units: Any situation requiring heading of joists not shown on the structural drawings shall be referred to engineer for framing.

F.

Splices in Chord Members: All splices shall be designed and provided in accordance with SJI Specifications. The splices in each of the two angles or bars of all members shall not be at the same location, but shall be staggered a minimum of 6 inches.

G.

Joist Bearing: Provide minimum end bearing of joists and joist girders as required by SJI Specifications but subject to requirements below, unless detailed otherwise on the drawings: 1. If two joists do not abut each other at a support, provide required joist bearing centered on the supporting member. 2. If two joists abut each other at a support and sufficient minimum bearing for each joist exists, provide 1/4” space between joist ends centered over the support. 3. If two joists abut each other at a support and sufficient minimum bearing for each joist does not exist at the support, offset the ends of each joists and center joist bearing on the center of the support.

H.

Camber members according to SJI's "Specifications” unless otherwise indicated.

I.

Equip bearing ends of members with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if member slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches.

2.4

JOIST ACCESSORIES A.

Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material, size, and type as indicated or, where not indicated, as required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required. Where applicable, adjust bridging to meet the requirements of OSHA.

B.

Fabricate steel bearing plates with integral anchorages of sizes and thicknesses indicated. Shop prime paint.

C.

Supply ceiling extensions, either extended bottom-chord elements or a separate extension unit of enough strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch (13 mm) of finished wall surface, unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to complete joist installation.

2.5

CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING A.

Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories to be primed by power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3.

B.

Do not prime paint joists and accessories to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

STEEL JOISTS

052100- 5


December 7, 2010

C.

Apply one shop coat of primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous, dry paint film not less than 1 mil thick.

D.

Painting of joists and joist accessories is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."


EXAMINATION A.

Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2

INSTALLATION A.

Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.

B.

Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section. 1. 2. 3.

4. 5.

Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. Secure joists resting on masonry or concrete bearing surfaces by bedding in mortar and anchoring to masonry or concrete construction as specified in SJI “Specifications” for type of steel joist used or as shown on drawings. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that joists are stabilized during construction. Delay rigidly connecting bottom-chord extensions to columns or supports until dead loads have been applied.

C.

Erection Stability and Handling: When it is necessary for the erector to climb on the joists, extreme caution must be exercised since unbridged joists may exhibit some degree of instability under the erector’s weight. Use only lightweight erectors during the construction period. The contractor shall provide means for adequate distribution of concentrated loads so that the carrying capacity of any joist is not exceeded. Erection must comply with OSHA requirements and SJI Technical Digest #9, “Handling and Erection of Steel Joists and Joist Girders”. Construction safety is the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

D.

Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates where indicated. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

STEEL JOISTS

052100- 6


December 7, 2010

E.

Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using carbon-steel bolts where indicated.

F.

Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with RCSC's "Allowable Stress Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts" or "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts" for high-strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements.

G.

Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before decking is erected or construction loads are applied, to ensure lateral stability during construction. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams. 1. 2.

3.3

For joists 40’ and longer and other joists required by OSHA, install a center row of bolted bridging before slackening of hoisting lines to provide lateral stability. After erection, remove temporary bridging as required for architectural, structural and mechanical clearance.

ATTACHMENTS TO JOISTS A.

The Contractor shall ensure that no cuts or holes are made in the members of the erected joists for attachment of ceiling, ducts, pipes, or any other items not specifically shown in the contract drawings. Use of powder driven fasteners in joist diagonal and bottom chord members is prohibited.

B.

The Contractor shall not hang any elements from joists except ceiling, ducts, pipes or other items specifically shown on the Contract Documents. Heavy pipes, ducts, or other equipment hung from steel joists may require additional joist reinforcement and shall be referred to the Architect for framing.

C.

Ceiling weighing 3 psf or less may have the grid hung anywhere along the joist bottom chord. Ceilings weighing more than 3 psf and all pipes, ducts and other mechanical, electrical, and plumbing equipment suspended from the joists shall have the hanger attached at a joist panel point only, except as approved otherwise in writing by the Architect.

3.4

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.

Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections.

B.

Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1.

C.

Bolted connections will be visually inspected. 1.

STEEL JOISTS

High-strength, field-bolted connections will be tested and verified according to procedures in RCSC's "Allowable Stress Design Specification for Structural Joints Using

052100- 7


December 7, 2010

ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts." or "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts." D.

Correct deficiencies in Work that inspections have indicated are not in compliance with specified requirements.

E.

Testing may be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements.

3.5

REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A.

Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists and accessories, bearing plates and abutting structural steel. 1. 2.

Clean with solvent and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2, or power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3. Apply a compatible primer of the same type as the shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.

C.

Touchup Painting: "Painting."

Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Division 9 Section

D.

Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.


STEEL JOISTS

052100- 8


December 7, 2010

SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.


B.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.3

Roof deck. Vented roof deck

Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill and reinforcing steel. Division 3 Section "Insulating Concrete Decks" for lightweight insulating concrete fill. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop-welded shear connectors. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel shapes.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated, or requested by the Architect.

B.

Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.

C.

Product Certificates: Signed by steel deck manufacturers certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

D.

Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. Submit to general contractor and Special Inspector.

E.

Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating that each of the following complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products: 1.

Mechanical fasteners.

STEEL DECKING

053100 - 1


December 7, 2010


Fabricator Qualifications: Member of the Steel Deck Institute.

B.

Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed steel deck installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C.

Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

D.

Fabrication and Erection: Fabricate and erect deck per the Steel Deck Institute’s “Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof Decks”.

E.

Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

F.

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical to those steel deck units tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.

Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

G.

AISI Specifications: Calculate structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

H.

Governing Building Code: Comply with Florida Building Code, 2007 Edition.

I.

FM Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FM and listed in FM's "Approval Guide, Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1 windstorm ratings.

J.

Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

1.5


Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B.

Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.

STEEL DECKING

Protect with a

053100 - 2


December 7, 2010


MANUFACTURERS A.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.

2.2

Steel Deck: a. Consolidated Systems, Inc. b. Epic Metals Corp. c. Marlyn Steel Products, Inc. d. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Div. e. Roof Deck, Inc. f. United Steel Deck, Inc. g. Wheeling Corrugating Co.; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corp.

ROOF DECK A.

Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, and the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

2.3

Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, G90 zinc coating. Deck Profile; Depth and Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. Span Condition: Triple span typical, Double span minimum, U.O.N. on Drawings. Side Laps: Interlocking seam. Vent Slot Area: Manufacturer's standard vent slots providing [0.5%] [.75%] open area.

NONCOMPOSITE VENTED FORM DECK A.

2.4

Noncomposite Vented Steel Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed- and vented-steel sheet noncomposite form deck panels to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Noncomposite Steel Form Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, and the following: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 zinc coating. 2. Profile Depth and Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Span Condition: Triple span typical, double span, minimum, U.O.N. on Drawings. 4. Side Laps: Interlocking seam. ACCESSORIES

A.

General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated.

B.

Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.

STEEL DECKING

053100 - 3


December 7, 2010

C.

Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.

D.

Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

E.

Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.

F.

Steel Sheet Accessories: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated.

G.

Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication No. 29 for overhang and slab depth unless otherwise indicated.

H.

Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated.

I.

Recessed Sump Pans: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as deck, with 3-inch wide flanges and level recessed pans of 1-1/2- inch minimum depth. For drains, cut holes in the field.

J.

Flat Sump Plate: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field.


EXAMINATION A.

3.2

Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A.

Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 29, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B.

Deck has been designed to span unshored, U.O.N. on Drawings.

C.

Locate decking bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.

D.

Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.

E.

Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

STEEL DECKING

053100 - 4


December 7, 2010

F.

Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to decking.

G.

Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of decking, and support of other work.

H.

Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

I.

Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Provide mechanical fasteners according to deck manufacturer's written instructions and per the Structural Notes on the Drawings.

3.3

ROOF DECK INSTALLATION A.

Fasten roof deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or seam welds with an equal perimeter, but not less than 1-1/2 inches long, and as follows: 1. 2.

Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch nominal. Weld Spacing: Weld deck units as indicated on the Drawings.

B.

Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, as indicated on the Drawings.

C.

End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows:

D.

Miscellaneous Roof Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, cover plates, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.

3.4


Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field qualitycontrol testing.

B.

Field welds will be subject to inspection.

C.

Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D.

Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.

E.

Additional testing and/or inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.

END OF SECTION 053100 STEEL DECKING

053100 - 5


December 7, 2010

SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes the following: 1.

B.


1.3

Steel or Aluminum pipe and tube railings.

Division 05 Section "Metal Stairs" railings associated with metal stairs. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings. Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board” for metal backing for anchoring railings.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.

General: In engineering railings and connections to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials and connections based on the following: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Aluminum: The lesser of minimum yield strength divided by 1.65 or minimum ultimate tensile strength divided by 1.95. Stainless Steel: 60 percent of minimum yield strength. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.

Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1.

Handrails: a. b. c.

2.

Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

Top Rails of Guards: a. b.

Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

055213 - 1

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 c. 3.

1.4

Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.. Uniform load of 25 lbf/sq. ft. applied horizontally. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

Thermal Movements: Provide exterior railings that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1.

D.

Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

Infill of Guards: a. b. c.

C.

December 7, 2010

Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; material surfaces.

Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For the following: 1. 2.

B.

Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.

For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer registered in the State of Florida responsible for their preparation.

C.

Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design.

D.

Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. 1. 2. 3.

Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters. Fittings and brackets. Assembled Sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including top rail, post, handrail, and infill. Sample need not be full height. a.

E.

Show method of finishing and connecting members at intersections.

Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.


055213 - 2


December 7, 2010

F.

Welding certificates: Provide welding certificates from all personnel performing welding in shop and in the installation of the stair system.

G.

Product Test Reports: review of product performance will be based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935 or on engineering analysis provided by an engineer registered in the State of Florida and responsible for the engineering design of the stair system.

1.5


Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a single manufacturer.

B.

Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. 2. 3.

1.6

AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum." AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code--Stainless Steel."


Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.

2. 1.7

Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating railings without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.

COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A.

Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B.

Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.


055213 - 3


December 7, 2010


MANUFACTURERS A.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.

Aluminum Pipe and Tube Railings: a. b. c. d. e.

2.2

Skyline Steel (Mike Davis; 954-968-1912) Weatherguard Poma (Brian; 561-790-5799) Miller Custom Metals (Alan Blalock; 561-540-6263) Composite Steel (Bucky Drotar; 561-582-4398) Royal Iron (Terry Barrett; 561-655-9353)

METALS, GENERAL A.

Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

B.

Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3

STEEL A.

Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.

B.

Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 1.

Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.

C.

Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D.

Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.

E.

Expanded Metal: ASTM F 1267, Type I (expanded) Type II (expanded and flattened), Class 1 (uncoated).

F.

Perforated Metal: Cold-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, or hot-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel Type B, 0.060 inch thick, with 1/4-inch holes 3/8 inch o.c. in staggered rows.


055213 - 4

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 G.

December 7, 2010

Perforated Metal: Galvanized-steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating, commercial steel Type B, 0.064 inch thick, 3/8 inch o.c. in staggered rows round end slotted holes in staggered rows .

2.4 ALUMINUM H.

Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required.

I.

Extruded Bars and Tubing: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5/T52.

J.

Extruded Structural Pipe and Round Tubing: ASTM B 429, Alloy 6063-T6. 1.

Provide Standard Weight (Schedule 40) pipe, unless otherwise indicated.

K.

Drawn Seamless Tubing: ASTM B 210, Alloy 6063-T832.

L.

Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy A356.0-T6.

2.5

FASTENERS A.

General: Provide the following: 1.

Aluminum Railings: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners.

B.

Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.

C.

Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 1.

2. D.

Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated. Provide tamper-resistant screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.

Anchors: Provide torque-controlled expansion anchors, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.


055213 - 5


December 7, 2010

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.

Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. 1.

For aluminum railings, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.

B.

Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections.

C.

Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79. 1. 2.

Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

D.

Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

E.

Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

F.

Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. 1.

2.7

Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.

FABRICATION A.

General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.

B.

Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

C.

Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D.

Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.


055213 - 6


December 7, 2010

E.

Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

F.

Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

G.

Connections: Fabricate railings with welded and nonwelded connections. Non welded connections will only be permitted at connections of dissimilar metals.

H.

Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. 2. 3.

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

I.

Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to interconnect members with welds that minimize surface grinding, using manufacturer's standard system of sleeve and socket fittings.

J.

Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 1.

K.

Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method.

Form changes in direction as follows: 1.

By radius bends of radius indicated or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings of radius indicated.

L.

Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

M.

Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails. Close ends of returns between end of rail and wall.

N.

Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 1.

At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide fillers made from crush-resistant material, or other means to transfer wall loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.


055213 - 7


December 7, 2010

O.

Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

P.

For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 6 inches long with inside dimensions less than greater than inside dimensions of post, with steel plate forming bottom closure.

Q.

Toe Boards: Where required by the authority having jurisdiction, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details required.

2.8

FINISHES, GENERAL A.

Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B.

Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C.

Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D.

Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings.

2.9

ALUMINUM FINISHES A.

Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.


EXAMINATION A.

Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.


055213 - 8


December 7, 2010


Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

B.

Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1.

2. 3.

Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.

C.

Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

D.

Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.

E.

Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.

3.3

RAILING CONNECTIONS A.

Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings.

B.

Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in Part 2 "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.

C.

Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to 1 side, and locate joint within 6 inches of post.

3.4

ANCHORING POSTS A.

Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into stair system for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off surplus anchoring material; and leave 1/8-inch buildup, sloped away from post.


055213 - 9


Anchor posts to metal surfaces with flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 1.

3.5

December 7, 2010

For aluminum pipe railings, attach posts using fittings designed and engineered for this purpose.

ANCHORING RAILING ENDS A.

3.6

Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to railing ends and anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts. ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS

A.

Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. 1.

Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt.

B.

Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.

C.

Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: 1. 2. 3.

3.7

For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. For steel-framed gypsum board partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardanttreated wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.

Clean aluminum by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean water.

B.

Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of finish touch up paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

C.

Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

3.8

PROTECTION A.

Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.


055213 - 10


December 7, 2010

Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.



055213 - 11


December 7, 2010

SECTION 057000 – MISCELLANEOUS METALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

B.

Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1.

C.

Steel framing and supports for overhead doors. Steel framing and supports for countertops. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete not specified in other Sections. Metal ladders and stairs. Metal bollards. Pipe guards. Metal floor supports. Metal downspout boots.

Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, wedge-type inserts and other items indicated to be cast into concrete. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items indicated to be built into unit masonry. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing." Division 05 Section "Metal Stairs." Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings." Division 05 Section "Metal Gratings." Division 05 Section "Decorative Metal." Division 05 Section "Decorative Metal Railings." Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for metal framing anchors.

MISCELLANEOUS METALS 057000 - 1


December 7, 2010


Structural Performance of Ladders: Provide ladders capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3.

B.

Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1.

1.4

Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; material surfaces.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

Equipment stand. Railings Paint products. Grout. Aluminum access ladders.

Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1. 2. 3.

Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. For installed products indicated or required by code to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer, registered in the State of Florida and responsible for their preparation.

C.

Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded nosing.

D.

Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

E.

Welding certificates.

F.

Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

1.5


Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. 2.

AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."


City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 3. 4. 1.6

December 7, 2010

AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code--Stainless Steel."


Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.

2. 1.7

Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B.

Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


MANUFACTURERS A.

In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. 2. 3.

4.

Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.



December 7, 2010

METALS, GENERAL A.

2.3

Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. FERROUS METALS

A.

Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B.

Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304 and 316L.

C.

Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304 and 316L.

D.

Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

E.

Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.

F.

Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads.

G.

Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels with continuous slot complying with MFMA-3. 1. 2. 3.

H.

2.4

Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches. Material: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, Grade 33, with G90 coating; 0.1046-inch nominal thickness. Material: Steel complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 33 0.1046-inch minimum thickness; Coated with rust-inhibitive coating.

Cast Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. NONFERROUS METALS

A.

Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6.

B.

Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6.

C.

Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.

D.

Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.



December 7, 2010

FASTENERS A.

General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at interior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B.

Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.

C.

Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts, Alloy Group 1.

D.

Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 1.

Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

E.

Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.

F.

Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.

G.

Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

H.

Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.

I.

Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.

J.

Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.

K.

Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to four times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1.

L.

Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.

Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. 2.

Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 and nuts complying with ASTM F 594.



December 7, 2010


Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B.

Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with this section.

C.

Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79. 1. 2.

D.

Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. 1. 2.

Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Products: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

Benjamin Moore & Co.; Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM18/19. Carboline Company; Carbozinc 621. ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha-Coat 313. International Coatings Limited; Interzinc 315 Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer. Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme-Zinc 90-97.

E.

Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

F.


G.

Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying with ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications.

H.

Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

I.

Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-inPlace Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated.



December 7, 2010

FABRICATION, GENERAL A.

Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B.

Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C.

Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D.

Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E.

Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F.

Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G.

Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H.

Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

I.

Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 1.

2.8

Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A.

General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.



December 7, 2010

Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. 2.

Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed.

C.

Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes indicated with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as indicated. Drill bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings.

D.

Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports at exterior and wet locations.

E.

Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer at interior locations.

2.9

LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A.

Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.

B.

Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span but not less than 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.

D.

Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.

2.10 A.

SHELF ANGLES Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2.

Provide mitered and welded units at corners. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint.

B.

For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete.

C.

Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.

D.

Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.



2.11 A.

2.12

December 7, 2010

Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-inplace concrete. STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with not less than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A.

Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

B.

Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1.

Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction.

C.

Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim and interior miscellaneous steel trim, at wet locations.

D.

Prime interior miscellaneous steel trim, with zinc-rich primer.

2.13

METAL LADDERS AND STAIRS

A.

Delegated Design: Design metal stairs, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B.

Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

C.

Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft.. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in.. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/240 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less.

Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 1.

Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:


City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 a. b. c. 2.

December 7, 2010

Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

Infill of Guards: a.

Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft..

D.

Finish: Provide G-90 hot dipped galvanized finish for all metal stairs and ladder systems provided.

E.

Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. General: 1. 2. 3. 4.

2.14 A.

METAL BOLLARDS Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe 1/4-inch wall-thickness. 1.

B.

2.15 A.

2.16 A.

Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1. Space siderails 18 inches apart, unless otherwise indicated. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted brackets, made from same metal as ladder.

Fill bollards with concrete and finish top to shed water.

Imbed bollards in concrete a minimum depth of 24 inches. Concrete shall extend 8 inches minimum from the surface of the bollard. PIPE GUARDS Fabricate pipe guards from 3/8-inch- thick by 12-inch- wide steel plate, bent to fit flat against the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with 2-inch clearance between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 3/4-inch anchor bolts or screws. METAL DOWNSPOUT BOOTS Provide downspout boots made from cast aluminum, or welded aluminum plate in heights indicated with inlets of size and shape to suit downspouts. 1.

Outlet: Connect downspouts to the rainwater collection system in accordance with the civil engineering documents.



December 7, 2010

FINISHES, GENERAL

A.


B.

Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.18 A.

STEEL AND IRON FINISHES Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: 1. 2.

ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.

B.

Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:

C.

Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1.

2.19

Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A.

Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.

B.

Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.

C.

Dull Satin Finish: No. 6.

D.

When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

2.20

ALUMINUM FINISHES

A.

Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

B.

Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker complying with AAMA 611.



December 7, 2010



Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B.

Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C.

Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D.

Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.

E.

Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

F.

Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

3.2

INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A.

General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

B.

Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.

C.

Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns.


City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1. D.

Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.

Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article. 1.

3.3

December 7, 2010

Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and leveled.

INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS A.

Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3 inches above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.

B.

Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. 1.

3.4

Do not fill removable bollards with concrete.

INSTALLING PIPE GUARDS A.

3.5

Provide pipe guards at vertical pipes not protected by barriers. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A.

Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1.

Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B.

Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

C.

Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.




December 7, 2010

SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.


1.3

Framing with dimension lumber. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. Wood furring and grounds. Utility shelving. Plywood backing panels.

Division 31 Section "Termite Control" for site application.

DEFINITIONS A.

Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.

B.

Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension.

C.

Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

1.4

NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

ROUGH CARPENTRY

061000 - 1


2.

3.

4. 5. B. 1.5

December 7, 2010

Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature (HT) type, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.

Fastener Patterns: Full-size templates for fasteners in exposed framing. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.


WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A.

Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. 2. 3.

4.

Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

ROUGH CARPENTRY

061000 - 2


December 7, 2010

WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER A.

Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2. 1. 2.

Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

B.

Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C.

Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 1.

D.

For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece. Application: Treat all wood in contact with concrete or masonry, and as requested by the Architect. 1.

2.3

Wood backer boards for mounting of equipment.

FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A.

General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). 1. 2. 3.

B.

Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.

C.

Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed framing where indicated. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.

For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece.

Application: Treat all rough carpentry, unless otherwise indicated. 1.

Plywood backing panels.

ROUGH CARPENTRY

061000 - 3


December 7, 2010

PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A.

2.5

Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness. FASTENERS

A.

General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1.

Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.

B.

Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C.

Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

D.

Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E.

Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

F.

Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

G.

Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. 2.

2.6

Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.

METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A.


B.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

C.

Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, or comparable products by one of the following:

ROUGH CARPENTRY

061000 - 4

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

December 7, 2010

Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. Harlen Metal Products, Inc. KC Metals Products, Inc. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc. USP Structural Connectors.

D.

Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those of products of manufacturers listed. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.

E.

Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation. 1.

F.

sheet

complying

with

Use for interior locations.

Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 1.

2.7

steel

Use for exterior locations.


Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer; 1-inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.

B.

Adhesives for Gluing Furring to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. 1.

Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).



Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

ROUGH CARPENTRY

061000 - 5


December 7, 2010

B.

Metal Framing Anchors: instructions.

C.

Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1.

Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written

Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.

D.

Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated or as required by the authority having jurisdiction.

E.

Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

F.

Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. 2.

Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

G.

Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by the use of powder driven fasteners or screws.

H.

Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.

I.

For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered.

3.2

WOOD GROUND, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A.

Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B.

Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

ROUGH CARPENTRY

061000 - 6


December 7, 2010

PROTECTION A.

Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B.

Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPAregistered label.


ROUGH CARPENTRY

061000 - 7


December 7, 2010

SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.


1.3

Interior standing and running trim. Interior frames and jambs. Plastic-laminate cabinets. Wood cabinets for transparent finish

Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

DEFINITIONS A.

1.4

Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes.

B.

Product Data: For solid wood cabinets, high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate, solid-surfacing material, cabinet hardware and accessories, finishing materials and processes.

C.

Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

064023 - 1

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1. 2. 3. 4. D.

Show details full size. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers, and other items installed in architectural woodwork. Apply WI-certified compliance label to first page of Shop Drawings.

Samples for Initial Selection: 1. 2.

E.

December 7, 2010

Plastic laminates. PVC edge material.

Samples for Verification: 1.

Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with 1 sample applied to core material, and specified edge material applied to 1 edge.

2.

Corner pieces as follows: a. b.

3.

Cabinet-front frame joints between stiles and rails, as well as exposed end pieces, 18 inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep. Miter joints for standing trim.

Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.

F.

Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.

G.

Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: WI-certified compliance certificates.

1.5


Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance Shop is a licensee of WI's Certified Compliance Program.

B.

Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

C.

Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork.

D.

Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with WI's "Manual of Millwork" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1.

Provide WI-certified compliance certificates indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.


064023 - 2


December 7, 2010

The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with such selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.

E.

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Materials shall meet the flame spread rating requirements of NFPA 101 for Commercial Class A interior finishes. Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated or required by the authorities having jurisdiction, provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation.

F.

Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1.

G.

1.6

Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

1.7

Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.

Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B.

Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1.

Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.


064023 - 3


1.8

December 7, 2010

Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

B.

Hardware Coordination: The Construction Manager shall distribute copies of the approved hardware schedule specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" to fabricator of architectural woodwork. Casework manufacturer shall coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication provide a single key operation for locking casework.


WOODWORK FABRICATORS A.

2.2

Fabricators: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. MATERIALS

A.

General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of WI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. 2. 3.

C.

Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD,AWI premium grade , made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with exposed or semiexposed edges.

High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1.

Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative laminates by one of the following:


064023 - 4

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. 2.3

December 7, 2010

Abet Laminati, Inc. Arborite; Division of ITW Canada, Inc. Formica Corporation; [email protected] Lamin-Art, Inc. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div. Panolam Industries International Incorporated. Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Div. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.

FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A.

General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this Article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with firetest-response characteristics specified. 1. 2.

3.

2.4

Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced woodworking standard or that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A.

General: cabinets.

B.

Hinges: Institutional Heavy Duty Concealed European style fully adjustable.

C.

Wire Pulls: Back mounted, brushed stainless steel 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter 2-1/2 inches deep.

D.

Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.

E.

Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: Recessed metal standards.

F.

Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.

G.

Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. 1.

Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural

Heavy Duty Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-extension type; stainless steel ball-bearing slides.


064023 - 5


December 7, 2010

File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-200; for drawers more than 6 inches high or 24 inches wide. Keyboard Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for computer keyboard shelves. Trash Bin Slides: Grade 1HD-200; for trash bins not more than 20 inches high and 16 inches wide.

H.

Door Locks: Keyed to match casework of space.

I.

Drawer Locks: Keyed to match casework of space.

J.

Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 1-1/4-inch OD, black, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. 1.

K.

Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1.

L.

2.5

Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "OG series" by Doug Mockett & Company, Inc.. Millwork contractor shall coordinate grommet locations with furniture plans and indicate locations on shop drawings provided.

Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.

For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A.

2.6

Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. FABRICATION, GENERAL

A.

Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.

B.

Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.

C.

Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. indicated for the following: 1. 2. 3.

Ease edges to radius

Corners of Cabinets Members 3/4 Inch Thick or Less: 1/16 inch. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch.


064023 - 6


Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. 2.

E.

Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment.

Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1.

2.7

December 7, 2010

Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS A.

Grade: Standard.

B.

WI Construction Style: Reveal overlay on face frame.

C.

WI Construction Type: Type I, multiple self-supporting units rigidly joined together.

D.

WI Door and Drawer Front Style: Reveal overlay.

E.

Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch.

F.

Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4.

G.

Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. Edges: Grade HGS laminate matching in color, pattern, and finish Shelf Edges: PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.

Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 1.

Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS. a.

Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC edge banding,0.12 inch thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.


064023 - 7

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 b. 2. 3.

December 7, 2010

For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.

Drawer Sides and Backs: provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS in white or other neutral color selected by the Architect. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.

H.

Concealed Backs of Panels: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL.

I.

Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1.

As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range of products.

J.

Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops.

K.

Plastic Laminate Standard:

L.

1.

PL-1: Plastic Laminate a. Manufacturer: Formica b. Color: Natural Cherry c. Number: 7737-58 d. Style: Matte Finish

2.

PL-2: Plastic Laminate a. Manufacturer: Formica b. Color: Shoji Screen c. Number: 3696-58 d. Style: Matte Finish

3.

PL-3: Plastic Laminate a. Manufacturer: Formica b. Color: Dover White c. Number: 7197-58 d. Style: Matte Finish

Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated on the shop drawings and approved by the Architect. Comply with material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1. 2.

Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges of materials and configuration indicated in the shop drawings and approved by the Architect.. Fabricate tops with loose backsplashes for field application.


064023 - 8


December 7, 2010

SHOP FINISHING A.

Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.

B.

General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.


PREPARATION A.

3.2

Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. INSTALLATION

A.

Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.

B.

Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C.

Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

D.

Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E.

Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening of cabinet units to the walls and to each other. Install finish caps matching cabinet interior.

F.

Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. 2. 3.

Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. Maintain laminate finish patterns as approved in shop drawings. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood blocking, or hanging.


064023 - 9

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 G.

Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1.

2. 3. 4. H.

3.3

December 7, 2010

Align adjacent countertop material and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. Secure backsplashes to walls with adhesive. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A.

Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B.

Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C.

Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.



064023 - 10


December 7, 2010

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2

RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.

This Section includes the following: 1. Cavity-wall insulation. 2. Concealed building insulation. 3. Exposed building insulation. 4. Vapor retarders. 5. Sound attenuation insulation.

B.

Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

1.3 A.

1.4 A.

Division 04 Section "Reinforced Masonry" for insulation installed in cavity walls and masonry cells. Division 07 Section "Hot Fluid-Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing" for insulation and insulated drainage panels installed with waterproofing. Division 07 Section "Built-up Asphalt Roofing for insulation specified as part of roofing construction. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for insulation installed as part of a perimeter fire-resistive joint system. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for installation in metal-framed assemblies of insulation specified by referencing this Section. Division 21 Section "Fire-Suppression Systems Insulation." Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation." Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."

DEFINITIONS Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass fibers; produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts (flat-cut lengths) or rolls. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Rating: Provide glass, slag-wool-fiber/rock-wool-fiber insulation where indicated in ceilings whose test performance is rated as follows determined by testing identical products per "Erosion

THERMAL INSULATION

072100 - 1


December 7, 2010

Test" and "Mold Growth and Humidity Test" described in UL 181, or on comparable tests from another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.

2.

1.5

Erosion Test Results: Insulation shows no visible evidence of cracking, flaking, peeling, or delamination of interior surface of duct assembly, after testing for 4 hours at 2500-fpm air velocity. Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no evidence of mold growth, delamination, or other deterioration due to the effects of high humidity, after inoculation with Chaetomium globosium on all surfaces and storing for 60 days at 100 percent relative humidity in the dark.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

Samples for Verification: Full-size units for each type of exposed insulation indicated.

C.

Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for insulation products.

D.

Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation.

1.6


ANSI/UL 1256-02, Standard for Fire Test of Roof Deck Constructions.

B. ASTM C209-98, Standard Test Methods for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board. C. ASTM C518-04, Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. D. ASTM C920-05, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. E. ASTM C1289-05, Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board. F.

ASTM C1363-05, Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Materials and Envelope Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus.

G. ASTM D1621-04a, Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. H. ASTM D1622-03, Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics.

THERMAL INSULATION

072100 - 2


December 7, 2010

I.

ASTM E84-05, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

J.

ASTM E96/E96M-05, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

K. FM 4880-1994, Approval Standard - Wall-Ceiling Construction Metal-faced Class 1 Rated to Max 30 ft (9.1 m) High. L. Federal Specification HH-I-1972/1, Insulation Board, Thermal, Polyurethane or Polyisocyanurate, Faced with Aluminum Foil on Both Sides of the Foam. M. NFPA 285-2006, Standard Method of Test for the Evaluation of Flammability Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components Using the Intermediate-Scale, Multistory Test Apparatus. N. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer. O. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136

1.7

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B.

Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. 2.

Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time.

THERMAL INSULATION

072100 - 3


December 7, 2010

Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.


MANUFACTURERS 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

CertainTeed Corporation. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. Johns Manville. Knauf Fiber Glass. Owens Corning.

B. 2.2

FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A. Foil Faced Extruded- Rigid Foam Board Insulation: closed cell polyisocyanurate foam board with glass fiber reinforced core, to ASTM C1289, Type I, Class 2 and Fed. Spec. HH-I, Class 2; meeting the following criteria: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Thermal Resistance (ASTM C1363 @ 75 deg. F) (ASTM C518 @ 75 deg. F)]: R-6.5 per 1 inch of thickness (RSI 1.14 per 25 mm of thickness). Density (ASTM D1622): nominal 2.0 pcf. Compressive Strength (ASTM D1621): minimum 25 psi Board Sizes: 48 inches wide, 144 inches long. Thickness: As required to achieve specified “R” value. Board Edges: Square. Faces: 1.0 mil thick aluminum foil facer, both sides.

Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. 9. 2.4 A.

DiversiFoam Products. Dow Chemical Company. Owens Corning. Pactiv Building Products Division.

Type V, 3.00 lb/cu. ft.

POLYSTYRENE INSULATION BOARD Expanded Polystyrene Insulation Board: Expanded polystyrene (EPS) insulation board having a nominal density of 1 pcf (16 kg/m3) defined as Type I by ASTM C 578 and containing approximately 3% open area. Each bundle of board shall be delivered to the job site with clear identification as to manufacturer and shall carry the Factory Mutual approval label and the Underwriter’s Laboratories Classified label on each bundle.

THERMAL INSULATION

072100 - 4


December 7, 2010

Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3.

Dow Chemical Company Owens Corning. Siplast

2.5 SLAG-WOOL-FIBER/ROCK-WOOL-FIBER BOARD INSULATION A.

Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3.

B.

Unfaced, Slag-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, maximum flamespread and smoke-developed indexes of 15 and 0, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics; and of the following nominal density and thermal resistivity: 1. 2.

2.6

Fibrex Insulations Inc. Owens Corning. Thermafiber.

Nominal density of 6 lb/cu. ft., Type II, thermal resistivity of 4.16 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F. Fiber Color: Regular color, unless otherwise indicated.

GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A.

Manufacturers: 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

CertainTeed Corporation. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. Johns Manville. Knauf Fiber Glass. Owens Corning.

B.

Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

C.

Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-kraft at areas subject to condensation, vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face. In shop area use vinyl faced batt insulation with plywood protection installed in accordance with the contract documents.

D.

Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated: 1.

3-1/2 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 11 deg F x h x sq. ft. Btu at 75 deg F 13 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.

THERMAL INSULATION

072100 - 5


December 7, 2010

2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm. B.

Foil-Polyester-Film Vapor Retarders: 2 layers of 0.5-mil- thick polyester film laminated to an inner layer of 1-mil- thick aluminum foil, with maximum water-vapor transmission rate in flat condition of 0.0 g/h x sq. m and with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5. 1.

Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Zero Perm" by Alumiseal Corporation.

A.

Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.

B.

Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and with demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated.

2.8 AUXILIARY INSULATING A.

Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by insulation manufacturers for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor-retarder facings.

B.

Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.

2.9 INSULATION A.

Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place; and complying with the following requirements: 1.

Products: a. b. c.

2. 3. B.

AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers. Eckel Industries of Canada; Stic-Klip Type N Fasteners. Gemco; Spindle Type.

Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. Spindle: Copper-coated, low carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

Adhesively Attached, Angle-Shaped, Spindle-Type Anchors: Angle welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place; and complying with the following requirements:

THERMAL INSULATION

072100 - 6


C.

1.

Products: Gemco; Insulation Hangers.

2.

Angle: Formed from 0.030-inch- thick, perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet with each leg 2 inches square.

3.

Spindle: Copper-coated, low carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick galvanized steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter. 1.

D.

December 7, 2010

Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in the following locations:

Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates. 1.

Products: a. b. c.

AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive. Eckel Industries of Canada; Stic-Klip Type S Adhesive. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive.


EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance. 1.

3.2


PREPARATION A.

3.3

Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A.

Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated.

B.

Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow.

THERMAL INSULATION

072100 - 7


December 7, 2010

C.

Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D.

Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.

E.

For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.4

INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A.

Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B.

Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, foil tape or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

C.

Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder exterior of construction assembly, unless otherwise indicated. 1.

D.

Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1.

2. 3. 4.

E.

Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.

Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.

Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation anchors as follows: 1.

Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to

THERMAL INSULATION

072100 - 8


2. 3.

4.

December 7, 2010

insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application indicated. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between concrete substrate and insulation. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to tips of spindles.

F.

Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft..

G.

Stuff Unfaced, Slag-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Blanket Insulation fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown or required to maintain fire resistive rating. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume

3.5

INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION Install 3-inch- thick, unfaced glass or slag-wool-fiber/rock-wool-fiber blanket insulation over suspended ceilings at partitions in a width that extends insulation 48 inches on either side of partition.

3.6

INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A.

General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.

B.

Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints.

C.

Before installing vapor retarder, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.

D.

Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.

E.

Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder.

THERMAL INSULATION

072100 - 9


3.7

December 7, 2010

Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. PROTECTION

A.

3.8

Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. B. C. D.

Insulation Type Molded polystyrene insulation board insulation. Insulation Type Unfaced, glass-fiber blanket insulation. Insulation Type Faced, glass-fiber blanket insulation. Insulation Type Unfaced, slag-wool-fiber/rock-wool-fiber blanket insulation.


THERMAL INSULATION

072100 - 10


December 7, 2010

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

Related Sections: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.3

Silicone joint sealants. Urethane joint sealants. Latex joint sealants. Preformed joint sealants.

Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for sealing joints in fire-resistancerated construction. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints. Division 09 Section "Tiling" for sealing tile joints. Division 09 Section "Acoustical Tile Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters with acoustical sealant.

PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A.

Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1.

2.

B.

Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.

Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows: 1.

Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

JOINT SEALANTS

079200 - 1


Conduct field tests for each application indicated below: a.

3. 4.

5.

1.4

December 7, 2010

Each kind of sealant and joint substrate indicated.

Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B.

Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C.

Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

D.

Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. Joint-sealant formulation. Joint-sealant color.

E.

Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

F.

Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.

G.

Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: For each sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program.

H.

Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.

I.

Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: indicating the following: 1.

From sealant manufacturer,

Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

JOINT SEALANTS

079200 - 2


December 7, 2010

Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

J.

Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article.

K.

Field-Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.

L.

Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

1.5


Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B.

Source Limitations: manufacturer.

C.

Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency. 1. 2.

Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single

Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. Test according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness.

D.

Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.

E.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.6


Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. 2. 3. 4.

When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. When joint substrates are wet. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.

JOINT SEALANTS

079200 - 3


December 7, 2010

WARRANTY A.

Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1.

B.

Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1.

C.

Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1.

2. 3. 4.

Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.


MATERIALS, GENERAL A.

Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B.

Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

C.

Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2

SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A.

Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT. 1.

ASTM C 920, Type S,

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products:

JOINT SEALANTS

079200 - 4

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 a. b. c. d. e. f. 2.3

December 7, 2010

Dow Corning Corporation; 790. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 290. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.

URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A.

Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: Class 100/50, for Use NT. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products: a. b.

2.4

ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,

Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 15LM. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 921.

LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A.

Latex Joint Sealant: Grade NF. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products: a. b. c. d. e. f.

2.5

Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP,

BASF Building Systems; Sonolac. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex 600. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.

PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS A.

Preformed Silicone Joint Sealants: Manufacturer's standard sealant consisting of precured lowmodulus silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit joint widths indicated, combined with a neutral-curing silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products: a. b. c. d.

JOINT SEALANTS

Dow Corning Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; UltraSpan US1100. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Silbridge 300. Pecora Corporation; Sil-Span.

079200 - 5

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 e. B.

Sealex, Inc.; ImmerBond.

Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-cell foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 10 lb/cu. ft. and impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products: a. b. c. d. e.

2.6

December 7, 2010

Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals; Polytite Standard. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.; Emseal 25V. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Polyseal. Schul International, Inc.; Sealtite. Willseal USA, LLC; Willseal 150.

JOINT SEALANT BACKING A.

General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B.

Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C.

Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

2.7


Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B.

Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C.

Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

JOINT SEALANTS

079200 - 6


December 7, 2010


EXAMINATION A.

Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting jointsealant performance.

B.


3.2

PREPARATION A.

Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1.

2.

Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. b. c. d.

3. 4.

Concrete. Masonry. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. Exterior insulation and finish systems.

Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. b. c. d.

Metal. Glass. Porcelain enamel. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B.

Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of jointsealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C.

Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or

JOINT SEALANTS

079200 - 7


December 7, 2010

by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3

INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A.

General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B.

Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C.

Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. 2. 3.

Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.

D.

Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E.

Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. 2. 3.

F.

Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193. a.

G.

Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.

Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements:

JOINT SEALANTS

079200 - 8


3.

4.

December 7, 2010

Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with preformed silicone-sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering a bonding area of not less than 3/8 inch. Hold edge of sealant bead 1/4 inch inside masking tape. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in vertical joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut silicone extrusion with a razor knife.

H.

Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping. Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

I.

Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.4


Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1.

Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows: a.

2.

Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. a.

3.

Perform 3 tests at locations directed by the Architect for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.

For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a. b. c.

JOINT SEALANTS

Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind

079200 - 9


December 7, 2010

of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria. 4.

5.

B.

3.5

Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.

Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. CLEANING

A.

3.6

Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. PROTECTION

A.

Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.


JOINT SEALANTS

079200 - 10


December 7, 2010

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

Section Includes: 1.

B.

Related Sections: 1. 2. 3.

1.3

Custom hollow metal doors and frames.

Division 08 Section "Door Hardware” Division 09 Sections "Exterior Painting" and "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow metal doors and frames. Division 26 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for door controls and operators.

DEFINITIONS A.

Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.

B.

Custom Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/NAAMMHMMA 861.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, and finishes.

B.

Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Elevations of each door design. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. Details of each different wall opening condition.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

081113 - 1


Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. Details of accessories. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

C.

Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D.

Samples for Verification: 1.

For the following items, prepare samples about 12 by 12 inches to demonstrate compliance with requirements for quality of materials and construction: a.

b. E.

December 7, 2010

Doors: Show vertical-edge, top, and bottom construction; core construction; and hinge and other applied hardware reinforcement. Include separate section showing glazing if applicable. Frames: Show profile, corner joint, floor and wall anchors, and silencers. Include separate section showing fixed hollow metal panels and glazing if applicable.

Other Action Submittals: 1.

Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.

F.

Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies.

G.

Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly.

1.5


Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

B.

Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.6


Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic. 1.

B.

Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.

Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.


081113 - 2


Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 1.

1.7

December 7, 2010

Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.


1.8

Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. COORDINATION

A.

Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


MANUFACTURERS A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or an approved equal: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

2.2

Amweld Building Products, LLC. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc. Next Door Company Inc. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company. Habersham Metal Products Company. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames. Kewanee Corporation (The). Mesker Door Inc. Pioneer Industries, Inc. Security Metal Products Corp. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. Windsor Republic Doors.

MATERIALS A.

Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B.

Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.


081113 - 3


1.

December 7, 2010

For anchors built into masonry walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

C.

Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

D.

Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

E.

Glazing: Comply with code requirements for location installed.

F.

Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.3

CUSTOM HOLLOW METAL DOORS A.

General: Provide doors not less than 1-3/4 inches thick, of seamless hollow construction unless otherwise indicated. Construct doors with smooth surfaces without visible joints or seams on exposed faces. Comply with ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861.

B.

Exterior Door Face Sheets: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum 0.0598 inch thick.

C.

Interior Door Face Sheets: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum 0.0478 inch thick.

D.

Core Construction: Provide thermal-resistance-rated cores for all exterior doors and interior doors where indicated. 1.

Steel-Stiffened Core: 0.026-inch- thick, steel vertical stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with vertical webs spaced not more than 6 inches apart, spot welded to face sheets a maximum of 5 inches o.c. Spaces filled between stiffeners with mineral-fiber insulation.

E.

Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled 1/8 inch in 2 inches.

F.

Vertical Edges for Double-Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with 2-1/8-inch radius.

G.

Top and Bottom Channels: Closed with continuous channels, minimum 0.0598 inch thick, of same material as face sheets and spot welded to both face sheets.

H.

Hardware Reinforcement: Install reinforcement for all hardware in accordance with the owner’s requirements. Provide 3/8” backing plate at hinges, closer and hardware locations of same material as door.


081113 - 4


December 7, 2010

CUSTOM HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A.

General: Fabricate frames of construction indicated. Close contact edges of corner joints tight with faces mitered and stops butted or mitered. Continuously weld faces and soffits and finish faces smooth. Comply with ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861. 1. 2. 3.

Door Frames for Openings 48 Inches Wide or Less: Fabricated from 0.0598-inch- thick steel sheet. Door Frames for Openings More Than 48 Inches Wide: Fabricated from 0.0747-inchthick steel sheet. Sidelight and Transom Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent door frame.

B.

Exterior Frames: Minimum .0598 –inch-thick hot dipped galvanized steel with mitered and welded corners

C.

Interior Frames: Minimum .0478–inch-thick hot dipped galvanized steel with mitered and welded corners

D.

Hardware Reinforcement: Install reinforcement for all hardware in accordance with the owner’s requirements. Provide 3/8” backing plate at hinges, closer and hardware locations of same material as door.

E.

Head Reinforcement: Provide minimum 0.1046-inch- thick, steel channel or angle stiffener for opening widths more than 48 inches.

2.5

FRAME ANCHORS A.

Jamb Anchors: 1. Steel Frame-Wall Type: Designed to engage steel member, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.0747 inch thick.

B.

Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.0747 thick, and as follows: 1.

2.6

Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

STOPS AND MOLDINGS A.

Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.0598 thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.

B.

Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated.


081113 - 5


2.7

December 7, 2010

Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.0598 thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed. ACCESSORIES

A. 2.8

Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick. FABRICATION

A.

Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. All hollow metal doors shall be “Extra Heavy Duty Seamless Construction”. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B.

Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in ANSI/NAAMMHMMA 861.

C.

Hollow Metal Doors: 1. 2.

D.

Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.

Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. 2.

3. 4. 5. 6.

Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a.

Steel-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.


081113 - 6

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 2) 7.

December 7, 2010

Two anchors per head for frames above mounted in steel frammimg.

Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. b.

Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

E.

Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from cold rolled steel sheet.

F.

Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 1. 2.

3. 4. G.

Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

2.9

Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. Reinforce doors and frames with 3/8” backing plate at hinges, closer and hardware locations of same material as door to receive mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections.

Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated.

STEEL FINISHES A.

Prime Finish: treating. 1.

Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pre-

Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.


081113 - 7

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 B. 2.10

December 7, 2010

Field Applied Finishes: Apply rust preventative paint to all hollow metal doors. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.


EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B.

Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

C.

For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

D.


3.2

PREPARATION A.

Do not remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory until after units are plumbed and set.

B.

Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: 1. 2. 3. 4.

C.

3.3

Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor.

Drill and tap doors and frames to receive mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. Fasteners for mounting of hardware shall be ¼ - 20; 3/4/” in length minimum. INSTALLATION

A.

General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.


081113 - 8


Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. 1.

Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. b. c. d. e. f.

2. 3.

4.

b. c. d.

Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1.

Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. b. c. d.

D.

At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout.

Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a.

C.

December 7, 2010

Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): 3/8 inch.

Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.


081113 - 9


3.4

December 7, 2010

Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.


Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B.

Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.

C.

Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D.

Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.



081113 - 10


December 7, 2010

SECTION 083323 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.


1.3

Insulated service doors.


Delegated Design: Design overhead coiling doors, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified Florida registered professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated for the project.

B.

Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Exterior overhead coiling doors shall withstand the wind loads, the effects of gravity loads, and loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE 7. 1.

Wind Loads: Installation shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of ASCE 7-05 a. b. c.

2.

Basic Wind Speed: 140mph. Importance Factor: 1.0 Exposure Category: B.

Deflection Limits: Design overhead coiling doors to withstand design wind load without evidencing permanent deformation or disengagement of door components.

C.

Operability under Wind Load: Design overhead coiling doors to remain operable under ASCE 7 requirements and out lined in the structural performance requirements for the project.

D.

Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance Performance: Provide impact-protective overhead coiling doors that pass missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests when tested according to the requirements for large missile impact. 1.

Large Missile Test: For overhead coiling doors located within 30 feet of grade.

OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

083323 - 1


December 7, 2010

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. Include the following: 1. 2.

B.

Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.

2. C.

Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.

Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

E.

Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Show locations of replaceable fusible links.

Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's finish charts showing full range of colors and textures available for units with factory-applied finishes. 1.

D.

Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles for slats, and finishes. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished accessories.

Curtain Slats: 6 inches long. Bottom Bar: 6 inches long. Guides: 6 inches long. Brackets: 6 inches square. Hood: 6 inches square.

Delegated-Design Submittal: For overhead coiling doors indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. 2.

Detail fabrication and assembly of wind restraints. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs.

F.

Qualification Data For qualified Installer: Installer shall be approved by the manufacturer and have a minimum of 5 years experience with similar installations.

G.

Maintenance Data: For overhead coiling doors to include in maintenance manuals.


083323 - 2


December 7, 2010


Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B.

Source Limitations: manufacturer. 1.

C.

Obtain overhead coiling doors from single source from single

Obtain operators from overhead coiling door manufacturer.

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and applicable local code.


DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A.

Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling-door curtain of interlocking metal slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows: 1.

2.

3. 4.

Aluminum Door Curtain Slats: 0.0478-inch- thick aluminum sheet complying with ASTM B 209, of alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated minimum or as required to meet the requirements of the project. Insulation: Fill slats for insulated doors with manufacturer's standard thermal insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within slat faces. Metal Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match metal of exterior curtain-slat face. Gasket Seal: Provide insulated slats with manufacturer's standard interior-to-exterior thermal break or with continuous gaskets between slats.

B.

Endlocks and Windlocks for Service Doors: Provide locks on not less than alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement constructed of the same material as the door they are installed in.

C.

Endlocks for Counter Doors: Manufacturer's standard locks on not less than alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement constructed of the same material as the door they are installed in.

D.

Bottom Bar for Service Doors: Manufacturer's standard continuous channel or tubular shape, fabricated from manufacturer's standard stainless steel, or aluminum extrusions to match curtain slats and finish.


083323 - 3


December 7, 2010

E.

Bottom Bar for Counter Doors: Manufacturer's standard continuous channel or tubular shape, fabricated from manufacturer's standard aluminum extrusions to match curtain slats and finish.

F.

Astragal for Interior Doors: Equip each door bottom bar with a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene as a cushion bumper.

G.

Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain, and a continuous bar for holding windlocks.

2.2

HOOD A.

General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging. 1.

2.3

Aluminum: 0.0478-inch- thick aluminum sheet complying with ASTM B 209, of alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated minimum or as required to meet the requirements of the project.

LOCKING DEVICES A.

Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.

B.

Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock.

2.4

CURTAIN ACCESSORIES A.

Weatherseals: Equip each exterior door with weather-stripping gaskets fitted to entire perimeter of door for a weathertight installation, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2.

At door head, use 1/8-inch- thick, replaceable, continuous sheet secured to inside of hood. At door jambs, use replaceable, adjustable, continuous, flexible, 1/8-inch- thick seals of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene.


083323 - 4


December 7, 2010

COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM A.

2.6

General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or selflubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. DOOR ASSEMBLY

A.

Insulated Service and Insulated Counter Door: Overhead coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats. 1.

Manufacturers: Basis of Design: Alpine Redi-Storm. - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r.

ACME Rolling Doors. Alpine Overhead Doors, Inc. AlumaTek, Inc. C.H.I. Overhead Doors. City-Gates. Cookson Company. Cornell Iron Works, Inc. Dynamic Closures Corp. Lawrence Roll-Up Doors, Inc. Mahon Door Corporation. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc. Metro Door. Overhead Door Corporation. QMI Security Solutions. Raynor. Southwestern Steel Rolling Door Co. Wayne-Dalton Corp. Windsor Door.

B.

Operation Cycles: Not less than 20,000.

C.

STC Rating: Not less than 26.

D.

Curtain R-Value: 6.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu.

E.

Door Curtain Material: Aluminum units.

F.

Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 2-5/8-inch center-to-center height. 1. Insulated-Slat Interior Facing: Metal.


083323 - 5


December 7, 2010

G.

Curtain Jamb Guides: Stainless steel or Aluminum with exposed finish matching curtain slats. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact and to minimize operational noise.

H.

Hood: Match curtain material and finish. 1. 2.

I.

Shape: Round. Mounting: Face of wall.

Locking Devices: Equip door with slide bolt for padlock and chain lock keeper. 1.

Locking Device Assembly: Both jamb sides locking bars, operable from inside.

J.

Manual Door Operator: Chain-hoist operator.

K.

Door Finish: 1. 2.

2.7

Aluminum Finish: Powder-Coated Finish custom color as selected by Architect to match existing buildings. Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match finish of exterior curtain-slat face for material and finish.

GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A.


B.

Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.8


Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, application, and baking. Color to be selected by the Architect from custom colors to match the existing adjacent buildings.


EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B.



083323 - 6


December 7, 2010

INSTALLATION A.

Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.

B.

Install overhead coiling doors, hoods, and operators at the mounting locations indicated for each door.

C.

Accessibility: Install overhead coiling doors operators along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.

3.3

STARTUP SERVICE A.

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. 2.

3.4

Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. Test and adjust operators and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning equipment.

ADJUSTING A.

Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion.

B.

Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.

C.

Adjust seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter.

3.5

DEMONSTRATION A.

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors.



083323 - 7


December 7, 2010

SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes fixed aluminum-framed windows for exterior locations.

B.


1.3

Division 08 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for coordinating finish among aluminum fenestration units. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for wind load glazing requirements for aluminum windows, factory- or site-glazed units. Division 08 Section “Overhead Coiling Doors and Shutters” for coordination of window and shutter requirements.

DEFINITIONS A.

Performance class designations according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

AW: Architectural. HC: Heavy Commercial. C: Commercial. LC: Light Commercial. R: Residential.

Performance grade number according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS: 1.

Design pressure number in pounds force per square foot used to determine the structural test pressure and water test pressure.

C.

Structural Test Pressure: For uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the design pressure.

D.

Minimum Test Size: Smallest size permitted for performance class (gateway test size). Products must be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size to comply with requirements for performance class.

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

085113 - 1


1.4

December 7, 2010


General: Provide aluminum windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified:

B.

Structural Performance: Provide aluminum windows capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test:

A.

Design Wind Loads: ASCE 7-02 a. b. c.

Basic Wind Speed: 146 mph. Importance Factor: 1.0. Exposure Category: C.

2.

Deflection: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less than 1

3.

L/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch, whichever is less, at design pressure based on testing performed according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Deflection Test or structural computations.

B.

Windborne-Debris Resistance: Windborne debris resistance required by code shall be provided as a requirement of Division 08 Section “Overhead Coiling Doors and Shutters”; Aluminum Window Units shall be constructed to withstand the project requirements for wind pressures, and water infiltration.

C.

Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1.

1.5

Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions for each type of aluminum window indicated. Aluminum window attachment performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data shall be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer registered in the State of Florida and responsible for their preparation.

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

085113 - 2


Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work, operational clearances, installation details, and the following:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. C.

Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners. Joinery details. Expansion provisions. Flashing and drainage details. Weather-stripping details. Thermal-break details. Glazing details.

Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. 1.

D.

December 7, 2010

Include similar Samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection.

Samples for Verification: For aluminum windows and components required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. 2.

Main Framing Member: 12-inch- long, full-size sections of extrusions with factoryapplied color finish. Window Corner Fabrication: 12-by-12-inch- long, full-size window corner including full-size sections of extrusions with factory-applied color finish, weather stripping, and glazing.

E.

Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

F.

Qualification Data: For Installer.

G.

Field quality-control test reports.

H.

Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed within the last four years by a qualified testing agency for each type, class, grade, and size of aluminum window. Test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted.

I.

Maintenance Data: For finishes, include in maintenance manuals.

J.

Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

1.6


Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to aluminum window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. 1.

Installer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility.

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

085113 - 3


December 7, 2010

Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for aluminum windows, including Shop Drawings, based on testing, field conditions and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this project.

B.

Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations.

C.

Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows through one source from a single manufacturer.

D.

Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aluminum windows' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.

E.

Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of aluminum windows and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements." Do not modify size and dimensional requirements. 1.

Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

F.

Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, "North American Fenestration Standard Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass Doors," for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if indicated.

G.

Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

H.

Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

I.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to aluminum windows including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2.

Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. Review and discuss the finishing of aluminum windows that is required to be coordinated with the finishing of other aluminum work for color and finish matching.

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

085113 - 4


4. 5.

1.7

December 7, 2010

Review, discuss, and coordinate the interrelationship of aluminum windows with other exterior wall components. Include provisions for structural anchorage, glazing, flashing, weeping, sealants, and protection of finishes. Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and weathertight exterior building envelope. Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by other trades.


Field Measurements: Verify aluminum window openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.

1.8

Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating aluminum windows without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

WARRANTY A.

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.

Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e.

2.

Failure to meet performance requirements. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. Deterioration of metals, other materials, and metal finishes beyond normal weathering. Failure of insulating glass.

Warranty Period: a. b. c.

Window: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. Glazing: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. Metal Finish: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

085113 - 5


December 7, 2010


MANUFACTURERS A.


B.


2.2

1. 2.

Arch Aluminum and Glass Co. Inc. PGT Industries.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

Custom Window Company. DeSCo Windows. EFCO Corporation. EXTECH Exterior Technologies, Inc. Fleetwood Aluminum Products, Inc. Gerkin Windows and Doors. Graham Architectural Products Corp. Kawneer; an Alcoa Company. Mannix; a division of Interstate Window Corp. Peerless Products Inc. Thermal Windows, Inc. TRACO. Wausau Window and Wall Systems. Winco Window Company. Window Technologies, Inc.; Century Manufacturing, Inc. YKK AP America Inc.

MATERIALS A.

Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum window manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 22,000-psi ultimate tensile strength, not less than 16,000-psi minimum yield strength, and not less than 0.062-inch thickness at any location for the main frame and sash members.

B.

Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. 1.

Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw anchor into aluminum less than 0.125 inch thick, reinforce interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard, noncorrosive, pressed-in, splined grommet nuts.

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

085113 - 6


December 7, 2010

C.

Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.

D.

Reinforcing Members: Reinforce window units with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel, complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.

E.

Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated windows, provide window manufacturer's standard, permanently elastic, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating type recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint size and movement.

2.3

WINDOW A.

Window Type: Fixed 1.

AAMA/WDMA Performance Requirements: Provide aluminum windows of performance indicated that comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS; and the project wind pressure requirements.

2.

Performance Class: HC

3.

Condensation-Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 52.

4.

Thermal Transmittance: Provide aluminum windows with a whole-window, U-factor maximum indicated at 15-mph exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested according to AAMA 1503, ASTM E 1423. a. U-Factor: 0.40 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F or less.

5.

Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide aluminum windows with a whole-window SHGC maximum of 0.40, determined according to NFRC 200 procedures.

6.

Sound Transmission Class (STC): Provide glazed windows rated for not less than 30 STC when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 413.

7.

Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Air Infiltration Test. a. Maximum Rate: 0.1 cfm/sq. ft. of area at an inward test pressure of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

085113 - 7


2.4

December 7, 2010

8.

Water Resistance: No water leakage as defined in AAMA/WDMA referenced test methods at a water test pressure equaling that indicated, when tested according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Water Resistance Test. a. Test Pressure: 20 percent of positive design pressure, but not more than 15 lbf/sq. ft.

9.

Life-Cycle Testing: Test according AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.

10.

Operating Force and Auxiliary (Durability) Tests: Comply AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS for operating window types indicated.

to

AAMA 910

and

comply

with

with

GLAZING A.

2.5

Glass : 1/2” minimum or as required to comply with the project wind load requirements; grey tinted low “E” glass complying with Division 08 Section "Glazing."

FABRICATION A.

Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows.

B.

Fabricate aluminum windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing.

C.

Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate aluminum windows with an integral, concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier; located between exterior materials and window members exposed on interior side; in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact.

1.

2. 3.

Provide thermal-break construction that has been in use for not less than three years and has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and condensation and to show adequate strength and security of glass retention. Provide thermal barriers tested according to AAMA 505; determine the allowable design shear flow per the appendix in AAMA 505. Provide hardware with low conductivity or nonmetallic material for hardware bridging thermal breaks at frame or vent sash.

D.

Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior.

E.

Provide water-shed members above lines of natural water penetration.

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

085113 - 8


December 7, 2010

F.

Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units.

G.

Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze aluminum windows in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.

H.

Glazing Stops: Provide snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 08 Section "Glazing" and glazing system indicated.

2.6



B.


C.

Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.7


Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A42/A44 Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker complying with AAMA 611.

1.

Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities.

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

085113 - 9


December 7, 2010


EXAMINATION A.

Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight window installation. 1. 2. 3.

3.2

Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction debris. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

INSTALLATION A.

Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components.

B.

Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction.

C.

Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction.

D.

Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within windows to the exterior.

E.

Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.

3.3


Testing Agency: Owner will as required engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B.

Remove and replace noncomplying aluminum window and retest as specified above.

C.

Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

ALUMINUM WINDOWS

085113 - 10


3.4

December 7, 2010

ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A.

Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

B.

Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

C.

Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.

D.

Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.5

DEMONSTRATION A.

Not required for fixed windows.


ALUMINUM WINDOWS

085113 - 11


December 7, 2010

SECTION 087100- DOOR HARDWARE

PART I - GENERAL 1.01

WORK INCLUDED A. The work in this section shall include furnishing of all items of finish hardware as hereinafter

specified or obviously necessary to complete the building, except those items that are specifically excluded from this section of the specification.

1.02

RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

1.03

DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish labor and material to complete hardware work indicated, as specified herein, or as may be required by actual conditions at building. B. Include all necessary screws, bolts, expansion shields, other devices, if necessary, as required for proper hardware application. The hardware supplier shall assume all responsibility for correct quantities. C. Hardware shall meet the requirements of Federal, State and Local codes having jurisdiction over this project, notwithstanding any real or apparent conflict therewith in these specifications. E. Fasteners: 1. Hardware as furnished shall conform to published templates generally prepared for machine screw installation. 2. Furnish each item complete with all screws required for installation. Typically, all exposed screws installation. 3. Insofar as practical, furnished concealed type fasteners for hardware units that have exposed screws shall be furnished with Phillips flat head screws, finished to match adjacent hardware. 4. Door closers and exit devices to be installed with closed head through bolts (sex bolts). F. Exterior openings 1. Provide hardware for hurricane openings in compliance with local jurisdiction. This requirement takes precedence over other requirements for such hardware. Provide only hardware that has been tested and listed by local authority for the types and sizes of doors DOOR HARDWARE

087100 - 1


December 7, 2010

required, and complies with the requirements of the door and door frame. Coordinate Section Finish Hardware with the Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.

1.04

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The supplier to be a directly franchised distributor of the products to be furnished and have in their employ an AHC (Architectural Hardware Consultant). This person is to be available for consultation to the architect, owner and the general contractor at reasonable times during the course of work. B. The finish hardware supplier shall prepare and submit to the architect six (6) copies of a complete schedule identifying each door and each set number, following the numbering system and not creating any separate system himself. He shall submit the schedule for review, make corrections as directed and resubmit the corrected schedule for final approval. Approval of schedule will not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for furnishing all necessary hardware, including the responsibility for furnishing correct quantities. C. No manufacturing orders shall be placed until detailed schedule has been submitted to the architect and written approval received. D. After hardware schedule has been approved, furnish templates required by manufacturing contractors for making proper provisions in their work for accurate fitting, finishing hardware setting. Furnish templates in ample time to facilitate progress of work. E. Hardware supplier shall have an office and warehouse facilities to accommodate the materials used on this project. The supplier must be an authorized distributor of the products specified. F. The hardware manufactures are to supply both a pre-installation class as well as a postinstallation walk-thru. This is to insure proper installation and provide for any adjustments or replacements of hardware as required.

1.05

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Wrap, protect finishing hardware items for shipment. Deliver to manufacturing contractors

hardware items required by them for their application; deliver balance of hardware to job; store in designated location. Each item shall be clearly marked with its intended location. 1.06

WARRANTY A. The material furnished shall be warranted for one year after installation or longer as the

individual manufacturer’s warranty permits. B. The manufacturer against failure due to defective materials and workmanship shall warrant

overhead door closers in writing for a period of ten (10) years. Commencing on the Date of Final Completion and Acceptance, and in the event of failure, the manufacture is to promptly repair or replace the defective with no additional cost to the Owner.

PART II - PRODUCTS

DOOR HARDWARE

087100 - 2


December 7, 2010

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. To the greatest extent possible, obtain each kind of hardware from only one manufacturer. B. All numbers and symbols used herein have been taken from the current catalogues of the following manufacturers. PRODUCT

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

ACCEPTABLE SUBSTITUTE

1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

Ives Schlage Von Duprin LCN Ives

Hager, Stanley, Bommer Falcon Falcon Falcon Rockwood, G-J

Ives National Guard Ives Lund

Rockwood, Quality Pemko, Zero GJ, Rockwood Key Control

6) 7) 8) 9)

Hinges Locks & Latches Exit Devices Door Closers Wall Stops/Floor Stops, Flushbolts Kick Plates Threshold/Weather-strip Silencers Key Cabinet

C. If material manufactured by other than that specified or listed herewith as an equal, is to be bid upon, permission must be requested from the architect seven (7) days prior to bidding. If substitution is allowed, it will be so noted by addendum.

2.02

FINISH OF HARDWARE:

A. Exterior Hinges to be Stainless Steel (32D),. Door Closers to be Aluminum. Locks to be Satin Chrome (26D), Overhead Holders to be Satin Stainless (32D), Flat Goods to be Satin Chrome (26D) or Stainless Steel (32D) and the Thresholds to be Mill Finish Aluminum.

2.03

HINGES AND PIVOTS: A. Exterior butts shall be Stainless Steel. Butts on all out swinging doors shall be furnished with non-removable pins (NRP). B. Doors 5’ or less in height shall have two (2) butts. Furnish one (1) additional butt for each 2’6” in height or fraction thereof.

2.04

KEYING: A. Equip locks and cylinders with Interchangeable core Falcon cylinders. B. All bittings shall be issued by lock manufacture per owners instructions.

DOOR HARDWARE

087100 - 3


December 7, 2010

C. Provide Two (2) each change keys per lock and Six (6) each grand master, master keys and construction keys. Provide Two (2) control keys construction and Four (4) permanent Control keys. D. Hardware supplier to provide Construction keyed cores where detailed. The contractor is to change out the construction keyed cores for the permanent cylinders at owners’ direction. 2.05

LOCKSETS: A. Locksets shall be Heavy Duty Cylindrical type, unless specified otherwise, in T Series and B Series with Dane Lever designs as manufactured by Falcon Lock Company.

2.06

DOOR CLOSERS: A. Closers shall be LCN 4040 Series having non-ferrous covers, separate valves for adjusting backcheck, closing and latching cycles and adjustable spring to provide up to 50% increase in spring power. Closers shall be furnished with parallel arm mounted on all doors opening into corridors or other public spaces and shall be mounted to permit 180 degrees door swing wherever wall conditions permit. Furnish with non-hold open arms unless otherwise indicated. B. All door closers shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 test requirements by a BHMA certified testing laboratory. C. Door closers shall utilize temperature stable fluid capable of withstanding temperature ranges of 120 degrees Fahrenheit to -30 degrees Fahrenheit, without requiring seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door. Closers for fire-rated doors shall be provided with temperature stabilizing fluid that complies with the standards UBC 7-2 (1997) and UL 10C. D. Door closers shall incorporate tamper resistant non-critical screw valves. Closers shall have separate and independent screw valve adjustments for latch speed, general speed, and hydraulic backcheck. Backcheck shall be properly located so as to effectively slow the swing of the door at a minimum of 10 degrees in advance of the dead stop location to protect the door frame and hardware from damage. Pressure relief valves (PRV) are not acceptable.

2.08

TRIM AND PLATES: A. Kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates, shall be .050 gauge with 32D finish. Kick plates to be 10” high, mop plates to be 4” high. All plates shall be two (2) inches less full width of door. B. Push plates, pull plates, door pulls, and miscellaneous door trim shall be shown in the hardware schedule.

2.09

DOOR STOPS: A. Doorstops shall be furnished for all doors to prevent damage to doors or hardware from striking adjacent walls or fixtures. Wall bumpers equal to Ives WS407 Series are preferred, but where not practical furnish floor stops equal to Ives FS436 or FS438 series. Where conditions prohibit the use of either wall or floor type stops, furnish surface mounted overhead stops equal to Glynn Johnson, 450 Series. DOOR HARDWARE

087100 - 4


2.10

December 7, 2010

THRESHOLDS AND WEATHERSTRIP: A. Thresholds and weather-strip shall be installed at all exterior doors and as indicated in the

contract documents.. PART III - EXECUTION 3.01

INSTALLATION: A. All hardware shall be applied and installed in accordance with the Finish Hardware schedule. Care shall be exercised not to mar or damage adjacent work. B. Contractor to provide a secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable, so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. C. No hardware is to be installed until the hardware manufactures have provided a pre-installation class to insure proper installation of the specified products. A post installation inspection by a manufacturer’s representative will be provided to insure proper installation.

3.02

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Contractor shall adjust all hardware in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions. Prior

to turning project to owner, contractor shall clean and make any final adjustments to the finish hardware. 3.03

PROTECTION: A. Contractor shall protect the hardware, as it is stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. B. Contractor shall protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase.

3.04

KEY CABINET: A. Set up and index one (1) Key Cabinet that allows room for expansion for 150% of the number of

keys for the project.

3.05

HARDWARE SCHEDULE: A. The following schedule is furnished for whatever assistance it may afford the contractor; do not

consider it as entirely inclusive. Should any particular door or item be omitted in any scheduled hardware group, provide door or item with hardware same as required for similar purposes. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors or for each single door.

DOOR HARDWARE

087100 - 5


December 7, 2010

B. For questions regarding hardware in this hardware schedule contact.

Ingersoll Rand Security Technology Bill Whitcomb 111 D Bent Arrow Drive Jupiter, FL 33458 Ph: 561-747-3029 Fax 866-256-7342 [email protected] Manufacture Index: FAL = Falcon GLY = Glynn Johnson IVE = Ives NGP = National Guard SCE = Schlage Electronics SCH = Schlage Lock VON = Von Duprin LDW = Less Door Width LAR = Length as Required

Hardware Group No. 01 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number 3 EA HINGE 5PB1 4.5 X 4.5 1 EA ENTRANCE LOCK B501BDC D 1 EA IC CORE ONLY, KEYED C607 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 DS 3 EA SILENCER SR64 Door 102 & 104 Also Include: 1 EA THRESHOLD 1 SET SEALS 1 EA DOOR SWEEP

896V 36" 170NA 1/36" 2/84" 202NA 36"

Hardware Group No. 2 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 1 EA PASSAGE LOCK T101S D 1 EA IC CORE ONLY, KEYED C607 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 DS 3 EA SILENCER SR64

DOOR HARDWARE

Finish 652 626 626 689 GRY

Mfr IVE FAL FAL FAL IVE

AL AL AL

NGP NGP NGP

Finish 652 626 626 689 GRY

Mfr IVE FAL FAL FAL IVE

087100 - 6


Hardware Group No. 3 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK T561BDC7D D 1 EA IC CORE ONLY, KEYED C607 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC71 RW/PA 1 SET SEALS 170NA 1/36" 2/84" 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 202NA 36" 1 EA THRESHOLD 896V 36" 1 IMPACT DOOR NOA REPORT

Hardware Group No. 4 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number 6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 2 EA SURFACE BOLT SB360T-12 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK T561BDC7D D 2 EA IC CORE ONLY, KEYED C607 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER SC81 DS 1 EA ASTRAGAL Z ASTRAGAL BY DOOR MFG 1 EA THRESHOLD 896V 72" 1 SET SEALS 170NA 1/36” 2/84” 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 202NA 36" Door 105 Also Includes: 1 EA DEADLOCK 1 IMPACT DOOR

D111HD NOA REPORT

Hardware Group No. 5 Provide each RU door(s) with the following: Quantity Description Model Number 1 HARDWARE BY DOOR SUPPLIER

DOOR HARDWARE

December 7, 2010

Finish 630 626 626 689 AL AL AL

Mfr IVE FAL FAL FAL NGP NGP NGP

Finish 630 603 626 626 689

Mfr IVE IVE FAL FAL FAL

AL AL AL

NGP NGP NGP

626

FAL

Finish Mfr

087100 - 7


DOOR NUMBER

December 7, 2010

HARDWARE SET

100 101 102 103 104 105 106A 106B

4 3 1 1 1 4 3 2

OH1 OH2 OH3

5 5 5

END OF SECTION

DOOR HARDWARE

087100 - 8


December 7, 2010

SECTION 089000 - LOUVERS AND VENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.


B.

Related Sections: 1.

1.3

Fixed, extruded-aluminum metal louvers.

Division 23 Sections for louvers that are a part of mechanical equipment.

DEFINITIONS A.

Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

B.

Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades; i.e., the axes of the blades are horizontal.

C.

Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening.

D.

Storm-Resistant Louver: Louver that provides specified wind-driven rain performance, as determined by testing according to AMCA 500-L.

1.4


Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using structural performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B.

Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures in accordance with ASCE 7.05 shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building.

LOUVERS AND VENTS

089000 - 1

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 A.

Wind Loads: Design Wind Loads: ASCE 7-05 a. b. c.

Basic Wind Speed: 140mph Importance Factor: 1.0 Exposure Category: B.

d.

Corner Zone: Review additional information provided in the Structural Drawings for load requirements at specific locations. Other Than Corner Zone: Review additional information provided in the Structural Drawings for load requirements at specific locations.

e. B.

Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes, without buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, or other detrimental effects. 1.

C.

1.5

December 7, 2010

Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.

B.

For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.

Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing. Aluminum louver attachment performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data shall be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer registered in the State of Florida and responsible for their preparation. 1. 2.

Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water intrusion. Show mullion profiles and locations.

C.


D.

Samples for Verification: For each type of metal finish required.

E.

Delegated-Design Submittal: For all louvers and attachments comply with structural performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed, sealed by a qualified professional engineer registered in the State of Florida and responsible for their preparation.

LOUVERS AND VENTS

089000 - 2


1.6

December 7, 2010

Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed according to AMCA 500-L by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of louver and showing compliance with performance requirements specified. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents from single source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.

B.

Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. 2. 3.

AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."

C.

SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.

D.

UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide motors and related components for motor-operated louvers that are listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable NEMA standards.

1.7


Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.


MATERIALS A.

Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.

B.

Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 1. 2.

Use tamper-resistant screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.

C.

Post-installed Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed, for masonry, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

D.


LOUVERS AND VENTS

089000 - 3


December 7, 2010

FABRICATION, GENERAL A.

Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B.

Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance.

C.

Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. 1.

Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.

E.

Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches o.c., whichever is less. 1.

Exposed Mullions: Where indicated, provide units with exposed mullions of same width and depth as louver frame. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, provide interlocking split mullions designed to permit expansion and contraction.

F.

Provide subsills made of same material as louvers for recessed louvers.

G.

Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.

2.3

FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS A.

Horizontal Storm-Resistant Louver: 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.

Air Balance Inc.; a Mestek company. Air Flow Company, Inc. Airolite Company, LLC (The). All-Lite Architectural Products. American Warming and Ventilating, Inc.; a Mestek company. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc. Construction Specialties, Inc. Greenheck Fan Corporation. Industrial Louvers, Inc.

LOUVERS AND VENTS

089000 - 4

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 j. k. l. m. n. 2. 3. 4.

b. c.

2.4

NCA Manufacturing, Inc. Nystrom Building Products. Reliable Products, Inc. Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC. United Enertech Corp.

Louver Depth: 4 inches. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch for blades and 0.080 inch for frames. Louver Performance Ratings: a.

5.

December 7, 2010

Free Area: Review additional information provided in the Mechanical drawings and specifications for specific louver location requirements. Air Performance: Review additional information provided in the Mechanical drawings and specifications for specific louver location requirements. Wind-Driven Rain Performance: Not less than 95percent effectiveness when subjected to a rainfall rate of 8 inches per hour and a wind speed of 50 mph at a core-area intake velocity of 400 fpm velocity.

AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.

LOUVER SCREENS A.

General: Provide screen at each exterior louver. 1. 2.

Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. Screening Type: Provide bird and insect screening.

B.

Secure screen frames to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws with heads finished to match louver, spaced a maximum of 6 inches from each corner and at 12 inches o.c.

C.

Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated. 1. 2. 3.

D.

Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: 1. 2.

2.5

Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached. Type: Rewirable frames with a driven spline or insert.

Bird Screening: Aluminum or Stainless Steel, 1/2-inch- square mesh, 0.063-inch wire. Insect Screening: Aluminum or Stainless Steel, 18-by-16 mesh, 0.012-inch wire.

BLANK-OFF PANELS A.

Uninsulated, Blank-Off Panels: Metal sheet attached to back of louver.

LOUVERS AND VENTS

089000 - 5

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.6

December 7, 2010

Aluminum sheet for aluminum louvers, not less than 0.050-inch nominal thickness. Stainless-steel sheet for stainless-steel louvers, not less than 0.050-inch nominal thickness, with grain running in same direction as grain of louver blades. Panel Finish: Same finish applied to louvers. Attach blank-off panels with sheet metal screws.


2.7

Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. ALUMINUM FINISHES

A.

Finish louvers after assembly.

B.

Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 1.

Color: As selected by Architect from custom colors to match the existing buildings in the area.


EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B.


3.2

PREPARATION A.

3.3

Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. INSTALLATION

A.

Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B.

Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

C.

Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.

LOUVERS AND VENTS

089000 - 6


December 7, 2010

D.

Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.

E.

Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

F.

Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation.

3.4


Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period.

B.

Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.

C.

Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units. 1.

Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.


LOUVERS AND VENTS

089000 - 7


December 7, 2010

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications: 1. 2.

B.


1.3

Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.). Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).

Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for non-load-bearing metal framing, gypsum panels, and other components of wall assemblies.

SUBMITTALS A.

1.4

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate nonload-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B.

STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.


NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A.

Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

092216 - 1


2.2

December 7, 2010

Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.

SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A.

Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch diameter wire, diameter wire.

B.

Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1.

Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency.

2.

Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency.

C.

Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter.

D.

Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1.

Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a.

E.

Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. 2.

Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c.

2.3

Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.

Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Furring System. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.

STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A.

Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.


092216 - 2

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1. 2. B.

December 7, 2010

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0359 inch min. Depth: As indicated on Drawings

Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: 1.

2.

3.

Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

C.

Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

D.

Flat Strap and Backing Plate: indicated. 1.

E.

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0359 inch.

Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0598-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch wide flanges. 1. 2.

2.4

Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width

Depth: 1-1/2 inches. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch thick, galvanized steel.

AUXILIARY MATERIALS A.

General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1.

Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.


092216 - 3


December 7, 2010


EXAMINATION A.

Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1.

3.2


PREPARATION A.

Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1.

3.3

Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.


Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated. 1.

Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B.

Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C.

Install double .0359 metal studs at all doors up to 3’-0” wide. For doors larger than 3’-0” provide a triple stud pack at door jambs.

D.

Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

E.

Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4

INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A.

Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated and as required by the authority having jurisdiction to meet local code.


092216 - 4


December 7, 2010

B.

Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C.

Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1.

Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a.

2.

Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a.

3.

4.

5. 6. 7.

Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D.

Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E.

Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

F.

Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.

3.5

INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A.

Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

B.

Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.


092216 - 5


Space studs as follows: a. b. c.

C.

December 7, 2010

Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. Tile backing panels: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate above suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1.

2.

Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. b.

c. 3.

4.

Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a.

5.

D.

Direct Furring: 1.

E.

Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistancerated assembly indicated. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing and acoustical sealant to comply with soundrated assembly indicated.

Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.



092216 - 6


December 7, 2010

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3.

B.


1.3

Interior gypsum board. Tile backing panels. Steel stud supports and furring channel

Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for framing and furring that supports gypsum board. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed in assemblies that incorporate gypsum board. Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board. Division 09 Section "Tiling" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for ceramic tile. Division 09 painting Sections for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces.

SUBMITTALS A.


B.

Samples: For the following products: 1. 2.

Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory indicated. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work.

GYPSUM BOARD

092900 - 1


December 7, 2010


Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B.

STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

C.

All perimeter wall gypsum board panels shall be mold resistant.

D.

Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1.

Install mockups for the following: a.

2. 3. 4.

1.5

Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.

Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

STORAGE AND HANDLING A.

1.6

Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging. PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.

Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B.

Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C.

Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. 2.

Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

GYPSUM BOARD

092900 - 2


December 7, 2010


INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A.

General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 5/8” thick shall be used at all locations unless other wise specified by the contract documents. 1.

2.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d.

B.

National Gypsum Company American Gypsum Company USG Corporation G-P Gypsum

Acoustical Applications (Foil Backed) 1.

At acoustical partitions the exterior layer of the wall assembly shall include 5/8” Type foil backed gypsum board panels. All acoustical assemblies shall include the required acoustical sealants as recommended by the manufacturer to maintain the integrity of the acoustical system.

C.

Wet Areas: 1. At all shower areas the wall assembly shall be constructed with 5/8” cement board as a substraight for the installation of wall and ceiling tile.

D.

Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board. 1. 2.

E.

Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces. 1. 2.

2.2

Thickness: 5/8 inch. Long Edges: Tapered.

Core: 5/8 inch. Long Edges: Tapered.

TILE BACKING PANELS A.

Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9. 1.

Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

GYPSUM BOARD

092900 - 3


Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a.

3. 2.3

December 7, 2010

National Gypsum Company (Perma Base Cement Board)

Thickness: 5/8 inch.

TRIM ACCESSORIES A.

Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. 2.

Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet. Shapes: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

2.4

Cornerbead. Bullnose bead. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. Expansion (control) joint. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A.

General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B.

Joint Tape: 1. 2. 3. 4.

C.

Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. Tile Backing Panels: Glass mesh or as recommended by panel manufacturer.

Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. 2.

Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. a.

3. 4. 5.

Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 4 finish, use.

GYPSUM BOARD

092900 - 4


Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. 2.

2.5

December 7, 2010

Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and settingtype, sandable topping compound. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.

AUXILIARY MATERIALS A.

General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B.

Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2.

Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

C.

Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

D.

Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 1.

Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

E.

Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."

F.

Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."


EXAMINATION A.

Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B.

Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C.


GYPSUM BOARD

092900 - 5


December 7, 2010

APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A.

Single-Layer Application: 1. 2.

On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. b.

3. 3.3

Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A.

Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install at showers, tubs, and where indicated. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.

B.

Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at wet locations indicated to receive tile.

C.

Moist Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Moisture resistant gypsum wallboard panels to produce a flat surface except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive water-resistant panels.

D.

Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.4

INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A.

General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C.

Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. L-Bead: Use where indicated.

GYPSUM BOARD

092900 - 6

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 5. 3.5

December 7, 2010

U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges, unless otherwise indicated.

FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A.

General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B.

Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C.

Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.

D.

Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1.

Level 4: All gypsum finishes shall be minimum Level 4 Finish as set forth by the National Gypsum Council . a.

Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.

E.

Moisture -Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F.

Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6

PROTECTION A.

Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B.

Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. 2.

Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.


GYPSUM BOARD

092900 - 7


December 7, 2010

SECTION 093000 - TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

Section Includes 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.


1.3

Porcelain/glazed ceramic tile. Marble thresholds. Tile backing panels. Metal edge strips.

Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces. Division 09 Section "Portland Cement Plastering" for portland cement scratch coat over metal lath on wall surfaces. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units.

DEFINITIONS A.

General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.

B.

ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in "American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."

C.

Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.

D.

Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.

TILING

093000 - 1


December 7, 2010

SUBMITTALS A.


B.

Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.

C.

Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.

D.

Samples for Verification: 1. 2.

3. 4. 5.

Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 12 inches square, but not fewer than 4 tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths.

E.


F.

Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer.

G.

Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.

H.

Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product and special purpose tile.

1.5


Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from one source or producer. 1.

Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B.

Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.

C.

Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer for each product:

TILING

093000 - 2

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1. 2. 3. 4. D.

Marble thresholds. Joint sealants. Cementitious backer units. Metal edge strips.

Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. 2. 3.

1.6

December 7, 2010

Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.

B.

Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

C.

Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided.

D.

Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.

E.

Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.

1.7


Do not install tile on substraights that are not plumb and level. Contractor shall remediate the tile substraight to provide a suitable surface for the tile installation.

B.

Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

1.8

EXTRA MATERIALS A.

TILING

Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

093000 - 3


December 7, 2010

1.

Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

2.

Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated.


PRODUCTS, GENERAL A.

ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

B.

ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.

C.

Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.

D.

Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 1.

E.

2.2

Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance.

Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces. TILE PRODUCTS

A.

Tile Type: Porcelain and glazed ceramic tile. 1.

2.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or approved equal: a. b.

TILING

American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.

093000 - 4

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 c. d. e. f. g. h. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

b. c. d.

Base Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size from manufacturer standard product line. External Corners for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bead (bullnose), module size from manufacturer standard product line. External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap, use angle pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes.

Tile Standard: 1.

PT-1- Tile a. b. c. d.

2.

3.

Manufacturer: Dal-Tile Color: CP80 Beach Style: Cliff Pointe Size: 12”x12”

PT-2-Tile a. b. c. d.

Manufacturer: Dal-Tile Color: CP84 Rock Style: Cliff Pointe Size: 12”x12”

PT-3-Tile a. b.

TILING

Crossville, Inc. Interceramic Lone Star Ceramics Company Grupo Porcelanite Portobello America, Inc. Seneca Tiles, Inc.

Composition: Porcelain/Glazed Ceramic Module Size: 6”x 6”, 12” x12” Thickness: 5/16 inch Face: Pattern of design indicated, with cushion edges. Surface: Slip-resistant, with abrasive admixture. Finish: Mat, clear glaze. Tile Color and Pattern: Match Architect's sample. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a.

B.

December 7, 2010

Manufacturer: Dal-Tile Color: CP80 Beach

093000 - 5

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 c. d. C.

WT-1-Tile a. b. c. d.

Manufacturer: Dal-Tile Color: Matte Pearl White Style: Glazed Wall Tile Size: 6”x6”

Base Standard: 1.

B-2-Tile a. b. c. d.

2.3

Style: Cliff Pointe Size: 6”x6” (Cut in field from 12”x12” tiles)

Wall Standard: 1.

D.

December 7, 2010

Manufacturer: Dal-Tile Color: CP80 Beach Style: Cliff Pointe Size: 6”x12” Cove Base

THRESHOLDS A.

General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 1.

B.

Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface.

Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 12 per ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish. 1. 2. 3.

Description: Uniform, fine-to medium-grained white stone with gray veining. Description: Match Architect’s sample. Description: Provide the following: a.

2.4

Carrara Marble

TILE BACKING PANELS A.

TILING

Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325, in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.

093000 - 6


1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or approved equal: a. b. c. d.

2. 2.5

December 7, 2010

Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. PermaBase Cement Board

Thickness: 5/8 inch.

SETTING MATERIALS A.

Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Mud Set): ANSI A118.1. 1. 2.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

3. B.

For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.1.

Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. 1. 2.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

TILING

Boiardi Products; a QEP company. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. Bostik, Inc. C-Cure. Custom Building Products. Jamo Inc. Laticrete International, Inc. MAPEI Corporation.


093000 - 7


2.6

December 7, 2010

Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.

GROUT MATERIALS A.

Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and white or colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.

B.

Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6. 1. 2.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or approved equal: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

2.7


ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A.

General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 1.

Use primers, backer rods, and sealant accessories recommended by sealant manufacturer.

B.

Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints unless otherwise indicated.

C.

One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or approved equal: a.

TILING

DAP Inc.; Titanium Enriched Kitchen and Bath Sealant.

093000 - 8

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 b. c. d. e. f. 2.8

December 7, 2010

Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786. GE Silicones; a division of GE Specialty Materials; Sanitary 1700. Laticrete International, Inc.; Latasil Tile & Stone Sealant. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600 White.


Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B.

Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications; stainless-steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.

C.

Temporary Protective Coating: Either product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile. 1. 2.

D.

2.9

Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F per ASTM D 87. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.

Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A.

Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.


EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1.

TILING

Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances

093000 - 9


2. 3. 4. B. 3.2

December 7, 2010

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION

A.

Fill cracks, holes, depressions other imperfections in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

B.

Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains.

C.

Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

D.

Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.

3.3

TILE INSTALLATION A.

Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.

B.

Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C.

Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

TILING

093000 - 10


Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3.

E.

December 7, 2010

For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.

Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. 2.

Porcelain Tile: 3/16 inch. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch.

F.

Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

G.

Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. 2.

H.

Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated. 1.

At locations where mortar bed (mud set) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent floor finishes, set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar (thin set).

I.

Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated.

J.

Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to groutsealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.

3.4

TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION A.

TILING

Install cementitious backer units and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use latex-portland cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions.

093000 - 11


December 7, 2010

WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION A.

Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.

B.

Do not install tile or setting materials over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight.

3.6

CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A.

Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.

B.

Do not install tile or setting materials over crack isolation membrane until membrane has cured.

3.7

CLEANING AND PROTECTING A.

Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. 2.

3.

Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer.

B.

Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.

C.

Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.

D.

Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces.


TILING

093000 - 12


December 7, 2010

SECTION 095123 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes acoustical tiles for ceilings and the following: 1.

B.

1.3

Concealed suspension systems.

Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete at ceilings. DEFINITIONS

A.

AC: Articulation Class.

B.

CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.

C.

LR: Light-Reflectance coefficient.

D.

NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A.


B.

Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. 2.

Ceiling suspension system members. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. a.

3. 4.

Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices whose installation is specified in other Sections.

Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.

ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

095123 - 1


December 7, 2010

Minimum Drawing Scale: As indicated

C.

Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes.

D.

Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. 2. 3.

Acoustical Tile: Set of full-size Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. Concealed Suspension System Members: 12-inch- long Sample of each type. Exposed Moldings and Trim: Set of 12-inch- long Samples of each type and color.

E.

Qualification Data: For testing agency.

F.


G.

Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each acoustical tile ceiling.

H.

Research/Evaluation Reports: fastener type.

I.

Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.

1.5

For acoustical tile ceiling and components and anchor and


Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, or an NVLAPaccredited laboratory, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated. NVLAP-accredited laboratories must document accreditation, based on a "Certificate of Accreditation" and a "Scope of Accreditation" listing the test methods specified.

B.

Source Limitations: 1. 2.

Acoustical Ceiling Tile: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.

C.

Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling tile and supporting suspension system through one source from a single manufacturer.

D.

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: following requirements: 1.

Provide acoustical tile ceilings that comply with the

Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical tile ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a.

Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency.


095123 - 2

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 b. 2.

1.6

Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1.

F.

Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical tiles with the following surfaceburning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: a.

E.

December 7, 2010

Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B.

Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C.

Handle acoustical tiles carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.

1.7


1.8

Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical tile ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. COORDINATION

A.

Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical tiles and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.


095123 - 3


December 7, 2010

EXTRA MATERIALS A.

Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2.

Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.


ACOUSTICAL TILES, GENERAL A.

Recycled Content: Provide acoustical tiles with recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of 25 percent by weight.

B.

Acoustical Tile Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Acoustical Tile Colors and Patterns: product type.

D.

Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical tiles treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.

E.

Antimicrobial Fungicide Treatment: Provide acoustical tiles with face and back surfaces coated with antimicrobial treatment consisting of manufacturer's standard formulation with fungicide added to inhibit growth of mold and mildew and showing no mold or mildew growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.

2.2

Match appearance characteristics indicated for each

ACOUSTICAL TILES FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING A.


B.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1.

Armstrong World Industries, Inc.;


095123 - 4


Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated tiles complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: 1.

Random Fissured 2x 2 x 5/8” 2908

D.

Color: White.

E.

Antimicrobial Treatment: Broad spectrum fungicide and bactericide based.

2.3

December 7, 2010

METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A.

Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.

B.

Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.

C.

Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 1.

D.

Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. 2.

Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch diameter wire.

E.

Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

F.

Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch-thick, galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch- diameter bolts.

2.4

METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING A.



095123 - 5


December 7, 2010


Armstrong World Industries, Inc

C.

Prelude ML grid in white or approved equal.

D.

The Contractor shall not allow conduit and wiring to be supported from the ceiling grid support wires.

E.

Ceiling grid shall be installed per ASTM C636.

2.5

METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A.


B.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. 2.

C.

Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with hurricane design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1.

2.

2.6

Armstrong World Industries, Inc USG Interiors, Inc

Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical tile edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners, unless otherwise indicated. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.

ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A.


B.


Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. b.

2.

Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:


095123 - 6


December 7, 2010

OSI Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series SC-175 Rubber Base Sound Sealant. Pecora Corporation; BA-98. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.

C.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

D.

Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

E.

Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.

2.7


Tile Adhesive: Type recommended by tile manufacturer, bearing UL label for Class 0-25 flame spread. 1.

B.

Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

Staples: 5/16-inch- long, divergent-point staples.


EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which acoustical tile ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical tile ceilings. 1.



095123 - 7


December 7, 2010

PREPARATION A.

Testing Substrates: Before installing adhesively applied tiles on wet-placed substrates such as cast-in-place concrete or plaster, test and verify that moisture level is below tile manufacturer's recommended limits.

B.

Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

3.3

INSTALLATION, SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS A.

General: Install acoustical tile ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1.

B.

Fire-Rated Assembly: Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested fire-rated design.

Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

8. 9. 10.

Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.


095123 - 8


12.

December 7, 2010

Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

C.

Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.

D.

Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles. 1. 2.

3.

Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

E.

Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F.

Arrange directionally patterned acoustical tiles as follows: 1.

G.

Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. Place splines or suspension system flanges into kerfed edges so tile-to-tile joints are closed by double lap of material. 1. 2. 3.

3.4

As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.

Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut tile for accurate fit at borders and around penetrations through tile. Hold tile field in compression by inserting leaf-type, spring-steel spacers between tile and moldings, spaced 12 inches o.c. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fireresistance-rated assembly.


Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B.

Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed installations of acoustical tile ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners shall take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed with installations of acoustical tile ceiling


095123 - 9


December 7, 2010

hangers for the next area until test results for previously completed installations of acoustical tile ceiling hangers show compliance with requirements. 1.

Extent of Each Test Area: When installation of ceiling suspension systems on each floor has reached 20 percent completion but no tiles have been installed. a.

b.

C.

3.5

Within each test area, testing agency will select 1 of every 10 power-actuated fasteners and postinstalled anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will test them for 200 lbf of tension; it will also select one of every 2 postinstalled anchors used to attach bracing wires to concrete and will test them for 440 lbf of tension. When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with requirements, testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested until 20 pass consecutively and then will resume initial testing frequency.

Remove and replace acoustical tile ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above. CLEANING

A.

Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical tile ceilings, including trim and edge moldings. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace tiles and other ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.



095123 - 10


December 7, 2010

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT RUBBER BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

1.2

RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY

A.


B.


1.3

Resilient base.

Division 09 Section "Resilient Sheet Flooring" for resilient sheet floor coverings.

SUBMITTALS A.


B.

Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.

C.

Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.

D.

Product Schedule: For resilient products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.4


Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1.

B. 1.5

Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

Mockups: Provide resilient products with mockups specified in other Sections. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

096513 - 1


December 7, 2010


Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 2. 3.

48 hours before installation. During installation. 48 hours after installation.

B.

Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C.

Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

1.7

EXTRA MATERIALS A.

Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.

Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.


RESILIENT BASE A.

Resilient Base: 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: a.

B.

Roppe Corporation, USA.

Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 1. 2.

Manufacturers: Roppe Corporation USA. Molded Thermoset (vulcanized) rubber with satin finish

C.

Height: 4 inches.

D.

Outside Corners: Job formed.

E.

Inside Corners: Job formed.


096513 - 2


Base Standard: 1.

B1-Base a. b. c. d.

2.2

December 7, 2010

Manufacturer: Roppe USA Color: 123 Charcoal Style: 700 Series Size: 4” H

INSTALLATION MATERIALS A.

Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B.

Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. 1.

Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a.

Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.


EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B.

Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.

C.


3.2

PREPARATION A.

Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B.

Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.


096513 - 3


Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1.

D.

3.3

December 7, 2010

Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B.

Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C.

Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D.

Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E.

Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F.

On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G.

Job-Formed Corners: 1. 2.

3.4

Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible.

RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B.

Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet or resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.

C.

The Contractor shall provide a minimum of 1% of surplus resilient baseboard in full lengths only, for use by the College following completion of the project.


096513 - 4


December 7, 2010

CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.

B.

Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. 2. 3.

Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C.

Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D.

Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.



096513 - 5


December 7, 2010

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.


1.3

Concrete. Concrete masonry units (CMU). Steel. Galvanized metal. Gypsum board.

Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. Division 06 Sections for shop priming carpentry with primers specified in this Section. Division 08 Sections for factory priming windows and doors with primers specified in this Section. Division 09 painting Sections for special-use coatings. Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates.

SUBMITTALS A.


B.

Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.

C.

Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. 2. 3.

Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. Label each coat of each Sample.

INTERIOR PAINTING

099123 - 1

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 4. D.

Label each Sample for location and application area.

Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. 2.

1.4

December 7, 2010

Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.


MPI Standards: 1. 2.

B.

Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.

Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1.

Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. b.

2. 3.

Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a.

1.5

Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.


Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. 2.

Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

INTERIOR PAINTING

099123 - 2


December 7, 2010


Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B.

Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.7

EXTRA MATERIALS A.

Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.

Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.


MANUFACTURERS A.


B.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

2.2

Benjamin Moore & Co. Duron, Inc. Porter Paints PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. Sherwin-Williams Company Or approved equal

PAINT, GENERAL A.

Material Compatibility: 1.

2.

Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

INTERIOR PAINTING

099123 - 3


December 7, 2010

VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L. Flat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. Nonflat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC content of not more than 340 g/L. Pre-Treatment Wash Primers: VOC content of not more than 420 g/L. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t. u. v. w. x. y.

Acrolein. Acrylonitrile. Antimony. Benzene. Butyl benzyl phthalate. Cadmium. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. Di-n-butyl phthalate. Di-n-octyl phthalate. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. Diethyl phthalate. Dimethyl phthalate. Ethylbenzene. Formaldehyde. Hexavalent chromium. Isophorone. Lead. Mercury. Methyl ethyl ketone. Methyl isobutyl ketone. Methylene chloride. Naphthalene. Toluene (methylbenzene). 1,1,1-trichloroethane. Vinyl chloride.

INTERIOR PAINTING

099123 - 4


December 7, 2010

BLOCK FILLERS A.

2.4

Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4. PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. 2.5

Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50. METAL PRIMERS

A.

Rust-Inhibitive Primer (Water Based): MPI #107.

B.

Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #134.

2.6

LATEX PAINTS A.

Interior Latex (Eggshell): MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5).

B.

Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex (Eggshell): MPI #145 (Gloss Level 5).


EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B.

Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. 2. 3.

Concrete: 12 percent. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. Plaster: 12 percent.

C.

Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D.

Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1.

Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

INTERIOR PAINTING

099123 - 5


December 7, 2010

PREPARATION A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B.

Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surfaceapplied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. 2.

C.

After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1.

Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D.

Concrete Masonry and Concrete Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E.

Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

F.

Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

G.

Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth.

3.3

APPLICATION A.

Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2.

3. B.

Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

INTERIOR PAINTING

099123 - 6


December 7, 2010

C.

If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D.

Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

3.4


Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: 1.

2. 3.

3.5

Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplyingpaint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.


At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B.

After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C.

Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D.

At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6

INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A.

Wall Schedule: 1.

PT1 a.

Manufacturer: Sherwin Williams

INTERIOR PAINTING

099123 - 7

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 b. c. d.

December 7, 2010

Color: Downy Number: 7002 Finish: Eggshell


INTERIOR PAINTING

099123 - 8


December 7, 2010

SECTION 101400 - SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.


B.


1.3

Plaques.

Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary Project identification signs and for temporary information and directional signs. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for labels, tags, and nameplates for plumbing systems and equipment. Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for labels, tags, and nameplates for HVAC systems and equipment. Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections for illuminated signs. Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment. Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting" for illuminated Exit signs.

DEFINITIONS A.

1.4

ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines." SUBMITTALS

A.


B.

Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs. 1.

SIGNAGE

Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories.

101400 - 1

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 2. C.

Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements including tactile characters and Braille and layout for each sign.

Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors available for the following: 1. 2.

Acrylic sheet. Polycarbonate sheet.

D.

Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

E.

Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.

F.


1.5

December 7, 2010


Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer

B.

Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance.

C.

Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single manufacturer.

D.

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.

1.6


Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit installation of signs in exterior locations to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.

B.

Field Measurements: Verify recess openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.7

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs.

SIGNAGE

101400 - 2


December 7, 2010

WARRANTY A.

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.

Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b.

2.

Deterioration of polymer finishes beyond normal weathering. Deterioration of embedded graphic image colors and sign lamination

Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.


PLAQUES A.


B.


C.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawing or approved equal: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

D.

Laminated Interior Signs: Solid phenolic panel core with graphic image covered with thermosetting resin face layer. 1. 2. 3. 4.

E.

Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division. A. R. K. Ramos. Baron Sign Manufacturing Gemini Incorporated. Matthews International Corporation; Bronze Division. Metal Arts; Div. of L&H Mfg. Co. Mills Manufacturing Company. Nelson-Harkins Industries. Southwell Company (The).

Surface Finish: Mat. Edge Condition: Bullnose. Corner Condition: Rounded to radius indicated. Thickness: 1/8 inch.

Tactile and Braille Sign: Manufacturer's standard process for producing text and symbols complying with ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be

SIGNAGE

101400 - 3


December 7, 2010

accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square-cut edges free from burrs and cut marks; Braille dots with domed or rounded shape. 1. 2. 2.2

Panel Material: Opaque acrylic sheet or Photopolymer. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch.

ACCESSORIES A.

2.3

Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal anchors and inserts for all installations. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. FABRICATION

A.

General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated. 1.

2.

2.4

Preassemble signs in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation, in location not exposed to view after final assembly. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous.



B.

Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.


EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B.

Verify that items, including anchor inserts are sized and located to accommodate signs.

C.


SIGNAGE

101400 - 4


December 7, 2010

INSTALLATION A.

Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2.

B.

Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply. 1.

3.3

Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door.

Mechanical Fasteners: Use nonremovable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer.


After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner.


SIGNAGE

101400 - 5


December 7, 2010

SECTION 102800 – TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.


B.


1.3

Public-use washroom accessories. Public-use shower room accessories. Underlavatory guards. Custodial accessories.

Division 09 Section "Tiling" for ceramic toilet and bath accessories.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

Samples: Full size, for each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements. 1.

C.

Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.

Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. 2.

D.

Construction details and dimensions. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. Material and finish descriptions. Features that will be included for Project. Manufacturer's warranty.

Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.

Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.

TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

102800 - 1


December 7, 2010


1.5

Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide products of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect. COORDINATION

A.

Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B.

Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.

1.6

WARRANTY A.

Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.

Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.


MATERIALS A.

Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-andtheft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

C.

Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).

D.

Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.

E.

ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.

2.2

PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A.


B.



102800 - 2


Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1.

D.

Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.

Grab Bar: 1. 2. 3.

Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-6806.99x36 and B-6806.99x42 Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. Material: Stainless steel. a.

4. 5. E.

Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.

Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-2112 ClassicSeries Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid form. Mounting: Surface mounted. Capacity: 40-fl oz. Materials and Finish: Satin-Finish Stainless Steel Refill Indicator: Window type. Lockset: Tumbler type

Mirror Unit: 1. 2.

Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-165 2430 Series Channel-Frame m Frame: Stainless steel, fixed tilt.

3.

a. Corners: Mitered. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below. a. b.

4. G.

Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area.

Liquid Soap Dispenser: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

F.

December 7, 2010

One-piece, galvanized steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove.

Size: As indicated on Drawings, 24”w x 30”h

Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-2890 Description: Single-roll dispenser. Mounting: Surface mounted. Operation: Equipped with spring lock. .


102800 - 3

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 5. 6. H.

Capacity: Spindle holds 10 inch diameter tissue rolls. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

Combination Towel (Folded) Dispenser/Waste Receptacle: 1. 2. 3.

Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-369 ClassicSeries Description: Combination unit for dispensing C-fold or multifold towels, with removable waste receptacle. Mounting: Recessed. a.

4. 5. 6. 7. 2.3

December 7, 2010

Designed for nominal 4-inch wall depth.

Minimum Towel-Dispenser Capacity: 350 C-fold multifold towels. Minimum Waste-Receptacle Capacity: 2 gal. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). Lockset: Tumbler type for towel-dispenser compartment.

PUBLIC-USE SHOWER ROOM ACCESSORIES A.


B.


C.

Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

D.

Shower Curtain Rod: 1. 2. 3. 4.

E.

A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. American Specialties, Inc. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Bradley Corporation. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO).

Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-207 Shower Curtain Rod with concealed mounting Description: 1-inch thick stainless steel. Mounting Flanges: 1-3/8” diameter flanges are chrome-plated plastic, bright polished finish; mount on concealed wall brackets. Finish: No. 4 (satin).

Shower Curtain: 1. 2. 3.

Basis-of-Design Product: Quality Stage Drapery Inc. Size: Minimum 6 inches (152 mm) wider than opening by 72 inches high. Material: 100 Polyester.


102800 - 4


F.

Color: White. Grommets: Corrosion resistant at minimum 6 inches o.c. through top hem. Shower Curtain Hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless-steel, spring wire curtain hooks with snap fasteners, sized to accommodate specified curtain rod. Provide one hook per curtain grommet.

Two-Wall Grab Bar: 1. 2. 3.

Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-6861 Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. Material: Stainless steel. a.

4. 5. G.

4. 5.

Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-5181 Reversible Folding Shower Seat Configuration: L-shaped seat, designed for wheelchair access. Seat: Phenolic or polymeric composite of slat-type or one-piece construction in color as selected by Architect. Mounting Mechanism: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). Dimensions: Seat 33” wide, projects 22-5/16” from wall.

Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-680 Description: Drawn, one piece soap dish welded to support arm and flange. Mounting: Surface mounted. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

Robe Hook: 1. 2. 3. 4.

2.4

Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.

Soap Dish: 1. 2. 3. 4.

I.

Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area.

Folding Shower Seat: 1. 2. 3.

H.

December 7, 2010

Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-2116 Heavy-Duty Clothes Hook with Concealed Mounting Description: Withstands 300 lb downward pull. Mounting: Locks to wall plate with three stainless steel setscrews for thert-resistant mounting. Material and Finish: Hook and Flange are one-piece brass casting with satin nickel-plated finish to match stainless steel.

UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS A.



102800 - 5


December 7, 2010

B.


C.

Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1.

D.

Underlavatory Guard: 1. 2.

3. 2.5

Truebro, Inc.

Basis-of-Design Product: Truebro Lav Guard 2 Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies, that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping, and allow service access without removing coverings. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded-plastic, white.

CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES A.


B.


C.

Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

D.

A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. American Specialties, Inc. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Bradley Corporation.

Mop and Broom Holder: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick B-223 Mop and Broom Holder Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf Length: 36 inches. Hooks: Three. Mop/Broom Holders: Four, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). a. b.

Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch thick stainless steel. Rod: Approximately 1/4-inch diameter stainless steel.


102800 - 6


December 7, 2010

FABRICATION A.

General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.

B.

Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.


INSTALLATION A.

Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B.

Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to method in ASTM F 446.

3.2


Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B.

Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C.

Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.



102800 - 7


December 7, 2010

SECTION 104413 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.


Fire protection cabinets for the following: a.

B.

Related Sections: 1. 2.

1.3

Portable fire extinguishers.

Division 10 Section "Signage" for directional signage to out-of-sight fire extinguishers and cabinets. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguishers."

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection cabinets. 1.

Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.

B.

Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C.

Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fire protection cabinet indicated.

D.

Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1.

Size: 6 by 6 inches square.

FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

104413 - 1


December 7, 2010

E.

Product Schedule: For fire protection cabinets. Coordinate final fire protection cabinet schedule with fire extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

F.

Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4


Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.

B.

Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

B.

Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.

1.6

SEQUENCING A.

Apply vinyl lettering on field-painted, fire protection cabinets after painting is complete.


MATERIALS A.

Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

B.

Acrylic Bubble: One piece.

2.2

FIRE PROTECTION CABINET A.

Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d.

B.

Fire End & Croker Corporation J.L. Industries, Inc. Larsen's Manufacturing Company Modern Metal Products

Cabinet Construction: 1-hour fire rated.


104413 - 2


C.

Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428-inch thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch thick, fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

Cabinet Material: Steel sheet. 1.

D.

December 7, 2010

Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.

Semi-recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semi-recessed cabinet installation. 1.

Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch backbend depth.

E.

Door Material: Steel sheet sheet.

F.

Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame.

G.

Door Glazing: Glass

H.

Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 1. 2.

I.

Provide projecting door pull. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open 180 degrees.

Accessories: 1.

2. 3. 4. 5.

Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. Break-Glass Strike: Manufacturer's standard metal strike, complete with chain and mounting clip, secured to cabinet. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed into face. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle. Cylinder lock, keyed alike to other cabinets. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect. a.

Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" 1) 2)

Location: Applied to cabinet door or cabinet glazing. Application Process: Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters.


104413 - 3

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 3) 4) J.

Lettering Color: Red. Orientation: Vertical.

Finishes: 1. 2.

2.3

December 7, 2010

Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following: Steel: Baked enamel or powder coat.

FABRICATION A.

Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. 2.

C.

2.4

Weld joints and grind smooth. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. Install door locks at factory.

Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A.


B.

Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C.

Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly.

D.

Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.


104413 - 4


December 7, 2010


EXAMINATION A.

Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semi-recessed cabinets will be installed.

B.


3.2

PREPARATION A.

3.3

Prepare recesses for semi-recessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. INSTALLATION

A.

General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights indicated below: 1.

B.

Fire Protection Cabinets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet.

Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire protection cabinets. If wall thickness is not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semi-recessed fire protection cabinets. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb. Fire-Rated Cabinets: a. b.

C. 3.4

Install cabinet with not more than 1/16-inch tolerance between pipe OD and knockout OD. Center pipe within knockout. Seal through penetrations with firestopping sealant as specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A.

Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B.

Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

C.

On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.


104413 - 5


December 7, 2010

D.

Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factoryfinished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.

E.

Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



104413 - 6


December 7, 2010

SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers.

B.

Owner-Furnished Material: Hand-carried fire extinguishers.

C.


1.3

Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets."

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguishers.

B.

Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire extinguisher schedule with fire protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

C.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.

D.

Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.4


NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B.

Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

104416 - 1


December 7, 2010

COORDINATION A.

1.6

Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. WARRANTY

A.

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.


2.

Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.


PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A.

Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet indicated. 1. 2.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a.

3. 4. 5.

B.

Larsen's Manufacturing Company.

Valves: Manufacturer's standard. Handles and Levers: Stainless steel. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.

Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Aluminum Container UL-rated 2-A:10-B:C, 5-lb (2.3-kg) nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-aluminum container.

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

104416 - 2


December 7, 2010


EXAMINATION A.

Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1.

B. 3.2

Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION

A.

General: Install fire extinguishers in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.


FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

104416 - 3


December 7, 2010

SECTION 105113 - METAL LOCKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.


1.3

Heavy-Duty Metal lockers.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of metal locker and bench.

B.

Shop Drawings: For metal lockers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. 2.

Show locker trim and accessories. Include locker identification system and numbering sequence.

C.


D.


E.

Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals.

F.

Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.4


Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B.

Source Limitations: Obtain metal lockers from single source from single manufacturer.

METAL LOCKERS

105113 - 1


1.5

December 7, 2010

Regulatory Requirements: Where metal lockers are indicated comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

1.6

Do not deliver metal lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for their installation. PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.

1.7

Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of recessed openings by field measurements before fabrication. COORDINATION

A.

Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete or concrete masonry bases for metal lockers.

B.

Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of work specified in other Sections to ensure that metal lockers can be supported and installed as indicated.

1.8

WARRANTY A.

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within specified warranty period. 1.


2. 3.

1.9

Structural failures. Faulty operation of latches and other door hardware.

Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is excluded. Warranty Period for Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

EXTRA MATERIALS A.

Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.

Full-size units of the following metal locker hardware items equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each type and finish installed, but no fewer than five units:

METAL LOCKERS

105113 - 2


December 7, 2010

Locks. Identification plates. Hooks.


MATERIALS A.

2.2

Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, suitable for exposed applications. HEAVY-DUTY METAL LOCKERS

A.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or approved equal: 1.

List Industries Inc.

B.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product approved by Archiect from manufacturer’s full range.

C.

Locker Arrangement: Single Tier.

D.

Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.

E.

Size: 24”x 24”

F.

Body: Assembled by riveting or bolting body components together. unperforated steel sheet as follows: 1. 2. 3.

G.

Fabricate from

Tops, Bottoms, and Intermediate Dividers: 0.060-inch nominal thickness, with single bend at sides. Backs and Sides: 0.048-inch nominal thickness, with full-height, double-flanged connections. Shelves: 0.060-inch nominal thickness, with double bend at front and single bend at sides and back.

Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.060-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; lapped and factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory welded into vertical main frames. Form continuous, integral door strike full height on vertical main frames. 1. 2.

Cross Frames between Tiers: Channel formed and fabricated from same material as main frames; welded to vertical main frames. Frame Vents: Fabricate face frames with vents.

METAL LOCKERS

105113 - 3


Doors: One piece; fabricated from 0.075-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; formed into channel shape with double bend at vertical edges and with right-angle single bend at horizontal edges. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6.

Doors less than 12 inches wide may be fabricated from 0.048-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet. Doors for box lockers less than 15 inches wide may be fabricated from 0.048-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet. Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard reinforcing angles, channels, or stiffeners for doors more than 15 inches wide; welded to inner face of doors. Stiffeners: Manufacturer's standard full-height stiffener fabricated from 0.048-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded to inner face of doors. Sound-Dampening Panels: Manufacturer's standard, designed to stiffen doors and reduce sound levels when doors are closed, of die-formed metal with full perimeter flange and sound-dampening material; welded to inner face of doors. Door Style: Vented panel as follows: a. b. c. d.

I.

Latch Hooks: Equip doors less than 48 inches high with two latch hooks; fabricated from 0.105-inch nominal-thickness steel sheet; welded or riveted to full-height door strikes; with resilient silencer on each latch hook.

Equipment: Equip each metal locker with identification plate and the following unless otherwise indicated: 1.

L.

Knuckle Hinges: Steel, full loop, five or seven knuckles, tight pin; minimum 2 inches high. Provide no fewer than three hinges for each door more than 42 inches high.

Projecting Door Handle and Latch: Finger-lift latch control designed for use with either built-in combination locks or padlocks; positive automatic latching, chromium plated; pry and vandal resistant. 1.

K.

Louvered Vents: No fewer than six louver openings at top and bottom for singletier lockers. Security Vents: Manufacturer's standard, stamped horizontal or vertical. Perforated Vents: Manufacturer's standard shape and configuration. Concealed Vents: Slotted perforations in top and bottom horizontal return flanges of doors.

Hinges: Welded to door and attached to door frame with no fewer than two factory-installed rivets per hinge that are completely concealed and tamper resistant when door is closed; fabricated to swing 180 degrees. 1.

J.

December 7, 2010

Single-Tier Units: Shelf, one double-prong ceiling hook, and two single-prong wall hooks.

Finish: Baked enamel.

METAL LOCKERS

105113 - 4


December 7, 2010

FABRICATION A.

Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, and without warp and with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch and free of sharp edges and burrs. 1. 2.

Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet unless otherwise indicated. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for complete installation.

B.

Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, and back; and common intermediate uprights separating compartments. Factory weld frame members of each metal locker together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly.

C.

Knocked-Down Construction: Fabricate metal lockers using nuts, bolts, screws, or rivets for nominal assembly at Project site.

D.

Accessible Lockers: Fabricate as follows: 1. 2.

Locate bottom shelf no lower than 15 inches above the floor. Locate no higher than 48 inches above the floor.

E.

Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed type, aluminum or steel; zinc plated.

F.

Identification Plates: Manufacturer's standard, etched, embossed, or stamped aluminum plates, with numbers and letters at least 3/8 inch high.

G.

Continuous Base: Formed into channel or zee profile for stiffness, and fabricated in lengths as long as practical to enclose base and base ends of metal lockers; finished to match lockers.

H.

Recess Trim: Fabricated with minimum 2-1/2-inch face width and in lengths as long as practical; finished to match lockers.

I.

Filler Panels: Provide slip-joint filler angle formed to receive filler panel. If required by location of installation.

J.

Boxed End Panels: Fabricated with 1-inch wide edge dimension, and designed for concealing fasteners and holes at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers. 1.

K.

Provide one-piece panels for locker ends.

Center Dividers: Full-depth, vertical partitions between bottom and shelf; finished to match lockers.

METAL LOCKERS

105113 - 5


December 7, 2010


EXAMINATION A.

Examine walls, floors, and support bases, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B.

Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

C.


3.2

INSTALLATION A.

General: Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. 1.

2. 3.

Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more than 36 inches o.c. Using concealed fasteners, install anchors through backup reinforcing plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion. Anchor single rows of metal lockers to walls near top and bottom of lockers and lockers to floor. Anchor back-to-back metal lockers to floor.

B.

Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Assemble with standard fasteners, with no exposed fasteners on door faces or face frames.

C.

Equipment and Accessories: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately together to form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates. 1. 2. 3.

Attach hooks with at least two fasteners. Attach door locks on doors using security-type fasteners. Identification Plates: Identify metal lockers with identification indicated on Drawings. a. b.

4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two aluminum rivets. Attach plates to upper shelf of each open-front metal locker, centered, with a least two aluminum rivets.

Attach recess trim to recessed metal lockers with concealed clips. Attach filler panels with concealed fasteners. Locate filler panels where indicated on Drawings. Attach sloping-top units to metal lockers, with closures at exposed ends. Attach boxed end panels with concealed fasteners to conceal exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers. Attach finished end panels with fasteners only at perimeter to conceal exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers.

METAL LOCKERS

105113 - 6


December 7, 2010

ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A.

Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

B.

Protect metal lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit use during construction.

C.

Touch up marred finishes, or replace metal lockers that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer.


METAL LOCKERS

105113 - 7


December 7, 2010

SECTION 131200- PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1

1.2

1.3

SECTION INCLUDES A.

Pre-engineering building and components including the following: 1. Structural steel frame. 2. Roof covering system including exterior roof panels, panel attachments, sealants, mastics, trim and flashings. 3. Exterior wall system including wall panels, panel attachments, sealants, mastics, trim and flashings.

B.

Wall accessories including the following: 1. Service doors 2. Overhead Coiling doors 3. Louvers.

RELATED SECTIONS A.

Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Foundations and anchor bolts.

B.

Section 099000 - Paints and Coatings: Finish painting of structural members, doors, roof curbs, and factory prime painted miscellaneous items.

REFERENCES A.

ASTM A 36/ASTM A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.

B.

ASTM A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength.

C.

ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.

D.

ASTM A 500 - Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.

E.

ASTM A 529/A 529M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality.

F.

ASTM A 572/A 572M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steel.

G.

ASTM A 607 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Columbium or Vanadium, or Both, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled.

H.

ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheets, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDINGS

131200-1


1.4

December 7, 2010

I.

ASTM A 792/A 792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

J.

ASTM A 1011 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low Alloy with Improved Formability.

K.

ASTM D 635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position.

L.

ASTM D 1929 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Properties of Plastics.

M.

ASTM D 2843 - Standard Test Method for Smoke from the Burning or Decomposition of Plastics.

N.

ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

O.

ASTM E 774 - Standard Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units.

P.

ASTM E 1592 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

Q.

AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code; American Welding Society.

R.

NAIMA 202 - Standard for Flexible Fiber Glass Insulation Used in Metal Buildings; North American Insulation Manufacturers Association.

S.

SDI 100 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; Steel Door Institute.

T.

UL 580 - Tests For Wind Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

U.

UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

DEFINITIONS A.

Building Width: Measured from outside to outside of sidewall girts.

B.

Building Length: Measured from outside to outside of end wall girts.

C.

Building Line: Outside face of structural steel.

D.

Building Eave Height: Measured from the top of the eave member at the outside of the sidewall girt line to the bottom of the sidewall column base plate.

E.

Bay Spacing: Measured from centerline to centerline of primary frames for interior bays and from centerline of the first interior frame to outside of end wall girts for end bays.


131200-2


F. 1.5

December 7, 2010

Roof Pitch: The ratio of the vertical rise to the horizontal run.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.

General: 1. Provide pre-engineered metal building frame, metal wall panels, metal roof panels, accessories and miscellaneous materials for a complete enclosure including supports for building components specified in other sections. 2. Design structural systems according to professionally recognized methods and standards and legally adopted building codes. 3. Design under supervision of professional engineer licensed in the jurisdiction of the Project.

B.

Design Requirements: 1. Bay size: Varies. 2. Roof pitch: 4/12. 3. Roof Live Load: Varies by tributary area. (See structural drawings) 4. Collateral Loads: 3 psf. 5.

Floor Load: a. Live Load 1st Floor Heavy: 250 psf. b. Live Load 2nd Floor Storage: 250 psf. c. Live Load 1st Floor Office/Corridor: 100psf. d. Collateral Gravity Load: 3.00 psf. e. Collateral Uplift Loads: 3.00 psf. f. Partition Load: N/A.

6.

Dead loads, including the weight of all indicated permanent construction: a. Elements required for support of lights and light battens, hanging fixtures, mechanical equipment, piping, ceiling hanger wires, and all other items required to provide a complete building and not specifically indicated on the drawings.

7.

Wind loads: a. Roof Wind Load: Calculate in accordance with applicable code, using 140 mph Basic Wind Speed, Exposure Category B, and Importance Factor of 1.0. b.

C.

Panel Rib panel accepted for use by the Dade County Building Commission.

Performance Requirements: 1. Provide frame with design roof profile after vertical dead load deflection has occurred. 2. System to withstand gravity and lateral loads in compliance with contract documents. 3. Refer to contract drawings for additional concentrated loads to pre-engineered building hanger beams and support jacks.


131200-3


a. b.

1.6

Exhaust fans and louvers: 1000 lbs. vertical and 250 lbs. horizontal each unit. Rigging and hoist assembly.

4.

Allowable Deflections a. Vertical: Clear span/180 for total load; clear span/180 for live load. b. Lateral frame movement: Height/60 for a 25 year mean recurrence wind load.

5.

Metal wall panels (interior and exterior) shall not to be used as shear elements.

6.

Construct assembly to permit movement of components without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to temperature range of 100 degrees F

7.

Design and fabricate wall and roof systems free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

SUBMITTALS A.

Design Data: Provide design documents prepared by a professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for permitting the installations of building systems that are indicated for this project in material, design and extent.

B.

Certification: Manufacturer certification that the building conforms to the contract documents and manufacturer's standard design procedures.

C.

Shop Drawings: Show building layout, primary and secondary framing member sizes and locations, cross-sections, and product and connection details. 1.

1.7

December 7, 2010

Anchor Bolt Installation Drawings: Layouts with minimum bolt diameters.

D.

Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

E.

Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.


Manufacturer Qualifications: Not less than 5 years experience in the actual production of specified products. 1. 2.

Member of the Metal Building Manufacturer's Association (MBMA). Certified by AISC in the Metal Building category.


131200-4


3. B.

1.8

1.9

December 7, 2010

Primary manufacturer of frames, secondary steel, roof and wall sheeting, and trim.

Installer Qualifications - Firm experienced in application or installation of systems similar in complexity to those required for this project, plus the following: 1. Acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer. 2. 3 years experience with systems. 3. Successfully completed not less than 5 comparable scale projects using this system.


Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B.

Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.


Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

1.10 WARRANTY A.

Manufacturer shall warranty installed system for the periods described herein, starting from Date of Substantial Completion against all the conditions indicated below. When notified in writing from Owner, manufacturer/installer shall, promptly and without inconvenience and cost to Owner, correct said deficiencies. 1. Materials and Workmanship Warranty: 1 years. 2. Finish Warranty: a. Finish coating shall not peel, blister, chip, crack or check in finish, and shall not chalk in excess of 8 numerical ratings when measured in accordance with ASTM D659. b. Finish coating shall not change color or fade in excess of 5 NBS units as determined by ASTM D2244. 1) Panel finish: 10 years. 2) Panel finish: 20 years. 3. Performance Warranty: Furnish written warranty, stating sheet metal roofing system and flashing under this Section will be maintained in watertight condition and defects resulting from the following items will be corrected without cost to Owner for a period of 10 years. a. Faulty workmanship. b. Defective materials including sealants and fasteners. c. Water infiltration.


131200-5


December 7, 2010

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS A.

Basis of Design: Dean Steel Buildings, Inc. 2929 Industrial Ave. Fort Myers, FL 33901 239-334-1051 Eric Carstensen Other manufactures conforming to project specifications and requirements will be considered.

2.2

2.3

2.4

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING A.

Primary Framing: Rigid Frame (RF Series) solid web framing consisting of tapered or uniform depth rafters rigidly connected to tapered or uniform depth columns. Provide a clear span that supports the loads at bay spacing indicated.

B.

End Wall Framing: Corner posts, end posts and rake beams.

SECONDARY FRAMING A.

Purlins: Zee-shaped; depth as required; with minimum yield strength of 55,000 psi; simple span or continuous span as required for design.

B.

Girts: Zee- or Cee-shaped; depth as required, with minimum yield strength of 55,000 psi; simple span or continuous span as required for design.

C.

Wind Bracing: Portal, torsional, diagonal bracing or diaphragm in accordance with manufacturer's standard design practices; utilizing rods, angles, and other members, with minimum yield strengths as required for design.

MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING A.

2.5

ROOF COVERING SYSTEM A.

2.6

Door Headers and Jambs: Zee- or Cee-shaped; depth as required; with minimum yield strength of 55,000 psi.

Roof Panels: Panel Rib; 36 inch wide net coverage, with 1-1/4 inch high major ribs at 12 inches on center with minor ribs spaced between the major ribs. 1. Material: Galvanized steel, with G90 coating. 2. Side laps: At least one full major rib, with a supporting member bearing edge on the lower panel. 3. Length: Continuous from eave to ridge. 4. End laps, where required: 6 inches wide, located at a support member.

WALL COVERING SYSTEM A.

Wall Panels: Panel Rib; 36 inch wide net coverage, with 1-1/4 inch high major ribs at 12 inches on center with minor ribs spaced between the major ribs.


131200-6


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

B. 2.7

2.8

Material: Galvanized steel, with G90 coating. Thickness: 24 gage. Side laps: One fully overlapping major ribs secured together with 1/4 inch diameter color-matched carbon steel fasteners. Length: Continuous from sill to eave. End laps, where required: 4 inches wide, located at a support member. Cut panels square at each end; provide base trim at sill.

Soffit Panels: Match Wall Panel.

WALL ACCESSORIES A.

Service Doors: 1. Doors: Refer to specification section “081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”. 2. Type: Full flush. 3. Frames: Refer to specification section “081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”. 4. Hardware reinforcements: Refer to specification section “081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”. 5. Finish: Refer to specification section “081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”. 6. Weatherstripping: At jambs, head and sill, complying with water and air resistance requirements of SDI 115 and SDI 116. 7. Hardware: a. One key in-knob cylindrical lockset per opening. b. One mullion and one pair surface bolts per double door opening. c. Three full mortise hinges per leaf, one with non-removable pin.

B.

Louvers: Contractor to purchase louver and.

C.

Wall Openings: Cold-formed sheet metal framing concealed with manufacturer's standard bronze trim.

ROOF ACCESSORIES A.

2.9

December 7, 2010

Eave Gutters: Roll-formed 26 gage steel sheet, with gutter straps, fasteners and joint sealant; manufacturer's standard bronze color. 1. Downspouts: 4 by 5 inches in 10 foot lengths, with downspout elbows and downspout straps; same color as wall panels.

MATERIALS A.

Structural Steel Plate, Bar, Sheet, and Strip for Use in Bolted and Welded Constructions: ASTM A 572/A 572M, A 529/A 529M, A 1011 or A 36/A 36M Modified 50, with minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi.

B.

Structural Steel Material for Use in Roll Formed or Press Broken Secondary


131200-7


December 7, 2010

Structural Members: ASTM A 607, with minimum yield strength of 55,000 psi. C.

Galvanized Steel Sheet for Roll Formed or Press Broken Roof and Wall Coverings, Trim and Flashing: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi.

D.

Galvalume Steel Sheet Used in Roll Formed or Press Broken Roof Covering: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 792/A 792M, with minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi; nominal coating weight of 0.5 oz per sq ft both sides, equivalent to an approximate coating thickness of 0.0018 inch both sides.

E.

Hot Rolled Steel Shapes: W, M and S shapes, angles, rods, channels and other shapes; ASTM A 500, ASTM A 572/A 572M or ASTM A 36/A 36M as applicable; with minimum yield strengths required for the design.

F.

Structural Bolts and Nuts Used with Primary Framing: High strength, ASTM A 325.

G.

Bolts and Nuts Used with Secondary Framing Members: ASTM A 307.

H.

Panel Fasteners: 1. For Galvalume and KXL finished roof panels: Stainless steel-capped carbon steel fasteners with integral sealing washer. 2. For SP finished roof panels: Coated carbon steel. 3. For wall panels: Coated carbon steel. 4. Color of exposed fastener heads to match the wall panel finish. 5. Concealed Fasteners: Self-drilling type, of size as required. 6. Provide fasteners in quantities and location as required by the manufacturer.

I.

Flashing and Trim: Match material, finish, and color of adjacent components. Provide trim at rakes, including peak and corner assemblies, high and low eaves, corners, bases, framed openings and as required or specified to provide weathertightness and a finished appearance.

J.

Plastic Parts: Glass fiber reinforced resin or thermoformed ABS (Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene). 1. ABS: Minimum 1/8 inch thick. 2. Color: Manufacturer's standard color.

K.

Sealants, Mastics and Closures: Manufacturer's standard type. 1. Provide at roof panel end laps, side laps, rake, eave, transitions and accessories as required to provide a weather resistant roof system; use tape mastic or gun grade sealant at side laps and end laps. 2. Provide at wall panel rakes, eaves, transitions and accessories. 3. Closures: Formed to match panel profiles; closed cell elastic material, manufacturer's standard color. 4. Tape mastic: Pre-formed butyl rubber-based, non-hardening, non-corrosive to metal; white or light gray. 5. Gun grade sealant: Non-skinning synthetic Elastomeric based material; gray


131200-8


December 7, 2010

or bronze. 2.10 FABRICATION A.

Fabrication: Fabricate according to manufacturer's standard practice. 1. Fabricate structural members made of welded plate sections by jointing the flanges and webs by continuous automatic submerged arc welding process. 2. Welding operators and processes: Qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1. 3. Field connections: Prepare members for bolted field connection by making punched, drilled, or reamed holes in the shop.

B.

Component Identification: Mark all fabricated parts, either individually or by lot or group, using an identification marking corresponding to the marking shown on the shop drawings, using a method that remains visible after shop painting.

2.11 FINISH A.

Schedule of Finishes: 1. Roof finish and color: TBD. 2. Wall finish and color: TBD. 3. Mansard panel finish and color: TBD. 4. Liner panel finish and color: TBD. 5. Soffit panels finish and color: TBD.

B.

Shop Coat: Iron Oxide primer/ paint; manufacturer's standard color.

C.

KXL Pre-Painted Finish: 1 mil Kynar 500 coating on exterior surface. 1. Color: Interior Finish: Off white 0.5 mil washcoat. 2. Color: Exterior Finish: To be selected from manufacturer’s standard selection of Kynar 500 finishes.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION A.

3.2

Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and or timely completion. 1. Verify foundations are properly installed, to correct dimensions and within acceptable tolerances. 2. Verify location of covered or built-in work. 3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

PREPARATION A.

Framing Erection: Erect framing in compliance with AISC Specification.

B.

Provide for erection and wind loads. Provide temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb and in alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. Locate braced bays as required by manufacturer.


131200-9


3.3

3.4

3.5

December 7, 2010

ERECTION OF FRAME A.

Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B.

Do not erect frames without complete installation of tie beams and anchorages.

C.

Set column base plates with non-shrink grout to full plate bearing.

D.

Do not field cut or alter structural members without written approval.

E.

After erection, welds, abrasions, and surfaces not primed with primer used in shop painting.

INSTALLATION OF WALL AND ROOF SYSTEM A.

Install in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.

B.

Exercise care when cutting prefinished material to ensure cuttings do not remain on finish surface.

C.

Fasten cladding system to structural supports, aligned level and plumb.

D.

Locate end laps over supports. End lap panels according to manufacturer's recommendations. Place sidelaps over bearing.

E.

Provide expansion joints where indicated.

F.

Install sealant and gaskets to prevent weather penetration.

G.

Install system free of rattles, noise due to thermal movement, and wind whistles.

H.

Install door frames, service doors, overhead doors, window and glass, and gutter system in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.

I.

Seal wall and roof accessories watertight and weathertight with sealant in compliance with building manufacturer's standard procedures.

J.

Rigidly support and secure gutters and downpouts. Joint lengths with formed seams sealed watertight. Flash and seal gutters to downspouts.

K.

Apply bituminous paint on surfaces in contact with cementitious materials.

L.

Tolerances: 1. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from level; 1/8 inch from plumb. 2. Racking: 1/8 inch from true position. Provide shoring to maintain position prior to cladding installation.


Testing by Contractor: 1. Roof installation inspection by roof manufacturer's representative; as required as part of warranty provision.


131200-10


B.

December 7, 2010

Testing by Owner: 1. High Strength Bolted Connections: Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, with minimum testing of bolted connections per the arbitration inspection procedure. 2. Welded Connections: AWS. Visual inspection of 100 percent of welds. Ultrasonic inspection of 50 percent of full and partial penetration welds. A rejection rate greater than 5 percent will increase the inspection to 100 percent. 3. General Testing: For materials and installed tolerances.

END OF SECTION


131200-11

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00

12/7/10

SECTION 211000 - FIRE PROTECTION All Conditions and Addenda thereto govern the work of this Section.

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

The work performed under this Section shall be by a State of Florida certified Fire Protection Contractor with a minimum of 5 years experience.

1.2

This section shall govern the furnishing of all labor, equipment, materials and services necessary to install complete operating wet sprinkler systems, in strict accordance with NFPA-13 and -24 and all applicable specifications.

1.3

All threads shall be in accordance with local fire department specifications.

1.4

Standards: All equipment and devices shall be U.L./F.M. approved.

1.5

SCOPE A. Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Automatic sprinkler systems, (1) free standing fire department connection and fire hydrant with supply underground mains, any and all accessories as shown on drawings or as required by the local fire department and NFPA-13 and -24, or Architect/Engineer. 2. Contractor shall visit site to check all existing conditions prior to bidding. 3. Contractor shall perform flow test for this project prior to performing hydraulic calculations and shop drawing layout to verify requirements specified in this section. Inform Architect/Engineer if changes in design parameters are indicated based on the latest flow test. 4. Not less than six (6) sets dated shop drawings and hydraulic calculations shall be submitted to the local fire department planning office for stamped approval. The approved copies are then to be submitted to Architect and Engineer for approval prior to commencing any construction. 5. Material submittals shall be submitted to Architect/Engineer on all fire protection items and/or equipment for approval and shall be approved before any installation. 6. Tests, shall be conducted pursuant to NFPA-13 and -24. 7. Inspection and final approval shall be by local Fire Department and Architect/Engineer. 8. Obtain all applicable permits and adhere to all governmental requirements. 9. Backfill and compaction to normal grade will be by this Contractor. Contractor to verify water tables and be responsible for de-watering if required.

1.6

Auxiliaries and Accessories: Include all auxiliaries and accessories for complete and properly operating systems.

FIRE PROTECTION

211000 - 1


12/7/10

1.7

Coordination: Provide all required coordination and supervision where work connects to or is affected by work of other trades.

1.8

Layout of Work: Correlate final equipment location with governing Architectural and Structural drawings. Lay out work before installation so that all trades may install equipment in spaces available. Provide coordination as required for installation in a neat and workmanlike manner.

1.9

Provisions for Openings: Locate all openings required for work performed under this section. Provide approved fire rated black steel Schedule 40 sleeves to allow passage of items installed under this section.

1.10

Supervision of the Work: Provide a field superintendent who has had previous successful experience on projects of comparable size and complexity. Superintendent shall be present at all times that work is being installed. Submit the proposed superintendent's experience qualifications for Architect/Engineer's review.

1.11

Protection and Clean-Up: Suitably protect all equipment furnished under this Division during construction. All rubbish occasioned by this installation shall be periodically removed from the premises and all exposed work shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to final acceptance. Restore any damaged surfaces and items to "like new" condition before a request for final acceptance.

1.12

Reports on Progress of Work Memo: Items noted during construction and before final acceptance which do not comply with the Contract Documents will be listed in a "Report on Progress of Work Memo" which will be sent to the Contractor for action. The Contractor shall have these items corrected, and shall sign and enter the date on which the item was corrected on two copies of the memo as indication that the item was corrected, and return the signed memos so items can be rechecked. Failure to return the signed memos shall be cause for disallowing monthly request for payments. Items noted after acceptance during one year guarantee period shall be checked by the Contractor in the same manner as above and signed memos returned by him when the items have been corrected.

1.13

Progress and Record Drawings: Keep two sets of white prints on the job. Neatly mark up design drawings with colored pencils each day as components (incorporate any/all changes to original design) are installed. Different colored pencils shall be used for different systems. Cost of prints shall be included under this Division. At the end of the project, all changes shall be transferred to a set of sepias of the design drawings to be forwarded to Engineer. Cost of the sepias and of the drafting involved shall be included under this Division.

1.14

Until system is completed, tested and accepted, this Contractor shall be responsible for repair of leaks, and accidental breaks.

1.15

Contractor shall instruct Owner's designated employee in the proper operation and maintenance all fire protection systems and/or equipment. Contractor will also furnish Owner with two (2) sets of typed operating instructions in hard-cover, 3-ring binders.

1.16

Performance Verification: Operate systems as required to demonstrate that the systems are operating correctly in accordance with the design, (this is to include line pressure testing). Supply instruments required to read data. Adjust systems to operate at the required performance levels. Advise Engineer 3 working days in advance of the time that the work will be done.

FIRE PROTECTION

211000 - 2


12/7/10

Tabulate data for submission. Submit tabulated data on 8-1/2" x 11" sheets with data, time and name of checker with one copy for each technical information brochure. Data shall be submitted and approved before Check-out Memos are signed or a request for final inspection is made. 1.17

Guarantee: Contractor shall guarantee in writing, his responsibility for defective materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of Final Acceptance issued by the Architect and correct any deficiencies, labor and material, without additional cost to Owner.

1.18

Instruction to Owner: Submit all required items for checking one week before final inspection of the building is scheduled. When all items are approved and placed in the proper brochures, the Contractor shall give notice in writing that he is ready to give the Owner an "Instruction in Operation Conference". After the above mentioned request is received, the Contractor will be notified of the time the conference can be held with the Owner. At the conference, the Contractor shall review with the Owner all appropriate information. At the end of the conference, seven copies of an Instruction in Operation Conference Memo shall be signed by the Contractor, Subcontractor and Owner and one copy inserted in each brochure.

1.19

Time Schedule for Final Inspection of System: All work on the System shall be complete and all forms and other information shall have been submitted and approved before the request for a substantial completion inspection is made.

1.20

Roughing-in for equipment by others: Rough-in all equipment requiring connections to systems furnished by this division and by others. Verify requirements and correct locations before proceeding with work.

1.21

Technical Information Brochure: Submit before start of construction or within ten days after award of the Contract. A. Each brochure shall consist of an adequately sized, hard-cover, 3-ring binder for 8-1/2" x 11" sheets. Provide correct designation on outside cover and on end of brochure.

PART 2 - MATERIALS AND METHODS 2.1

Pipe shall be new, designed for 175 PSI working pressure, conforming to ASTM specifications, and have the manufacturer's name or brand, along with the applicable ASTM standard, marked on each length of pipe.

2.2

2" or smaller pipe and all screwed pipe shall be steel, Schedule 40, black, and in accordance with specifications ASTM A120 or A53.

2.3

2-1/2" or larger pipe shall be steel, Schedule 10, black, and in accordance with specification ASTM A135.

2.4

Schedule 40 black steel pipe shall be joined by screwed joints in accordance with specification ANSI B2.1.

FIRE PROTECTION

211000 - 3


12/7/10

2.5

Schedule 10 black steel ASTM A135 sprinkler pipe shall be joined by UL and FM approved mechanical couplings. Couplings may be of the rolled groove type or the mechanical locking type (push-on). Grooves for the rolled groove type shall be rolled only (die cut grooving will not be permitted) and they shall be dimensionally compatible with the coupling.

2.6

All black steel pipe must be preoxidized with a suitable protective coating. All pipe and valving shall be installed rust-free.

2.7

All ASTM A53 and ASTM A120 sprinkler pipe must be hydrostatic tested at the mill pursuant to the ASTM standard.

2.8

All ASTM A135 sprinkler pipe must be tested with a non-destructive electric test for continuous and uninterrupted inspection of the welded seam.

2.9

Screwed fittings shall be cast iron, 125 lb. class, black, and in accordance with ANSI B16.4 or malleable iron, 150 lb. class, black, and in accordance with ANSI B16.3. Style of fittings shall be Stockham or ITT Grinnell.

2.10

Flanged fittings shall be threaded, cast iron, short body, Class 125, black, and in accordance with ANSI B16.1. Gaskets shall be full face of 1/8" minimum thickness red sheet rubber. Flange bolts shall be hexagon head machine bolts with heavy semi-finished hexagon head nuts, cadmium plated, having dimensions in accordance with ANSI B18.2. Grooved flanges shall not be permitted. Style of fittings shall be Stockham or ITT Grinnell.

2.11

Welded branch connections shall be steel; standard weight, black, in accordance with AWSD10.9 and ANSI B31.1. Weld branch connections to main shall be permitted when pipe size of the branch line is more than (2) two nominal pipe sizes smaller than main. Style of welded connections shall be Allied.

2.12

Grooved couplings and mechanical fittings shall be malleable iron, 500 PSI working pressure, in accordance with ASTM A47. Coupling gasket material shall be butyl rubber. Grooved couplings and mechanical fittings shall be tested and listed by UL and/or FM. Style of grooved coupling/fittings shall be Victaulic. Grooved mechanical fittings such as; mechanical tees, rousta-bout, plain end fitting, hookers, etc. shall not be used unless written permission from Engineer is obtained prior to any submissions or installation.

2.13

Underground piping shall be UL-FM approved, ductile iron, water pipe Class #52. Fittings shall be Class 250, Mechanical Joints. Install in strict accordance with NFPA-24. All underground bends shall be rodded and thrust blocked. All pipe shall be installed rust-free.

2.14

Corrosion Protection: Supply pipes, risers, branch lines, fittings, hangers, sprinkler, or any/all fire protection materials that are installed where corrosive conditions exist, or moisture may be present, the contractor shall provide protective coating that resists corrosion ie. galvanization. Galvanized painting shall not be permitted.

2.15

Automatic sprinkler heads shall have temperature ratings of fusible elements to be in accordance with NFPA-13.

FIRE PROTECTION

211000 - 4


12/7/10

2.16

Furnish spare sprinkler heads of each type, with wrench, in wall mounted cabinet. As required by NFPA-13, 6.2.9.

2.17

See drawings for sprinkler types and locations and/or Architect or Engineer.

2.18

Coordinate sprinkler spacing with all other trades as required.

2.19

Hangers: Methods of hanging pipes, headers and branches shall be approved by NFPA-13. All hangers on 4" pipe and larger is to be Clevis type hangers. Powder driven studs shall not be permitted. All hangers shall be U.L./F.M. approved.

2.20

Tests: Hydrostatic tests shall be conducted in accordance with the "National Fire Codes." Tests must be witnessed by Owner's representative.

2.21

Codes: Wherever, or whenever questions may arise, approval and directions shall be guided by the "National Fire Codes" and/or Architect-Engineer.

2.22

All wet-pipe system pipe sizes have been hydraulically proven and classified in strict accordance to NFPA-13.

2.23

Fire extinguishers shall be provided under other divisions of this specification.

2.24

Furnish and install (1) alarm check valve with variable pressure trim - see drawings for detail size and locations. Style of valve, trim shall be Gem F200 valve/variable pressure trim

2.25

The fire protection contractor shall submit to the Architect/Engineer a complete set of drawings indicating pipe layout, valve configuration and all details required for system installation. The fire protection contractor shall coordinate with the fire alarm contractor to provide proper interface with the fire alarm system.

2.26

Furnish and install (2) 2-1/2" x 2-1/2" x 4" fire department connection with chrome finish; see drawings for location. F.D.C. shall be Potter Roemer or Elkhart.

2.27

Provide and install post indicator valves. As required by local codes. Style of post indicator valves shall be Mueller Adjustable #G-1 or Stockham #G-951.

2.28

Electric Waterflow Devices and Supervisory Switches: A. Furnish devices for installation of electrical flow and valve supervisory switches, whose function is to respond to flow in the sprinkler system and to sound an alarm if any system valve is closed. B. Waterflow detector device shall have built-in pneumatic retard device with automatic reset dial and two snap-action SPDT switches (U.L./F.M. approved). C. Flow switches style shall be Notifier. D. All exterior switches shall be rated for outside installation.

FIRE PROTECTION

211000 - 5


12/7/10

2.29

Coordinate with Electrical Contractor to insure all fire protection electrical items have been properly completed.

2.30

Electrical switches shall be furnished and installed under this Division and wired under Division26.

2.31

Gate valves for fire service shall be approved by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., and the Factory Mutual Laboratories. Valves shall be factory marked "UL" and "FM", 175 PSI working pressure. Gate valves 2-1/2" or larger shall be flanged OS&Y type. Gate valves 2" or smaller shall be butterball type. Style of valves shall be Stockham #G-634 or Mueller #B-1.

2.32

Check valves for fire service shall be approved by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., and the Factory Mutual Laboratories. Valves shall be factory marked "UL" and "FM", 175 PSI working pressure. Spring loaded wafer check valves shall be used aboveground. Style of valves shall be Mueller or Mission.

2.33

Furnish and install 4" backflow preventer; see drawings for location. Style of backflow preventer shall be Wilkins #475DA. Backflow preventer shall include backflow preventer and OS&Y's factory assembled and shipped as one unit.

2.34

Furnish and install 10" electric bell(s) 24 DC. Style of electric bells shall be Notifier N-CO-Bell. See drawings for locations.

PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.1

General: All materials, equipment and accessories shall be installed in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 13 and 24.

3.2

All pipe hangers shall be securely anchored to the building structural components and shall be listed and approved by UL-FM, and Architect/Engineer. (Powder driven anchors are not permissible.)

3.3

The entire system shall be flushed with clean water to remove debris resulting from installation.

3.4

All required grouting shall be with non-shrink grout.

PART 4 - TESTING 4.1

ACCEPTANCE TESTS A. Underground mains and lead-in connections to system risers shall be flushed before connection is made to sprinkler piping in order to remove foreign materials which may have entered the underground piping during the course of the installation. For all systems, the flushing operation shall be continued until water is clear.

FIRE PROTECTION

211000 - 6


12/7/10

B. Underground mains and lead-in connections shall be flushed at a flow rate not less than indicated in the following table or at the hydraulically calculated water demand rate of the system, whichever is greater. C. Main Flushing Rate Table: Main Pipe Size Flow Rate 4 in. 6 in. 8 in. 10 in. 12 in.

390 gpm 880 gpm 1560 gpm 2440 gpm 3520 gpm

D. Provision shall be made for the disposal of water issuing from test outlets to avoid property damage.

4.2

HYDROSTATIC TESTS A. Systems including yard piping shall be hydrostatically tested at not less than 200 psi pressure for 2 hours, or at 50 psi in excess of the maximum pressure, when the maximum pressure to be maintained in the system is in excess of 150 psi. B. The test pressure shall be read from a gauge located at the low elevation point of the individual system or portion of the system being tested. C. The inside sprinkler piping shall be installed in such a manner that there will be no visible leakage when the system is subjected to the hydrostatic pressure test. D. Piping between the check valve in the fire department inlet pipe and the outside connection shall be tested the same as the balance of the system. E. Whenever a test blank is used it shall be of the self-indicating type. Test blanks shall have red painted lugs protruding beyond the flange in such a way as to clearly indicate their presence. The Contractor shall have all test blanks numbered so as to keep track of their use and assure their removal after the work is completed. F. Approval of Sprinkler Systems: 1. The Contractor shall perform all required acceptance tests in accordance with NFPA-13 and -24. Complete the Contractor's Material and Test Certificate(s), and forward the fire department approved certificate(s) to the Architect/Engineer for approval of the installation. 2. All test certificate(s) shall be dated, signed and witnessed by the local fire department and/or other authority having jurisdiction. Submit one copy of each test certificate to Architect/Engineer.

FIRE PROTECTION

211000 - 7


12/7/10

PART 5 - HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS 5.1

Contractor shall perform a flow test and hydraulic calculations at the time of construction to verify adequacy based on the latest flow data.

5.2

Submit calculations along with applicable drawings for review by local fire department.


FIRE PROTECTION

211000 - 8


12/7/10

SECTION 220001 - PLUMBING, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2

SCOPE OF DIVISION A. Work shall include all materials, equipment and labor necessary for a complete and properly functioning mechanical installation in accordance with all applicable codes, and contract drawings and specifications. Work shall include all work specified in Division-22 PLUMBING. B. Pay for all required licenses, fees, inspections and permits.

1.3

RELATION TO OTHER WORK A. Work Not in Division-22: Related work not included in this division consists of requirements given in the following as may be included in the contract documents: 1. Other divisions which may include work (such as concrete, steel, painting, ceiling systems, structure and other work) related to the work of Division-22. Equipment, Piping and Valve identification is specified in Division 23. B. Work of Division-22: Any or all sections of Division-22 may include a paragraph or paragraphs under the heading, "Relation to other Work". Where such a paragraph is indicated and work directly related to the section is listed or described, such work shall be considered as relating directly to the indicated section. Any related work (directly related or otherwise) which may be omitted by reference from the "Relation to Other Work" paragraph of such section(s), shall be provided as necessary and required whether or not such work is included by reference. Such listing or description of related work within a section is given only as a convenience to the Contractor; omission of other related sections or described work does not in any way exclude the provision of such work.

1.4

CODES A. Install all work in accordance with the latest edition of all applicable regulations and governing codes, including the regulations of the utility companies serving the project.

PLUMBING, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

220001 - 1


12/7/10

B. Where a conflict in code requirements occurs the more stringent requirement shall govern.

1.5

STANDARDS A. All equipment and devices shall bear U.L. label, the label of an industry recognized approved testing agency or A.G.A. certification for said item of equipment or device. B. All electrical devices must be U.L. approved.

1.6

DRAWINGS A. Architectural and structural drawings take precedence over mechanical drawings with reference to the building construction. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement and extent of work. Architectural drawings indicate more exactly the desired relationship between diffusers, registers, lighting fixtures, equipment, electric panels and devices, plumbing fixtures, and other items which remain exposed in the completed building. Exact locations and arrangement of materials and equipment shall be determined, with the acceptance of the Architect/Engineer, as work progresses to conform in the best possible manner with the surroundings and with the adjoining work of other trades. Where locations of equipment, devices or fixtures are controlled by architectural features, establish such locations by referring to dimensions on Architectural drawings and not by scaling drawings.

1.7

DISCREPANCIES A. In case of differences between drawings and specifications, or where drawings and specifications are not clear or definite, the subject shall be referred to Architect/Engineer for clarification and instructions.

1.8

ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS A. Work of Division 22 includes various electrical requirements (a) which incorporate specific electrical features and components which are required to be physically integral with mechanical equipment, or (b) which require necessary electrical interconnecting components for the mechanical systems. Such electrical-related work to be provided as work of Division 22 includes (but is not necessarily limited to) the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Motors integral with the mechanical equipment. Motor starters (controllers) integral with the mechanical equipment. Electrical heating coils and similar elements integral with mechanical equipment. Electrical work specified in Division 23 for the HVAC control system. Drip pans to protect electrical work.


220001 - 2


12/7/10

B. Drip Pans: Where possible, do not run mechanical piping directly above electrical (or electronic) equipment which is sensitive to moisture; otherwise provide drip pans under mechanical piping. Locate pan below piping, and extend 6" on each side of piping and lengthwise 18" beyond equipment. Fabricate pans 2" deep, of reinforced sheet metal with rolled edges and soldered or welded seams; 20 gage copper, or 16 gage steel with 2 oz. zinc finish hot dipped after fabrication. Provide 3/4" copper drainage piping, properly discharged. C. Motors: Unless specifically specified otherwise in the section covering the driven equipment (or the equipment drives), motors shall comply with the following: 1. Three Phase: NEMA design B, three-phase, squirrel cage induction type designed for 1800 rpm synchronous speed for operation in 40oC ambient at 1.15 service factor at constant speed on the scheduled voltage. Motors shall be insulated with Class B insulation material and shall be cast iron, drip proof, horizontal foot mounted type with ball bearings. Two speed motors shall be provided as scheduled and shall be two winding type. 2. Single Phase: Squirrel cage induction type designed for 1800 rpm synchronous speed for operation in 40oC ambient at 1.15 service factor at constant speed on the scheduled voltage. Motors shall be insulated with Class B insulation materials and shall be two winding capacitor start type with steel enclosure, drip proof, horizontal foot mount and ball bearings. 3. Electric motors which are designated to be high efficiency type shall also comply with the section describing high efficiency motors. 4. Manufacturer: Electric motors, complying with the requirements of this Section and the installation and performance requirements of the plans, by the following manufacturers are acceptable: a. b. c. d.

Reliance Electric Gould Electric General Electric Westinghouse

D. Scheduled Horsepower: The horsepower scheduled or specified are those nominal sizes estimated to be required by the equipment when operating at specified duties and efficiencies. In the case of pumps, these horsepower’s are non-overloading and may also include provisions for future planned impeller changes. If the actual horsepower for the equipment furnished differs from that specified or shown on the drawings, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to insure that proper size feeders, breakers, starters, etc. are provided at no change in contract price. E. Any TEFC motors shall have Class F insulation. F. Drip proof protected motors shall have Class B insulation.


220001 - 3

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1.9

12/7/10

COORDINATION BETWEEN DIVISION 22 AND DIVISION 26 OF WORK RELATED TO POWER AND CONTROL REQUIREMENTS A. Definitions: Definitions for the purpose of mechanical/electrical control and power coordination are as given below. Any items which do not fall within the scope of this paragraph shall be coordinated as individually specified. 1. "Furnish" means to procure an item and to deliver it to the project for installation. 2. "Install" means to determine (in coordination with others as necessary) the appropriate intended location of an item and to set and connect it in place. 3. "Provide" means to both furnish and install. 4. Power Circuit: Circuit which carries main electric power to apparatus to which the power circuit is connected. 5. Control Circuit: Circuit which carries electrical signals directing the performance of a controller but which does not carry the main electric power. (See NEC, Section 430-71.) Such circuits shall also include those which serve a dual control and power function (e.g., a line voltage thermostat circuit which both activates and powers a small fan motor). 6. Controller: A device, or group of devices, which serves to govern, in some predetermined manner, electric power delivered to apparatus to which the controller is connected and includes any switch or device normally used to start and stop a motor. (See NEC, Article 100, Definitions, "Controller", and Section 430-81(a).) 7. Control Device: A device which reacts to an operating condition (pressure, temperature, flow, humidity, etc.) and which initiates transmission of an electrical control signal which causes operation of a controller or which causes operation of pressure switches, etc. 8. Auxiliary Control Device: A device (such as a low voltage control transformer, electric relay, etc.) which is located in a control circuit and which carries or responds to (but does not initiate) an electrical control signal initiated by a control device. B. Work of Division-22 includes (but is not necessarily limited to): 1. Provide: a. All controllers which are generally manufactured or shipped as integral with Division-22 equipment. b. All electrical power consuming equipment (such as electric water heaters, pumps, etc.) which are specified in Division-22. c. All control circuits (including conduit and boxes) from the Division-26 panels to point of use including the necessary circuit breakers. d. All other control circuits, including conduit and boxes. e. All control connections to equipment. f. All control connections to controllers, switches, motors and other mechanical systems electrical power consuming equipment (such as electric water heaters, pumps, etc.). g. Auxiliary control devices. h. All control devices (thermostats, pressure switches, flow switches, etc.) and make control circuit connections thereto. i. Any and all electronic and electric control devices and electric or pneumatic connections thereto.


220001 - 4


12/7/10

2. Furnish: a. All controllers which are generally manufactured and/or shipped as separate but companion items to Division-22 equipment. C. Work of Division-26 includes (but is not necessarily limited to): 1. Provide: a. All power circuits, including conduit and boxes. b. All power connections to controllers, switches, motors and other mechanical systems electrical power consuming equipment (such as electric hot water heaters, etc.). c. All remote motor disconnects (remote from the related controller) at all locations required by NEC and connections thereto except those disconnects which are specified in Division-23 to be provided as part of the equipment itself. d. All controllers (except those which are generally manufactured or shipped as separate but companion items to Division-22 equipment. 2. Install: a. All controllers which are generally manufactured and/or shipped as separate but companion items to Division-22 equipment.

1.10

AUXILIARIES AND ACCESSORIES A. Include all auxiliaries and accessories for complete and properly operating systems.

1.11

INVESTIGATION OF SITE A. Check site and existing conditions thoroughly before bidding. Advise Architect/Engineer of discrepancies or questions noted before bidding.

1.12

ASBESTOS A. Should asbestos, or any other hazardous waste material, be encountered during the execution of the work, or should the presence of asbestos or any other hazardous material be suspected, immediately notify the Architect/Engineer and the Owner and suspend all work in the affected area. The Owner will activate an assessment study to determine the presence of asbestos, or other hazardous material, and evaluate what condition it is in. Removal of asbestos, or other hazardous material, if required, will be conducted by a qualified Contractor, and will be done under separate contract.


220001 - 5


12/7/10

COORDINATION A. Provide all required coordination and supervision where work of this division interfaces directly or indirectly with work of any other divisions.

1.14

PROVISIONS FOR OPENINGS A. Provide all openings required for work of Division-22. Provide sleeves or other approved methods to allow passage of items installed under any Section of Division-22.

1.15

INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING SERVICES A. Any interruption of existing mechanical services shall be coordinated in advance with the Owner's Representative. This includes, but is not limited to, services providing chilled water, steam, compressed air, medical gasses, ventilation air systems, exhaust air systems, plumbing systems or other critical systems as may be pertinent to this particular project. Service interruption times and duration of interruption of services shall be decided by the Owner. Provide appropriate provisions (e.g., isolation shut-off valves, dampers, end caps, and similar items) as necessary to accommodate the required service interruptions.

1.16

CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Equipment: All mechanical equipment provided shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, oil, concrete, etc. Any dents, scratches or other visible blemishes shall be corrected and the appearance of the equipment made "like new" and to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. B. Upon completion, and before final acceptance of the work, all debris, rubbish, leftover materials, tools and equipment shall be removed from the site. C. Protection of Work Until Final Acceptance: Protect all materials and equipment from damage, entrance of dirt and construction debris from the time of installation until final acceptance. Any materials and equipment which are damaged shall be repaired to "as new" condition or replaced at the direction of the Architect/Engineer. Where factory finishes occur and damage is minor, finishes may be touched up. If, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer the damage is excessive, factory finish shall be replaced to "new" condition.

1.17

SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings for all Division 22 work including all items, services and systems provided for the project. B. Shop drawings for each of the following groups shall be submitted as a single submission for that particular group. Submission of more than one group as a single submission is encouraged.


220001 - 6


12/7/10

1. All plumbing work. 2. All plumbing insulation work. C. Provide a shop drawing submission schedule for all Division 22 work to the Architect/Engineer for approval. Allow sufficient time in making shop drawing submission to provide for Architect/Engineer=s review, rejection, resubmission, rejection and resubmission without creating project construction delays of any type. Consider that Architect/Engineer will require not less than 10 working days for the submittal to be in the possession of the reviewing design professional for review and comment for each submission. D. Shop drawings shall clearly show the following: 1. Technical and descriptive data in detail equal to or greater than the data given in the item specification. Indicate all characteristics, special modifications and features. Where performance and characteristic data is shown on the drawings or specified, submitted data shall be provided in a degree which is both quantitatively and qualitatively equal to that specified and shown so that comparison can be made. Present data in detail equal to or greater than that given in item specification and include all weights, deflections, speeds, velocities, pressure drops, operating temperatures, operating curves, temperature ranges, sound ratings, dimensions, sizes, manufacturers' names, model numbers, types of material used, operating pressures, full load amperages, starting amperages, fouling factors, capacities, set points, chemical compositions, certifications and endorsements, operating voltages, thicknesses, gauges and all other related information as applicable to particular item. 2. Exceptions to or deviations from the contract documents. Should Architect/Engineer accept any items having such deviations which are not clearly brought to Architect/Engineer's attention, in writing, on item submittal, then Contractor is responsible for correction of such deviations regardless of when such deviations are discovered. E. Additional Requirements: See specific sections of the Specifications for any additional requirements.

1.18

SHOP DRAWINGS TECHNICAL INFORMATION BROCHURE A. Near conclusion of work and not less than 10 days prior to Substantial Completion Inspection, submit a Technical Information Document (TID) containing all final shop drawing and submittal information for the project. This Technical Information Document shall consist of one or more adequately sized, hard-cover, 3-ring binder for 8-1/2" x 11" sheets. Provide correct designation on outside cover and on spine of binder, i.e., mechanical. B. First sheet in the TID shall be a photocopy of the "Division-22 Index" for these specifications. Second sheet shall be prepared by the Contractor and shall list Project addresses for this Project for Contractor and all major subcontractors and suppliers. C. Provide reinforced separation sheets tabbed with the appropriate specifications section reference number and typed index for each section.


220001 - 7


12/7/10

D. Shop drawing technical and descriptive data shall be inserted in the TID in proper order on all items. Mark the appropriate specification section or drawing reference number in the right hand corner of each item. Provide complete information, including, but not limited to, wiring and control diagrams, scale drawings showing that proposed substitute equipment will fit into allotted space (indicate all service access, connections, etc.), test data, and other data required to determine if equipment complies fully with the specifications. All typewritten pages shall be on contractor or equipment manufacturer printed letterhead. E. At the end of the TID, provide and insert a copy of the specifications for Division-22 and all addenda applicable to this Division. F. Submit not less than six TID=s. Provide separate tag marking on an individual copy for the Owner, Architect, Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractor (two copies). G. Contractor shall review the TID before submitting. Submittal information on each item in each TID shall bear the Contractor's stamp of approval, initials of checker and date checked by him. No request for payment of or substitutions will be considered until TID has been reviewed by the Contractor and submitted for checking.

1.21

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Submit for checking a specific set of written operating instructions on each item which requires instructions to operate. After acceptance, insert information in each Technical Information Document. Refer also to other sections which may describe operating instructions.

1.22

MAINTENANCE INFORMATION A. Submit for acceptance Maintenance Information consisting of manufacturer's printed instruction and parts lists for each major item of equipment. After acceptance, insert information in each Technical Information Document. Refer also to other sections which may describe maintenance.

1.23

MANUFACTURER'S CHECK-OUT A. Check out by Manufacturer's Representative (for major items of equipment): At completion of construction and after performance verification information as above-mentioned has been gathered, submitted and accepted, provide one copy of this information to the manufacturer's representative. Work required under this section shall include having the representative examine the performance verification information, check the equipment in the field while it is operating, and sign a Check-Out Memo for record. Submit a copy of the memo on each major item of equipment for each brochure. Accepted memos shall be inserted on each brochure with the performance verification information and submittal data. Memos shall be submitted and accepted before Instruction in Operation to Owner or a request for final inspection.


220001 - 8


12/7/10

SYSTEM GUARANTEE A. The work required under Division-22 shall include a one year guarantee. This guarantee shall be by the Contractor to the Owner to replace for the Owner any defective workmanship, equipment, or material which has been furnished under this Contract at no cost to the Owner for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of the System. This guarantee shall also include reasonable adjustments of the system required for proper operation during the guarantee period. Explain the provisions of guarantee to Owner at the "Instruction in Operation Conference".

1.25

INSTRUCTION TO OWNER A. Submit all required items for checking one week before final inspection of the building is scheduled. When all items are accepted and placed in the proper brochures, the Contractor shall give notice in writing that he is ready to give the Owner an "Instruction in Operation Conference". After the above mentioned request is received the Contractor will be notified of the time the conference can be held with the Owner. At the conference, the Contractor shall review with the Owner all appropriate information. At the end of the conference, seven copies of a memo certifying Instruction in Operation and Completed Demonstration shall be signed by the Contractor, Subcontractor and Owner and one copy inserted in each brochure.

1.26

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Each bidder represents that his bid is based upon the materials and equipment described in this division of the specifications. 1. Submittal shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted, substituted equipment model numbers, drawings, cuts, performance and test data and any other data or information necessary for the Architect/Engineer to determine that the equipment meets all specification and requirements. If the Architect/Engineer accepts any proposed substitutions, such acceptance will be set forth in writing. 2. Substituted equipment with all accessories installed or optional equipment where permitted and accepted, must conform to space requirements. Any substituted equipment that cannot meet space requirements, whether accepted or not, shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. Any modifications of related systems of this or other trades as a result of substitutions shall be made at the Contractor's expense, and Contractor shall so state in his written request for substitution.

1.27

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Materials and Equipment specified in these contract documents are accepted only in regards to general performance and quality. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to insure that acceptable materials and equipment meet or exceed the efficiencies, capacities, electrical characteristics, performance and quality of the equipment herein specified. Acceptable equipment must also generally conform, without extensive modification of related


220001 - 9


12/7/10

systems to the accessories, weights, space and maintenance requirements, etc., of the specified equipment. Any modification to related systems of this or other trades shall be made at the Contractor's expense and the Contractor shall be responsible for coordination between trades. Any difference in capacity, efficiency, electrical characteristics, weights or quality of product, etc., between specified materials and equipment and acceptable alternates shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for acceptance within 30 days of Notice to Proceed.


Section part not applicable.





220001 - 10


12/7/10

SECTION 220700 - INSULATION FOR PLUMBING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division-01 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2

SCOPE A. Above grade domestic cold and hot water piping. B. Below grade domestic cold and hot water piping. C. Above grade waste lines receiving condensate from air conditioning units to a point of connection to a soil line receiving waste from 4 or more plumbing fixtures. D. Above grade exterior domestic cold water piping. E. Barrier-free (ADA) lavatory exposed water and waste piping. Provide pre-fabricated insulation kits for water and waste piping. F. Alternates may or may not substantially change scope and general character of the work; and must not be confused with "change orders", "substitutions", and other similar provisions.

1.3

RELATION TO OTHER WORK A. Refer to the section, "General Mechanical Provisions", for related requirements. Refer to other sections of Division-22 and to all other applicable portions of the Drawings and Specifications.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data for review before any work is commenced.


GENERAL A. Materials listed in subsequent paragraphs of this specification are those used as basis of design; alternate manufacturer's equivalent projects as listed herein will be accepted. The

INSULATION FOR PLUMBING SYSTEMS

220700 - 1


12/7/10

insulation contractor shall verify materials and comply with requirements of NFPA 90, with regard to a flame spread rating of 25 or less and; a smoke developed/fuel contributed value of less than 50.

2.2

MATERIALS A. Insulation and accessory materials to be as manufactured by the listed manufacturers or approved equal: 1. Fiberglass: Owens Corning, Knauf, CertainTeed, or Manville. 2. Foamed Plastic Insulation: Armstrong "Armaflex", U.S. Rubber "Ensolex", Gustin Bacon "Ultra-Foam", Owens Corning "O-C" Halstead Industrial Products, or approved equal. 3. Extruded Polyethylene Insulation: Nomaco Inc. "Thermacell, Sentinel Energy Savings Products Division of Packaging Energy Groups, Inc., "Senflex" or approved equal. 4. Insulating Finish Cement: JM No. 301, BH Improved Super Powerhouse Cement, The Ruberoid Co., No. 412, or approved equal. 5. Mastics, Sealers and Adhesives: Benjamin Foster

Childers

J-M

General purpose 35-00 Series Vi AC Mastic mastic

CP-10

375

Vapor barrier 30-35 sealant (indoor)

CP-30

Adhesive

Insulcoustic

IC-501

85-20

Fire retardant 60-35 sealer (outdoor)

CP-89 IC-531

Foamed Plastic & Adhesive Extruded Poly- ethylene

57

Therma-Cel 950 Adhesive

6. Pipe Jacketing and Valve Covers (Ultra Violet Resistant): Zeston PVC, CEEL-Tite, Proto Corp. (Lo Smoke), or approved equal. 7. Metal Jacketing and Fitting Cover: Aluminum 0.016 gage (minimum) smooth or corrugated, Childers Products Co., General Aluminum Supply Co. (Gasco), Alcorjac by Insulcoustic Co., or approved equal. 8. Molded Fiberglass Fitting Insulation: Molded Acoustical Products, Inc., West Easton, PA, 18042 or approved equal. INSULATION FOR PLUMBING SYSTEMS

220700 - 2


12/7/10


GENERAL A. Insulation is not to be installed until the piping systems have been checked and found free of all leaks. Surfaces shall be clean and dry before attempting to apply insulation. A professional insulator with adequate experience and ability shall install insulation. B. Provide hanger or pipe support shields of 16 gage (minimum) galvanized steel over or embedded in the insulation. Shield shall extend halfway up the pipe insulation cover and at least 6" on each side of the hanger. Securely fasten shield with pipe straps at each end. Insulate pipe anchors adequately to prevent moisture condensation problems. C. Insulation installed in exposed locations such as water heater rooms, equipment rooms, air handling unit rooms, all exterior above grade areas, kitchens, laundries, power houses, utility buildings, energy building or similarly identified locations where the insulation would be subject to physical damage shall be covered with metal jacketing. Elbows may be covered with fire rated and ozone resistant (for exterior locations) PVC covers in lieu of metal jacket.

3.2

HORIZONTAL WASTE PIPING RECEIVING AIR-CONDITIONING CONDENSATE A. Shall be insulated with 1" thickness AP-T fiberglass pipe insulation. Prior to installing with insulation, the pressure release paper shall be removed from the jacket laps. The insulation shall be secured in place by applying pressure to the pressure sensitive closure system. All fittings shall be insulated with pipe insulation segments and finished with Foster's 30-35 vapor barrier coating or equal, reinforced with white open weave glass fabric.

3.3

ABOVE GROUND DOMESTIC COLD AND HOT WATER PIPING A. Shall be insulated with ASJ fiberglass pipe insulation. Prior to installing the insulation, the pressure release paper shall be removed from the jacket laps. The insulation shall be secured in place by applying pressure to the pressure sensitive closure system. All fittings shall be insulated with molded fiberglass pipe insulation segments and finished with Foster's 30-35 vapor barrier coating or equal, reinforced with a layer of white open weave glass fabric. B. Main pipe sizes 2-1/2" and smaller shall have 1" thickness insulation unless noted on the drawings. C. Pipe sizes 2-1/2" and larger shall have 1-1/2" thickness insulation. D. Branch run-outs up to 2" shall have 1/2" thickness insulation.

3.4

HANDICAP LAVATORY EXPOSED WATER AND WASTE PIPING A. Shall be insulated with pre-fabricated insulation kits consisting of foamed plastic insulation or extruded polyethylene, one-half inch thickness.


220700 - 3


12/7/10

B. Mitre cut insulation to fit the pipe, fittings and stops.



220700 - 4


12/7/10

SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division-01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2

SCOPE A. The work pertaining to this Division occurs within the confines of the building line, and within a boundary outside of the building line for a distance of five (5) feet, measured normal to the building line, or as indicated on the drawings. B. Alternates may or may not substantially change scope and general character of the work; and must not be confused with "change orders", "substitutions", and other similar provisions.

1.3

RELATION TO OTHER WORK A. Refer to the section, "General Mechanical Provisions", for related requirements. Refer to other sections of Division 22 and to all other applicable portions of the Drawings and Specifications.

1.4



GENERAL A. Provide valves and specialties as specified under additional Sections of this Specification.

2.2

PIPE A. The following schedule covers materials unless otherwise specified under a particular System Section. 1. Above Ground Piping: Copper Type L, pipe and fittings, ASTM D-1784 and D-2665. 2. Below Ground Piping: Copper Type K, pipe and fittings, ASTM D-1784 and D-2665.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

221119 - 1


12/7/10

3. Brass pipe or tube, chrome plated.

2.3

FITTINGS A. Copper Tube: Wrought or cast brass solder joint (Lead-free). B. Service material shall be brass compression fittings-angle ball cocks, ball corporations, etc. Flared fittings are acceptable under controlled conditions.

2.4

PIPE JOINTS A. Joints in copper piping shall be made with tin-antimony solder (95-5) and non-acid flux. Contractor shall furnish manufacturers literature documenting that the lead content (trace quantities) are within the guidelines of the local codes having jurisdiction as well as the Safe Drinking Water Act Amendment (SDWAA). B. Joints in threaded piping shall be made with teflon tape or non hardening pipe compound (seal-tite).


GENERAL A. The design drawings are generally diagrammatic. They do not show every bend, off-set, elbow or other fitting which may be required in the piping for installation in the space allotted. Careful coordination of the work is necessary to avoid conflicts. B. Run all water lines parallel or perpendicular to building lines. C. For piping requiring insulation, layout and carefully install piping with sufficient clearances to permit proper application of the insulation. If the piping is such that a neat insulation job cannot be obtained with reasonable effort, the piping subcontractor shall relocate piping. D. Separate underground water piping and building sewer with undisturbed or compacted earth at least 10' horizontally if installed at the same level or lower than the sewer. Where water piping is closer than 10' to a sewer, place the bottom of the water pipe at least 18" above the top of the sewer, or the sewer shall be encased in a concrete envelope as required by the Department of Health & Rehabilitative Services (State of Florida). E. Minimum cover for exterior underground piping is three feet over insulation or conduit unless otherwise noted on plans. Carefully excavate trench to smooth finished surface; if cut is too deep, backfill with clean earth and hand tamp to compact bottom. Make depression at joints to receive flanges, collars, and couplings. Provide continuous support for pipe or conduit. Backfill to be clean earth, free of rocks and debris completely enveloping pipe or conduit on both sides and top to a minimum thickness of 6". Carefully hand tamp backfill in 6" layers until 24" has been deposited over pipe or conduit.


221119 - 2


12/7/10

F. Place color coded 6" wide 0.004" thickness polyethylene printed plastic identification tape directly above all underground piping systems approximately 12" below finished grade. Tapes shall be continuously printed with "CAUTION" in large bold letters. Printed second line with type of service below. Yellow tape is to be used for water, (Print type of water on tape; i.e., domestic cold water.)

3.2

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Vertical Piping shall be supported at its base and no greater than every story height. B. Horizontal Piping (Suspended) shall be supported at not more than eight (8) foot intervals. Supports shall be adequate to maintain alignment and prevent sagging. C. Supports shall be connected to the building structure not from other equipment, ducts or conduits.

3.3

JOINTING PIPE A. All pipe lines shall be correctly aligned before joints are made. B. Squarely cut pipe and properly ream to remove all constriction and burrs before making up the joints. C. Threaded Pipe: Ream all pipe after cutting and before threading. Use non-hardening pipe compound or tape on male threads only at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed. D. Copper Tube: Ream all pipe after cutting squarely, clean outside of tube ends and inside of fittings and tin end to be soldered. Apply solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings. Insert tube full depth into fitting, and solder in manner which will draw solder full depth and circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens. E. Provide nipples of same material and weight as pipe used. Provide extra strong nipples when length of unthreaded part of standard weight nipple is less than 1-1/2". F. Run water supply main to point indicated on plans.

3.4

AIR CHAMBERS A. 20 pipe diameters, but not less than 12". Provide at each fixture, risers and ends of supply lines.


221119 - 3


12/7/10

WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS A. Water hammer arresters (shock stops) shall be installed at the locations on the plans and in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201. Provide access panels so located to permit ease of service.

3.6

VALVES A. Provide valves to isolate each riser, and branch line. requirements.

3.7

See also Section 220523 for

REDUCERS A. Screwed bushings are prohibited, except where available space prevents use of reducing couplings. Pipe reductions on horizontal, hot water piping shall be made with eccentric reducers. Top of hot water piping shall be flat for venting.

3.8

TESTS A. Apply a water pressure test to all parts of the water supply system before the piping is concealed and before the fixtures and equipment are connected. Use a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 100 psig or 150% of system operating pressure, applied to the system for a period of four hours. There shall be no leaks at any point in the system at this pressure. B. Leave concealed work uncovered until required tests have been completed, but if necessary, make tests on portions of the work and those portions of the work may be concealed after being inspected and approved. Make repairs of defects that are discovered as a result of inspection or tests with new materials. Caulking, welding or other such sealing methods of screwed joints, cracks or holes will not be accepted. Repeat tests after defects have been eliminated. C. Complete all field testing prior to insulation, wrapping and/or backfill.

3.9

STERILIZATION A. As soon as the water piping has been thoroughly flushed out, sterilize the lines by introducing into them a solution of calcium hypochlorite or chloride of lime. Open and close all valves while system is being chlorinated. After the sterilizing agent has been applied for 24 hours, test for residual chlorine at the ends of the lines. If less than 10 parts per million is indicated, repeat the process. When tests show at least 10 parts per million of residual chlorine, flush out the system until all traces of the chemical used are removed. Make necessary connections to sterilized piping.


221119 - 4


12/7/10

PIPE PROTECTIONS A. Paint all un-insulated piping underground with two coats of asphaltic paint. (Manual wiping is not acceptable) B. Wrap pipe that touches metal or is exposed to masonry with a layer of 6 mil polylene film or 15 lb. felt. C. Spirally wrap all pipe lines embedded in concrete with two layers of 30 lb. felt.



221119 - 5


12/7/10

SECTION 221316 - SANITARY SEWER, STORM WATER & SANITARY VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1


1.2

SCOPE A. The work pertaining to this Division occurs within the confines of the building line, and within a boundary outside of the building line for a distance of five (5) feet, measured normal to the building line, or as indicated on the drawings. B. Alternates may or may not substantially change scope and general character of the work; and must not be confused with "change orders", "substitutions", and other similar provisions.

1.3


1.4



MATERIAL A. The following schedule covers materials unless otherwise specified under a particular System Section.

2.2

PIPE A. Cast-iron soil pipe service weight, centrifugally cast, ANSI A112.5.1. 2" Through 15" size, bell and spigot joint.

SANITARY SEWER, STORM WATER AND SANITARY VENT PIPING

221316 - 1


12/7/10

B. Cast-iron soil pipe service weight, centrifugally cast, ANSI A112.5.1. 1-1/2" through 10" size, "non-hub" joint. C. Copper type DWV. D. Brass pipe or tube, chrome plated. E. PVC, Type DWV, ASTM D2665-78.

2.3

FITTINGS A. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: 1. Underground: Provide fittings of same weight and manufacture as pipe in which installed. Joints shall be bell and spigot push-on type neoprene gasket or "NO HUB" type conforming to CIPI Standard 301 unless noted otherwise on drawings. 2. Above ground and in buildings: "NO-HUB" type conforming to CIPI Standard 301 unless noted otherwise on the drawings. B. Threaded Drainage Pipe: Cast-iron, recessed. C. Copper DWV: Cast or wrought solder joint DWV drainage fittings. D. PVC Type DWV: ASTM D-2665, NSF Seal of Approval, Solvent-cement joint.

2.4

PIPE JOINTS A. Bell and spigot type joint shall be made with push-on compression type, neoprene gasket conforming to ASTM A-74. B. No-hub type joints shall be constructed of 24 gage type 304 stainless steel, with gasket guides, type 304 stainless steel screw clamp, and matching neoprene (ASTM C-564) gasket that shall interlock with housing. C. Joints in copper piping shall be made with tin-antimony solder (95-5) silver solder and nonacid flux. D. Joints in threaded piping shall be made with teflon tape or non hardening pipe compound (Seal-tite).

2.5

VENT FLASHING A. Furnish 4 lb. lead flashing, material as recommended by roofing system manufacturer, or copper pitch pans for all vents through the roof. Type of flashing used shall be compatible with piping material.


221316 - 2


12/7/10

IDENTIFICATION A. Below grade piping identification and warning tape shall be 0.004 inch thick polyethylene, printed with a continuous two line message. Tapes used for non magnetic piping materials shall have a metallic core. Acceptable manufacturer is Seton Name Plate Corporation or approved equal.


GENERAL A. The design drawings are generally diagrammatic. They do not show every bend, off-set, elbow or other fitting which may be required in the piping for installation in the space allotted. Careful coordination of the work is necessary to avoid conflicts. B. PVC piping, fittings and other PVC materials shall not be installed in air conditioning plenums or equipment rooms used as air conditioning plenums. C. Joints and connections shall be made permanent and watertight. D. Run piping to sewer connection point outside of building or as indicated on drawings. E. Install 3" and larger horizontal soil and waste piping to 1/8" per foot slope. Piping 2" and smaller shall be installed at a slope of 1/4" per foot. Run horizontal vent lines to a minimum grade back to stacks and vertical vent lines as direct and free from bends as possible. F. For piping requiring insulation, lay out and carefully install piping with sufficient clearances to permit proper application of the insulation. If the piping is such that a neat insulation job cannot be obtained with reasonable effort, the piping subcontractor shall relocate piping. G. Separate underground water piping and building sewer with undisturbed or compacted earth at least 10' horizontally if installed at the same level or lower than the sewer. Where water piping is closer than 10' to a sewer, place the bottom of the water pipe at least 18" above the top of the sewer, or the sewer shall be encased in a concrete envelope as required by the Department of Health & Rehabilitative Services (State of Florida). H. Minimum cover for exterior underground piping is three feet over conduit unless otherwise noted on plans. Carefully excavate trench to smooth finished surface; if cut is too deep, backfill with clean earth and hand tamp to compact bottom. Make depression at joints to receive bells, collars, and couplings. Provide continuous support for pipe or conduit. Backfill to be clean earth, free of rocks and debris completely enveloping pipe or conduit on both sides and top to a minimum thickness of 6". Carefully hand tamp backfill in 6" layers until 18" has been deposited over pipe or conduit. I.

Place color coded 6" wide 0.004" thickness polyethylene printed plastic identification tape directly above all underground piping systems approximately 12" below finished grade. Tapes shall be continuously printed with "CAUTION" in large bold letters. Printed second


221316 - 3


12/7/10

line with type of service below. Red tape is to be used for sewer, (Print type of water on tape; i.e., storm water.)

3.2

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Vertical Piping shall be supported at its base and no greater than every story height, not to exceed 20 foot intervals. B. Horizontal Piping (Suspended) shall be supported at each bend; at not more than five (5) foot intervals; except that pipe exceeding five (5) feet in length may be supported at not more than ten (10) foot intervals. Supports shall be adequate to maintain alignment and prevent sagging and shall be made directly behind the bell or coupling, where possible, not near the center of the pipe. C. Supports shall be connected to the building structure not from other equipment, ducts or conduits. D. Horizontal pipe and fittings six inches and larger shall be suitably braced to prevent horizontal movement. This should be done at every branch opening or change of direction by the use of braces, blocks, rodding or other suitable method, to prevent movement. E. Where components are suspended in excess of eighteen inches by means of non-rigid hangers, they should be suitably braced against movement horizontally, often called sway bracing.

3.3

LINE AND GRADE A. Install gravity lines at uniform grade to low point after field verification of low point invert. B. Run piping straight, plumb and grade in the direction indicated on the drawings.

3.4

JOINTING PIPE A. All pipe lines shall be correctly aligned before joints are made. B. Squarely cut pipe and properly ream to remove all constriction and burrs before making up the joints. C. Threaded Pipe: Ream all pipe after cutting and before threading. Use non-hardening pipe compound on male threads only at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed. D. Copper Tube: Ream all pipe after cutting squarely, clean outside of tube ends and inside of fittings and tin end to be soldered. Apply non-acid solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings. Insert tube full depth into fitting, and solder in manner which will draw solder full depth and circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens.


221316 - 4


12/7/10

E. Joining "NO-HUB" cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with recommended practices described by the coupling manufacturers. F. Provide nipples of same material and weight as pipe used. Provide extra strong nipples when length of unthreaded part of standard weight nipple is less than 1-1/2". G. Provide reducing fittings (reducing bushings shall not be used) where changes in pipe sizes occur. H. Provide dielectric unions or flanges between copper and steel piping and between brassware and steel. Do not use steel and copper piping in the same system without such isolation.

3.5

PIPE PROTECTION A. Paint all un-insulated piping underground (except cast iron) with two coats of asphaltic paint (Manual wiping is not acceptable). B. Wrap soil pipe that touches metal or is exposed to masonry with a layer of 6 mil polyethylene film or 15 lb. roofing felt. C. Spirally wrap all pipe lines embedded in concrete with two layers of 30 lb. roofing felt.

3.6

TESTS A. A water test shall be applied to the sanitary and storm drainage systems either in its entirety or in sections. If applied to the entire system, all openings in the piping shall be tightly closed, except the highest opening and the system filled with water to point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening shall be tightly plugged except the highest openings of the section under test, and each section shall be filled with water, but no section shall be tested with less than 10 ft. head of water. In testing successive sections at least the upper 10 ft of the next preceding section shall be tested, so that no joint or pipe in the building (except the uppermost 10 ft of the system) shall have been submitted to a test of less than a 10 ft head of water. The water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 30 minutes before inspection starts; the system shall then be tight at all points. B. An air test shall be made by attaching an air compressor or testing apparatus to any suitable opening and after closing all other inlets and outlets to the system, forcing air into the system until there is a uniform gauge pressure of 5 psi or sufficient to balance a column of mercury ten inches in height. This pressure shall be held without introduction of additional air for a period of at least 30 minutes. C. Complete all field testing prior to insulation, wrapping and/or backfill.


221316 - 5


12/7/10

VENT FLASHING A. Extend lead type flashing 12" beyond pipe in all directions and carry to top of pipe with at least 2" return inside of pipe. B. Install PVC pipe flashing in accordance with flashing manufacturer's recommendation. C. Flashing for PVC piping shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Install flashing materials as required by roofing system manufacturer's details and methods.



221316 - 6


12/7/10

SECTION 221317 - CLEANOUTS AND CLEANOUT ACCESS COVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division-01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Alternates may be or may not substantially change scope and general character of the work; and must not be confused with "change orders", "substitutions", and other similar provisions.

1.2

SCOPE A. Furnish and install cleanouts as shown on drawing or specified herein.

1.3


1.4



MATERIALS A. Cleanouts and cleanout access covers shall be of the type and materials as scheduled on the drawings. B. Provide all necessary bolts and appurtenances to effect a complete installation.


INSTALLATION A. Install all cleanouts and cleanout access covers in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.

CLEANOUTS AND CLEANOUT ACCESS COVERS

221317 - 1


12/7/10

B. Exterior cleanouts below grade shall be extended to finish grade. Pour a concrete pad 18" x 18" x 6" thick around cleanout; slope top down approximately 2" from cleanout to edge of pad so that edge of pad is flush with grade. C. Cleanouts shall be of the same nominal size as the pipes to which they are connected up to 4" in diameter; and not less than 4" for larger pipes. D. Cleanouts shall be provided at not more than 50 feet apart in horizontal drainage lines of 4" nominal diameter, and at not more than 75 feet apart for larger diameter pipe. E. At change in direction: Cleanouts shall be provided at each change of direction of the building drain when the angle of change is 90 degrees. F. At base of stacks: Cleanouts shall be provided at or near the base of each vertical stack. G. Direction of cleanout: All cleanouts shall be installed so that the cleanout opens in a direction opposite to the flow of the drainage line, or at a right angle to the line. H. Concealed cleanouts in wall shall be provided with removable access panel. I.

Where access cleanout boxes or covers are installed in the floor, the top surface shall be scoriated and the cover secured, but removable when necessary. Polished brass. Install carpet type covers in carpeted areas.


CLEANOUTS AND CLEANOUT ACCESS COVERS

221317 - 2


12/7/10

SECTION 221319 - FLOOR & SHOWER DRAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1


1.2

SCOPE A. Furnish and install floor drains and shower drains including strainers and trap primers. B. Alternates may or may not substantially change scope and general character of the work; and must not be confused with "change orders", "substitutions", and other similar provisions.

1.3


1.4



DRAINS A. Drains shall be of the type and materials as scheduled on the drawings. B. Provide all necessary bolts, clamping rings and appurtenances to effect a complete installation. C. The strainer size shall be as recommended by the manufacturer unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. The strainers shall be nickel alloy or polished brass. Provide tapped boss and trap primer floor drains as indicated on the drawings.

FLOOR & SHOWER DRAINS

221319 - 1


12/7/10

TRAP PRIMERS A. Provide for all floor drains. B. Units shall be cast bronze, with removable top cover, threaded or sweat pattern, and integral vacuum breaker. C. Acceptable manufacturers are: Wade, Josam, Smith and Zurn.


DRAINS A. Install all drains in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

3.2

TRAP PRIMERS A. Trap primer outlet should extend vertically a minimum of 12" before a change in direction to horizontal is made. The horizontal line to the trap primer connection shall be installed sloping to the trap it serves. Provide a minimum size of 12" x 12" stainless steel access cover for each trap primer.


FLOOR & SHOWER DRAINS

221319 - 2


12/7/10

SECTION 223330 - DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS, ELECTRIC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1


1.2

SCOPE A. Furnish and install water heater including all valves, fittings, overflow drain pan, relief valve, heat trap and appurtenances. B. Alternates may be or may not substantially change scope and general character of the work; and must not be confused with "change orders", "substitutions", and other similar provisions.

1.3


1.4



WATER HEATER (LIGHT COMMERCIAL) A. Water heater shall be constructed with steel tank constructed to 150 PSI working pressure, 300 PSI test pressure and lined with borosilicate glass bonded to tank. Glass lining to be baked at 1600oF to assure a molecular-interchange between tank and lining. Tank to be protected against electrolytic activity with replaceable factory installed anode rod and factory installed dielectric nipples. B. Water heater to be provided with fully adjustable temperature controls and automatic high limit control. Unit shall have A.S.M.E. approved temperature and pressure relief valve properly sized for BTU capacity of the unit installed.

DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS, ELECTRIC

223330 - 1


12/7/10

C. Water heater shall be insulated to ASHRAE 90-1980A standards and jacketed with manufacturer’s standard heavy steel jacket. D. Water heater shall also feature 98% efficient immersion type heating elements. Tin coated, copper sheathed elements shall be provided. All units shall be constructed with factory installed heat traps to increase efficiency and reduce stand-by loss by a minimum of 10%. E. All units to be U.L. tested and U.L. listed for service as a domestic water heater for voltage inputs of 120V, 208V, 240V or 480V. F. Water heater shall carry a limited factory warranty of 5 years. Owner to be provided with copy of warranty and operations manuals as distributed by manufacturer.

2.2

WATER HEATER SAFETY PAN A. Provide galvanized steel (24 gage min.) or other corrosion resistant material plastic or PVC accepted metal safety pan with a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches and of sufficient size and shape to receive all drippings and/or condensate from the water storage tank or heater. The pan shall be drained by an indirect waste pipe no less than one (1) inch in diameter or the diameter of the outlet of the required relief valve(s) whichever is larger. B. The pan drain shall extend full-size and terminate over a suitably located indirect waste receptor or floor drain or extend to the exterior of the building and terminate no less than six (6) inches or more than twenty-four (24) inches above grade. C. When the discharge from the relief valve(s) is to be discharged into the safety pan, it shall be piped full-size of the valve outlet pipe size to a point not more than two (2) inches or no less than one (1) inch above the pan flood level rim. D. The discharge from the relief valve shall be piped full-size separately to the outside of the building or to another approved terminal as provided for safety pan drain terminals but in no case shall the discharge from a relief valve be trapped.


INSTALLATION A. Provide gate valves on both the incoming cold water and leaving hot water supply piping. B. Cold water supply shall also be equipped with a check valve down stream of the gate valve. Remove flapper from check valve and drill a 1/16 inch hole in flapper. Replace flapper in valve body. Install a pressurized thermal expansion tank on the cold water supply side as manufactured by Amtrol or Therm-x-trol. Tank shall be suitable for use in potable water systems. C. Provide unions to facilitate replacement of the storage tank and/or heater.


223330 - 2


12/7/10

D. Heat trap shall be installed in the hot water supply piping.



223330 - 3


12/7/10

SECTION 224005 - PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1


1.2

SCOPE A. Furnish and install plumbing fixtures indicated on drawings or specified herein. B. All plumbing fixtures shall be "First Quality" as defined and set forth in Commercial Standard CS77-28 as promulgated by the U.S. Department of Commerce. All water closet, urinal and lavatory fixtures are to be white vitreous china unless otherwise specifically noted. Where enameled cast-iron fixtures are specified, they shall be furnished with acid resisting enamel. C. Fixtures shall be properly protected from damage during construction and shall be cleaned in accordance with manufacturer's instruction under this section of the specifications. D. Fixtures and fittings proposed shall be from one manufacturer and of similar character in any room or location. Escutcheons, handles, etc., on the different fixtures shall be of the same design. E. The fixture manufacturer’s, model numbers and types are scheduled on the drawings, and are used to indicate type and quality of fixtures desired. F. Acceptable commercial-type water closet, urinal, lavatory and stainless steel sink fixture manufacturer’s are as follows: American Standard, Eljer and Kohler. Unless otherwise specified, all vitreous china water closet, urinal and lavatory fixtures shall be white. Fixture manufacturers not listed herein will be considered subject to the general requirement outlined in Section 230100 General Mechanical Provisions. G. Flush Valves: Where flush valve fixtures are specified, provide flush valves for water closets and/or urinals per the schedule on the drawings. H. Faucets Sets: Provide faucets sets per the schedule on the drawings. Lavatory faucet sets shall include wrist-blade handles for the HW/CW controls on the ADA fixtures as a minimum. All lavatory and sink faucets shall include water-saver, laminar-flow type aerator fittings. I. Where additional plumbing fixtures are scheduled on the drawings provide per the manufacturer specified on the drawings.

PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM

224005 - 1

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 J.

1.3

12/7/10

Alternates may or may not substantially change scope and general character of the work; and must not be confused with "change orders", "substitutions", and other similar provisions.


1.4

SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data, dimensional data, color selections and performance data for review before any work is commenced.


MATERIALS A. Flush valves and water closet seats shall be as scheduled on the drawings. B. All exposed metal not otherwise specified shall be polished chromium on brass or bronze. All supply valves shall have renewable seats and discs. All hot and cold water supply to fixtures shall be provided with stops. Provide P-trap with cleanout for each lavatory and sink except as specifically noted. C. All seats shall be solid, white, open front seat with checking and self sustaining, stainless steel hinge. D. Chair carriers and combination chair carriers and fittings shall be as scheduled on the drawings. E. Chrome-plated. Provide where exposed piping passes through finished surfaces. Escutcheons for extended sleeves shall be of the type designed for that purpose. F. Provide a concealed hanger type lavatory chair carrier with short foot mounted in the chase to support lavatories shown on walls of a chase. G. Provide through toggle bolts, 1/8" thickness steel backing plate, and wall hangers for support of lavatories on 6" or thicker concrete block walls.


INSTALLATION A. Layout fixtures as indicated on the drawings.


224005 - 2


12/7/10

B. Carefully install fixtures in accordance with manufacturer's data with sufficient clearances to coordinate with accessories, specialties and equipment specified in other divisions of these specifications and/or as shown on the drawings. C. Hangers and carriers shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with good practice and workmanship. D. Clean all exposed metal surfaces from grease, dirt, paint or other foreign material. E. Fixtures shall be properly protected from damage during construction and shall be cleaned in accordance with manufacturer's instruction under this section of the specification. F. Fixtures, chrome-plated piping, fittings and trim shall be polished before requesting acceptance of the system.



224005 - 3


12/7/10

SECTION 230100 - GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1


1.2

SCOPE OF DIVISION A. Work shall include all materials, equipment and labor necessary for a complete and properly functioning mechanical installation in accordance with all applicable codes, and contract drawings and specifications. Work shall include all work specified in Division 21-Fire Protection, Division-22, Plumbing and Division-23, HVAC. B. Pay for all required licenses, fees, inspections and permits.

1.3

RELATION TO OTHER WORK A. Work Not in Divisions 22 and 23: Related work not included in this division consists of requirements given in the following as may be included in the contract documents: 1. Other divisions which may include work (such as concrete, steel, painting, ceiling systems, structure and other work) related to the work of Divisions 22 and 23. B. Work of Divisions 21, 22 and 23: Any or all sections of Divisions 21, 22 and 23 may include a paragraph or paragraphs under the heading, "Relation to other Work". Where such a paragraph is indicated and work directly related to the section is listed or described, such work shall be considered as relating directly to the indicated section. Any related work (directly related or otherwise) which may be omitted by reference from the "Relation to Other Work" paragraph of such section(s), shall be provided as necessary and required whether or not such work is included by reference. Such listing or description of related work within a section is given only as a convenience to the Contractor; omission of other related sections or described work does not in any way exclude the provision of such work.

1.4

CODES A. Install all work in accordance with the latest edition of all applicable regulations and governing codes, including the regulations of the utility companies serving the project. B. Where a conflict in code requirements occurs the more stringent requirement shall govern.

GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS

230100 - 1


12/7/10

STANDARDS A. All equipment and devices shall bear U.L. label, the label of an industry recognized approved testing agency or A.G.A. certification for said item of equipment or device. B. All electrical devices must be U.L. approved.

1.6

DRAWINGS A. Architectural and structural drawings take precedence over mechanical drawings with reference to the building construction. Mechanical drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement and extent of work. Architectural drawings indicate more exactly the desired relationship between diffusers, registers, lighting fixtures, equipment, electric panels and devices, plumbing fixtures, and other items which remain exposed in the completed building. Exact locations and arrangement of materials and equipment shall be determined, with the acceptance of the Architect/Engineer, as work progresses to conform in the best possible manner with the surroundings and with the adjoining work of other trades. Where locations of equipment, devices or fixtures are controlled by architectural features, establish such locations by referring to dimensions on Architectural drawings and not by scaling drawings.

1.7

DISCREPANCIES A. In case of differences between drawings and specifications, or where drawings and specifications are not clear or definite, the subject shall be referred to Architect/Engineer for clarification and instructions.

1.8

ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS A. Work of Divisions 22 and 23 shall include the electrical requirements which are indicated to be integral with mechanical work and which can be summarized to include (but not necessarily be limited to) the following: 1. Motors. 2. Motor starters. 3. Wiring from mechanical equipment to electrical work termination (junction box or disconnect switch). 4. Control switch, pilot lights, interlocks and similar devices. 5. Electrical heating coils and similar elements in mechanical equipment. 6. Electrical work specified in Division-23 for the HVAC control system. 7. Drip pans to protect electrical work. B. Motors, Starters, Switches: otherwise indicated.

Provide with all motorized mechanical equipment unless


230100 - 2


12/7/10

C. Drip Pans: Where possible, do not run mechanical piping directly above electrical (or electronic) equipment which is sensitive to moisture; otherwise provide drip pans under mechanical piping. Locate pan below piping, and extend 6" on each side of piping and lengthwise 18" beyond equipment. Fabricate pans 2" deep, of reinforced sheet metal with rolled edges and soldered or welded seams; 20 gage copper, or 16 gage steel with 2 oz. zinc finish hot dipped after fabrication. Provide 3/4" copper drainage piping, properly discharged. D. Motors: Unless specifically specified otherwise in the section covering the driven equipment (or the equipment drives), motors shall comply with the following: 1. Three Phase: NEMA design B, three-phase, squirrel cage induction type designed for 1800 rpm synchronous speed for operation in 40oC ambient at 1.15 service factor at constant speed on the scheduled voltage. Motors shall be insulated with Class B insulation material and shall be cast iron, drip proof, horizontal foot mounted type with ball bearings. Two speed motors shall be provided as scheduled and shall be two winding type. 2. Single Phase: Squirrel cage induction type designed for 1800 rpm synchronous speed for operation in 40oC ambient at 1.15 service factor at constant speed on the scheduled voltage. Motors shall be insulated with Class B insulation materials and shall be two winding capacitor start type with steel enclosure, drip proof, horizontal foot mount and ball bearings. 3. Electric motors which are designated to be high efficiency type shall also comply with the section describing high efficiency motors. E. Scheduled Horsepower: The horsepowers scheduled or specified are those nominal sizes estimated to be required by the equipment when operating at specified duties and efficiencies. In the case of pumps, these horsepowers are non-overloading and may also include provisions for future planned impeller changes. If the actual horsepower for the equipment furnished differs from that specified or shown on the drawings, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to insure that proper size feeders, breakers, starters, etc. are provided at no change in contract price. F. Any TEFC motors shall have Class F insulation. G. Drip proof protected motors shall have Class B insulation. H. Manufacturer: Electric motors, complying with the requirements of this Section and the installation and performance requirements of the plans, by the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Reliance Electric Gould Electric General Electric Westinghouse


230100 - 3


12/7/10

ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL WORK A. Definitions: Definitions for the purpose of mechanical/electrical control and power coordination are as follows: (Note: The use of the words, "Provide", "furnish" and "install" are intended only for use in describing the coordination indicated by this paragraph and do not necessarily have the same definitions when used outside of the context of this paragraph.) Any items which do not fall within the scope of this paragraph shall be coordinated as individually specified. 1. "Furnish" means to procure an item and to deliver it to the project for installation. 2. "Install" means to determine (in coordination with others as necessary) the appropriate intended location of an item and to set and connect it in place. 3. "Provide" means to both furnish and install. 4. Power Circuit: Circuit which carries main electric power to apparatus to which the power circuit is connected. 5. Control Circuit: Circuit which carries electrical signals directing the performance of a controller but which does not carry the main electric power. (See NEC, Section 430-71.) Such circuits shall also include those which serve a dual control and power function (e.g., a line voltage thermostat circuit which both activates and powers a small fan motor). 6. Controller: A device, or group of devices, which serves to govern, in some predetermined manner, electric power delivered to apparatus to which the controller is connected and includes any switch or device normally used to start and stop a motor. (See NEC, Article 100, Definitions, "Controller", and Section 430-81(a).) 7. Control Device: A device which reacts to an operating condition (pressure, temperature, flow, humidity, etc.) and which initiates transmission of an electrical control signal which causes operation of a controller or which causes operation of pressure switches, etc. 8. Auxiliary Control Device: A device (such as a low voltage control transformer, electric relay, etc.) which is located in a control circuit and which carries or responds to (but does not initiate) an electrical control signal initiated by a control device. B. Work of Division-23 includes (but is not necessarily limited to): 1. Provide: a. All controllers which are generally manufactured or shipped as integral with Division-23 equipment (such as starters packaged with air cooled chillers, etc.). b. All electric motors and other electrical power consuming equipment (such as electric air heating coils, electric boilers, electric hot water heaters, etc.) which are specified in Division 22 or 23. c. All control circuits (including conduit and boxes) from the Division-26 panels to point of use including the necessary circuit breakers. d. All other control circuits, including conduit and boxes. e. All control connections to equipment. f. All control connections to controllers, switches, motors and other mechanical systems electrical power consuming equipment (such as electric air heating coils, electric boilers, electric hot water heaters, etc.). g. Auxiliary control devices. h. All control devices (thermostats, pressure switches, flow switches, humidistats, etc.) and make control circuit connections thereto.


230100 - 4

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 i.

12/7/10

Any and all pneumatic and electronic and electric control devices and electric or pneumatic connections thereto.

2. Furnish: a. All controllers which are generally manufactured and/or shipped as separate but companion items to Division-23 equipment (such as centrifugal chiller starters which are matched with the chillers but are not physically an integral part of the chiller assembly.) C. Work of Division-26 includes (but is not necessarily limited to): 1. Provide: a. All power circuits, including conduit and boxes. b. All power connections to controllers, switches, motors and other mechanical systems electrical power consuming equipment (such as electric air heating coils, electric boilers, electric hot water heaters, etc.). c. All remote motor disconnects (remote from the related controller) at all locations required by NEC and connections thereto except those disconnects which are specified in Division-23 to be provided as part of the equipment itself. d. All controllers (except those which are generally manufactured or shipped as separate but companion items to Division-23 equipment such as centrifugal chiller starters). 2. Install: a. All controllers which are generally manufactured and/or shipped as separate but companion items to Division-23 equipment (e.g., chiller starters).

1.10

AUXILIARIES AND ACCESSORIES A. Include all auxiliaries and accessories for complete and properly operating systems.

1.11

INVESTIGATION OF SITE A. Check site and existing conditions thoroughly before bidding. Advise Architect/Engineer of discrepancies or questions noted before bidding.

1.12

ASBESTOS A. Should asbestos, or any other hazardous waste material, be encountered during the execution of the work, or should the presence of asbestos or any other hazardous material be suspected, immediately notify the Owner and suspend all work in the affected area. The Owner will activate an assessment study to determine the presence of asbestos, or other hazardous material, and evaluate what condition it is in. Removal of asbestos, or other hazardous


230100 - 5


12/7/10

material, if required, will be conducted by a qualified Contractor, and will be done under separate contract.

1.13

COORDINATION A. Provide all required coordination and supervision where work of this division connects to or is affected by work of others.

1.14

PROVISIONS FOR OPENINGS A. Provide all openings required for work performed under Division-23. Provide sleeves or other approved methods to allow passage of items installed under any Section of Division-23.

1.15

INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING SERVICES A. Any interruption of existing services shall be coordinated in advance with the Owner's Representative. Shutdown time and duration of critical services shall be decided by the Owner. Contractor shall provide shutoff valves at point of tie-in to minimize downtime.

1.16

CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Ductwork: Keep the interior of the duct system free from dirt and rubbish and other foreign matter. All fan motors, switches, and other items, shall also be protected from dirt, rubbish and other foreign matter during building construction. Thoroughly clean all components of the ductwork and remove all dirt, scale, oil and other foreign substances which may have accumulated during the installation process. B. Equipment: All mechanical equipment provided shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, oil, concrete, etc. Any dents, scratches or other visible blemishes shall be corrected and the appearance of the equipment made "like new" and to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. C. Upon completion, and before final acceptance of the work, all debris, rubbish, leftover materials, tools and equipment shall be removed from the site. D. Protection of Work Until Final Acceptance: Protect all materials and equipment from damage, entrance of dirt and construction debris from the time of installation until final acceptance. Any materials and equipment which are damaged shall be repaired to "as new" condition or replaced at the direction of the Architect/Engineer. Where factory finishes occur and damage is minor, finishes may be touched up. If, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer the damage is excessive, factory finish shall be replaced to "new" condition.


230100 - 6


12/7/10

SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings for all items, services and systems included in the project. B. Shop drawings shall clearly show the following: 1. Technical and descriptive data in detail equal to or greater than the data given in the item specification. Indicate all characteristics, special modifications and features. Where performance and characteristic data is shown on the drawings or specified, submitted data shall be provided in a degree which is both quantitatively and qualitatively equal to that specified and shown so that comparison can be made. Present data in detail equal to or greater than that given in item specification and include all weights, deflections, speeds, velocities, pressure drops, operating temperatures, operating curves, temperature ranges, sound ratings, dimensions, sizes, manufacturers' names, model numbers, types of material used, operating pressures, full load amperages, starting amperages, fouling factors, capacities, set points, chemical compositions, certifications and endorsements, operating voltages, thicknesses, gauges and all other related information as applicable to particular item. 2. Exceptions to or deviations from the contract documents. Should Architect/Engineer accept any items having such deviations which are not clearly brought to Architect/Engineer's attention, in writing, on item submittal, then Contractor is responsible for correction of such deviations regardless of when such deviations are discovered. C. Additional Requirements: See specific sections of the Specifications for any additional requirements.

1.18

SHOP DRAWINGS TECHNICAL INFORMATION BROCHURE A. Submit within thirty days after Notice to Proceed. Each brochure shall consist of an adequately sized, hard-cover, 3-ring binder for 8-1/2" x 11" sheets. Provide correct designation on outside cover and on spine of binder, i.e., mechanical. All shop drawings shall be submitted at one time; partial submittals will not be accepted. B. First sheet in the brochure shall be a photocopy of the "Division-23 Index" for these specifications. Second sheet shall be prepared by the Contractor and shall list Project addresses for this Project for Contractor and all major subcontractors and suppliers. C. Provide reinforced separation sheets tabbed with the appropriate specifications section reference number and typed index for each section. D. Shop drawing technical and descriptive data shall be inserted in the brochure in proper order on all items. Mark the appropriate specification section or drawing reference number in the right hand corner of each item. Provide complete information, including, but not limited to, wiring and control diagrams, scale drawings showing that proposed substitute equipment will fit into allotted space (indicate all service access, connections, etc.), test data, and other data required to determine if equipment complies fully with the specifications. All typewritten pages shall be on contractor or equipment manufacturer printed letterhead.


230100 - 7


12/7/10

E. At the end of the brochure, provide and insert a copy of the specifications for Division-23 and all addenda applicable to this Division. F. Submit not less than six brochures. Provide separate tag marking on an individual copy for the Owner, Architect, Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractor (two copies). G. Contractor shall review the brochure before submitting. Submittal information on each item in each brochure shall bear the Contractor's stamp of approval, initials of checker and date checked by him. No request for payment of or substitutions will be considered until brochure has been reviewed by the Contractor and submitted for checking.

1.19

ELECTRONIC FILES A. CADD files will be available on a limited basis to qualified firms at the Architects prerogative. The cost of the files will be $100 per sheet. Recipients are cautioned that these files may not accurately show actual conditions as constructed. Users are responsible to verify actual field conditions. These files are not intended to be used as shop drawings. 1. A request for CADD files should be delivered in writing along with payment for such files. Files will not be processed until payment is received.

1.20

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Submit for checking a specific set of written operating instructions on each item which requires instructions to operate. After acceptance, insert information in each Technical Information Brochure. Refer also to other sections which may describe operating instructions.

1.21

MAINTENANCE INFORMATION A. Submit for acceptance Maintenance Information consisting of manufacturer's printed instruction and parts lists for each major item of equipment. After acceptance, insert information in each Technical Information Brochure. Refer also to other sections which may describe maintenance.

1.22

MANUFACTURER'S CHECK-OUT A. Check out by Manufacturer's Representative (for major items of equipment): At completion of construction and after performance verification information as above-mentioned has been gathered, submitted and accepted, provide one copy of this information to the manufacturer's representative. Work required under this section shall include having the representative examine the performance verification information, check the equipment in the field while it is operating, and sign a Check-Out Memo for record. Submit a copy of the memo on each major item of equipment for each brochure. Accepted memos shall be inserted on each brochure with the performance verification information and submittal data. Memos shall be


230100 - 8


12/7/10

submitted and accepted before Instruction in Operation to Owner or a request for final inspection.

1.23

SYSTEM GUARANTEE A. The work required under Division-23 shall include a one year guarantee. This guarantee shall be by the Contractor to the Owner to replace for the Owner any defective workmanship, equipment, or material which has been furnished under this Contract at no cost to the Owner for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of the System. This guarantee shall also include reasonable adjustments of the system required for proper operation during the guarantee period. Explain the provisions of guarantee to Owner at the "Instruction in Operation Conference".

1.24

INSTRUCTION TO OWNER A. Submit all required items for checking one week before final inspection of the building is scheduled. When all items are accepted and placed in the proper brochures, the Contractor shall give notice in writing that he is ready to give the Owner an "Instruction in Operation Conference". After the above mentioned request is received the Contractor will be notified of the time the conference can be held with the Owner. At the conference, the Contractor shall review with the Owner all appropriate information. At the end of the conference, seven copies of a memo certifying Instruction in Operation and Completed Demonstration shall be signed by the Contractor, Subcontractor and Owner and one copy inserted in each brochure.

1.25

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Each bidder represents that his bid is based upon the materials and equipment described in this division of the specifications. 1. Submittal shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted, substituted equipment model numbers, drawings, cuts, performance and test data and any other data or information necessary for the Architect/Engineer to determine that the equipment meets all specification and requirements. If the Architect/Engineer accepts any proposed substitutions, such acceptance will be set forth in writing. 2. Substituted equipment with all accessories installed or optional equipment where permitted and accepted, must conform to space requirements. Any substituted equipment that cannot meet space requirements, whether accepted or not, shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. Any modifications of related systems of this or other trades as a result of substitutions shall be made at the Contractor's expense, and Contractor shall so state in his written request for substitution.

1.26

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Materials and Equipment specified in these contract documents are accepted only in regards to general performance and quality. It shall be the Contractor's


230100 - 9


12/7/10

responsibility to insure that acceptable materials and equipment meet or exceed the efficiencies, capacities, electrical characteristics, performance and quality of the equipment herein specified. Acceptable equipment must also generally conform, without extensive modification of related systems to the accessories, weights, space and maintenance requirements, etc., of the specified equipment. Any modification to related systems of this or other trades shall be made at the Contractor's expense and the Contractor shall be responsible for coordination between trades. Any difference in capacity, efficiency, electrical characteristics, weights or quality of product, etc., between specified materials and equipment and acceptable alternates shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for acceptance within 30 days of Notice to Proceed.







230100 - 10


12/7/10

SECTION 230500 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section, in addition to the following:

1.2

SCOPE A. Materials listed herein are general mechanical materials to be used under the Division 21, 22 and 23 sections of the specifications unless specifically noted otherwise in the particular section or on the drawings.

1.3

RELATION TO OTHER WORK A. Refer to the section, "General Mechanical Provisions", for related requirements. Refer to other sections of Division 21, 22 and 23 and to all other applicable portions of the Drawings and Specifications. This section relates to all sections of Division 23 as may be applicable to the work of each section.

1.4

STANDARDS A. Quality and weight of materials shall comply with requirements and specifications of the appropriate standards of the American Society of Testing and Materials.


MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT, GENERAL A. All materials and equipment shall be new and without blemish or defect. B. Equipment and materials shall be products which will meet with the acceptance of the agency inspecting the work. Where acceptance is contingent upon having the products examined, tested and certified by Underwriters Laboratory or other recognized testing laboratory, the product shall be so examined, tested and certified.

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

230500 - 1


12/7/10

C. Where no specific indication as to the type or quality of material or equipment is indicated, a standard item or system shall be furnished with all options, features and capabilities to meet the project requirements. D. Performance and Capacity: 1. Performance as delineated in schedules and in the specifications shall be interpreted as minimum performance. In some cases equipment may be sized to allow for future requirements or for other reasons which may not be stated on the Drawings or in the Specifications; provide equipment and systems with the capacities, capabilities and features indicated to provide the maximum or minimum (as appropriate) conditions. E. Operating conditions and capacities must be as follows: 1. No overloading. 2. No operation at conditions outside of maximum and minimum limits recommended by the manufacturer and accepted by the Architect/Engineer. 3. Compatible with all systems. F. Unless otherwise specified, all equipment and materials furnished must be as follows: 1. Recommended by the manufacturer for the application. 2. Installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for the application except where specifications and drawings clearly indicate otherwise.

2.2

ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A. Locations: Provide access doors and panels (access units) as necessary for access to items which are concealed and which may require service or maintenance or other reason for accessibility. Examples of such items include, but are not limited to, the following: valves, cleanouts, pipe unions, expansion joints and connectors, dampers, coils, junction boxes, duct heaters, terminal units, HVAC control system devices and similar types of items. B. Access units: Shall be manufactured by the Milcor Division of Inland-Ryerson, Boico, Nystrom or Ventfabrics. Types are as follows (Milcor style designations are used for example only): Location Drywall Masonry or tile Acoustical tile Plaster Fire-rated walls (**or as indicated below)

Door/Panel Type Style "DW" Style "M-stainless" Style "AT" Style "K" Style "Fire Rated"**


230500 - 2


12/7/10

C. Fire Rated Units: 1. Frame and panel assembly shall bear a U.L. label reading, "frame and door assembly, rating 1-1/2-hour (B), temperature rise 30 minutes 250oF maximum". 2. Have an automatic closing device and mechanism to release the latch bolt from the inside. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: Boico Style F, Inryco/Milcor Style VA, Nystrom Style APFR. D. Non-fire Rated Units: 1. Steel panels and frames. 2. Locks and latches shall be as appropriate for the location and shall be cam-lock type latches, flush screw driver operated locks or cylindrical locks. 3. Provide two keys for all doors. All doors shall be keyed the same. E. Other Requirements: 1. Doors and panels installed in glazed or ceramic tiled surfaces, in toilet rooms or in kitchens shall be stainless steel. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, finish shall be rust inhibitive prime coat. F. Sizes: 1. Minimum size: 8" x 8". 2. Sizes of each unit shall be individually selected to allow the recommended and required service and maintenance and accessibility functions to be accomplished. These functions shall generally include, for example, valve removal, damper linkage resetting, control adjustment, lubrication, repair, replacement and similar tasks as may be necessary and recommended for the concealed item. 3. Sizes shall be of the following increments (unless otherwise approved) to allow the accessibility function to be accomplished: 8" x 8", 8" x 12", 12" x 12", 12" x 16", 16" x 16", 16" x 24", 24" x 24", 24" x 36", 30" x 30", 36" x 36" or 36" x 48". 4. No size smaller than 16" x 24" shall be allowed when a person must pass through the access opening in order to accomplish the desired accessibility function. 5. Every attic or furred space in which mechanical equipment is installed shall be accessible by an opening and passageway as large as the largest piece of the equipment and in no case less than 22 x 36 inches continuous from the opening to the equipment and its controls. The opening to the passageway shall be located not more than 20 feet from the equipment measured along the center line of such passageway.

2.3

PAINTING AND MARKING A. All paint and materials used for painting shall be manufacturer's "first quality" product. For additional paint material requirements, refer to Section 099101, Painting. B. Marking: Refer also to sections describing identification of mechanical systems.


230500 - 3


12/7/10

PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTING DEVICES A. General: Refer to other sections of Division 23 for any requirements which may be additional to this section. Comply with the more stringent requirement if more than one method is specified or shown. B. Pipe supporting devices specified herein shall apply to all Division 22 and 23 piping unless modified in subsequent sections of Division 22 and 23 (ie., vibration isolation) or detailed on the drawings. 1. Pipe hangers for copper pipe shall be copper or copperplated and for steel pipe shall be zinc-plated, clevis type hangers. 2. Hangers for pressure piping shall be clevis type or accepted as equivalent. Pipe hangers shall be capable of vertical adjustment after erection of the piping. Piping shall not be hung from fire and/or smoke walls. 3. Vertical piping supports shall be constructed of carbon steel with rounded ears and two or four holes for clamping bolts. Steel, galvanized and cast iron piping riser clamps shall have galvanized finish. Copper and brass piping riser clamps shall have electro-plated copper or PVC coating finish. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers are Grinnell, PHD Manufacturing Inc., Fee and Mason, Michigan and Elcen. C. Beam clamps may be used when supporting piping from steel structures. D. Concrete inserts shall be placed in forms as work of Divisions 22 and 23 prior to the time that concrete is poured. E. Lead tamp-ins may be used when installed in a concrete or masonry wall or other like vertical surface to support a vertical hanger. Lead tamp-ins will not be permitted to support hangers to the underside of a concrete slab. F. For parallel runs of above ground suspended piping, an acceptable trapeze-type hanger may be used. Provide permanent, non-conductive type wrapping between copper pipe and steel trapeze hangers. G. Powder set type fasteners or inserts shall not be used.

2.5

FLOOR, WALL OR CEILING PLATES OR ESCUTCHEONS IN EXPOSED AREAS A. Shall be chrome-plated. Escutcheons for extended sleeves shall be of the type designed for that purpose. Split ring escutcheons will not be allowed. B. Escutcheons to be as manufactured by Guarantee Specialty Mfg. Co., Cleveland, Ohio; American Sanitary Mfg. Co., Abingdon, Ill., or Beaton Cadwell. C. Provide escutcheons or fabricated plates or collars at each location where pipe or duct passes through a finished surface. Escutcheons for flush sleeves shall be equivalent to Benton & Caldwell No. 3A chromium plated brass; for sleeves extending above floor shall be


230500 - 4


12/7/10

equivalent to Benton & Caldwell No. 36 chrome plated brass. Collars or plates for ducts and large diameter insulated pipe shall be fabricated of 18 gage galvanized copper bearing sheet steel, secured to structure and neatly fitted around duct or pipe.

2.6

SLEEVES A. General: Lay out work and set sleeves in new or existing construction so there shall be minimum of cutting, drilling and patching. All sleeves not used during construction period shall be sealed using grout. Unused penetrations or sleeves through fire rated barriers shall be sealed to prevent passage of smoke or heat using an Underwriters' Laboratories approved method rated at least equivalent to the barrier being penetrated. Method submitted must show proof of UL approval. B. Pipe Sleeves: Except where specified otherwise below, pipe sleeves shall be as follows: 1. Sleeves installed in walls subject to hydrostatic (water) pressures shall be "link seal" (Thunderline Corp) Type WS or accepted as equivalent. 2. When there is piping existing, and fire rated walls are to be erected, Proset fire rated split wall system pipe sleeves, or accepted equivalent, are to be used. 3. When copper or steel slab penetrations are required, use Proset System A, or accepted as equivalent for fire-rated and water pipe installations. C. Walls and Partitions: 1. Sleeves 8-Inch Diameter and Smaller (Above Grade): Sleeves shall be mild steel pipe or plastic sleeves built into wall, partition or beam, sized to pass pipe and covering, leaving a clear space of 1/4-inch minimum between covering and sleeve. Penetrations of fire rated barriers shall have mild steel sleeves. 2. Sleeves Installed in Exterior Walls (Below Grade): Schedule 40 steel hot dipped galvanized after fabrication or cast iron sleeve with 1/4-inch x 3-inch center flange (water stop) around the outside. D. Floors (Above Grade): Sleeves shall be Schedule 10 galvanized steel, set before floor is poured, sized to pass pipe and covering, leaving a clear space of 1/4-inch between covering and sleeve, and shall extend ½-inch above finished floor. E. Duct Sleeves: Sleeves or openings sized to pass mechanical ducts and covering shall be of framed construction in roof, wall, or partitions. F. Sealing of Sleeves: 1. Sleeves Below Grade: Caulk annular space between pipe and sleeve using oakum and poured lead both sides minimum one inch deep to make wall penetration water tight. 2. Sleeves Above Grade: Openings around pipes, duct, etc., passing through sleeves shall be made draft free and vermin-proof by packing solidly with mineral wool or fiberglass. 3. Sealing of Sleeves Through Fire Rated Barriers: All penetrations through fire rated barriers shall comply with Division-07 or as specified in this Division.


230500 - 5


12/7/10

FIRE/SMOKE RATED FLOOR, PARTITION OR WALL PENETRATION SEALANT A. Seal shall be composed of fire barrier product, putty, or caulking materials used either in combination or singularly. Acceptable Manufacturers are 3M Corporation or Dow Corning.

2.8

EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Provide as necessary to accomplish work specified. Perform in accordance with applicable State and Local codes and accepted good practice and in accordance with other applicable sections or divisions.

2.9

BELT DRIVES A. General: Equip each motor driven machine not direct connected with V-belt drive. Belts shall be of correct cross section to fit properly in sheave grooves and shall be carefully matched for each drive. Sheaves shall be cast iron or steel, bored to fit properly on shafts and secured with keys of proper size. The rating of each drive shall be as recommended by manufacturer for service but shall be at least 1.5 times nameplate rating of motor. B. Speed Adjustment: Adjust fan speed by change(s) in sheave size as necessary to obtain proper design air flow with fan in its installed location. Fans may be first fitted with variable pitch drives until proper speed adjustment is made and then fitted with proper fixed pitch drive size, or alternate sizes of fixed pitch drives may be used until proper fan needed to deliver necessary air quantity. C. Vibration of Air Handling Equipment and Fan Units: For air handling equipment and fans driven by motors 5-hp or greater, field vibration levels will not be acceptable if the maximum vibration velocity or displacement measurement exceeds the following values (when measurements are taken at the bearing supports using a vibration analyzer with the filter set at the operating fan speed): Fan Speed (RPM)

Maximum Vibration Level

800 or Less 801 and Greater

5 Mils (0.127 mm) max. displacement 0.20 in/sec. (5 mm/s) max. velocity

D. Belt and Coupling Guards: Each belt drive shall be equipped with an OSHA approved guard. Guards shall be constructed of #12 U.S. standard gage 3/4-inch diamond mesh wire screen, or equivalent, welded to one inch steel angle frames, and shall enclose all belts and sheaves. Tops and bottoms of guards shall be of substantial sheet metal or not less than #18 U.S. standard gage. Braces or supports must not "bridge" sound and vibration isolators. Guards shall be designed with adequate provision for movement of motor required to adjust belt tension. Means shall also be provided to permit oiling, use of speed counters, and other maintenance and testing operations with guard in place. All direct drive equipment shall have coupling guards in accordance with Florida Department of Business Regulation safety regulations and OSHA. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

230500 - 6


12/7/10

BEARINGS A. All bearings shall be 200,000-hour rated unless otherwise specified.


EQUIPMENT ACCESS A. Access Doors and Panels: 1. Locations: Provide access unit at the following locations. a. Where additionally specified in other sections of this Divisions 22 and 23 and where specifically indicated on the drawings. b. Where not specifically indicated on the drawings but where the work to be provided will require accessibility for purposes as described or as recommended by the manufacturer of the concealed item. c. At all locations where concealed equipment, fixtures, devices and similar items require accessibility for service, inspection, maintenance, repair, replacement and where such concealed item would not otherwise be accessible for such functions without the provision of an appropriately sized access unit. B. Installation: 1. Definitions: For the purpose of coordination of responsibility, the following words are defined to describe the intended coordination. a. "Furnish" means to procure an item and deliver it to the project for installation. b. "Install" means to determine (in coordination with others as necessary) the intended appropriate location of an item and to set, connect and otherwise fix in place in a manner to allow intended operation and use. c. "Provide" means to both furnish and install fully and completely in all aspects. 2. Furnishing Access Units: Access units shall be furnished as work of the Division which governs the item which is intended to be made accessible by the access unit. 3. Installing Access Units: Access units shall be installed as work of the Division which governs the surface, barrier, partition or other building component in and on which the access unit is to be placed. 4. Determination of Locations: a. Where the work of Divisions 22 or 23 requires that the access unit be provided (i.e., both furnished and installed), then the responsibility for determination of the location at which the access unit is to be placed is also work of Divisions 22 and 23. b. Where the work of Divisions 22 or 23 requires that access unit be furnished for installation as work of another Division, then the responsibility for determination of the location at which the access unit is to be installed shall be work of Divisions 22 and 23. Conversely, where the work of one Division requires that an access unit be only installed, then the responsibility for determination of the location of which the


230500 - 7


12/7/10

access unit is to be installed shall be work of Divisions 22 or 23 which furnishes the access unit. 5. Determination of Sizes: a. Unless an access unit size is indicated on the drawings or otherwise specified, the size of each access unit shall be determined as work of the Division which either provides or furnishes the access unit. b. Sizes for access units which are provided or furnished as work of this Division shall be in compliance with sizing criteria of this Division.

3.2

PAINTING A. Paint all exposed piping, insulation, equipment, structural bases, racks, in equipment rooms and on roof, furnished under Divisions 22 and 23 of these specifications. All exposed metal surfaces shall be given one prime coat and two finish coats. All insulated surfaces shall be given one sizing coat of glue sizing (omit this step if factory applied finish is suitable to receive prime coat), one prime coat and one finish coat. Factory painted or finished items do not require field painting but shall require "touch-up" with matching paint or finish where scratched. B. Pipe hangers, saddles, supports, riser clamps and accessories shall be painted to match their piping. C. Equipment not completely accessible for painting when set in place shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted before installation and suitably protected. D. Piping concealed need not be painted.

3.3

HANGERS AND INSERTS A. Refer also to other sections which may describe additional requirements for hanging and supporting. Comply with the more stringent requirement if more than one method is specified or shown. B. Provide and properly locate hangers to adequately support piping and equipment. Arrange hangers to permit expansion and contraction. C. The size of hanger for non-insulated pipes shall be suitable for pipe size to be supported. For insulated piping, the size of the hanger shall be suitable for the pipe size, plus the insulation and a 16-gauge half-circle galvanized sheet metal insulation saddle. D. Isolation of copper pipe from steel hangers to consist of wrapping pipe at, and 1" each side of contact surface with not less than two layers of adhesive type plastic electrical insulating tape.


230500 - 8


12/7/10

E. Pipe supports for piping 2" diameter and below may be supported directly from Epicure steel decking using Epicure standard hangers (200 lb. max. load). Piping above 2" shall be supported from steel beams. F. Locate pipe supports as follows unless noted in other sections of these specifications or on the drawings: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Horizontal cast iron pipe inside building - supported on each length of pipe. Vertical cast iron pipe inside building - supported at each floor level and at the base. Horizontal steel piping and copper tubing 1" diameter and under - support on 6' centers. Horizontal steel piping and copper tubing above 1" through 1-1/2" diameter - support on 8' centers. 5. Horizontal steel piping and copper tubing larger than 1-1/2" diameter -support on 10' centers, except 24" diameter piping shall be supported by main roof beams (20' O.C. maximum). 6. Support vertical cast iron, steel and copper piping at each floor penetration not to exceed 20 foot intervals.

3.4

ANCHORS A. Install a suitable anchor on piping to prevent movement from expansion and contraction by welding or clamping securely to pipe at fitting or coupling. Approval of the Architect/Engineer of method of anchorage must be obtained before installation of work. Properly anchor piping to remove strains on equipment which would be caused by expansion and contraction. Adequately insulate anchors on piping, with operating fluid temperatures below 75oF, to prevent moisture condensation problems.

3.5

FLASHING A. Flashing shall be done as work of other divisions.

3.6

PIPING SLEEVES A. Contractor shall furnish and set sleeves for his piping. Use galvanized sheet steel with water tight seams and joints or pipe for poured concrete. Extend sleeves thru walls, partitions and ceilings to finished surface. Extend sleeves 1/4 inch above finished concrete floors and 1 inch above slab in chases. Sleeves, installed above finished ceilings, for fire/smoke rated wall assemblies shall extend 1" beyond each face of wall. B. Adequately size sleeves to permit clearance for pipe movement and proper grading of pipes. Sleeves for insulated pipe shall be of adequate size to clear insulation. C. Caulk space between insulation or pipe and sleeve with asbestos rope and seal with fire rated safing material (or flexible fire retardant sealant if pipe is subject to expansion or contraction) to serve as a fire and smoke stop.


230500 - 9


12/7/10

D. Sleeves in walls and/or slabs subject to hydrostatic pressures shall be made water tight.

3.7

ESCUTCHEONS A. Provide chrome plated brass escutcheons (for 1/4 or 1 inch projecting sleeves as required) at each point where an uninsulated pipe passes thru a finished surface.

3.8

CONCRETE BASES AND STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Concrete bases and structural steel to support equipment and piping installed under each specification section or division and not specifically shown on the structural or architectural plans shall be furnished for this work.

3.9

SEALANT A. Fire/smoke sealant shall be installed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.



230500 - 10


12/7/10

SECTION 230515 - INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1


1.2

SCOPE A. Provide complete written and verbal operating and maintenance instruction to the Owner for all mechanical systems.

1.3

RELATION TO OTHER WORK A. Refer to the section, "General Mechanical Provisions", for related requirements. Refer to other sections of Divisions 22 and 23 and to all other applicable portions of the Drawings and Specifications. B. This section directly relates in particular to sections which describe the following: 1. Valves and piping systems components requiring maintenance and which are involved in the dynamic function of the systems. 2. Plumbing equipment (water heaters, etc.) 3. HVAC equipment (all air handling equipment, terminal units, filter assemblies, etc). 4. Control systems.


INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Provide three Instructions and Maintenance Manuals, each complete as follows: 1. Hardback three-ring loose-leaf binders. 2. Title sheet with job name, Contractor's, subcontractor's control subcontractor and related contractor's or material supplier's names, addresses and phone numbers. 3. Index of contents. 4. A signed copy of acknowledgment of instructions to the Owner or his authorized representative. Two additional copies of the signed acknowledgment shall be sent directly to the Architect as soon as possible after receipt.

INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

230515 - 1


12/7/10

5. Typewritten operating instructions for the Owner's personnel describing the following for each piece of equipment and systems: a. b. c. d.

How to start and stop each piece of equipment. How to set equipment and systems for normal operation. Normal restarting procedures before contacting the service contractor. Complete description of functions and operations of each piece of equipment including description of how equipment operates in conjunction with automatic control systems. e. Instructions for cleaning, oiling, greasing, fueling and similar tasks. 6. Approved shop drawings and submittal data and parts and maintenance booklet for each item of material and equipment furnished under this Division, including (but not limited to) the following: a. Spare parts list and source of supply for each equipment item. b. List of valves with location, service, size, model and operating position. c. Diagrams clearly indicating automatic control hook-up. 7. Any as-built wiring diagrams as called for in other sections of this division as needed to show how equipment controls interface with related systems. 8. Copies of certificates of inspection. 9. Guarantees.


VERBAL INSTRUCTION A. Provide verbal, hands-on, operating and maintenance instruction to Owner's authorized personnel for each equipment item and system. Instruction shall be given by competent personnel. 1. Duration: Total instruction period for all systems of this Divisions 22 and 23 shall be not less than fifteen (15) working days. The Owner reserves the right to audio-tape or videotape the instruction procedure.

3.2

MANUFACTURERS' SERVICE REPRESENTATIVES A. Verbal instruction at the site for the following equipment items and systems shall be given jointly by the contractor and the authorized manufacturer's service representative. (Contractor and manufacturer's service representative shall provide instruction to Owner for each equipment item of no less duration than the hours indicated in parenthesis. Duration shall be greater if otherwise specified). 1. RTU’s, Air Handling Units. (4 hours). 2. Exhaust/Supply Fans. (2 hours).


230515 - 2


12/7/10

3. Terminal Units. (2 hours). 4. DDC Controls (16 hours).



230515 - 3


12/7/10

SECTION 230518 - PIPING: CONDENSATE DRAIN

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1


1.2

SCOPE A. Provide condensate drain piping from cooling coil drain pans.

1.3

RELATION TO OTHER WORK A. Refer to the section, "General Mechanical Provisions", for related requirements. Refer to other sections of Division-23 and to all other applicable portions of the Drawings and Specifications. B. This section directly relates in particular to sections (which may or may not be included in this division) which describe the following: 1. Air handling equipment with cooling coils. 2. Insulation.

1.4

SHOP DRAWINGS A. Refer to Section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions".


PIPE A. Type M hard drawn copper conforming to ASTM Spec. B88.

2.2

FITTINGS A. Wrought copper, solder joint, pressure type conforming to ANSI B16.22.

PIPING: CONDENSATE DRAIN

230518 - 1


12/7/10

SOLDER A. Composition SB5 (95/5), Fed. Spec. QQ-S-571d and Class 3 (Sil Fos), Fed. Spec. AA-S561d, ASTM B32.


GENERAL A. Piping shall be sloped uniformly toward drain, and provided with trap seal having a depth, in inches, equivalent to one and one-half (1-1/2) times the total static pressure of the respective fan system. Traps shall be assembled using elbows and tees with threaded brass plugs to permit cleaning of trap and drain line. Piping shall be installed in a neat manner and shall be not smaller than full size of the equipment drain connection or three-quarters inch (3/4") whichever is larger.

3.2

JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS A. General: Joints and connections shall be made permanently air, gas, and water tight. B. Solder Joints: Cut pipe square using cutting tool which does not crimp pipe. Remove all burrs using pipe reamer and taking care not to flare the pipe end. Thoroughly clean the outside of pipe and the interior of the fittings using a fine sand cloth. Apply noncorrosive paste flux to the cleaned surfaces immediately and apply solder and heat, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, to complete joint. C. Equipment Connections: Connections to copper drain nipples may be made with solder joints provided care is exercised not to damage equipment, its insulation or finish. Connections to equipment having steel nipples shall be made using screwed to solder adapters with teflon tape applied to male threads prior to assembly.

3.3

ROUTING A. Unless otherwise indicated, route pipe discharge as indicated on the construction documents. If not indicated on the drawings, then route as follows: 1. Roof Mounted Equipment: To nearest roof drain. 2. Interior Equipment: To nearest floor drain.

3.4

INSULATION A. Insulate if so specified in section describing insulation.

END OF SECTION 230518 PIPING: CONDENSATE DRAIN

230518 - 2


12/7/10

SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-01 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section.

1.2

SCOPE A. Provide all angles, brackets, clamps, anchors, inserts, rods, braces, frames, hangers nuts and bolts, and other miscellaneous steel and hardware items as may be required for the proper support of equipment, piping systems, HVAC systems, plumbing systems and fire protection systems.

1.3

RELATION TO OTHER WORK A. Refer to the section, "General Mechanical Provisions", for related requirements. Refer to other sections of Divisions 22 and 23 and to all other applicable portions of the Drawings and Specifications. B. This section directly relates in particular to sections (which may or may not be included in this division) which describe the following: 1. Piping systems. 2. Duct systems. 3. Equipment items.

1.4

INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Where compliance with an industry, society or association standard is specified or indicated, certification of such compliance shall be submitted with shop drawings.

1.5

MANUFACTURER A. Products listed in this Section or on the plans are based on a specific manufacturer to establish the desired style, quality and type. Equivalent products, complying with the requirements of this Section and the installation requirements of the plans, by the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. F&S Manufacturing Corp.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

230529 - 1


12/7/10

2. Mason Manufacturing Co.


HANGERS A. Hangers In Contact With Copper Piping: Shall be copper plated or teflon coated. Hangers shall be Fed. Spec. WW-H-171E, Type 9. Acceptable: Grinnell Fig. 97 or 97C, or equivalent. B. Hangers (other than in Contact with Copper Piping): Shall have manufacturer's standard finish. Hangers shall be of the following types: 1. Pipe 3" and Larger: Fed. Spec. WW-H-171E, Type 1. Acceptable: Grinnell Fig. 260 or equivalent. 2. Pipe 2-1/2" and Smaller: Fed. Spec. WW-172E, Type 6. Acceptable: Grinnell Fig. 104 or equivalent.

2.2

ISOLATORS A. Refer to the Section, if included in this Division, which describes vibration isolation.

2.3

INSULATION SHIELDS A. Shall be Fed. Spec. WW-H-171D, Type 41. Acceptable: Grinnell Fig. 167, or equivalent.

2.4

BEAM CLAMPS A. Fed. Spec. WW-H-171D, Type 29. Acceptable: Grinnell Fig. 292 with links, or equivalent.

2.5

INSERTS A. Preset Type: Malleable iron with removable interchangeable nuts having lateral adjustment of not less than one and five-eighths inches. Continuous inserts shall have a capacity of 2,000 lb. per foot and shall be hooked over reinforcing. Acceptable: C-B Universal Fig. 282; Uni-strut Products Co., P3200 or P3300; B-Line Systems, Inc., Series B- 32.1, or equivalent.

2.6

ROD A. Galvanized steel, threaded bolt ends or continuous thread, sized with safety factor of five (5). Acceptable: Grinnell Fig. 140 or 146, or equivalent.


230529 - 2


12/7/10


GENERAL A. Refer to Section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions". All inserts, fasteners, hangers and supports shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.2

PIPE A. General: Hangers shall be spaced to prevent sag and to permit proper drainage. All piping shall be run parallel with the lines of building, unless otherwise indicated on drawings. The hanger spacing and placement shall be such that after the covering (insulation and finish) is applied, there will be not less than 1/2" clear space between finished covering and other surfaces, including the finished covering of parallel adjacent pipes. Hangers for insulated pipes shall be sized to encompass the insulation, finish and metal insulation shield (a metal insulation shield shall be provided for each hanger or support). Vertical piping shall be supported with pipe riser clamps at every floor penetration, unless specifically indicated otherwise on the drawings. Hangers and supports shall not be placed at greater than the following intervals: B. Pipe 1" and Smaller: Eight foot (8') centers and not more than two feet (2') from a change in direction (offsets, elbows, and tees). 1. Pipe 1-1/4" through 2-1/2": Ten foot (10') centers and not more than two feet (2') from a change in direction (offsets, elbows and tees). 2. Pipe 3" and Larger: Fourteen foot (14') centers and not more than two feet (2') from a change in direction (offsets, elbows, and tees).

3.3

EQUIPMENT A. Equipment supports shall be as otherwise indicated on the drawings or in the specifications.

3.4

DUCTWORK A. Refer to Sections describing ductwork.

3.5

POWDER (GUNPOWDER) ACTUATED FASTENERS A. Not allowed.

3.6

STEEL DECKING A. On projects where floor or roof slabs are installed over steel decking, drill or punch web of steel decking and insert hangers with washers before the concrete fill is poured in place.


230529 - 3


12/7/10

Hangers shall be plumb within one-half inch (1/2") in four feet (4') and spaced as required for service intended.



230529 - 4


12/7/10

SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1


1.2

SCOPE A. Provide vibration isolation supports for all equipment and piping as may be required to prevent transmission of vibration to building structure. This shall include air handling units, fans, piping, pumps and similar items.

1.3

RELATION TO OTHER WORK A. Refer to the section, "General Mechanical Provisions", for related requirements. Refer to other sections of Division-23 and to all other applicable portions of the drawings and specifications.

1.4

SHOP DRAWINGS A. Refer to Section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions". Submittal data shall show type, point loading information, size and deflection of each isolator proposed and any other information as may be required for the Architect/Engineer to check isolator selections for compliance with specifications. Include clearly outlined procedures for installing and adjusting the isolators.

1.5

MANUFACTURERS A. Products of the following manufacturers will be acceptable, provided they comply with all of the requirements of this specification: Consolidated Kinetics; Mason Industries; AmberBooth; Keflex; Flexonics; Vibration Eliminator Company or equivalent. Any model numbers listed are from one or more of these manufacturers and are given to provide an example of item(s) required.

1.6

OTHER REQUIREMENTS A. All vibration isolation equipment shall be both recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Architect/Engineer for each particular application on this project.

VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT

230548 - 1


12/7/10


BASIC REQUIREMENTS A. Unless otherwise noted, spring type vibration isolators shall be used for all motor driven equipment. It shall be the responsibility of isolation manufacturer to determine the amount of spring deflection required for each isolator to achieve optimum performance, prevent the transmission of objectionable vibration and meet noise criteria referenced herein.

2.2

CORROSION PROTECTION A. Steel components shall be phosphatized and painted. All nuts, bolts and washers shall be zinc-electroplated. Structural steel bases shall be thoroughly cleaned of welded slag and primed with zinc-chromate or metal etching primer. B. All isolators exposed to weather shall have steel parts PVC coated or hot-dip galvanized. Aluminum components shall be etched and painted. Nuts, bolts and washers may be zincelectroplated.

2.3

BASIC ISOLATORS A. General: Unit designations indicated are Architect/Engineer designations. Each of the following basic isolators may not be applicable to a specific installation application. See PART 3, "EXECUTION". B. Spring Mounts, Open Type, Unrestrained (Unit SMOU): Free standing springs; laterally stable; minimum horizontal-to-vertical spring rate (Kx/Ky) of 1.0: 1/2-inch neoprene acoustical friction pads between bottom baseplate and the supporting surface; leveling bolts; provision for bolting the mount to the equipment (unless otherwise specified); spring diameters not less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load; springs shall have a minimum additional travel to full compression of 50% of the rated deflection; 1-inch minimum static deflection (unless otherwise specified); submittals shall include spring diameters, deflections, free spring heights, solid spring heights and operating heights. Be similar to Mason Type SLF; Korfund Series L; Amber-Booth Type SW. C. Spring Mounts, Open Type, Restrained (Unit SMOR): Free standing springs; laterally stable; 1/2 inch neoprene acoustical friction pads between bottom baseplate and the supporting surface; leveling bolts; provision for bolting the mount to the equipment (unless otherwise specified); spring diameters not less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load; springs shall have a minimum additional travel to full compression of 50% of the rated deflection; 1-inch minimum static deflection (unless otherwise specified); restraint consisting of welded steel channel ends for outdoor installation and welded steel studs for indoor installation; restraint shall have restraining bolts connecting top plate and lower housing to limit vertical rise of isolated equipment when load is reduced; vertical clearance of 1/8 to 3/8 inch shall be maintained between spring top plate and housing (leveling bolts shall be adjusted to maintain this clearance). Submittal shall include spring diameters, deflections,


230548 - 2


12/7/10

free spring heights, solid spring heights and operating heights. Be similar to Mason Type SLR; Amber-Booth Type CT. D. Spring Mounts, Housed, Unrestrained (Unit SMHU): Springs free standing within their housing; laterally stable; 1/2 inch neoprene acoustical friction pads between bottom baseplate and the supporting surface; leveling bolts; provision for bolting the mount to the equipment (unless otherwise specified); spring diameters not less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load; springs shall have a minimum additional travel to full compression of 50% of the rated deflection; 1-inch minimum static deflection (unless otherwise specified); welded steel housing; vertical clearance of 1/8 to 3/8 inch shall be maintained between spring top plate and housing (leveling bolts shall be adjusted to maintain this clearance). Submittal shall include spring diameters, deflections, free spring heights, solid spring heights and operating heights. Be similar to Mason Type C. E. Neoprene and Spring Hangers, Vertical Deflection (Unit NSHV): Steel housing for undampened support of the spring: Provisions for attachment of hanger rods; reinforced neoprene washer and grommet to break up metal to metal contact; free standing spring; 1 inch minimum static deflection (unless otherwise specified) spring diameters not less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load; springs shall have a minimum additional travel to full compression of 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring diameters, solid spring heights, free spring heights, deflections, overall hanger dimensions and maximum hanger rod diameter which can be accommodated by the hanger. Be similar to Mason Type DNHS: Amber-Booth Type BSR. F. Neoprene and Spring Hangers, Vertical and Angular Deflection (Unit NSHVA): Shall contain a laterally stable steel spring and 0.3" reflection neoprene or fiberglass element in series. A neoprene neck shall be provided where the hanger rod passes through the steel box supporting the isolator mount to prevent metal to metal contact. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree arc before contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Mason Type 30N. G. Neoprene and Spring Hangers, Vertical Deflection, Position Type (Unit NSHVP): Steel housing for undampened support of the spring; provisions for attachment of hanger rods; reinforced neoprene washer and grommet to break up metal to metal contact; free standing spring; 1 inch minimum static deflection (unless otherwise specified); spring diameters not less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load; springs shall have a minimum additional travel to full compression of 50% of the rated deflection; be capable of holding the supported item at fixed elevation during installation with secondary adjustment to transfer the load to the spring while maintaining a fixed position; scale and pointer to indicate the deflection. Submittals shall include spring diameters, solid spring heights, free spring heights, deflections, overall hanger dimensions and maximum hanger rod diameter which can be accommodated by the hanger. Be similar to Mason Type PCDNHS: Amber-Booth Type PBS. H. Neoprene and Spring Hangers, Vertical and Angular Deflection, Position Type (Unit NSHVAP): Shall contain a laterally stable steel spring and 0.3" deflection neoprene or fiberglass element in series. A neoprene neck shall be provided where the hanger rod passes through the steel box supporting the isolator mount to prevent metal to metal contact. Spring VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT

230548 - 3


12/7/10

diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree arc before contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Be capable of holding the supported item at the fixed elevation during installation with secondary adjustment to transfer the load to the spring while maintaining a fixed position; scale and pointer to indicate the deflection; similar to Mason Type PC30N. I.

Neoprene-In-Shear Hangers (Unit NH): Steel housing for un-dampened support of the neoprene; provisions for attachment of hanger rods; neoprene-in-shear isolator; similar to Mason Type HD, Amber-Booth Type HRD.

J.

Neoprene-In-Shear Mounts (Unit NM): Double deflection neoprene-in-shear mountings shall have a minimum static deflection of 0.35". All metal surfaces shall be neoprene-covered. The top and bottom surfaces shall be neoprene ribbed and bolt holes shall be provided in the base. On equipment such as small vent sets and close coupled pumps, steel rails shall be used above the mountings to compensate for the overhang; steel rails shall be by same manufacturer as vibration isolators and equivalent to Mason Industries Type DNR. Mounts shall be Mason Industries Type ND, Consolidated Kinetics Type RD or Vibration Mounts and Controls Series RD.

K. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Same internal diameter as the pipe in which the connector is installed (not necessarily internal diameters of inlets or outlets of equipment). 1. Both recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Architect/Engineer to be suitable for handling the conveyed fluid at all conditions (maximums and minimums of temperatures, pressures, velocities, etc.) encountered for each particular application. 2. Of proper design to absorb the combination of vibratory and/or expansion or contraction motions (lateral and/or axial and/or angular) encountered at each installation point (for example, do not use hose type where axial motion is encountered at the installation point unless so recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Architect. 3. Stainless steel bellows type (Unit SSB): Heavy duty steel restraining rods and spacers; laminated steel bellows; steel flanges; permit axial, lateral and angular movement; rated to withstand 180oF operating temperature and 150 psig working pressure for chilled water; 250oF operating temperature and 150 psig working pressure for heating hot water; similar to Keflex Series 151 or 301. 4. Stainless steel hose type (Unit SSH): Rated to withstand 180oF operating temperature and 150 psig working pressure; have flanges except 2-1/2 inch and smaller sizes may have screw type fittings installed with a union at one end or with screw-on flanges at both ends; net flexible lengths shall be at least 6 pipe diameters for pipe up to 5 inch ID and not less than 36 inches for pipe 6 inch ID and greater; corrugated bellows with stainless steel wire braid restraining sheath; similar to Flexonics Type RW, RF or Series 400, Mason Type BSS, Keflex Series SSH. L. Steel Equipment Frames (Unit SEF): Frames shall consist of structural steel sections sized, spaced and connected to form a rigid base which will not twist, rack, deform or deflect in any manner that will negatively affect the operation of the supported equipment or the performance of the vibration isolation mounts. Frames shall be of adequate size and plan form to support basic equipment units and motors plus any associated pipe elbow or duct elbow supports and electrical control elements or other components closely related and VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT

230548 - 4


12/7/10

requiring resilient support in order to prevent vibration transfer from equipment to the building structure. Frames shall include side mounting brackets for attachment to Unit SMOU isolator or other specified isolator. The clearance between the underside of any frame or mounted equipment unit and the top of the building structure below shall be at least 2 inches. M. Neoprene Pads (Unit NP): Waffle or ribbed pattern neoprene pads shall be fabricated from 40-50 Durometer neoprene. Mason Type W.


GENERAL A. All isolators shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and shall be properly adjusted prior to requesting final inspection or the performance of any vibration testing specified. B. Each item of equipment (machinery, piping, etc.) which is provided with vibration isolation equipment shall rest in its intended, proper operating position (i.e; exactly level, etc.) after installation of vibration isolation equipment. Approval of such vibration isolation equipment by Architect/Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of this responsibility. C. Equipment which is specified to rest on concrete housekeeping pads shall have Unit NP pads unless otherwise indicated.

3.2

PIPING IN AIR HANDLING UNIT EQUIPMENT ROOMS A. General: 1. Isolators for equipment are described elsewhere in this specification; and it shall be the responsibility of the vibration isolation manufacturer to coordinate the selection of piping supports with equipment supports to provide for a carefully engineered system designed to accommodate expansion and contraction without creating excessive stress at any equipment connections or in any portion of the piping. 2. Hangers for horizontal piping shall be installed at regular intervals. Pipe risers shall be supported at the base of the riser. Submit hanger schedule. 3. The first three piping supports away from any given piece of vibrating equipment to which piping is connected shall be selected for an operating spring deflection not less than that specified for the equipment isolators. All other vibration isolation supports for horizontal piping shall have a minimum operating deflection of 3/4" with capability of 50% additional travel-to-solid. All supports for pipe risers shall have deflection capability at least four times the expansion or contraction to be accommodated. 4. Temporary anchors, where required, shall be installed to permit pre-adjustment of springs in risers. Pre-adjustment procedure, which is intended to control direction of pipe movement and final operating deflection of the springs, shall be detailed in submittal data.


230548 - 5


12/7/10

5. Permanent limit stops shall be installed to prevent excessive vertical motion of risers in the event water is drained from system. Locations and other details of these limit stops shall be submitted to Architect/Engineer for acceptance. 6. Piping connected to vibration isolated equipment shall be installed so that it does not strain or force out of alignment vibration isolators supporting the basic equipment, nor shall pipes restrict such equipment from "floating" freely on its respective vibration isolation system. 7. Drain piping connected to vibrating equipment shall not physically contact any building construction or non-isolated systems or components. 8. Do not allow the weight of the pipe to be carried by walls through which the pipe passes. B. Isolator Locations: 1. Ceiling hung piping to air handling units: Provide neoprene and spring hangers, vertical and angular deflection (Unit NSHVA) at the first three support points of pipe runs connected to the vibrating equipment or at all support points along the first 50 feet of pipe runs connected to the vibrating equipment, whichever length is greater, but not to exceed length of mechanical equipment room. 2. Floor supported piping to air handling units: Provide resilient support for floor supported piping same locations as specified above for ceiling hung piping. Provide open type unrestrained spring mounts (Unit SMOU) for first three support points; use neoprene-inshear mounts (Unit NM) thereafter and both with supplemental supports as required by job conditions. 3. Acoustic Seals: Provide acoustic seals (Unit AS) at all wall, ceiling and floor openings through which pipe runs from equipment rooms into adjoining spaces.

3.3

AIR HANDLING UNITS, FACTORY PACKAGED A. Floor Mounted: 1. Spring mounted (Unit SMOU) with 1 inch minimum static deflection when AHU motor is 5 hp. or less; spring mounts with 2 inch minimum static deflection when AHU motor is 7-1/2 hp. or greater. Instead of bolting the units to the spring mounts, provide height saving brackets. 2. Flexible duct connections as specified in "Duct System Accessories" section. 3. Flexible pipe connectors (Unit SSB). 4. Steel equipment frame (Unit SEF) manufacturer's standard unit frame or base is not sufficiently stiff and rigid to permit point vibration isolation. 5. Mount equipment on reinforced concrete pads as specified in other sections. B. Suspended from Building Structure: 1. Spring hangers (Unit NSHV) with 1-inch minimum static deflection when motor is 5-HP or less; spring hangers (Unit NSHV) with 2-inch minimum static deflection when motor is 7-1/2 HP or greater. 2. Flexible duct connectors as specified in Section entitled "Ductwork".


230548 - 6


12/7/10

FAN COIL UNITS AND FANS, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL LIGHT DUTY AND HEAVY DUTY A. Flexible duct connectors as specified in "Ductwork". B. Neoprene-in-shear hangers (Unit NH). C. Piping (first 10 feet) with neoprene hangers (Unit NH).

3.5

FANS, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL HEAVY DUTY A. Suspended from Structure: 1. Spring hangers (Unit NSHV) with 1-inch minimum static deflection when motor is 5 HP or less; spring hangers (Unit NSHV) with 2-inch minimum static deflection when motor is 7-1/2 HP or greater. 2. Flexible duct connectors as specified in Section entitled "Ductwork".

3.6

VAV TERMINAL UNITS A. Flexible duct connectors as specified in "Ductwork". B. Neoprene-in-shear hangers (Unit NH).

3.7

MANUFACTURER'S SUPERVISION A. The Contractor shall include in his price the cost of the vibration isolation manufacturer or his qualified representative for providing such supervision as may be necessary to assure correct installation and adjustment of the isolators. Upon completion of the installation and after system is put into operation, the manufacturer or his representative shall make a final inspection and submit his report to the Architect/Engineer in writing certifying the correctness of installation and compliance with approved submittal data.



230548 - 7


12/7/10

SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary conditions and Division-01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2

SCOPE A. Provide complete identification of the mechanical systems including piping, valves and equipment as noted herein.

1.3

RELATION TO OTHER WORK A. Refer to the section, "General Mechanical Provisions", for related requirements. Refer to other sections of Divisions 21, 22 and 23 and to all other applicable portions of the Drawings and Specifications. B. This section directly relates in particular to sections (which may or may not be included in this division) which describe the following: 1. Piping and the interconnected equipment and component items for the following systems: a. HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, etc. as specified in other Division 21, 22, 23, etc. sections. b. Insulation.

1.4

APPLICABLE PIPING AND RELATED ITEMS A. Piping and interconnected equipment and component items for the following systems shall be identified. Identification of the following systems shall not preclude the identification of other systems where identification of such other systems may be specified in other sections. Systems requiring identification as work of this section are: 1. Refrigerant. 2. Domestic water, hot and cold. 3. Fire Protection.

IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT

230553 - 1


12/7/10

SHOP DRAWINGS A. Refer to Section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions". Provide schedule of colors, lettering, tagging, handling and similar items to clearly identify proposed method of identification for mechanical systems.

1.6

DIMENSIONS A. Pipe dimensions as used in this section refer to the total outside dimensions (diameters) of both the pipe and its insulation (if any).


GENERAL A. Comply with ANSI A13. 1-1975, "Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems" and OSHA requirements, or as otherwise indicated. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: W. H. Brady Co., 2223 West Camden Road, Milwaukee, WI 53201; Seton Name Plate Corporation, 592 Boulevard, New Haven, CT 06505, or equivalent.

2.2

MARKERS, BANDS, TAGS AND LABELS A. Markers: Must have approved color coded background, proper color of legend in relation to background color, approved legend letter size, approved length and flow arrow indicator. 1. Pipes 3/4" through 5" O.D.: Seton "Setmark" Type SNA marker or equivalent. 2. Pipes 6" O.D. and Greater: Seton "Setmark" Type STR marker or equivalent. B. Bands: Color coded in minimum widths of 2-1/4" for pipe through 12" O.D. and 4" for pipe 14" O.D. and greater. Brady B-500 Vinyl Cloth, B-350 PermaCode or B-946 Outdoor Film or equivalent as applicable. C. Valve Tags: Each tag shall designate appropriate service and valve number. Be securely attached with meter seals with 4-ply 0.018 copper smooth wire, or brass "S" hooks, or brass jack chain in a manner to allow easy reading. Provide either of the following types: 1. Brass Type: Minimum 19 gauge polished brass; 1-1/2" min. diameter. Acceptable: Seton Style 250-BL or equivalent. 2. Aluminum Color Coded Type: Anodized aluminum; 2": min. diameter. Acceptable: Seton Style 2070 or equivalent. 3. Aluminum Alloy Type: 16 gauge sheet aluminum: depressed type letters filled with black enamel. Face and periphery of satin finish Alumilite, Alcoa 204A2 or equal, free from burns and scratches. Seton Type 4 or equivalent.


230553 - 2


12/7/10

4. Fiber Glass Type: 1/16" thick glass fiber reinforced resin. 2" x 2" size of 2-1/2" x 9" size as necessary to identify item. Brady Series No. 2297 or equivalent. D. Labels: Provide either of the following types: 1. Plastic Type: Outdoor grade acrylic plastic to withstand weather, abrasion, grease, acid, chemical and other corrosive conditions; 1/16" min. thickness. Sized 3/4 x 2-1/2, 1 x 21/2, 1 x 3 or 1-1/2 x 4 as necessary to identify item. Seton "Setonite" or equivalent. 2. Aluminum Type: Engraved, flexible, 0.020" thick aluminum. Sized 3/4 x 2-1/2, 1 x 3, 11/2 x 4 or 3/6 as necessary to identify item. Seton No. 06505 or equivalent.


GENERAL A. Apply only after completion of insulation, painting and cleaning work so that final identification is not disfigured by such other work. B. Coordinate with actual composition and operating temperatures of surface on which identification is to be placed so that proper permanent adhesion of markers and labels to surface is obtained. C. Locate marking and banding where practical such that groups of pipe are identified at similar location for ease of visual tracking. For example, mark and band parallel runs of pipe which are side-by-side at the same general place. D. Small pipes less than 3/4" diameter may be identified with tags similar to those specified for valves. E. Adhere or affix all identification items permanently except where removal may be necessary for maintenance or service.

3.2

MARKERS AND BANDS A. Provide on piping as follows: 1. Pipe Concealed in Inaccessible Locations (e.g., Chases, Underground): No identification required. 2. Pipe Concealed in Accessible Locations (e.g., Ceiling Plenums): a. Markers every 30 feet of pipe length. Bands every 15 feet of pipe length. 3. Pipe Exposed in Equipment Rooms: a. Markers every 15 feet of pipe length for pipe through 12 inches O.D. and every 30 feet for pipe 14 inches O.D. and greater.


230553 - 3


12/7/10

4. Bands every 10' of pipe length for pipe through 12" O.D. and every 25' for pipe 14" O.D. and greater. 5. Exterior Pipe, Exposed: No identification required unless otherwise indicated.

3.3

VALVE TAGS A. Valve tags shall be installed on the following items: 1. All motorized valves (except those valves associated with direct control of flow to air handling apparatus whereby the valve may be identified by reference to the item of equipment it serves). 2. All fire protection system valves located in mains and branches (except those valves in fire hose cabinets). 3. All manual valves which perform functions other than isolation of an equipment item for servicing. This includes, but is not limited to, valves in valve stations, remote locations where use is not evident due to proximity of equipment or other piping, and similar locations. 4. Small piping (other than domestic water) where markers are impractical. 5. Small but critical equipment items on which it is impractical to install labels.

3.4

VALVE TAG LISTS A. Prior to substantial completion, provide a complete list of all valves having tags. Indicate the following on such list: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

3.5

Valve size. Valve location. Valve type. Service application. Valve manufacturer and model number. Pressure class and allowable working pressure.

LABELS A. Provide labels of proper size on mechanical system equipment including but not limited to, air handling equipment, fans, control panels, terminal units, coils and similar items.

3.6

COLORS A. Colors for piping systems and equipment which are required to be painted shall be as follows for those systems which may be applicable to this project: 1. Domestic Cold Water: Medium green enamel with domestic cold water legend.


230553 - 4


12/7/10

2. Domestic Hot Water and Domestic Hot Water Recirculation: White insulation with yellow tape or metal bands with domestic hot water (domestic hot water recirculation) legend. 3. Fire Protection Piping: Red with fire line legend. 4. Sprinkler Piping: Red with sprinkler legend. 5. Sanitary Sewer and Vent Piping: Brown with sanitary sewer (vent) legend. B. Identification: Coordinate colors and finishes with pipe identification.



230553 - 5


12/7/10

SECTION 230594 - PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION, FINAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1


1.2

SCOPE A. Provide the services of an independent test and balance agency to verify the performance of the complete heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems as described by Division 23. Performance verification shall be accomplished by established testing and balancing procedures as described in this section.

1.3


1.4

TEST AND BALANCE AGENCY A. All performance verification shall be performed by an independent test and balance agency (herein referred to as the "T & B Agency") which is fully certified by and a current member of the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC).

1.5

CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP A. Performance verification shall be performed as a service of the T & B Agency directly to the Contractor with no other subcontractors as part of the agreement. B. Performance verification is specified in this Division 23 only because it relates predominantly to Division 23 work. However, the inclusion in this Division 23 of this section covering performance verification shall not preclude the contractual agreement of the T & B Agency from contracting directly to the Contractor with no other subcontractors as part of such agreement.

PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION, FINAL

230594 - 1


12/7/10

AGENCY APPROVAL A. Submit the name and qualifications of the proposed T & B Agency to the Architect/Engineer for approval within thirty (30) days of Notice to Proceed. B. Include AABC National Project Certification Performance Guaranty.

1.7

WORK INCLUDED A. The T & B Agency shall provide all labor, supervision, professional services, tools, test equipment and instruments (except as otherwise specified) to perform the following work and all other work of this section: 1. Review the automatic temperature control and air terminal unit specifications for their respective and combined effects on the testing and balancing procedures for the air systems. 2. Where in the opinion of the T & B Agency conditions may exist in the system design or construction that may have the potential of adversely affecting system performance, then the T & B Agency shall identify the condition and submit in writing recommended correctives for consideration by the Architect/Engineer. 3. During construction, review those shop drawings which have relevance to performance verification to confirm that the required piping, ductwork and equipment, and their respective specialties and accessories such as gauges, valves, dampers, access doors, etc., are properly selected, sized and located to permit proper and complete testing and balancing to be accomplished. 4. Perform site inspections to verify compliance with documents, and observe pressure tests on ductwork. 5. Perform a complete air test and balance of all heating, ventilating, air conditioning and exhaust air systems shown and described on the Construction Documents and as further described herein. 6. Submit Equipment Test and Systems Balance Report. 7. Furnish specifications to Contractor for properly sized fixed sheaves on fan systems after proper RPM has been established.

1.8

GUARANTY A. The T & B Agency shall include a warranty period of ninety (90) days after completion and acceptance of test and balance work. During the warranty period, the Architect/Engineer may request a re-check or re-setting of any system component requiring testing and balancing. The T & B Agency shall provide technicians, instruments, and tools to assist the Architect/Engineer in conducting any test that he may require during this time. The foregoing shall be in addition to the A.A.B.C. National Project Certification Performance Guaranty which shall also be provided.


230594 - 2


12/7/10


GENERAL A. The tangible product of this section shall include the reports and documentation necessary to verify the systems' performance.

2.2

REPORT A. The T & B Agency shall in the course of his work record the information herein specified. Recorded test data shall be at the final balanced condition for each system. Recorded data shall be arranged by system using the appropriate designation as established on the Construction Documents. Four (4) copies of the final report signed, bound and indexed shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for his approval or comments. B. Where actual measurements recorded for the final balance show deviations of more than 10% from the design, the T & B Agency shall note same in the report and submit recommendations for corrective action to the Architect/Engineer for his consideration. C. In those cases where recorded data can be reasonably interpreted to be inaccurate, inconsistent and/or erroneous, the Architect/Engineer may request additional testing and balancing. The T & B Agency shall at no additional cost perform such retesting and rebalancing as directed by and in the presence of the Architect/Engineer. D. Where, in the opinion of the T & B Agency, there is excessive vibration, movement or noise from any piece of equipment, ductwork, pipes, etc., the T & B Agency shall note same in the report and submit recommendations for action to the Architect/Engineer. E. The T & B Agency shall verify that each thermostat and the devices it is controlling, such as control valves, motorized dampers, VAV boxes, etc., operate in the exact sequence required. F. Test Data: Include the following data in the Systems Test and Balance Report: 1. Motors: Manufacturer Model and serial number Rated amperage and voltage Rated horsepower Rated RPM Corrected full load amperage Measured amperage and voltage Calculated BHP Measured RPM Sheave size, type and manufacturer


230594 - 3


12/7/10

2. Fans: Manufacturer Model or Serial number, BI or Air Foil - number of blades Rated CFM, measured CFM Rated RPM, measured RPM Measured pressures - Inlet and Outlet Static Pressure Pulley size, type and manufacturer Belt size and quantity Rated TSP Operating TSP & operating ESP (at discharge side of Supply Fan or suction side of Exhaust/Return Fan) 3. Air Systems (including inlets and outlets): Provide single line diagrammatic plan locating each air inlet and outlet and its reference number. Grille or diffuser reference number and manufacturer. Grille or diffuser location. Design velocity. Design CFM. Effective area factor and size. Measured velocity. Measured CFM Terminal Unit CFM G. Other Report Requirements: Where any systems have equipment or components which are not covered by the above, then the Final Test and Balance Report shall include the following data as applicable to such equipment or systems to confirm actual operation: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

2.3

All inlet and outlet areas. All applicable duct, pipe and coil sizes. Outside, inside, mixed and supply air conditions. All fluid velocities, flow rates, temperatures and pressures at appropriate locations. All speeds. All voltage and ampere ranges. Descriptions of each test method used.

INSTRUMENTATION A. All test and balance equipment and instruments to be furnished by the T & B Agency shall have been calibrated within six (6) months of use on this work. A list of equipment and instruments to be used shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer prior to commencing test and balancing operations and shall include equipment and/or instruments, name, manufacturer, serial number and certification of last calibration date. Instruments without calibration adjustment capability shall be accompanied with manufacturer's certification of accuracy. Test and balance equipment and instruments furnished by the Contractor to the T & B Agency shall be accompanied with certification as required above. The T & B Agency


230594 - 4


12/7/10

shall be responsible for the protection from damage due to accident, abuse or misuse, all equipment and instruments provided by the Contractor, and shall return same in good working condition at the completion of the test and balance work to the Contractor. The T & B Agency shall repair at his expense to original condition and accuracy or replace with like equipment and instruments damaged in the work.

2.4

DIAGRAMS A. Provide a schematic diagram (i.e., one-line) of duct system(s) tested. Indicate on the diagram the relative location of all air distribution devices, VAV boxes, heating/cooling coils, points of data measurements (i.e., pitot traverse, temperature, static pressure) fans, air handling units, and similar equipment included in the system. Diagram shall identify each component tested. Said identification shall utilize the conventions shown on the drawings (i.e., AHU-1 or SF-6) and correlate with the data sheets provided in the Test and Balance Report.

2.5

LOGS AND FORMS A. Logs and forms shall clearly indicate following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

All inlet and outlet areas. All applicable duct, pipe and coil sizes. Outside, inside, mixed and supply air conditions. All fluid velocities, flow rates, temperatures and pressures at significant locations (e.g., fluid pressures before and after each pump and fan, temperatures and pressures at supply and return headers and at chiller and boiler inlets and outlets, etc.). 5. All fan speeds. 6. All motor ampere ranges. 7. Descriptions of each test method used. B. Associated Air Balance Council log and data forms.


GENERAL A. Sheaves: The Contractor shall provide applicable fans with V-belt drives and fixed pitch sheaves. In order to provide the properly sized fixed pitch sheave, the Contractor shall initially provide fans with V-belt drives, variable pitch sheaves. The Contractor, upon completion of system balancing by the T & B Agency, will replace these adjustable pitch sheaves with fixed sheaves of the size and type specified by the T & B Agency. The Contractor shall tag the adjustable sheaves, transmit same to Owner, and receive written receipt by Owner of acceptance of these sheaves. B. Load Conditions: All testing and balancing of systems shall be undertaken with maximum attainable load. Testing and balancing of all air handling systems shall be accomplished with ceiling tile in place and enclosing partitions and doors erected.


230594 - 5


12/7/10

C. Observe all equipment and exposed piping for noise, movement or vibrations under normal operating conditions and report excesses to the Architect and Owner.

3.2

PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION, PRELIMINARY A. The Contractor, prior to commencement of the balancing by the T & B Agency, shall verify in writing: 1. That all air filters have been installed and are in clean condition. 2. That expansion tanks have been inspected and that the system is not air bound and is completely filled with water. 3. That all automatic valves, hand valves, and balancing valves have been left or fixed in the open position for full flow through all devices. 4. That all linkages between valves or dampers and their actuators are secure. 5. That all fans are operating at the specified RPM. B. The Contractor shall confirm in writing that the systems as scheduled for balancing, are operational and complete and that all piping and ductwork have been pressure tested and accepted and all affected piping systems have been cleaned, flushed and refilled with prescribed treated water and vented.

3.3

PROTECTION OF WORK A. The Contractor shall protect all mechanical devices during the testing and balancing period. The activities of the T & B Agency will include but not be limited to the adjustments of designated balancing devices including; adjustment of balancing dampers, adjustment of inlet vane dampers, adjustment of air extractors, air splitters, or manual dampers, the adjustment of adjustable sheaves for fan speed, the adjustment of balancing valves, or similar devices. The existence of the T & B Agency shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the complete operation of the mechanical systems in conformance with the contract documents.

3.4

CORRECTION OF WORK A. The Contractor shall at no additional cost to the Owner rectify discrepancies between the actual installation and contract documents when in the opinion of the T & B Agency the discrepancy will significantly affect system balance and performance.

3.5

COORDINATION AND ASSISTANCE A. The Contractor shall assist the T & B Agency by providing all labor, equipment, tools and material required to operate all of the equipment and systems necessary for the testing and balancing of the systems and for the adjustment, calibration or repair of all electric or pneumatic or automated control devices and components. These services shall be available on each working day during the period of final testing and balancing. The Contractor shall


230594 - 6


12/7/10

assist the T & B Agency by arranging to have all ceilings, partitions, windows, and doors installed prior to the scheduled commencement of balancing within each specified area. B. The Contractor shall provide to the approved T & B Agency a complete set of plans and specifications and an approved copy of all heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment shop drawings. The Contractor shall include the cost of all pulley, belt, and drive changes, as well as balancing dampers required to achieve proper system balance recommended by the T & B Agency.

3.6

AIR SYSTEMS A. The testing and balancing shall include, but is not limited to, the following requirements: 1. Adjust fan speeds to deliver the required cfm and static pressure, and record rpm and full load amperes. 2. Make pitot tube traverse of main supply ducts to verify design cfm. Seal duct access holes with rubber or metal snap-in plugs. 3. For each supply air system, verify the quantity of outside air and return air when the system is operating in the maximum cooling and full heating modes. 4. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille and register to within 10% of design requirements, and also adjust so as to minimize drafts in all areas. 5. Observe all equipment and exposed ductwork for noise, movement or vibration under normal operating conditions and report excesses to the Engineer. B. After all air distribution devices have been balanced to distribute calculated design indicated air quantities and if temperature in any area (where such area does not have the particular zone temperature control thermostat located therein) of any zone is not maintained within 2 degrees plus or minus of the zone areas which does have the zone temperature control thermostat, then notify Architect/Engineer of such conditions and obtain approval to rebalance devices to obtain air quantities other than those indicated so that air temperature in entire zone will be as even as possible regardless of calculated design air quantities. After obtaining approval to rebalance, perform such necessary rebalancing.



230594 - 7


12/7/10

SECTION 230700 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Basic Requirements: Provisions of Section 230100, BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS are a part of this Section.

1.2

SUMMARY A. General: Provide thermal insulation as indicated. Materials such as fasteners and retainers not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation shall be provided.

1.3

SUBMITTAL A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "SUBMITTAL" in Section 230100. Include the following data: 1. Manufacturers Literature: a. Provide data on all types of insulation, jacketing, sealer and adhesive required by this section of these specifications, with indication of each material and its intended application. 2. Performance Data: a. Provide thermal performance, density and vapor permeance for each type of insulation, finish, cover, facing or jacket specified in this section. b. Unless otherwise stated, insulation types and thicknesses specified are based on insulating materials having a "K" value (BTU per hour per square foot per degree temperature difference) per inch of thickness as indicated. c. Vapor permeance is based on vapor retardant materials having water vapor transmission rates in perms (grains of vapor per hour per square foot per inch of mercury vapor pressure differential).

. 3. Installation Instructions: a. Provide copy of manufacturer's printed installation instructions for all insulation materials including copies shipped with the material.

THERMAL INSULATION

230700 - 1


12/7/10

APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. General: All equipment, material, accessories, methods of construction and reinforcement, finish quality, workmanship and installation shall comply with the paragraph entitled "Code Compliance" in Section 230100. B. Comply: With the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards and other Codes and Standards as adopted by the Local Authority having Jurisdiction. C. NFPA: All materials and adhesives used shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A, 1999 Revision, as to flame spread and smoke developed ratings throughout their operating temperature range. All insulation, jackets, facings and adhesives used to adhere the jacket or facing to the insulation, including fittings and butt strips, shall have a non-combustible fire and smoke hazard rating and label as tested by ASTM E-84, NFPA 255, 2000 Revision and UL-723 not exceeding flame spread value of 25 and smoke developed/fuel contributed value of 50. Accessories such as mastics, cements, tapes and cloth for fittings shall have the same ratings. D. ASHRAE: Insulation thermal conductance values and insulation thicknesses shall comply with the requirements of the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) Standard 90.1-1989. E. Florida Energy Code: Insulation thermal conductance values and insulation thickness shall comply with the Florida Energy Efficiency Code for Building Construction, 2001 edition. F. Industry Standards: Where compliance with an industry, society or association standard is specified or indicated, certification of such compliance shall be included in the submittal. G. Packaging Information: All products or their shipping cartons shall bear the Underwriter's Label indicating that flame and smoke ratings do not exceed the above criteria. Every package or container of insulation, jacketing, facing, cement, adhesive, or coating delivered to the project site must have a manufacturer's stamp or label attached, giving the brand and a description of the material. All vapor retardants shall be labeled, indicating the thickness, product nomenclature and manufacturer.


GENERAL A. Materials: The insulation materials and installation procedures shall be as indicated in this section and must be approved by the insulation product manufacturer for each particular application. The actual products to be used must comply with the insulation material for the specific application as indicated in other sections of these specifications.

THERMAL INSULATION

230700 - 2


12/7/10

B. Applicability: Products and manufacturers listed may not all be applicable. Use only those products and manufacturers which are indicated as being applicable to a specific insulation condition. Insulating materials shall be resilient and moisture-resistant so that the insulating properties will not be affected by rough handling, water damage and similar construction hazards. All adhesives, sealers and vapor retardant coatings shall be compatible with the materials to which they are applied, and shall not corrode, soften or attack such materials when wet or dry. C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Manufacturers which are listed are those manufacturers who may make one or more of the insulation products required. Listing of a manufacturer does not mean the manufacturer is approved for all applicable insulation conditions. Manufacturers must comply with the requirements of each insulation condition to be acceptable for the application.

2.2

MANUFACTURER A. Refer to paragraph entitled "MANUFACTURERS" in Section 230100.

2.4

ELASTOMERIC CLOSED-CELL FOAM A. General: Flexible foam-type expanded closed-cell preformed (tube), roll or sheet as applicable. Nitrile, rubber based, closed cell structure. Maximum K value of 0.27 at 75 degrees F., and maximum water vapor transmission of 0.02 perm. Allowable temperature applications from -40 degrees F. to 220 degrees F. when installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

2.5

FIBERGLASS INSULATION A. General: Inorganic fibrous glass. B. Board: Faced rigid or semi-rigid form. Stiffness of 800 EI unless otherwise indicated. 1. Duct insulation external: Fiberglass semi-rigid board. Composed of resin bonded glass fibers faced with a foil scrim-kraft (FSK) reinforced laminate of aluminum foil and kraft bonded to provide a metallic surface finish vapor retardant; alternate vapor retardant facing (if specifically indicated) is an all service jacket (ASJ) of high intensity white bleached, chemically treated kraft paper reinforced with fiberglass yarn mesh and laminated to aluminum foil with fire-retardant adhesive to impart a clean, white appearance. Conductivity (K) of not less than 0.23 at 75 degrees F. Provide in thickness of 1-1/2 inches unless otherwise indicated. Provide with minimum density of 3-pcf unless 6-pcf is specifically indicated.

THERMAL INSULATION

230700 - 3


12/7/10

2. Equipment insulation: Rigid, minimum 6-pcf density fiberglass with factory-applied laminated foil vapor retardant Kraft- reinforced with a glass fiber scrim. The board shall be minimum 1-1/2 inch thick with a K-value of 0.22 at 75 degrees F. mean temperature, maximum vapor transmission of 0.02 perm and be able to operate from -20 to 450 degrees F. If insulation having a higher K-value is used, the thickness shall be increased proportionally to achieve the specified K rating. Boards shall have a minimum dimension of 10 inch and a maximum dimension of 48 inch. C. Blanket: Flexible form; faced, un-faced or coated as indicated. 1. Duct insulation, external: Composed of flexible blanket of glass fiber factory laminated to a reinforced foil kraft (FRK) vapor retardant with a minimum 2 inch taping and stapling flange on one edge. Suitable for operation at temperatures from 40 degrees F. to 250 degrees F. thermal conductivity of 0.31 at 75 degrees F. Minimum density of 0.75 pcf. Provide 2 inch thickness unless otherwise indicated in Section 233100. 2. Finish Fabric, General Purpose: Nylon membrane. For use generally with fiberglass duct insulations at joints or seams or as indicated. D. Preformed: Jacketed or unjacketed as indicated, one-piece or half-sectional. 1. Pipe insulation, preformed jacketed fiberglass: Jacketed with factory-applied kraft reinforced foil all-service vapor retardant jacket suitable for use in systems with temperatures from -60 to 350 degrees F. The jacketing shall have a white finish suitable for painting without sizing. Jacket closure system of factory-applied double pressuresensitive adhesive on longitudinal joints; self-sealing butt strips at circumferential joints which provide closure and positive vapor retardant seal without hard rubbing or the application of heat. Thermal conductivity (K) of 0.24 at 100 degrees F. and vapor transmission of 0.02 perms. 2. Pipe insulation, preformed unjacketed fiberglass: Suitable for field-jacketing. Thermal conductivity (K) of 0.23 at 100 degrees F.

2.7

INSULATION MASTICS AND ADHESIVE A. Mastic: Low-odor, fire and vapor retardant mastic with permeance not exceeding 0.08 perms in accordance with ASTM E96. For use where indicated or otherwise applicable. Coating shall be non-flammable in both dry and wet states. 1. Adhesive: For adhering fiberglass blanket and board insulations to metal substrate such as ductwork.

2.8

INSULATION JACKETS AND COVERS A. Jacket, Pipe, PVC: All purpose, UL-rated, white vinyl jacket with a minimum 0.015 inch thickness, with or without self-sealing feature, and suitable for painting; NFPA-255 rated not exceeding a flame spread value of 25 or smoke developed/fuel contributed rate of 50.

THERMAL INSULATION

230700 - 4


12/7/10

B. Pipe Fitting Covers, Aluminum (Type PFC-A1): Aluminum fitting covers, 0.020 inches minimum thickness, type 3003 alloy, H-14 temper prefabricated fitting covers with baked epoxy moisture barrier for pipe sizes through 24". Field fabricate fitting covers for pipe sizes larger than 24" using 0.020 inches thick aluminum roll jacketing with laminated polyethylene/kraft moisture barrier. Childers Products "Ell-Jacs", "Gore Ell-Jacs", "TeeJack", "End-Caps", and "Flange Jacs" or equivalent. Provide Aluminum jacketing for all exterior, weather-exposed piping and as specified in Specification Section 15510.

2.9

RELATED PRODUCTS A. Wire (Type W-1): Dead soft, 16-gauge, stainless steel. B. Straps (Type ST-1): Stainless steel T-304 (18-8) soft annealed with deburred edge with stainless steel wing seals. Childers Products "Febstraps" or equivalent. C. Tape (Type T-1): High tensile strength rope stock flat back paper pressure sensitive tape. Pittsburg-Corning "PC Tape No. 25" or equivalent. D. Screws (Type S-1): Aluminum pan head type "A" slotted #8 by 1/2-inch.


GENERAL A. Field Forming, Fitting and Finishing: Where preformed insulation products are available they shall be used. Provide field formed, fitted and finished insulation systems only if such application is more practical and acceptable to the Architect. B. Terms: For an explanation of the terms used to describe the installation of the various types of insulation products refer to paragraph entitled “DEFINITIONS” in Section 230100. C. Pre-installation: 1. Prior to work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all trades and verify that all work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence. 2. Insulation on pipe fittings, valves and pipe joints shall not be installed before the piping is tested and approved. Do not apply insulation adhesives, materials or finishes until the building is adequately closed in and the item to be insulated has been completely installed, tested and proved tight and suitable for insulation. 3. Remove all foreign material, clean and surfaces before applying insulation.

THERMAL INSULATION

230700 - 5


12/7/10

D. Penetrations: All insulation shall be continuous through walls, floors and ceiling openings, except at fire dampers. Pipe insulation through fire-rated partitions shall be cellular foamglass type only, with the ends sealed; fiberglass and foam insulation through rated partitions is prohibited. Where piping and ducts pass through partitions (walls or floors), the openings in the construction around the piping and ducts shall be packed with fire-stop material to provide an effective retardant against the spread of fire, smoke and gases as shown in the detail drawings or as shown in a current Underwriter's Laboratory "Building Materials Directory". Submit a copy of the intended system to the authority having jurisdiction for their review and acceptance. E. Vapor Retardant Continuity: A continuous, unbroken moisture and vapor seal shall be provided over insulation on cold surfaces where vapor retardant jackets, facings, or coatings are required. Anchors, hangers and other projections shall be insulated and vapor-sealed to prevent condensation. All openings and punctures shall be sealed with a vapor retardant compound. The edges of vapor retardant insulation at valve stems, instrument wells, gauge connections, unions and other raw edges shall be sealed to prevent moisture from penetrating the insulation by sealing on all open ends. F. Cold Equipment Insulation: 1. Hangers and Supports: Insulation and jackets shall be neatly finished at pipe and duct hangers, clamps, anchors, and other supports which are in contact with the pipe or duct. Insulation shall consist of rigid pipe or duct insulation of equal thickness to the adjoining insulation, and shall be provided with a vapor retardant seal. The length of insulation shall be sufficient to prevent condensation but not be less than 9 inches. 2. Pipe Shields: For cold piping, hangers and supports shall be installed on the outside of the insulation and the insulation shall be protected by a galvanized metal shield. Shield shall extend halfway up both sides of the pipe insulation cover and shall provide support over the bottom 120 degree arc of the insulation. If the hanger is too large to provide this support a metal liner shall be provided. The shield shall be fastened with pipe straps at each end. 3. Trapeze Hangers for Glass Fiber Insulation: Piping insulated with glass fiber insulation and supported on trapeze hangers shall have a 6 inch long paraffin coated hard maple curved block between the saddle and the piping. G. Valves and Specialties: Insulate as for the related piping system in which they are located unless otherwise indicated. H. Piping: Insulation thicknesses for piping are given for insulation installed at the locations indicated. Thicknesses are based on the various conditions of temperature, usage and environment which are typically encountered.

THERMAL INSULATION

230700 - 6


12/7/10

GLASS FIBER PIPING INSULATION A. Interior, Concealed: Insulate with glass fiber insulation with all-purpose jacket. Elbows, joints, valves, and all like items shall be insulated using closely mitered insulation and wrapped with glass fabric secured with 20-gauge non-corrosive wire finished with a smoothing coat of insulating cement and mastic or insulated and jacketed using factory-made pre-molded pipe fitting covers. Install all items in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Interior, Exposed: Provide as specified for "Interior, Concealed", except where fieldfabricated fitting covers are used. Additionally finish with open weave 20x10 mesh glass fabric adhered between two flood coats of white lagging adhesive, overlapping the adjacent pipe insulation 2" and smoothed to a neat uniform finish without noticeable ridges or exposed fabric. Finish materials shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. Exterior, Protected: Provide the same insulation system as "Interior, Concealed" except thicknesses as specified. Cover finish with aluminum jacketing and fitting covers. Secure fitting covers with screws and secure jacketing with straps containing a high-temperature sealant. D. Exterior, Unprotected: Provide the same as for "Exterior, Protected".

3.3

INSULATION THICKNESS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS A. General: 1. Basis: Insulation thicknesses for piping are given for insulation installed in the locations indicated. Thicknesses are based on the various conditions of temperature, usage and environment which are typically encountered. 2. Applicable Thicknesses: All thicknesses as applicable to all conditions may not be given in this section article. Where an insulation thickness for a particular application is specified to be of other thickness than may be listed in this section article, "INSULATION THICKNESSES FOR PIPING SYSTEMS", then provide the insulation in the thickness indicated in other portion of this section which specifically describes the particular insulation application and its required insulation thickness. Thicknesses for other than piping insulation are given in the specific description of the particular application or description of the particular material used. 3. Ambient Conditions: Unless otherwise indicated, ambient conditions for the purpose of describing insulation thicknesses are related to cold applications to prevent condensation or excessive heat gain (e.g., chilled water pipe, cold vessels) and are related to hot applications to prevent harm to personnel or to prevent objectionable heat loss to the environment (e.g, hot water pipe, hot vessels, hot stacks).

THERMAL INSULATION

230700 - 7


12/7/10

a. These conditions are generally: Interior: 80oF and 80% RH. Exterior: 90oFand 80% RH. 4. Thickness Requirements: Thicknesses are given below based on the following information: a. General type of fluid or process involved (e.g., A/C condensate, refrigerant, etc.). b. General location and, if necessary, conditions related to temperature (either or both internal or external to the insulation barrier) and ambient environment of the insulated item. c. Pipe size range. B. Refrigerant Piping Systems: Fluid generally considered to be between 40oF and 65oF. Insulate with 1-1/2” thick fiberglass pipe insulation and fittings. Provide Aluminum jacketing (Type PFCA1): on exterior exposed piping. C. Air Conditioning Condensate Piping Systems: Insulate with 1” thick fiberglass pipe insulation or 1” thick elastomeric pipe insulation.

3.5

DUCT SYSTEMS A. General: Air handling unit casings downstream of cooling coils shall be insulated. Insulate supply, return and outside air ducts for heating and air conditioning systems from supply fan discharge to room outlets on all systems and return air from return air inlet device to AHU inlet plenum box, including the plenum box. Outside air ducts shall be externally insulated in all instances. B. Interior, Concealed, External Insulation: Insulate with fiberglass blanket wrap. Adhere duct insulation to metal and provide continuity of vapor retardant in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. . Where duct width exceeds 24 inches, the insulation shall be additionally secured to the bottom of the duct using mechanical fasteners spaced 1 foot on center to prevent sagging of the insulation. Self-adhesive or double-sided tape is not allowed. C. Interior, Exposed, Round: Insulate with same insulation system as for "Interior, Concealed". An acceptable alternate is preformed jacketed fiberglass pipe insulation of the same internal size as the round ductwork, with performance criteria and installation as specified herein. D. Interior, Exposed, Rectangular: Insulate with semi-rigid fiberglass board. Adhere to ductwork with adhesive. Finish joints and seams with finish fabric and mastic, applied by trowel, to provide a smooth, seamless and vapor-retardant finish. E. Exterior, Protected: Similar to "Interior, Exposed, Round or Rectangular".

THERMAL INSULATION

230700 - 8


12/7/10

F. Exterior, Unprotected: Similar to "Exterior, Protected", but in addition finish with two 1/4 inch thick coats of heavy-duty weatherproof mastic, to be applied by spray or trowel, with a layer of glass cloth embedded between the coats installed in accordance with the mastic manufacturers written recommendations.

3.6

DUCT SYSTEMS EQUIPMENT A. General: Insulate as follows unless detailed to a greater extent elsewhere. B. Fire Damper External Surfaces: 1. Externally Insulated Duct Locations: Extend duct insulation and vapor barrier up face of fire damper to damper sleeve retaining angles.

3.7

COLD EQUIPMENT AND RELATED COMPONENTS A. Condensate Drain Piping From Cooling Equipment: 1. Interior; and Exterior, Protected: Insulate with preformed elastomeric pipe insulation secured with adhesive and finished with a white finish coating. 2. Exterior, Unprotected: None required. B. Flexible Pipe Connectors for Vibration Isolation: Insulate with elastomeric insulation. Secure the insulation with adhesive applied to a clean surface and finish with white finish coating.


THERMAL INSULATION

230700 - 9


12/7/10

SECTION 230925 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Basic Requirements: Provisions of Section 230100, BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS are part of this Section.

1.2

SUMMARY A. General: Provide Variable Frequency Drives of the latest design and technology to provide adjustable frequency/speed control of motors, as indicated herein and on the Construction Documents. It is the intention of these specifications that the VFD controller shall be completely solid-state variable voltage source design.

1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Manufacturer: All VFD units shall be provided by a single manufacturer. B. Parts and Service: The VFD Manufacturer shall maintain, as part of a national network, Engineering and Parts service facilities to provide start-up service, emergency service calls, repair work, service contracts, maintenance and training of customer personnel. C. Standards: The VFD shall comply with latest IEEE 519 – “Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems”, and the latest applicable standards of ANSI, NEMA and the NEC. As a minimum, the full load output current rating of the drive shall be equal to 1.2 times the equivalent motor horsepower full load current (as listed by National Electric Code Table 430-230). D. Harmonics: The VFD's shall limit harmonic distortion reflected onto the source distribution system to a voltage and current distortion level as defined by IEEE 519. Harmonic calculations shall be provided with submittal. Field testing and certification is required as indicated separately in this specification. 1. IEEE 519 Calculations, provided by the VFD manufacturer, indicating calculated harmonic distortion levels with equipment being provided. Point of common coupling shall be at the secondary of the utility company transformer. 2. Warranty Information E. General: Refer to paragraph entitled “SUBMITTAL” in Section 230100. Include the following material and performance data:

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

230925 - 1

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1.4

12/7/10

Manufacturers literature Performance data Installation instructions Maintenance instructions Manufacturer's Start-Up, Checkout and Instructions

FACTORY TESTING AND CALCULATIONS A. Factory Testing and Warranty: Each VFD shall be factory tested to ensure reliability. Testing shall include component thermal cycling, logic system simulation tests and full load operation tests. B. Point of Common Coupling: Field testing of each VFD at the point of common coupling is required to determine harmonic feedback onto the distribution system. The harmonic distortion at this point shall be limited to the voltage and current levels defined by IEEE-519. 1. Voltage: 5% = 100 x Total Harmonic Voltage (total units) Fundamental Voltage


ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: The VFD shall be as produced by one of the following manufacturers. Other manufacturers are not acceptable and will not be considered. 1. Yaskawa (Basis of Design). 2. ABB. B. Requirements: VFD manufacturers listed here are not automatically approved for this project. All requirements of these specifications must be fully met for the VFD to be approved.

2.2

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE A. General: The Variable Frequency Drive shall be capable of converting the input voltage from to variable frequency, three phase AC power for variable torque motor control continuously from 10 percent to 100 percent of base speed. A transformer shall not be used to adjust the input or output voltage. All general options and modifications shall mount within the VFD enclosure. The voltage-to-frequency ratio shall be automatically adjusted to maximize energy savings. B. Duty: The adjustable frequency system shall be continuous centrifugal duty stepless VFD matched to the motors provided with the equipment (i.e. fans and pumps). The VFD's shall be


230925 - 2


12/7/10

capable of operating any motor, regardless of manufacturer, with a load rating within the capacity of the VFD's. C. Microprocessor Based: The VFD's shall provide a microprocessor-based adjustment of three-phase motors. D. Pulse: The VFD's shall be of the 6 pulse for motor HP 100, Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) design converting the utility input voltage and frequency to a variable voltage and frequency output via a two-step operation. VFD's utilizing a third power section are not acceptable. E. Operating Conditions: Standard operating conditions shall be: 1. Incoming Power: Specified Voltage +5% to -10% and 60 hertz +/-2 hertz power to a fixed potential DC bus level. 2. Humidity: 0 to 95% non-condensing and non-corrosive (indoor applications). 3. Altitude: 0 to 3,300 feet above sea level. 4. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40 degrees C (indoor applications). F. Rotating Motor: The VFD's shall be able to start into a spinning motor. The VFD's shall be able to determine the motor speed in any direction and resume operation without tripping. If the motor is spinning in the reverse direction, the VFD's shall start into the motor in the reverse direction, bring the motor to a controlled stop, and then accelerate the motor in the preset method of starting. G. Housing: VFD's located in dry interior spaces shall be housed in a NEMA 1 enclosure; VFDs located outside or in damp locations shall be provided with NEMA 3R weatherproof enclosure. H. Power Factor: Power Factor Correction capacitors shall not be utilized to meet motor performance criteria. I.

Front Door: The front door of the controller shall include a door interlock disconnect switch. This shall prevent opening of the unit until the disconnect is in the off position. Input fuses shall be provided.

J.

Manual Reset: The output power circuitry of the unit shall include a manual reset motor overload relay interlocked with the "on" circuitry of the unit. This shall be an adjustable solid-state device to allow easy field adjustment to motor nameplate amps.

K. Minimum Withstand Rating: The entire Variable Frequency Drive assembly (drive, bypass and all components) shall be capable of a minimum withstand rating as indicated on the electrical drawings, for a minimum 3-cycles. The VFD assembly nameplate shall indicate that the entire assembly (not individual components) is rated at this minimum withstand rating.


230925 - 3


12/7/10

L. UL Listing: The entire Variable Frequency Drive assembly (drive, bypass and all components) shall be UL-listed as a single assembly. Individual component listings only shall not be acceptable. UL test data indicating that the entire assembly has been tested and approved by UL shall be submitted to the Engineer for review.

2.3

CONTROL AND MONITORING FUNCTIONS A. General: All VFD's programmable parameters shall be adjustable from a digital operator keypad located on the front door of the VFD or equivalent, convenient arrangement without opening the front door. Parameters shall include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Programmable maximum and minimum frequency. Programmable acceleration and deceleration times. Selectable carrier frequencies, V/Hz, and critical frequency avoidance lockout. Adjustable electronic overload and torque limits. Keypad lockout and factory default overrides.

B. Display: The VFD's shall have a minimum of 8 character display indicating monitored functions. C. Additional Features: The VFD's shall be additionally equipped with a digital operator station mounted on the enclosure. D. Interface: The VFD's shall include the proper system interfaces. E. H-O-A Switch: The front door of the unit shall have a "hand/off/auto" switch. F. Acceleration/Deceleration: Acceleration time from 0 to full speed shall be adjustable from 30 to 300 seconds. Deceleration time shall be independently adjustable for the same range. A maximum frequency (speed) adjustment shall be available to allow less than 50 Hz output. A minimum frequency adjustment shall be available to set a minimum output frequency.

2.4

PROTECTION A. General: The VFD's shall be provided with means to protect itself and the motor from the following “faults”: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Overload. Speed compensated overcurrent. In-rush current limit (adjustable 50 to 230%). Undervoltage and Overvoltage. Overtemperature. Short Circuit (3-phase and line-to-line). Ground fault. Input and output phase loss.


230925 - 4


12/7/10

9. Overfrequency.

2.5

BYPASS MOTOR CONTROLLER REQUIREMENT A. Starter: VFD assembly shall contain a separate, across-the-line magnetic starter, sized to match motor and arranged for manually-activated emergency use in event of VFD system failure, controlled by same input data as VFD system. B. Bypass: The front door shall include the manual bypass switch. The bypass section door shall include a "VFD-Off-Bypass" selector switch. In bypass mode the motor shall run at full speed directly from normal power. No electronic circuit shall be employed in the bypass mode. Motor protection thermal overload shall be provided in "bypass" and "normal" mode. C. Transfer: Manual bypass shall provide all the circuitry necessary to safely transfer the motor from the VFD to the power line, or from the line to the controller, while the motor is at zero speed. The bypass shall not be located in the VFD section of the cabinet. D. Interlock: The bypass option shall include a door interlocked, main power input disconnect, providing positive shutdown of all input power to both the bypass circuitry and the VFD. E. Factory Installed: Manual bypass with magnetic contactors shall be factory installed. Field modification of the VFD to provide manual bypass is not permitted.


GENERAL A. General: Provide Variable Frequency Drive for each motor identified as requiring a VFD or variable speed operation. B. Mounting: Floor mounted variable frequency drive units shall be installed on housekeeping pads. C. Wiring Diagrams: The VFD shall be provided with all necessary wiring diagrams for installation and power wiring from the manufacturer. D. Coordination: Coordinate each VFD with the motor served and with the Controls System, paying specific attention to the signal input/output and the ground source. E. Startup: The VFD manufacturer shall provide, at no additional cost to the owner, a start-up service package by a factory trained field service engineer for all VFDs provided. Service shall include inspection, final adjustments, operational checks, functional checks of spare parts (if provided) and a final report for record purpose. Start-up service shall be provided for each VFD. Start-up shall be performed with the cooperation of the controls sub-contractor, where applicable.


230925 - 5


12/7/10

F. Warranty: The service package shall include a comprehensive (replacement parts and labor) two-year warranty from date of Owner Acceptance or Substantial Completion (whichever is later) for all VFDs provided.

3.2

TRAINING A. Training: Provide a minimum of 16 hours of training for all VFDs for the Owner and Owner’s maintenance personnel.



230925 - 6


12/7/10

SECTION 232313 - REFRIGERATION PIPING SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Basic Requirements: Provisions of Section 230100, BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS are a part of this Section.

1.2

SUMMARY A. General: Provide refrigerant piping systems, complete in all respects, between the system components and connected equipment.

1.3

SUBMITTAL A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "SUBMITTAL" in Section 230100. Include the following data: 1. Manufacturers Literature: a. Complete list of piping materials to be used in this section including valves, specialties, pipe material, pipe insulation, pipe sizes for each refrigeration piping system.

1.4

APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. General: All equipment, material, accessories, methods of construction and reinforcement, finish quality, workmanship and installation shall be in compliance with the paragraph entitled "Code Compliance" in Section 230100. B. ANSI: All materials and installation shall conform to ANSI B31.5, Code for Refrigerant piping, ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15-94, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration", ASME/ANSI B31.5-1987 (Refrigeration Piping), and ANSI/SAE J513-77, Refrigerant Tube Fittings. C. ASME: Provide safety relief valves in conformance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII Division I.

REFRIGERATION PIPING SYSTEM

232313 - 1


12/7/10


GENERAL A. Application: The refrigeration piping system shall be of the material indicated. See Section 232113, PIPE AND FITTINGS for material specifications. B. Pipe: Refrigerant system piping shall be refrigerant grade, dehydrated and sealed, seamless, uniformly dead soft anneal to 1-3/8 inch O.D. or hard temper annealed, type K copper tubing conforming to ASTM B280. C. Fittings: Refrigerant grade, wrought copper, long radius, brazed joint type. D. Brazing: Silver brazing alloy and non-corrosive flux, designed for silver brazing.

2.2

CHARGING VALVES A. Quick Couplers: Schrader type designed for use with quick coupler hose fittings and provided with individual cap.

2.3

SPECIALTIES A. Removable Core Filter-Drier: Provide a removable core filter-drier in liquid line with a full size valved bypass. Provide shut-off valves to isolate the filter drier. B. Sight Glass: Provide a moisture indicating sight glass in the liquid line downstream from the filter-drier. Install the sight glass in vertical line if possible and a sufficient distance downstream from any valve to eliminate visual disturbance in the glass.


GENERAL A. Pipe Size: Refrigerant pipe sizes indicated are nominal. Provide sizes not less than sizes indicated and in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Provide change in sizes in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and Architect's acceptance. Piping shall maintain a minimum velocity of 500 fpm in horizontal lines and 1000 fpm in vertical risers for proper oil return. Provide double suction risers with oil trap or accumulator and hot gas risers as may be necessary. B. Flexible Connection: Provide flexible piping in suction and hot gas discharge line of compressor. Flexible piping shall be a 15 pipe diameter loop or similar measure to prevent transmission of vibration.


232313 - 2


12/7/10

C. Specialties: Refrigerant valves, dryers, expansion valves, and similar items shall be provided with each system. Refrigerant charging valves not furnished by the manufacturer shall be field installed to enable charging and checking the system.

3.2

JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS A. General: All joints and connections shall be permanently refrigerant tight. Arrange piping generally as shown allowing for service access. Refrigerant lines shall be run as direct as possible with a minimum number of joints. Provide sleeves through floors, walls or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full-thickness insulation. Sleeves shall be sealed airtight after installation of piping and insulation. B. Brazed Joints: Refer to Section 232113, PIPE AND FITTINGS. All joints shall be brazed unless otherwise indicated. C. Hangers and supports: Refer to paragraph entitled "HANGERS AND SUPPORTS" in Section 230500. Isolate copper tubing from contact with dissimilar metals.

3.3

EVACUATION AND CHARGING A. Charge the system in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation and accepted refrigeration practice.

3.4

REFRIGERANT PIPING CONDUIT A. General: Refrigerant piping below slab or grade shall be installed in Schedule 40 PVC piping. Size conduit to properly install piping. Provide long bend sweeps. Conduit shall drain and not trap water. Protect ends of conduit from entry of vermin, insects and water.

3.5

OTHER REQUIREMENTS A. Charging Connection: Provide a refrigerant charging connection in the liquid line upstream from the filter-drier. B. Installation: Keep piping free from traps unless otherwise indicated. Install vertical pipe plumb. Pitch horizontal piping only where slope is desirable to prevent liquid refrigerant or oil from traveling toward the compressor inlet. C. Valve Locations: Provide shut-off valves at inlet and outlet to all condensers, receivers and evaporators to permit isolation for service. Use angle valves to minimize pressure drop. Use globe valves only when angle valves are impractical. Valves in copper tubing 7/8 inch or smaller shall be mounted independent of tubing supports or fastenings.


232313 - 3


12/7/10

D. Expansion Valve Operation: To prevent erratic operation of thermal expansion valve, provide a suction line trap next to evaporator coil suction outlet with a pilot thermostatic expansion valve, a pilot-operated main expansion valve, and expansion valve bulb located between coil and trap. Provide only in suction lines which are level leaving coil outlet or which rise on leaving coil outlet. Trap is not required when evaporator coil outlet suction line drops to compressor or suction header immediately after expansion valve bulb. E. Insulation: Insulate refrigerant suction line with pipe insulation as specified in accordance with Section 230700, Insulation, HVAC.



232313 - 4


12/7/10

SECTION 233100 - DUCTWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1


1.2

SCOPE A. Provide complete duct systems as indicated. Systems shall include, but not be limited to, the following: outside air, exhaust air, and air conditioning supply and return air duct systems as shown on drawings. Drawing scales prohibit the indication of all offsets, fittings, and like items; however, these items shall be installed as required for the actual project conditions at no change in contract price. B. Items Included: This section generally includes, but is not limited to, the following major items: 1. Low pressure sheet metal ductwork. 2. Low pressure flexible ducts. 3. Other special duct systems.

1.3

RELATION TO OTHER WORK A. Refer to the section, "General Mechanical Provisions" for related requirements. Refer to other sections of Division 23 and to other applicable portions of the Drawings and Specifications. B. This section is directly related in particular to sections (which may or may not be included in this division) which describe the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Sections describing air handling equipment and fans. Air distribution devices. Duct system accessories. Insulation.

C. Coordinate shop drawings, ordering, delivery, and placement of all items affecting the duct systems including, but not limited to, the following items: air handling units, exhaust fans, supply fans, sound attenuators, duct mounted coils, access panels, air distribution devices, fire dampers, outside air louvers, hoods, filters, roof curbs, structural framing, roof construction, roofing, and the work of all trades to insure an orderly and timely progression of the work. Refer to the requirements of Section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions". DUCTWORK

233100 - 1


12/7/10

D. Refer to other sections which may describe additional sound attenuation measures which may relate to this section.

1.4

SHOP DRAWINGS A. Refer to Section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions". Include complete data as applicable to this project on: all prefabricated duct and fittings; duct liner including mechanical fasteners and adhesives; duct sealing materials; duct joining and seaming methods; and all other items. If required by Architect, prepare and submit for approval completely detailed shop drawings of supply and return ductwork from any or each air handling unit through its transitions, bends and elbows until such ducts are extended beyond the air handling unit equipment area and/or congested areas; these shop drawings will not be required unless specifically called for elsewhere or unless significant deviation from the Drawings is necessitated by the equipment provided.

1.5

OTHER REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all ductwork and components thereof in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. All ductwork dimensions indicated are nominal free clearance internal dimensions which do not include insulation thickness.

1.6

DEFINITIONS A. "SMACNA" means "Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc." B. Low Pressure Ductwork: Any and all ductwork conveying air or other gases at velocities less than 2000 fpm and static pressure less than 2.0 inches wg. This ductwork may also be referred to in these specifications as "Low Velocity Ductwork". SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible", Second Edition, 1995, shall govern construction of this ductwork unless otherwise specified. C. Medium/High Pressure Ductwork: Any and all ductwork conveying air or other gases at velocities equal to or greater than 2000 fpm or static pressure equal to or greater than 2.0 inches wg. This ductwork may also be referred to in these specifications as "High Velocity Ductwork" or "Medium Pressure Ductwork", but shall be considered, in either terminology, to fall within pressure/velocity class (PV/C designation) 3 to 10. SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible", Second Edition, 1995, shall govern construction of this ductwork unless otherwise specified.

1.7

PRESSURE/VELOCITY CLASSIFICATIONS A. Pressure and velocity classifications (hereinafter called "P/VC") for ducts are defined as follows:

DUCTWORK

233100 - 2


12/7/10

SMACNA Static P/VC Pressure Pressure Desig. Class Rating

Positive or Negative Pressure

SMACNA Maximum Seal Velocity Class (fpm)

10 6 4 3 2 1 ½

+ + + + or + or + or + or -

A A A B C C C

High Medium Medium Medium Low Low Low

10" 6" 4" 3" 2" 1" 1/2"

2000 up 2000 up 4000 dn 4000 dn 2000 dn 2000 dn 2000 dn

B. See Part 3, EXECUTION, of this section for duct sealing requirements.


GENERAL A. Materials shall comply with current SMACNA standards. B. ASTM: Unless otherwise specified, ASTM material specifications applicable are: Material Galvanized steel Stainless steel Cold rolled steel Cold rolled steel Aluminum

Type G90 304,316 20-28 ga. 18 ga. 3003 H-14

ASTM Number A525 A240 A366 A619 B609

C. Special Materials, Gauges and Construction: 1. Special Materials: Where special duct material other than galvanized steel is required, such duct material (e.g., fiberglass, stainless steel, plastic such as polyvinylchloride, etc.) shall be specifically indicated. 2. Gauges: Gauges indicated in this section are for galvanized steel. Where greater or lesser gauges are specifically indicated for a sheet metal material other than galvanized steel, provide the indicated gauge. Comply with the SMACNA construction standard covering the required material if no gauge is given. 3. Construction: Comply with indicated special requirements (i.e., such as welding, soldering, etc.) where application requires.

2.2

LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTWORK A. Material: Prime quality forty-eight inch wide re-square tight coat galvanized steel conforming to the requirements of ASTM A-525 and/or A-527 as applicable to the intended use.

DUCTWORK

233100 - 3


12/7/10

B. Construction: 1. Construct to comply with the pressure/velocity classification(s) indicated. 2. Use rectangular or round as indicated on drawings. 3. Reinforcing, Cross Breaking, Seams, Joints: Be in accord with latest SMACNA construction standard for low pressure sheet metal duct. 4. Gauge: As required by SMACNA for the dimensions and pressure/velocity classification involved. C. Insulation: 1. Rectangular rigid sheet metal ductwork: shall be internally lined with acoustical thermal duct liner if so designated. 2. Round rigid sheet metal ductwork: Where low pressure round ductwork is designated to have internal acoustical/thermal liner, provide factory fabricated double wall ductwork as specified for high pressure round acoustically lined sound attenuating duct (i.e., factory fabricated double wall duct with perforated inner wall).

2.3

LOW PRESSURE FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. General: 1. The inclusion of flexible ducts in this specification shall not be construed as approval of use on the project unless specifically shown on the Drawings. 2. Where used, provide in factory finished lengths not in excess of lengths required to make kink-free connections with minimum air pressure drop. B. Insulated flexible ducts: Flexible duct shall be factory-fabricated pre-insulated type with seamless vapor barrier. Duct shall bear UL 181 Class 1 Air Duct label and shall comply with NFPA 90A and 90B. Fiberglass insulation nominal 1" thickness with thermal conductance of 0.23 BTU/hr-ft2-oF maximum at 75oF mean temperature. Flexible duct shall have an operating range of minus 0.5" w.g. to plus 2" w.g. Core shall be continuous and consist of aluminized mylar laminated to corrosion resistant steel wire helix. Vapor barrier perm rating shall be 0.17 maximum per ASTM E96-A. Maximum working velocity shall be 4000 FPM. Flexible duct shall be Genflex SLR-25, Clevaflex Type KQ, Wire Mold type WG, Flexmaster Type 5B, or approved equal. C. Round branch take-off fittings for flexible duct: 1. Round duct branch take-off fitting shall be made of galvanized sheet metal designed for twist-in installation and to assure minimum air loss at the take-off. The fittings shall be of the conical converging type to reduce the pressure drop through the fittings. Provide a raised bead on the throat of the fitting to assure a tight positive connection. Products shall be Flexmaster Model CB-DE-BO3 or approved equal. 2. Provide each fitting with the following: a. Lockable quadrant damper. b. 45-degree extractor scoop.

DUCTWORK

233100 - 4


12/7/10

c. Insulation guard where used with internally lined ductwork. 3. Provide these "spin-in" type fittings at all connections between rigid sheet metal duct and flexible duct at the upstream end of the flexible duct.


GENERAL A. All duct systems shall be free of noise, chatter, vibration and pulsation under all conditions of operation. Remove, replace or reinforce as directed by the Architect/Engineer if necessary to correct such conditions. B. If field conditions are determined to exist which would limit the guarantee of air delivery or system performance, due notice in writing shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer of such conditions prior to starting fabrication. C. Properly support and align ductwork. Ducts to be free of sag and bulge. Hang ductwork below concrete floors or roof deck with hangers set prior to pouring concrete, or from self drilling screw anchors. GUN POWDER SET ANCHORS ARE NOT PERMITTED. D. Where it is necessary that ducts be divided due to pipes or other obstructions which must pass through these ducts, the Contractor shall, at locations as noted or directed, provide air-stream deflectors in the duct and the duct shall be increased in size to maintain equivalent area around deflectors. Such changes shall be in accord with standard SMACNA details and shall be shown on Contractor's As-Built Drawings. E. Interior of ductwork visible through registers, grilles, or diffusers shall be painted flat black. F. Do not route ductwork through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures. G. Construct all ductwork and accessories in accord with the latest indicated editions of applicable SMACNA construction standards. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association. H. Streamline all ductwork to the full extent practical and equip with proper and adequate devices to assure proper balance and quiet draftless distribution of indicated air quantities. I.

Protect all ductwork and system accessories from damage during construction until Architect/Engineer's final acceptance of project.

J.

Prior to ductwork fabrication, verify if all ductwork as dimensioned and generally shown will satisfactorily fit allocated spaces. Take precautions to avoid space interferences with beams, columns, joists, pipes, lights, conduit, other ducts, equipment, etc. Notify Architect/Engineer if any spatial conflicts exist, and then obtain Architect/Engineer's approval of necessary routing. Make any such necessary revisions which are minor at no additional cost.

DUCTWORK

233100 - 5


12/7/10

K. Carefully correlate all duct connections to air handling units and fans to provide proper connections, elbows and bends which minimize noise and pressure drop. L. Provide all curved elbows with radius ratios of not less than 1.5 unless otherwise shown or approved by Architect/Engineer. Provide all mitered elbows with turning vanes. M. Properly suspend all ductwork so that no objectionable conditions result (such as vibration, sagging, etc.). N. Coordinate any and all dimensions at interfaces of dissimilar type of ductwork and at interfaces of ductwork with equipment so that proper overlaps, interfaces, etc., of insulation and continuity of vapor barriers are maintained. O. If necessary where ducts interface and have different types of insulation, provide transitions so that internal free-clear dimensions of duct remain unchanged. P. Install horizontal low pressure ductwork at a level which maximizes length of any vertical, rectangular or round rigid duct connections to rectangular diffuser necks; however, such vertical duct connections are not required to be over 24 inches in length. Q. Make connections from any low pressure ductwork to terminal units (fan terminal units, variable volume boxes, etc.) with appropriate lengths of flexible duct unless other type of connection is indicated. R. Install all flexible round duct without kinks or similar obstructions so that pressure drop is minimized. Cut and remove excess lengths as necessary. S. Install horizontal rigid ductwork as high as practical above suspended ceilings so that movable light fixtures may be relocated without interference to meet any future partition relocation requirements. T. Insulated Duct: Where ducts will be insulated, make provision for neat insulation finish around damper operating quadrants, splitter adjusting clamps, access doors, and similar operating devices. A metal collar equivalent in depth to insulation thickness and of suitable size to which insulation may be finished shall be mounted on duct.

3.2

LOW PRESSURE SHEET METAL DUCTS A. If width or height of rectangular duct exceeds 12 inches, cross break or roll a cross bead in panels to increase stiffness; otherwise, use two gages heavier steel. B. Provide corner closures. Longitudinal seams and transverse joints shall be flat and smooth inside. Make slip joints in direction of air flow. See governing SMACNA manual for transition requirements.

DUCTWORK

233100 - 6


12/7/10

C. Fabricate offsets, turns and elbows with centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times diameter when possible. No mitered offsets will be allowed. Provide double thickness turning vanes to assist in smooth flow of air in square elbows or elbows with centerline radius less than duct width or diameter.

3.3

LOW PRESSURE FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Flexible ducts shall not be used unless specifically indicated on drawings. B. If flexible duct is indicated for use on this project, it must comply with the following requirements. 1. The extent of the use of flexible ductwork shall be limited to that shown on the drawings. 2. Flexible duct installation shall be per SMACNA Flexible Duct Installation Standards, and manufacturers latest printed instructions, whichever is stricter. In addition the following shall apply: a. Flexible duct between rigid duct and diffusers shall be a MAXIMUM of 8 feet in length and shall be fully extended with a maximum equivalent of (2) 90 degree bends (no bend shall be made with centerline radius of less than one duct diameter). No additional flexible duct shall be provided for future terminal device relocation unless otherwise specified. b. Flexible duct shall be supported at ends and at each 90 degree bend. Maximum permissible sag is 1/2 inch per foot of spacing between supports. c. Hanger or saddle material in contact with the flexible duct shall be of sufficient width to prevent any restriction of the internal diameter of the duct when the weight of the supported section rests on the hanger or saddle material. In no case will the material contacting the flexible duct be less than 1 inch wide. Narrower hanger material may be used in conjunction with a sheet metal saddle which meets the foregoing specifications. This saddle must be formed to cover one-half the circumference of the outside diameter of the flexible duct and must be rolled to fit neatly around the lower half of the duct's outer circumference. d. Factory installed suspension systems integral to the flexible duct are an acceptable alternative hanging method when manufacturers recommended procedures are followed. e. Hangers shall be adequately attached to the building structure (not pipe, conduit, etc.). f. To prevent tearing of vapor barrier, do not support entire weight of flexible duct on any one hanger during installation. Avoid contact of flexible duct with sharp edges of hanger material. Damage to vapor barrier may be repaired with approved tape. If internal core is penetrated, replace flexible duct or treat as a connection. 3. Terminal devices connected by flexible duct shall be supported independently of the flexible duct.

DUCTWORK

233100 - 7


12/7/10

MISCELLANEOUS DUCT SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Spin-In Take-Off Fittings: Install around duct branch takeoff fittings according to manufacturer's installation instruction. Additionally seal fitting to rectangular duct with a thin bead of mastic sealant.

3.5

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. General: Comply with latest applicable SMACNA construction standard. Where sprayed fireproofing occurs, install hangers before application of such treatment and withhold installation of ducts until after application. B. Supports: Vertical risers and other duct runs where the method of support specified above is not applicable shall be supported by substantial angle brackets designed to meet field conditions and installed to allow for duct expansion. C. Fasteners: Secure hangers to steel beams or metal deck with beam clamps or drop through connections from the metal or concrete deck.

3.6

CHANGES IN SHAPE OR DIMENSION A. Where duct size or shape is changed to effect a change in area, the following shall apply: 1. Where the area at the end of the transformation results in an increase in area over that at the beginning, the slope of the transformation shall not exceed one inch in seven inches. 2. Where the area at the end of the transformation results in a decrease in area from that at the beginning, the slope of the transformation may be one inch in four inches, but one inch in seven inches is preferable, space permitting. 3. The angle of transformation at connections to heating coils or other equipment shall not exceed thirty degrees from a line parallel to the air flow on the entering side of the equipment, nor fifteen degrees on the leaving side. The angle of approach may be increased to suit limited space conditions when the transformation is provided with vanes approved by the Architect/Engineer.

3.7

CHANGES IN DIRECTION A. Changes in direction shall be basically as indicated on the drawings and the following shall apply: 1. Supply duct turns of ninety degrees in low pressure duct shall be made with mitered elbows fitted with closely spaced turning vanes designed for maintaining a constant velocity through the elbow. 2. Return and exhaust duct turns of ninety degrees in low pressure duct shall be made with mitered elbows, as specified hereinbefore for supply ducts, unless radius elbows are indicated in which case they shall be constructed with a turning radius one and one-half

DUCTWORK

233100 - 8


12/7/10

(1-1/2) times the width (with width considered as the dimension in the plane of the turn) as measured to the duct centerline. 3. Tees in low pressure duct shall conform to the design requirements specified hereinbefore for elbows. 4. Branch take-offs in low pressure supply duct shall be made with extractors or splitter dampers, as indicated, in square take-offs. 5. In high pressure duct, branch take-offs and connections to flexible duct supplying air to terminal units shall be made with conical taps.

3.8

IMPROPER MATERIALS OR CONFIGURATION A. If ductwork materials or ductwork configurations are installed which do not meet these specifications, Contractor shall remove such ductwork and replace with materials or configurations which are acceptable. Any delay in job progress will be the responsibility of the Contractor.

3.9

OTHER REQUIREMENTS A. Insulated Duct: Where ducts will be insulated, make provision for neat insulation finish around damper operating quadrants, splitter adjusting clamps, access doors, and similar operating devices. A metal collar equivalent in depth to insulation thickness and of suitable size to which insulation may be finished shall be mounted on duct. B. Control Devices: Properly install all control related devices which are part of the duct systems. See Section(s) describing control systems.

3.10

SEALING OF DUCTS A. Duct seal classes are as follows: 1. Seal class "A": Seal all transverse joints, longitudinal seams and duct wall penetrations. Use for P/VC-4 (4" w.g.) and greater unless otherwise indicated. 2. Seal class "B": Seal all transverse joints and longitudinal seams. Use for P/VC-3 (3" w.g.) unless otherwise indicated. 3. Seal class "C": Seal all transverse joints. Use for P/VC-2 (2" w.g.) and lower unless otherwise indicated. B. Where sealing is required it shall mean the following: 1. The use of adhesives, gaskets, tape systems or combinations thereof to close openings in the surface of the ductwork and field-erected plenums and casings through which air leakage would occur; or 2. The prudent selection and application of sealing methods by fabricators and installers, giving due consideration to the designated pressure class, pressure mode (positive or negative), chemical compatibility of the closure system, potential movement of mating

DUCTWORK

233100 - 9


12/7/10

parts, workmanship, amount and type of handling; cleanliness of surfaces, product shelf life, curing time and manufacturer-identified exposure limitations; 3. That these provisions are applicable to duct connections to equipment and to apparatus but are not for equipment and apparatus; 4. That where distinctions between seams and joints are made herein, a seam is defined as joining of two longitudinally (in the direction of air-flow) oriented edges of duct surface material occurring between two joints. Helical (spiral) lock seams are exempt from sealant requirements. All other duct surface connections made on the perimeter are deemed to be joints. Joints are inclusive of but not limited to girth joints; branch and subbranch intersections; so-called duct collar tap-ins; fitting subsections; louver and air terminal connections to ducts; access door and access panel frames and jambs; duct, plenum and casing abutments to building structures; that sealing requirements herein do not contain provisions to: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l.

Resist chemical attack. Be dielectrically isolated. Be waterproof, weatherproof or ultraviolet ray resistant. Withstand temperatures higher than 120oF or lower than 40oF. Contain atomic radiation or serve in other safety-related construction. Be electrically grounded. Maintain leakage integrity at pressures in excess of the duct classification herein. Be underground below the water table. Be submerged in liquid. Withstand continuous vibration visible to the naked eye. Be totally leak-free within an encapsulating vapor barrier. Create closure in portions of the building structure used as ducts, e.g., ceiling plenums, shafts, pressurized compartments.

5. The requirements to seal apply to both positive pressure and negative pressure of operation. 6. Externally insulated ducts located outside of buildings shall be sealed prior to being insulated as though they were inside. If metal surfaces of ducts located on the exterior of buildings are exposed to weather, they shall receive exterior duct sealant. An exterior duct sealant is defined as a sealant that is marketed specifically as forming a positive air and water tight seal, bonding well to the metal involved, remaining flexible with metal movement and having a service temperature range of -30oF to 175oF. If exposed to direct sunlight it shall also be ultraviolet ray and ozone resistant or shall, after curing, be painted with a compatible coating that provides such resistance. The term sealant herein is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature but is inclusive of tapes and combinations of open weave fabric strips and mastics. C. Materials and applications for sealing ducts: 1. General: a. Complete product data on all materials used for sealing ducts must be submitted for approval prior to any duct fabrication. b. All sealants must be specifically recommended by their manufacturer for the purpose of sealing ducts. DUCTWORK

233100 - 10


12/7/10

2. Liquid Sealant: a. Use only for slip type joints where sealant is to fill small space between overlapping pieces of metal. Do not use where metal clearances exceed 1/32-inch. b. Sealant must be specifically manufactured for the purpose of sealing ducts. 3. Mastics: a. Use in lieu of liquid sealant at Contractor's option. b. Use as a fillet, in grooves and between flanges. c. Do not use oil base caulking or glazing compounds. 4. Gaskets: a. Use soft elastomer butyl or neoprene rubber or extruded forms of sealants in flanged joints in addition to mastic. 5. Tape: a. Tape is not allowed on sheet metal ducts. 6. Combination of mastic and embedded fabric: a. Use mastic/mesh/mastic as a sealant where pressure/velocity classification is equal to and exceeds P/VC-3 and where any spaces between metal surfaces at transverse joints or longitudinal seams or duct wall penetrations exceeds 1/16-inch. b. Apply glove coat of mastic, then embed a continuous or overlapping strip of not less than 4-inch wide 10 x 10 fiberglass cloth into the mastic, then apply a final glove coat of mastic over the glass cloth. 7. Surface preparation: a. Surfaces to receive sealant should be adequately clean (free from oil, dust, dirt, rust, moisture, ice crystals and other substances that inhibit or prevent bonding). Use solvent and/or apply a face primer if necessary to obtain adequately clean surface for adhesion.

3.11

LEAKAGE TESTING A. General: 1. Test the following duct systems: a. All ducts which are (1) under positive or negative pressure and (2) which are directly connected to air moving device (air handling unit, exhaust fan, supply fan or similar air moving equipment) and (3) which convey 1000-cfm or greater through their largest portion.

DUCTWORK

233100 - 11


12/7/10

b. All ducts which are (1) under positive or negative pressure and (2) which are part of a supply, return, outside and/or exhaust air system and (3) which are equal to or greater than 25 feet in length and (4) which may or may not be directly connected to an air moving device. 2. Portions of duct to be tested shall consist of all portions from the largest cross sectional area to the air distribution device connection or to the smallest inlet or outlet point, whichever is applicable. 3. Duct systems shall be constructed so that leakage does not exceed 5.00% of the air quantity handled by the respective fan. B. Allowable Leakage: 1. Leakage shall be measured during leakage test at a test pressure which is equal to the pressure/velocity classification of the duct system (e.g., a P/VC-2 duct shall be tested at 2.0 in. w.g.s.p., a P/VC-1/2 duct at 0.5 in. w.g.s.p., etc.). C. Test Procedure: 1. Test at time of duct installation and prior to installation of any field applied insulation and prior to any concealment in chases or similar enclosures. 2. Duct openings (both entry openings and outlet openings) shall be capped or sealed by taping or banding a flexible plastic sheet over each opening prior to pressurizing duct. The plastic sheet shall be of adequate strength and thickness to withstand the test pressures. Use other method of sealing duct openings providing objective of test is obtained and if method of sealing is approved by Architect/Engineer. 3. Use a fan having a minimum capacity of 300-cfm or 5% of the particular duct system design capacity, whichever is greater and which is capable of producing a duct test pressure of 150% of the duct test pressure. 4. Test fan shall be connected to a flow measuring assembly consisting of straightening vanes and an orifice plate mounted in a straight tube with appropriately located pressure taps. Orifice assembly shall be accurately calibrated with its own calibration curve. Pressures shall be measured with U-tube manometers and corresponding flow rates obtained from the orifice performance curve. 5. Connect test fan and orifice flow measuring assembly to the duct to be tested with a section of flexible duct. 6. Test for audible leaks as follows: a. Close off and seal all openings in the duct section to be tested. Connect the test apparatus to the duct by means of a section of flexible duct. b. Start the blower with its control damper closed (some small blowers popularly used for testing ducts may damage the duct because they can develop pressures up to 25 inches (W.G.). c. Gradually open the inlet damper until the duct pressure reaches 50% in excess of designed duct operating pressure. d. Survey all joints for audible leaks. Mark each leak and repair after shutting down blower. Do not apply a retest until sealing has been repaired if and where necessary.

DUCTWORK

233100 - 12


12/7/10

7. After all audible leaks have been sealed, the leakage should be measured with the orifice section of the test apparatus as follows: a. Start blower and open damper until pressure in duct reaches 25% in excess of designed duct operating pressure. b. Total allowable leakage shall not exceed five (5) percent of the total system design air flow rate. When partial sections (such as supply section, return section, etc.) of the duct system are tested, the summation of the leakage for all sections shall not exceed the total allowable leakage. 8. Correct any duct leaks which are detected either audibly or by touch regardless of whether leakage through duct system is less than allowable test leakage.

3.12

DEFINITIONS OF DUCT TYPES A. Duct types shall be as follows: 1. Supply Air Ductwork Low pressure ductwork/Seal Class C. 2. Toilet and Ventilation Exhaust ductwork – Low pressure ductwork/Seal Class C. 3. Return Air Ductwork – Low pressure ductwork/Seal Class C. 4. Outside Air Ductwork – Low pressure ductwork/Seal Class C.


DUCTWORK

233100 - 13


12/7/10

SECTION 233300 - DUCT SYSTEM ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1


1.2

SCOPE A. Provide all necessary duct system accessories to assure proper balance, quiet and draftless distribution and conveyance, and minimization of turbulence, noise and pressure drop for all supply return, exhaust and ventilation air quantities indicated. B. Items Included: This section generally includes, but is not limited to, the following items as may be applicable to this project: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

1.3

Flexible duct connections. Splitters. Turning vanes. Extractors. Manual volume dampers. Access doors.

RELATION TO OTHER WORK A. Refer to the section, "General Mechanical Provisions", for related requirements. Refer to other sections of Division 23 and to all other applicable portions of the Drawings and Specifications. B. This section directly relates in particular to sections (which may or may not be included in this division) which describe the following: 1. Ductwork. 2. Air distribution devices. 3. All types of air handling equipment.

1.4

COORDINATION A. Coordinate all items affecting the duct systems including but not limited to the following items: air handling units, exhaust fans, supply fans, sound attenuators, duct mounted coils, access panels air distribution devices, fire dampers, outside air louvers, hoods, filters, roof

DUCT SYSTEM ACCESSORIES

233300 - 1


12/7/10

curbs, structural framing, roof construction, roofing, and the work of all trades to insure an orderly and timely progression of the work.

1.5

SHOP DRAWINGS A. Include complete data on: access doors; flexible connectors; manual volume dampers including operating hardware; extractors; turning vanes; automatic shutters and all other items. B. See section entitled, "General Mechanical Provisions".

1.6

OTHER REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all components in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. All ductwork dimensions indicated which may affect items of this section are nominal free clearance internal dimensions which do not include insulation thickness.

1.7

DEFINITIONS A. "SMACNA" means "Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.".


GENERAL A. Be recommended by the manufacturer for the application. B. Products listed in this Section or on the plans are based on a specific manufacturer to establish the desired style, quality and type. Equivalent products, complying with the requirements of this Section and the installation requirements of the plans, by the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Ventfabrics Barber-Colman Tuttle & Bailey Dura-Dyne Titus Anemostat Young Metalaire United McGill


233300 - 2


12/7/10

C. Products which are specified may not necessarily all be required on the projects; provide those products which are applicable.

2.2

FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Provided where air handlers, fans and blowers connect to their ductwork. B. At least 4 inches long. C. Connected on each side to metal (either metal ductwork, air handling apparatus, or heavy gauge steel sleeves). D. For use in high and/or low pressure duct systems. E. Ventfabrics, Inc., "Ventglas Metaledge", or equivalent.

2.3

SPLITTERS A. Provide for adjustment of air volume to their respective branches, where indicated. Constructed of at least the same gauge galvanized steel as the duct wherein they are used, and in no instance be less than twenty-two (22) US gauge. Use in low pressure duct systems only. Be adequately sized to close off air to applicable branches. Rigidly attached to pivot rod and operating linkage. Install on raised insulated base when used in internally insulated ductwork. Splitter blades; formed in two thicknesses of metal so that entering edge presents rounded nose to air flow; length no less than one and one half times the width of the smaller branch served or twelve inches, whichever is larger. Hardware used for the construction, assembly, and operation of splitter dampers shall be as follows: 1. Operators for exposed splitters and those located above "lay-in" or accessible ceiling shall be Ventlok #690 splitter damper assembly. 2. Operators for concealed splitters shall be Ventlok #691 with #680 miter and #677 concealed regulator.

2.4

LOW PRESSURE METAL TURNING VANES A. Provide in all elbows, bends and tees of all low velocity supply air ducts whether or not shown in detail; provide in all elbows, bends and tees of all other low velocity ducts where portions of such ducts convey air at greater than 700 fpm average velocity. Adequate rigidity and strength to be completely flutterproof; properly designed; permanently fixed type. Aluminum, or steel with acid/solvent chemical corrosion resistant coating, or galvanized steel. Air foil type in all mitered elbows, mitered bends and tees. Air foil type must be manufactured by Titus, Tuttle & Bailey, Anemostat, Waterloo, Metalaire, Barber-Colman or other approved manufacturer. Be Barber-Colman "Airturns", Tuttle and Bailey "Ducturns", or Dura-Dyne "VR" with 24 gauge rails and hollow vanes, or equivalent.


233300 - 3


12/7/10

HIGH PRESSURE TURNING VANES A. None required for this project.

2.6

EXTRACTORS A. Provide at rectangular branch duct take-offs. B. Use in low pressure duct systems only. C. Properly designed to deflect, proportion and direct the indicated air quantities to the branch duct and/or to the registers, grilles or other outlets without causing objectionable noise or pressure drop. D. Multi-vaned and adjustable. E. Aluminum, or steel with acid/solvent chemical corrosion resistant coating, or galvanized steel. F. Provided with devices for adjusting and securing the position of these deflectors; these devices shall allow adjustment of the deflectors from outside the completed ductwork without necessity for puncturing or otherwise penetrating ductwork and/or its vapor barrier. G. Made by Titus, Tuttle and Bailey, Metalaire, Anemostat, Waterloo, Barber-Colman, or equivalent. H. Be similar to Titus Model AG-45 or AG-225 Volume Extractor, Tuttle & Bailey Type VCL or VLK Vectrol, Waterloo Type DTM or DT2M Extractor, Anemostat "DTB" or "DTA" or Young Regulator "890" or 890A", or equivalent.

2.7

MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A. These dampers are to be other than those specified as being integral with each register, diffuser and other air outlet or inlet. B. Provided where indicated in the complete air distribution system(s) (including ductwork, return air plenums, etc.) to allow complete balancing of the air supply, return, ventilation and exhaust system(s). C. Opposed blade type. D. 8" maximum blade width. E. Made of galvanized steel, steel with acid/solvent chemical resistant coating, or steel with a sprayed or dipped aluminum rust resistant finish; flutter-proof.


233300 - 4


12/7/10

F. Provided so that all damper adjustment can be made form outside the completed ductwork without necessity for puncturing or otherwise penetrating the ductwork and/or its vapor barrier. G. Fully adjustable and with locking device. H. Manufactured by Titus, Tuttle & Bailey, Anemostat, Waterloo, Metalaire, Greenheck or equivalent. I.

Provided at a point in the ductwork which is a sufficient distance upstream from an outlet (or downstream from an inlet) to attenuate objectionable noise due to damper throttling and to preclude adverse effects on the distribution device.

J.

Based upon location of the duct in which the damper is to be installed, provide the following types: 1. Dampers in ducts which are exposed or located above "lay-in" or "accessible ceilings": Young Regulator Company Model 817 or equivalent. 2. Dampers in ducts concealed above plaster ceilings or behind dry wall construction: Young Regulator Company Model 817A or equivalent.

K. Use in low pressure duct system only.

2.8

LOW PRESSURE DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Provided for: each manual and motorized damper; fire damper; smoke damper; electric duct heater; and where access is otherwise necessary. B. Factory prefabricated double wall insulated type of 24 US gauge galvanized steel (of same or thicker gauge than ductwork panel in which installed, whichever is greater). C. Minimum size shall be as large as is compatible with duct size but in no case less than the following (provide larger sizes if necessary to permit proper access operation): Max. Duct Dimensions

Access Door Size

11" and less 12" through 16" 17" and over

10" x 12" 12" x 16" 16" x 24"

D. Doors shall be provided with and operated adjustable tension catches and shall be completely gasketed around their perimeters. Doors shall be Ventlok "Access Doors". Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations using Ventlok #360 sealant or equivalent.


233300 - 5


12/7/10

TEST OPENINGS A. Furnish and install gasketed capped test openings for test equipment (pitot tubes, etc.) on the entering and leaving sides of air handling unit and other air handling equipment and heating coils. Test openings shall be Ventlok #699-2 or equivalent.

2.10

PREFABRICATED DUCT CONNECTIONS A. At Contractor's option, prefabricated duct connections as manufactured by Ductmate (or approved equal system) may be used in locations and applications for which the duct connection system is recommended. Use of these connections must meet or exceed specified duct construction quality as related to structural rigidity, pressure, accessibility and other such requirements.


GENERAL A. Construct and install all accessories in accordance with the latest indicated editions of applicable SMACNA construction standards. B. Provide all mitered elbows with turning vanes. C. Install all duct system accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. D. All accessories installed in poly-vinyl-steel ductwork shall have acid/solvent chemical corrosion resistant coating.



233300 - 6


December 7, 2010

SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.


1.3

Propeller fans.


Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on sea level.

B.

Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Also include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.

2. C.

Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. Certified fan sound-power ratings. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. Fan speed controllers.

Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

Delegated-Design Submittal: For unit hangars and supports indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

233423 - 1


2. D.

December 7, 2010

Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for vibration isolators and restraints bases.

Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved: 1. 2. 3.

Roof framing and support members relative to fans. Ceiling suspension assembly members. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access ladders and structural supports.

E.

Field quality-control reports.

F.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.5


Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B.

AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

C.

UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.

1.6

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

B.

Coordinate sizes and locations of equipment supports, with actual equipment provided.


PROPELLER FANS A.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Power Foil X fan by BIG ASS FANS or comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Acme Engineering & Manufacturing Corporation. Aerovent; a division of Twin City Fan Companies, Ltd. Airmaster Fan Company. American Coolair Corporation.


233423 - 2

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23.

December 7, 2010

Ammerman; Millennium Equipment. Big Ass Fans. Breidert Air Products. Broan-NuTone LLC; NuTone Inc. Carnes Company. Chicago Blower Corporation. Cincinnati Fan. Hartzell Fan Incorporated. Howden Buffalo Inc. JencoFan. King Company; part of Mestek, Inc. Loren Cook Company. Madison Manufacturing. Moffitt Corporation Inc. New York Blower Company (The). PennBarry. Quietaire Inc. Stanley Fans. W.W. Grainger, Inc.; Dayton Products.

B.

Housing: Galvanized-steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with baked-enamel finish coat applied after assembly.

C.

Steel Fan Wheels: Formed-steel blades riveted to heavy-gage steel spider bolted to cast-iron hub.

D.

Fan Wheel: Replaceable, cast or extruded-aluminum, airfoil blades fastened to cast-aluminum hub; factory set pitch angle of blades.

E.

Fan Drive: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing.

F.

Fan Drive: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Resiliently mounted to housing. Statically and dynamically balanced. Selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. Extend grease fitting to accessible location outside of unit. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.4. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings. a.

8. 9.

Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L 10 of 100,000 hours.

Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.


233423 - 3


December 7, 2010

G.

Accessories: 1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent. 2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.

H.

Capacities and Characteristics: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Airflow: 162,831 cfm. Fan Diameter: 192 inches. Fan rpm: 63. Motor Size: 1.5 hp. Electrical Characteristics: a. b. c.

6.

Vibration Isolators: a. b.

2.2

Volts: 400-480VAC. Phase: 3 Phase. Hertz: 50/60.

Type: Elastomeric hangers. Static Deflection: 1 inch.

MOTORS A.

Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1. 2.

Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections.


INSTALLATION A.

Install power ventilators level and plumb.

B.

Support units using elastomeric mounts having a static deflection of 1 inch.

C.

Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel supports and wire safety cable with shackle.


233423 - 4


December 7, 2010

D.

Install units with clearances for service and maintenance as required by the manufacturer and the authority having jurisdiction.

E.

Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.2

CONNECTIONS A.

Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B.

Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.3


Perform tests and inspections. 1.

B.

Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

Tests and Inspections: 1. 2.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, and align. Adjust drive tension. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. Energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

C.

Test and adjust controls and safeties. equipment.

D.

Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4

Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

ADJUSTING A.

Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B.

Adjust belt tension.


233423 - 5


Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

D.

Lubricate bearings.

December 7, 2010



233423 - 6


12/7/10

SECTION 233425 - FANS: IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL, LIGHT DUTY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1


1.2

SCOPE A. Provide in-line centrifugal light duty exhaust fans of size, sound power level, and electrical characteristics indicated on drawings.

1.3


1.4

SHOP DRAWINGS A. Refer to requirements of Section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions". Include complete data on: fan external static pressure, fan rpm, motor rpm, fan tip speed, fan size, fan performance tables or curves showing all possible operating selection points for each fan size (including rating certification), fan brake horsepower, motor horsepower and electrical characteristics sound level, fan accessories, and a complete schedule worked up by fan number. B. Exhaust air fans shall be AMCA certified as to both sound and performance ratings.

1.5

MANUFACTURER A. Products listed in this Section or on the plans are based on a specific manufacturer to establish the desired style, quality and type. Equivalent products, complying with the requirements of this Section and the installation requirements of the plans, by the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Greenheck Fan and Ventilator Corp. 2. Penn Ventilator Company. 3. Loren Cook Company.

FANS: IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL, LIGHT DUTY

233425 - 1


12/7/10


FAN HOUSING A. Fan housing including longitudinal, traverse, and diagonal stiffeners, motor mounts, bearing and drive supports shall be constructed of steel. Entire fan housing shall be internally lined with 1/2-inch or greater, three pound per cubic foot density fiberglass acoustical duct liner with a stabilized surface. Liner shall be held in place with adhesive and mechanical fasteners. All insulation and adhesives shall meet requirements of NFPA 90A as to flame spread and smoke developed ratings. Housing, including all bracing, stiffeners and motor mounting assembly shall be factory finished with a baked on alkyd enamel finish over a corrosion resistant primer. Removable panel in bottom of housing for complete access to motor and fan. Inlet and outlet duct connections.

2.2

FAN WHEEL A. Shall be centrifugal type and shall be statically and dynamically balanced.

2.3

FAN MOTOR A. Permanently lubricated shaded pole motor mounted on resilient isolators to minimize vibration and noise.

2.4

BACKDRAFT DAMPER A. Mounted on the fan discharge.

2.5

DRIVE ASSEMBLY A. Drive shall be direct or belt drive type as indicated on drawings, and shall conform with the requirements of Section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions".

2.6

DISCONNECT SWITCH A. Fans shall include factory mounted disconnect switches prewired to the drive motor.

2.7

SPEED CONTROL A. Solid state speed controller for direct drive fans for speed reduction to 40%. Mounted on housing or as otherwise indicated.


233425 - 2


12/7/10


FAN PLACEMENT AND MOUNTING A. Fan locations shall be essentially as shown on drawings; however, actual wall openings and fan placement shall be verified using field measurements and data relating to equipment approved for actual installation on this project. Mount fan in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.2

SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL A. Refer to Section entitled "Ductwork" for air side sound control and to Section entitled "Vibration Isolation" for vibration control.

3.3

DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Inlet and discharge ducts shall be connected to the fan duct collars using flexible connectors. These connectors shall be installed properly so that they are not in tension and are aligned with their respective ducts.

3.4

TEST AND BALANCE A. All fan performance shall be certified as specified in section describing test and balance procedures.

3.5

OTHER REQUIREMENTS A. Remove shipping bolts and temporary supports within fans. operation.

Adjust dampers for free

B. Provide necessary anchorage and supports to prevent vibration.



233425 - 3


12/7/10

SECTION 233713 - AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1


1.2

SCOPE A. Provide all air distribution devices as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein for a complete and operable system.

1.3

RELATION TO OTHER WORK A. Refer to the section, "General Mechanical Provisions", for related requirements. Refer to other sections of Division 23 and to all other applicable portions of the Drawings and Specifications. B. Coordinate with work of the ceiling, drywall and plastering trades as required to insure an orderly progression of work and a first class finished system with respect to placement, alignment, finish, general fit and absence of conflict with lighting systems and fire protection systems. C. Provide an accessory insulation blanket on the bell of the diffusers for the air distribution devices to prevent condensation formation.

1.4

DESIGN CONDITIONS A. Acoustical: Noise produced at each diffuser, register, grille or other air distribution device shall not exceed a noise criteria level of NC 25 based on sound pressure levels in db re 0.002 microbars unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate air distribution devices, sound attenuation measures and equipment actually provided to insure that this design constraint is not exceeded by the system installed. Exceptions: Any particular rooms or areas which are normally occupied by other than maintenance staff or service staff and which may be noted on the drawings as requiring lower NC criteria. B. Pressure Drop: Pressure drop across any air distribution device shall not exceed 0.15 in wg static pressure unless otherwise indicated.

AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES

233713 - 1


12/7/10

SHOP DRAWINGS A. Refer to the requirements of Section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions".

1.6

MANUFACTURER A. Products listed in this Section or on the plans are based on a specific manufacturer to establish the desired style, quality and type. Equivalent products, complying with the requirements of this Section and the installation requirements of the plans, by the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Titus. (Basis of Design) Metalaire. Price. Krueger. Carnes.

B. Manufacturers must be members of the Air Distribution Council unless otherwise indicated.

1.7

OTHER REQUIREMENTS A. All aluminum is to be extruded unless otherwise indicated. B. Appearance: Each air distribution device which has a portion thereof (frame, core, etc.) exposed to view in the finished area shall have a factory applied finish which matches and is compatible with the color of the surrounding surface on which the device is installed. Colors must be approved by Architect prior to device fabrication. C. All louvers, dampers and/or shutters shall be rated by their manufacturer in accord with AMCA Standard 500-74. D. Integral Components: All dampers, blank-off baffles and other companion devices which form an integral part of air distribution device shall be factory made items produced by the manufacturer of air distribution device. E. Louvers: Louvers may be specified in another division but for reference may also be indicated on mechanical drawings. F. Door Grilles: Door grilles may be specified in another division but for reference may also be indicated on mechanical drawings.


233713 - 2


12/7/10


GENERAL A. Provide the following air distribution devices as applicable to this project. Refer to air distribution device schedule as shown on drawings.

2.2

OTHER REQUIREMENTS A. All devices must each comply with the applicable portions of the Air Diffusion Council (ADC) Equipment Test Code 1062R4 "Certification, Rating and Test Manual", the Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. (AMCA) Standard 500 "Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters" and the "National Fire Protection Association" (NFPA) Standard 90A "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems". B. Provide ceiling and/or linear diffusers with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling systems which will contain each type of diffuser. C. All specified 24”x24”louvered face ceiling diffusers shall be provided with full face panels, no exceptions. D. Diffusers, grilles and registers installed in fire rated ceiling, or floor/ceiling assemblies shall be constructed of steel. E. Mounting Screws: Where grilles, diffusers or registers are specified which require mounting screws visible from the face of the device these screws shall be furnished with the air distribution equipment and be finished at the factory to match the finish on the grille, diffuser or register in which they are to be used.


GENERAL A. Install neatly where indicated in accord with manufacturer's recommendations and in accord with SMACNA recommendations and as otherwise indicated. B. Properly test, balance and adjust to produce quiet, draftless operation to best degree possible.

3.2

INSTALLATION A. Rectangular Diffusers: Where diffusers are the lay-in type, they shall be supported by the inverted T-bar suspension system but all ducts connected thereto shall be supported independently of the ceiling as specified under Section entitled "Ductwork". Surface mounted diffusers shall be supported by the duct run-outs or drops where sheet metal ducts


233713 - 3


12/7/10

are indicated and by separate hangers where flex run-outs are indicated. All rectangular ceiling diffusers shall be installed with their lines parallel and perpendicular to the building line and properly aligned with the ceiling. B. Sidewall Grilles and Registers: Mount securely to the duct system flanges using finish screws and in accordance with accepted good practice. C. Ceiling mounted Exhaust and Return Registers/Grilles: Mount as specified hereinbefore for surface mounted ceiling diffusers except use finished screws provided and secure to duct and finished ceiling (or finished ceiling for non-ducted returns) in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Where required to provide adequate support for non-ducted registers or grilles, provide appropriate mounting frame for incorporation into the ceiling system. D. Install all outlets and inlets as recommended by the manufacturer; in accordance with recognized industry practices; to insure that products serve intended functions. E. Locate ceiling air outlets and inlets as indicated on the drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical ceiling modules. Install square and parallel with partitions, ceiling grid members, etc. F. Provide as an accessory, insulated fiberglass blanket on the bell of all ceiling diffusers. G. Spare Parts: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, 3 operating keys for each type of outlet and inlet that require them. H. Do not install blank-offs under continuous linear diffuser distribution plenums. Distribution plenums shall cover only active portion of the diffuser.

3.3

PROTECTION OF WORK UNTIL FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Coordinate the installation of the air distribution equipment with related work and finishing of adjacent surfaces to prevent damage to the devices or adjacent finishes. Protect the finish of all air distribution equipment until final acceptance. Replace or repair to the Architect's satisfaction any damaged equipment.



233713 - 4


12/7/10

SECTION 233725 - LOUVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

SCOPE A. Provide complete louver assemblies as indicated on Drawings and in Specifications.

1.2

SHOP DRAWINGS A. Refer to the section entitled "General Mechanical Provisions".

1.3

CERTIFICATION A. All performance shall be certified by AMCA and bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for Air Performance and Water Penetration in accord with AMCA Standard 500. B. Provide product data to indicate conformance with the Miami-Dade protocol for the louvers. All louvers shall be wind-driven rain resistant per the Basis of Design.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Stationary type; extruded aluminum construction. B. All components factory assembled by the louver manufacturer including heads, jambs, sills, blades and mullions. Louver sizes too large for shipping shall be assembled at the site from factory assembled louver sections to provide the overall sizes required. C. Frame: 1. 4-inch depth. 2. Suitable for mounting in the type of wall where indicated. construction indicated on architectural drawings. 3. Extruded aluminum of 0.100-inches minimum thickness. 4. Provided with caulking slots.

Coordinate with wall

D. Blades: 1. Drainable type with drain gutter in each blade and downspouts in jambs and mullions. 2. Extruded aluminum of 0.081-inch minimum thickness. 3. Blade angle to meet the wind-driven rain resistant requirements. LOUVERS

233725 - 1


12/7/10

4. Blades spaced to meet the wind-driven rain resistant requirements. E. Finish: 1. Provide custom color selections/samples for Architect’s Selection and Approval. F. Operating characteristics: 1. 2. 3. 4.

High free area. Low water penetration. Free area based on air velocity of not greater than 500 fpm. Air flow pressure drop in intake mode or exhaust mode of not greater than 0.025-inches w.g.s.p.

G. Design: Limit span between visible mullions to 10-feet and shall incorporate such other structural supports required to withstand a wind load of 50 lbs. per sq. ft. H. Size: As scheduled or shown on Drawings or as required to comply with the above operating characteristic constraints.

2.2

ACCESSORIES A. Bird screen: Aluminum, 1/2-inch mesh, typical for all louvers. B. Frame: Flange, 1-1/2-inch nominal width for louvers of sizes 24" wide X 12" high and smaller; non-flanged, suitable for cased opening mounting for louvers of sizes greater than 24" wide x 12" high.

2.3

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Greenheck Model EHH-601-D. Carnes; Ruskin, or approved equal.

Acceptable:

equivalent products of


GENERAL A. Install in accord with manufacturer's recommendations and in accord with applicable portions of current SMACNA guidelines. B. Installation shall be watertight between complete circumference of frame and wall. C. Coordinate complete installation with other work related to structure, wall construction, ductwork (if any) and other such interfaces.

LOUVERS

233725 - 2


12/7/10

D. For additional requirements, refer to Architectural drawings and other portions of the Contract Documents.


LOUVERS

233725 - 3


12/7/10

SECTION 238127 - SPLIT PACKAGE AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Basic Requirements: Provisions of Section 230100, BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS and Section 230200, ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, are a part of this Section.

1.2

SUMMARY A. General: Provide factory catalog rated split package air conditioning equipment as specified herein and of the type, size, and capacity indicated.

1.3

SUBMITTAL A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "SUBMITTAL" in Section 230100. Include the following performance data for each combination of factory rated split package air conditioning equipment at the scheduled operating condition: 1. Manufacturers Literature. 2. Performance Data: a. Provide the following information for each size of split package air conditioning unit indicated: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Heating and cooling. Air entering and leaving conditions. Airflow and airside pressure loss at design conditions. Motor horsepower (or watts), voltage and phase. DX coil descriptions, rows and fins per inch. Electric coil face velocity, fpm and watts per square foot.

3. Installation Instructions: a. Manufacturer's printed instructions for the installation of each type of fan and coil unit and matching air-cooled condensing unit including copies shipped with the equipment. b. Auxiliary drip pan design for concealed units and exposed units in critical locations.

SPLIT PACKAGE AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT

238127 - 1


12/7/10

4. Maintenance Instructions: a. Manufacturer's printed instructions for the maintenance of each type of unit.

1.4

APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. General: All equipment, material, accessories, methods of construction and reinforcement, finish quality, workmanship and installation shall be in compliance with the paragraph entitled "Code Compliance" in Section 230100. B. Certification: Unit capacities shall be rated in accordance with ANSI/ARI Standard 210/240. Unit shall be sound tested and rated in accordance with ARI Standard 350-86.


MANUFACTURER A. General: Refer to paragraph entitled "MANUFACTURERS" in Section 230100. 1. Manufacturer: a. Carrier. (Basis of Design) b. Trane. c. McQuay. B. Single Manufacturer: All split system units shall be by a single manufacturer.

2.2

AIR HANDLING FAN AND COIL UNIT A. General: 1. Casing: Galvanized steel; designed for service access; insulated internally with foil-faced fiberglass insulation; discharge duct collar and/or return air duct collar where indicated. The casing shall an enamel finish. All cabinet openings shall be provided with airtight seals. 2. Fan Assembly: Statically and dynamically balanced at factory; centrifugal forwardcurved double width; wheels and housing corrosion resistant. 3. Motor and Drive: High efficiency; permanent split capacitor unless specifically noted otherwise; inherent thermal overload protection; permanently lubricated sleeve bearings; direct drive; resilient mount in such a manner that external isolation will not be necessary; detachable motor cord; 3 speed controller with "OFF" position; voltage and phase as indicated in the schedule or as required by the circuit wiring shown on the electrical drawings; motor input shall not exceed the power input indicated.


238127 - 2


12/7/10

4. Drain Pan: Galvanized steel or thermoplastic; primary pan extending under full length and width of cooling coil; secondary pan under control valve and isolation valves and all un-insulated piping connections. 5. Filter: Frame shall be an integral part of fan coil unit; suitable for standard size filter; removable throwaway type unless otherwise indicated. 6. Exposed Cabinet Finish: Cabinet and/or access panel shall be phosphatized and finished with baked-on enamel or heat fused epoxy coating. Either finish shall be suitable for additional painting if required under Section 09 91 01, PAINTING. 7. Sound Power Rating: Each fan coil unit shall meet or be less than the sound power rating indicated. B. Horizontal Flow: 1. General: Chassis provided with supply air discharge plenum with single or multiple openings; removable front access panel; enclosed fan; front filter access; integral thermostat control unless otherwise indicated. 2. Concealed: Exposed fan housing; side or bottom filter access; suitable for suspended mounting above accessible ceiling; duct collar supply and return connection. 3. Exposed Cabinet: Enclosed fan; bottom filter access; supply and return air grilles or duct collar connections as shown on the drawing or indicated in the schedule.

2.3

DX COOLING COIL A. Casing: 16 gauge or heavier galvanized steel; A-frame design with access panel for service access; aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes. Factory pressure and leak tested. Coil can be rotated to suit airflow.

2.4

ELECTRIC HEATING COIL A. General: The coil shall meet all NEC requirements; protected by high-limit thermal cut-out with automatic reset and manual-reset additional high-limit cut-out; open coil type; fan interlock; air flow switch; mounted, fused, wired and enclosed at the factory with throughpanel disconnect switch; UL listed; voltage and phase as indicated. B. Performance: Provide complete heating coil assemblies designed to be installed inside the air handling fan and coil unit cabinet of capacity and characteristics indicated.

2.5

AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT A. General: Unit shall be factory assembled and shall be weatherproofed. Units shall include a compressor, plate fin condenser coil, fans and motors, controls and holding charge of R-410A refrigerant. B. Casing: Unit casing shall be constructed of minimum 18 gauge zinc coated galvanized steel with a weather-resistant baked enamel finish.


238127 - 3


12/7/10

C. Single Compressor: Units as indicated shall have single direct drive hermetic reciprocating or scroll compressor with oil pump, single refrigeration circuit with integral sub-cooling. A refrigeration filter drier, liquid line and suction gas line service valves and gauge port shall be provided. Crankcase heater temperature and current-sensitive motor overloads shall be included. D. Condenser Coil: Coil shall be internally finned or smooth bore copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum plate fins. Coil shall be factory pressure and leak tested. Metal grilles shall be provided for coil physical protection. Provide Factory-Applied Seacoast coating on the condenser coils. E. Condenser Fan and Motors: Condenser fan shall be direct-drive, statically and dynamically balanced propeller type with aluminum blades steel hub. Fan shall be used in draw-through vertical discharge position. Fan motor shall be either permanently lubricated totally enclosed or open construction with ball or sleeve bearings and shall have built-in current and thermal overload protection. F. Controls: Condensing units shall be completely factory wired with necessary controls and contactor pressure lugs or terminal block for power wiring. Control wiring shall be 24-volt and shall include fusing and control transformer. Units shall be provided with anti-shortcycle solid state timer shall be provided to prevent compressor operation for a fixed amount of time after shutdown. G. Warranty: The compressor shall be provided with a 5 year extended warranty. The warranty period shall commence upon the date of substantial completion.

2.6

FILTER A. Filter Material: Dacron or fibrous glass multi-ply fiber; 3 graduated density plies; fiberboard frame; minimum efficiency, 30 percent NBS atmospheric dust spot test.

2.7

TEMPERATURE-HUMIDITY AND OUTSIDE AIR CONTROL A. Provide an electronic, 24-hour/7-day programmable temperature-humidity controller with battery back-up to provide temperature and humidity control functions. B. Outside Air Intake: Where indicated, provide a motorized outside air damper in the outside air duct interlocked with the air handling unit. When the unit is energized in the occupied mode, the outside air damper shall open. When in the unoccupied mode or de-energized, the outside air damper shall be closed.


238127 - 4


12/7/10


EQUIPMENT PLACEMENT A. Location: Equipment shall be located essentially as shown on drawings; however, actual placement of the unit shall be verified using field measurements and data relating to the units accepted for actual installation.

3.2

SUPPORT A. General: All air handling fan and coil units shall be supported independently of ductwork or piping.

3.3

DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Supply and Return: Ducts shall be connected with flexible connectors. Refer to paragraph entitled "FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS" in Section 233300.

3.4

CONDENSING UNIT SUPPORT A. Ground Mounted Condensing Unit: Units shown on the ground shall be installed on a concrete housekeeping pad. Pad shall be a minimum of 6 inches in depth and 6 inches wider than equipment on all sides. Provide angles at the base of the unit and pad to secure the condensing unit in place. Provide 2 angle clips per side of each condensing unit.

3.5

AUXILIARY DRAIN PAN A. General: Horizontal concealed split package air handling units located above the ceiling shall be provided with an auxiliary drain pan and float switch.. Drain pan shall be manufactured of 20 gauge galvanized steel seamless or welded construction with a minimum 2-inch deep pan. Support the drain pan independent of the air handling unit. Provide float switch in the drain pan or condensate drain line interlocked with the unit to de-activate the system upon sensing an overflow condition.

3.6

PIPING A. General: Properly connect all refrigerant and condensate drain piping; allow adequate space for all service and operational clearances necessary; provide trap in condensate drain from the primary AHU drain; slope condensate drain down toward the discharge at location indicated.



238127 - 5


12/7/10

SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

1.3

Electrical equipment coordination and installation. Sleeves for raceways and cables. Sleeve seals. Grout. Common electrical installation requirements.

DEFINITIONS A.

EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B.

NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A.

1.5

Product Data: For sleeve seals. COORDINATION

A.

Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. So connecting raceways and cables will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

260500 - 1


12/7/10

C.

Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

D.

Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."


SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES A.

Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B.

Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel. 1.

Minimum Metal Thickness: a. b.

2.2

For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

SLEEVE SEALS A.

Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d.

2. 3. 4.

Advance Products & Systems, Inc. Calpico, Inc. Metraflex Co. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.


260500 - 2


12/7/10

GROUT A.

Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.


COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION A.

Comply with NECA 1.

B.

Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

C.

Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D.

Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E.

Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2

SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A.

Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B.

Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C.

Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D.

Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

E.

Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F.

Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

G.

Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

H.

Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry


260500 - 3

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1.

12/7/10

Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I.

Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

J.

Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

K.

Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L.

Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using cast-iron pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

M.

Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.3

SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION A.

Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B.

Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4

FIRESTOPPING A.

Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." END OF SECTION 260500


260500 - 4


12/7/10

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.


1.3

Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.

DEFINITIONS A.


B.


1.4

SUBMITTALS A.


B.


C.


1.5


Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the International Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.

Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the International Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES

260519 - 1


12/7/10

B.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C.

Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6

COORDINATION A.

Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.


CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. General Cable Corporation. Senator Wire & Cable Company. Southwire Company.

B.

Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

C.

Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN.

2.2

CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

2.3

AFC Cable Systems, Inc. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 3M; Electrical Products Division. Tyco Electronics Corp.

Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. SLEEVES FOR CABLES

A.



260519 - 2


12/7/10

B.

Fire and Smoke Rated Sleeves: Manufactured by: EZ Path or Wiremold.

C.

Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.

D.


2.4

SLEEVE SEALS A.


B.


C.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

D.


Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable. 1. 2. 3.



CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A.

Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B.

Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

3.2

CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A.

Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.


260519 - 3


12/7/10

B.

Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway cable.

C.

Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: THWN, single conductors in raceway and underground feeder cable, Type UF.

D.

Exposed Branch Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

E.

Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway and underground branch-circuit cable, Type UF.

3.3

Type THHN-

INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A.

Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C.

Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

D.

Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E.

Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

F.

Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4

CONNECTIONS A.

Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B.

Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 1.

C. 3.5

Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.

Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack. SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A.



260519 - 4


12/7/10

B.


C.


D.

Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness: 1. 2.

For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

E.


F.

Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.

G.


H.

Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.

I.

Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

J.

Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

K.

Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

L.

Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

M.

Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

N.

Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.6


Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations.


260519 - 5

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 B.

3.7

12/7/10

Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. FIRESTOPPING

A.

3.8

Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B.

Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

C.

Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. 3.

After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. a. b.

c.

D.

Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. 2. 3.

Test procedures used. Test results that comply with requirements. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.


260519 - 6

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 E.

12/7/10

Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 260519


260519 - 7


12/7/10

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications: 1. 2.

1.3

Underground distribution grounding. Common ground bonding with lightning protection system.

SUBMITTALS A.


B.

Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Test wells. Ground rods. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment.

C.

Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.

D.


E.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include the following in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals: 1.

Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells and grounding connections for separately derived systems based on NETA MTS and NFPA 70B. a.

b.

Tests shall be to determine if ground resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if they do not. Include recommended testing intervals.

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260526 - 1


12/7/10



Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the International Electrical Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B.


C.

Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.


CONDUCTORS A.

Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B.

Bare Copper Conductors: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

C.

2.2

Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 15/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

Grounding Bus: Rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 2 inches in cross section, unless otherwise indicated; with insulators. CONNECTORS

A.

Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B.

Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts.


260526 - 2

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1. 2.3

12/7/10

Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

GROUNDING ELECTRODES A.

Ground Rods: Copper-clad, sectional type; 3/4 inch by 10 feet.

B.

Chemical-Enhanced Grounding Electrodes: Copper tube, straight or L-shaped, charged with nonhazardous electrolytic chemical salts. 1. 2.

Termination: Factory-attached No. 4/0 AWG bare conductor at least 48 inches long. Backfill Material: Electrode manufacturer's recommended material.


APPLICATIONS A.

Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 12 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 10 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum. 1. 2.

Bury at least 24 inches below grade. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches above duct bank when indicated as part of duct-bank installation.

C.

Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow.

D.

Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. 2.

E.

Install bus on insulated spacers 1 inch, minimum, from wall 6 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, down to specified height above floor, and connect to horizontal bus.

Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.


260526 - 3


12/7/10

GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A.

Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

B.

Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches above to 6 inches below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.

C.

Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields as recommended by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.

3.3

EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A.

Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B.

Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

3.4

Feeders and branch circuits. Lighting circuits. Receptacle circuits. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. Flexible raceway runs.

INSTALLATION A.

Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B.

Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.

C.

Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated.


260526 - 4


2.

D.

Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service, unless otherwise indicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor.

Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. 2. 3.

F.

Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if any. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are specified in Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems," and shall be at least 12 inches deep, with cover. 1.

E.

12/7/10

Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1.

2. 3.

Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.

G.

Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart.

H.

Under Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70, using a minimum of 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG. 1.

If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet long, coil excess conductor within base of foundation.


260526 - 5


3.5

12/7/10

Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building grounding grid or to grounding electrode external to concrete.


Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B.

Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

C.

Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. 2.

After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a.

b. 3.

D.

Prepare dimensioned drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

E.

Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 3 ohms. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms

Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION 260526


260526 - 6


12/7/10

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.


1.3

Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

DEFINITIONS A.

EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B.

IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C.

RMC: Rigid metal conduit.

1.4


Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B.

Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C.

Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

D.

Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.

1.5

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For the following:

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260529 - 1

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1. 2. B.

1.6

Steel slotted support systems. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.

Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

C.

12/7/10

Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. Equipment supports.

Welding certificates. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B.


1.7

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B.

Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."


SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A.

Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1.

2.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.

Allied Tube & Conduit. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. ERICO International Corporation. GS Metals Corp. Thomas & Betts Corporation.


260529 - 2

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 f. g. 3. 4. 5. 6. B.

12/7/10

Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. Wesanco, Inc.

Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels and angles with 9/16-inch- diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least 1 surface. 1.

2.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d.

3. 4. 5.

Allied Tube & Conduit. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited. Seasafe, Inc.

Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be stainless steel. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.

C.

Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

D.

Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

E.

Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

F.

Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

G.

Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:


ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,

260529 - 3


Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a.

b.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) 2) 3) 4)

2.

b.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

4. 5. 6. 7. 2.2

Hilti Inc. ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. MKT Fastening, LLC. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a.

3.

12/7/10

Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. Hilti Inc. ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. MKT Fastening, LLC.

Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A.

Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B.

Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.


260529 - 4


12/7/10


APPLICATION A.

Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B.

Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

C.

Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1.

D.

3.2

Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 11/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A.

Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B.

Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C.

Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

D.

Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.


260529 - 5


7. 8.

E.

3.3

12/7/10

To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts, beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69 or spring-tension clamps. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A.

Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for sitefabricated metal supports.

B.

Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C.

Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4

PAINTING A.

Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1.

Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B.

Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

C.

Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 260529


260529 - 6


12/7/10

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

B.


1.3

Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction.

DEFINITIONS A.

EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B.

ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.

C.


D.

FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

E.

IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

F.

LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

G.

LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

H.


I.

RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260533 - 1


Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. 2.

Custom enclosures and cabinets. For handholes and boxes for underground wiring, including the following: a. b. c. d. e.

C.

Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. Frame and cover design. Grounding details. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons. Joint details.

Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. 2.

D.

Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.

Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosures and cabinets and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following: 1.

Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a.

2. 3.

The term "withstand" means "the cabinet or enclosure will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified.

Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

E.

Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

F.

Source quality-control test reports.

1.5

12/7/10



B.



260533 - 2


12/7/10


METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A.


B.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

AFC Cable Systems, Inc. Alflex Inc. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. Electri-Flex Co. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. Maverick Tube Corporation. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal. Wheatland Tube Company.

C.

Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

D.

Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80.5.

E.

IMC: ANSI C80.6.

F.

PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit. 1. 2.

Comply with NEMA RN 1. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.

G.

EMT: ANSI C80.3.

H.

FMC: Zinc-coated steel or aluminum.

I.

LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

J.

Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. 1. 2. 3.

K.

Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886. Fittings for EMT: Steel compression type. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.


260533 - 3


12/7/10

NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING A.


B.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

AFC Cable Systems, Inc. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. Arnco Corporation. CANTEX Inc. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. Condux International, Inc. ElecSYS, Inc. Electri-Flex Co. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. RACO; a Hubbell Company. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

C.

RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.

D.

LFNC: UL 1660.

E.

Fittings for RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

F.

Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.

2.3

METAL WIREWAYS A.


B.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3.

Cooper B-Line, Inc. Hoffman. Square D; Schneider Electric.

C.

Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1 or 3R, unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, holddown straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.


260533 - 4


Wireway Covers: Hinged type, Flanged-and-gasketed type.

F.

Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4

12/7/10

NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS A.


B.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2.

Hoffman. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

C.

Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with no holes or knockouts. Cover is gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections are flanged, with stainless-steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets.

D.

Description: PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap-on cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners.

E.

Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, holddown straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

2.5

HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING A.

Description: Comply with SCTE 77. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

B.

Color of Frame and Cover: Gray. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open bottom, unless otherwise indicated. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "COMMUNICATIONS". Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two. 1.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:


260533 - 5


12/7/10

SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS A.


B.


C.

Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.

D.


2.7

SLEEVE SEALS A.


B.


C.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

D.

Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable. 1. 2. 3.

2.8


Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. Connecting Bolts and Nuts Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES A.

Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied. 1.

Tests of materials shall be performed by a independent testing agency.


260533 - 6


3.

12/7/10

Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.


RACEWAY APPLICATION A.

Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFNC. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. Application of Handholes and Boxes for Underground Wiring: a.

b.

c.

B.

Handholes and Pull Boxes in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional, Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Polymer concrete SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating. Handholes and Pull Boxes in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Polymer-concrete units, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating. Handholes and Pull Boxes Subject to Light-Duty Pedestrian Traffic Only: Fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, structurally tested according to SCTE 77 with 3000-lbf vertical loading.

Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated: 1.

Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. a.

2. 3.

4. 5.

Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit.

Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel in damp or wet locations.

C.

Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D.

Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.


260533 - 7

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1. 2.

12/7/10

Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer.

E.

Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.

F.

Do not install aluminum conduits in contact with concrete.

3.2

INSTALLATION A.

Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B.

Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C.

Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D.

Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

E.

Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

F.

Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

G.

Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

H.

Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1.

2. 3.

Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above the floor.

I.

Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

J.

Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.


260533 - 8


12/7/10

K.

Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

L.

Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows: 1. 2. 3.

M.

3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.

Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. 2.

N.

Install raceways, metallic and

Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. 2.

Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

O.

Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall.

P.

Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

Q.

Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.3

INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A.

Direct-Buried Conduit: 1.

2. 3.

Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12


260533 - 9


4.

5.

inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout the length of the elbow. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor. a. b.

6.

3.4

12/7/10

Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried conduits, placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of conduit.

INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES A.

Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B.

Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C.

Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.

D.

Install handholes and boxes with bottom below the frost line, below grade.

E.

Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in the enclosure.

F.

Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

3.5

SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A.


B.



260533 - 10


12/7/10

C.


D.

Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness: 1. 2.

For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

E.


F.


G.


H.

Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway unless sleeve seal is to be installed.

I.

Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

J.

Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

K.

Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply with Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

L.

Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

M.

Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

N.

Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.6


Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations.


260533 - 11


3.7

12/7/10

Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway material and size. Position raceway in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. FIRESTOPPING

A.

3.8

Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." PROTECTION

A.

Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. 2.

Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 260533


260533 - 12


12/7/10

SECTION 260543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.


1.3

Conduit, ducts, and duct accessories for direct-buried and concrete-encased duct banks, and in single duct runs. Handholes and boxes. Manholes.

DEFINITION A.

1.4

RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

Duct-bank materials, including separators and miscellaneous components. Ducts and conduits and their accessories, including elbows, end bells, bends, fittings, and solvent cement. Accessories for manholes, handholes, boxes, and other utility structures. Warning tape. Warning planks.

Shop Drawings for Precast or Factory-Fabricated Underground Utility Structures: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and accessories, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. Reinforcement details. Frame and cover design and manhole frame support rings. Ladder details. Grounding details. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, pulling-in and lifting irons, and sumps. Joint details.

UNDERGROUND DUCTS & RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260543 - 1

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 C.

Shop Drawings for Factory-Fabricated Handholes and Boxes Other Than Precast Concrete: Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations, and fabrication and installation details, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

D.

12/7/10

Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. Cover design. Grounding details. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons.

Duct-Bank Coordination Drawings: Show duct profiles and coordination with other utilities and underground structures. 1. 2.

Include plans and sections, drawn to scale, and show bends and locations of expansion fittings. Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

E.

Product Certificates: For concrete and steel used in precast concrete manholes and handholes, as required by ASTM C 858.

F.

Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

G.


H.


1.5


Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

B.

Comply with ANSI C2.

C.


1.6


Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent bending, warping, and deforming.

B.

Store precast concrete and other factory-fabricated underground utility structures at Project site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical damage. Arrange so identification markings are visible.

C.

Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points.


260543 - 2


12/7/10


Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: 1. 2.

1.8

Notify Owner no fewer than three days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's written permission.

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes, handholes, and boxes with final arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field.

B.

Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into manholes, handholes, and boxes with final locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to manholes and handholes, and as approved by Architect.

1.9

EXTRA MATERIALS A.

Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

B.

Furnish cable-support stanchions, arms, insulators, and associated fasteners in quantities equal to 5 percent of quantity of each item installed.


CONDUIT A.

Rigid Steel Conduit: Galvanized. Comply with ANSI C80.1.

B.

RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-80-PVC, UL 651, with matching fittings by same manufacturer as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B.

2.2

NONMETALLIC DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES A.



260543 - 3


12/7/10

B.


C.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

ARNCO Corp. Beck Manufacturing. Cantex, Inc. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. Condux International, Inc. ElecSys, Inc. Electri-Flex Company. IPEX Inc. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. Manhattan/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies. Spiraduct/AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

D.

Underground Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 6 & 8, Type EB-20-PVC, ASTM F 512, UL 651A, with matching fittings by the same manufacturer as the duct, complying with NEMA TC 9.

E.

Underground Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 6 & 8, Type DB-60-PVC Type DB-120-PVC, ASTM F 512, with matching fittings by the same manufacturer as the duct, complying with NEMA TC 9.

F.

Duct Accessories: 1.

2. 3.

Duct Separators: Factory-fabricated rigid PVC interlocking spacers, sized for type and sizes of ducts with which used, and selected to provide minimum duct spacings indicated while supporting ducts during concreting or backfilling. Warning Tape: Underground-line warning tape specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." Concrete Warning Planks: Nominal 12 by 24 by 3 inches in size, manufactured from 6000-psi concrete. a. b.

2.3

Color: Red dye added to concrete during batching. Mark each plank with "ELECTRIC" in 2-inch- high, 3/8-inch- deep letters.

PRECAST CONCRETE HANDHOLES AND BOXES A.


B.


Carder Concrete Products.


260543 - 4

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

12/7/10

Christy Concrete Products. Elmhurst-Chicago Stone Co. Oldcastle Precast Group. Riverton Concrete Products; a division of Cretex Companies, Inc. Utility Concrete Products, LLC. Utility Vault Co. Wausau Tile, Inc.

C.

Comply with ASTM C 858 for design and manufacturing processes.

D.

Description: Factory-fabricated, reinforced-concrete, monolithically poured walls and bottom unless open-bottom enclosures are indicated. Frame and cover shall form top of enclosure and shall have load rating consistent with that of handhole or box. 1. 2. 3.

Frame and Cover: Weatherproof cast-iron frame, with cast-iron cover with recessed cover hook eyes and tamper-resistant, captive, cover-securing bolts. Frame and Cover: Weatherproof steel frame, with steel cover with recessed cover hook eyes and tamper-resistant, captive, cover-securing bolts. Frame and Cover: Weatherproof steel frame, with hinged steel access door assembly with tamper-resistant, captive, cover-securing bolts. a. b.

4.

Frame and Cover: Weatherproof aluminum frame with hinged aluminum access door assembly with tamper-resistant, captive, cover-securing bolts. a. b.

5. 6. 7. 8.

Cover Hinges: Concealed, with hold-open ratchet assembly. Cover Handle: Recessed.

Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." "TELEPHONE." As indicated for each service. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have integral closed bottom, unless otherwise indicated. Extensions and Slabs: Designed to mate with bottom of enclosure. Same material as enclosure. a. b.

9.

Cover Hinges: Concealed, with hold-open ratchet assembly. Cover Handle: Recessed.

Extension shall provide increased depth of 12 inches. Slab: Same dimensions as bottom of enclosure, and arranged to provide closure.

Windows: Precast openings in walls, arranged to match dimensions and elevations of approaching ducts and duct banks plus an additional 12 inches vertically and horizontally to accommodate alignment variations. a.

Windows shall be located no less than 6 inches from interior surfaces of walls, floors, or frames and covers of handholes, but close enough to corners to facilitate racking of cables on walls.


260543 - 5

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 b. c. 10.

2.4

Window opening shall have cast-in-place, welded wire fabric reinforcement for field cutting and bending to tie in to concrete envelopes of duct banks. Window openings shall be framed with at least two additional No. 4 steel reinforcing bars in concrete around each opening.

Duct Entrances in Handhole Walls: Cast end-bell or duct-terminating fitting in wall for each entering duct. a. b.

11.

12/7/10

Type and size shall match fittings to duct or conduit to be terminated. Fittings shall align with elevations of approaching ducts and be located near interior corners of handholes to facilitate racking of cable.

Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long and larger shall have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE A.

Description: Comply with SCTE 77. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

7. 8. B.

Color: Gray. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have integral closed bottom, unless otherwise indicated. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." "TELEPHONE." As indicated for each service. Direct-Buried Wiring Entrance Provisions: Knockouts equipped with insulated bushings or end-bell fittings, selected to suit box material, sized for wiring indicated, and arranged for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. Duct Entrance Provisions: Duct-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long and larger shall have factory-installed inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons.

Polymer Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with a polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a combination of the two. 1.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d.

Armorcast Products Company. Carson Industries LLC. CDR Systems Corporation. NewBasis.


260543 - 6


Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with covers of polymer concrete. 1.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c.

2.5

12/7/10

Carson Industries LLC. Christy Concrete Products. Nordic Fiberglass, Inc.

PRECAST MANHOLES A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

B.

Carder Concrete Products. Christy Concrete Products. Elmhurst-Chicago Stone Co. Oldcastle Precast Group. Riverton Concrete Products; a division of Cretex Companies, Inc. Utility Concrete Products, LLC. Utility Vault Co. Wausau Tile, Inc.

Comply with ASTM C 858, with structural design loading as specified in Part 3 "Underground Enclosure Application" Article and with interlocking mating sections, complete with accessories, hardware, and features. 1.

Windows: Precast openings in walls, arranged to match dimensions and elevations of approaching ducts and duct banks plus an additional 12 inches vertically and horizontally to accommodate alignment variations. a.

b. c. 2.

Windows shall be located no less than 6 inches from interior surfaces of walls, floors, or roofs of manholes, but close enough to corners to facilitate racking of cables on walls. Window opening shall have cast-in-place, welded wire fabric reinforcement for field cutting and bending to tie in to concrete envelopes of duct banks. Window openings shall be framed with at least two additional No. 4 steel reinforcing bars in concrete around each opening.

Duct Entrances in Manhole Walls: Cast end-bell or duct-terminating fitting in wall for each entering duct. a. b.

Type and size shall match fittings to duct or conduit to be terminated. Fittings shall align with elevations of approaching ducts and be located near interior corners of manholes to facilitate racking of cable.


260543 - 7


12/7/10

C.

Concrete Knockout Panels: 1-1/2 to 2 inches thick, for future conduit entrance and sleeve for ground rod.

D.

Joint Sealant: Asphaltic-butyl material with adhesion, cohesion, flexibility, and durability properties necessary to withstand maximum hydrostatic pressures at the installation location with the ground-water level at grade.

2.6

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A.

Test and inspect precast concrete utility structures according to ASTM C 1037.

B.

Nonconcrete Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of manholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied. 1. 2.

3.

Tests of materials shall be performed by a independent testing agency. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing agency or the manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.


UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION A.

Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-80-PVC, in concreteencased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-80-PVC, in directburied duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Ducts for Electrical Branch Circuits: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-80-PVC, in direct-buried duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Underground Ducts Crossing Paved Paths Walks and Driveways Roadways: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, encased in reinforced concrete.

3.2

EARTHWORK A.

Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Division 31 Section "Earth Moving," but do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.

B.

Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed.


260543 - 8


12/7/10

C.

Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching. Comply with Division 32 Sections "Turf and Grasses" and "Plants."

D.

Cut and patch existing pavement in the path of underground ducts and utility structures according to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching."

3.3

DUCT INSTALLATION A.

Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two manholes to drain in both directions.

B.

Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48 inches, both horizontally and vertically, at other locations, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same plane.

D.

Duct Entrances to Manholes and Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells, spaced approximately 10 inches o.c. for 5-inch ducts, and vary proportionately for other duct sizes. 1. 2. 3.

Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet from the end bell without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line. Direct-Buried Duct Banks: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each conduit in the area of disturbed earth adjacent to manhole or handhole. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances.

E.

Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit at least 10 feet outside the building wall without reducing duct line slope away from the building, and without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for duct-to-conduit transition. Install conduit penetrations of building walls as specified in Division 26 Section "Common Work Results for Electrical."

F.

Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig hydrostatic pressure.

G.

Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf- test nylon cord in ducts, including spares.

H.

Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support ducts on duct separators. 1.

Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less than 5 spacers per 20 feet of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Stagger separators approximately 6 inches


260543 - 9


2.

between tiers. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups. Concreting Sequence: Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous operation. a.

b.

3.

4.

5. 6. 7.

8.

9.

Start at one end and finish at the other, allowing for expansion and contraction of ducts as their temperature changes during and after the pour. Use expansion fittings installed according to manufacturer's written recommendations, or use other specific measures to prevent expansion-contraction damage. If more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane and install 3/4-inch reinforcing rod dowels extending 18 inches into concrete on both sides of joint near corners of envelope.

Pouring Concrete: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy mass of concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Use a plank to direct concrete down sides of bank assembly to trench bottom. Allow concrete to flow to center of bank and rise up in middle, uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-bank application. Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete-encased duct banks where they cross disturbed earth and where indicated. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups. Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms. Minimum Space between Ducts: 3 inches between ducts and exterior envelope wall, 2 inches between ducts for like services, and 4 inches between power and signal ducts. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 24 inches below finished grade in areas not subject to deliberate traffic, and at least 30 inches below finished grade in deliberate traffic paths for vehicles, unless otherwise indicated. Stub-Ups: Use manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Extend concrete encasement throughout the length of the elbow. Stub-Ups: Use manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor. a. b.

10.

12/7/10

Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete. Stub-Ups to Equipment: For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches above all concrete-encased ducts and duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches of the centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional warning tape for each 12-inch increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches. Space additional tapes 12 inches apart, horizontally.


260543 - 10

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 I.

Direct-Buried Duct Banks: 1. 2.

3.

4. 5.

6. 7. 8. 9.

10.

Support ducts on duct separators coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor temperature. Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less than 5 spacers per 20 feet of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent displacement during backfill and yet permit linear duct movement due to expansion and contraction as temperature changes. Stagger spacers approximately 6 inches between tiers. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct bank. Prepare trench bottoms as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipes less than 6 inches in nominal diameter. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." After installing first tier of ducts, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point and work toward end of duct run, leaving ducts at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Repeat procedure after placing each tier. After placing last tier, hand-place backfill to 4 inches over ducts and hand tamp. Firmly tamp backfill around ducts to provide maximum supporting strength. Use hand tamper only. After placing controlled backfill over final tier, make final duct connections at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Install ducts with a minimum of 3 inches between ducts for like services and 6 inches between power and signal ducts. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 36 inches below finished grade, unless otherwise indicated. Set elevation of bottom of duct bank below the frost line. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout the length of the elbow. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor. a. b.

11.

3.4

12/7/10

Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete. For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried ducts and duct banks, placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional plank for each 12-inch increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches. Space additional planks 12 inches apart, horizontally.

INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND BOXES A.

Cast-in-Place Manhole Installation:


260543 - 11

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1. 2. 3. B.

Finish interior surfaces with a smooth-troweled finish. Windows for Future Duct Connections: Form and pour concrete knockout panels 1-1/2 to 2 inches thick, arranged as indicated. Cast-in-place concrete, formwork, and reinforcement are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

Precast Concrete Handhole and Manhole Installation: 1. 2. 3.

C.

12/7/10

Comply with ASTM C 891, unless otherwise indicated. Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

Elevations: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Manhole Roof: Install with rooftop at least 15 inches below finished grade. Manhole Frame: In paved areas and trafficways, set frames flush with finished grade. Set other manhole frames 1 inch above finished grade. Handhole Covers: In paved areas and trafficways, set surface flush with finished grade. Set covers of other handholes 1 inch above finished grade. Where indicated, cast handhole cover frame integrally with handhole structure.

D.

Drainage: Install drains in bottom of manholes where indicated. Coordinate with drainage provisions indicated.

E.

Manhole Access: Circular opening in manhole roof; sized to match cover size. 1. 2.

Manholes with Fixed Ladders: Offset access opening from manhole centerlines to align with ladder. Install chimney, constructed of precast concrete collars and rings to support frame and cover and to connect cover with manhole roof opening. Provide moisture-tight masonry joints and waterproof grouting for cast-iron frame to chimney.

F.

Waterproofing: Apply waterproofing to exterior surfaces of manholes and handholes after concrete has cured at least three days. Waterproofing materials and installation are specified in Division 07 Section "Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing." After ducts have been connected and grouted, and before backfilling, waterproof joints and connections and touch up abrasions and scars. Waterproof exterior of manhole chimneys after mortar has cured at least three days.

G.

Dampproofing: Apply dampproofing to exterior surfaces of manholes and handholes after concrete has cured at least three days. Dampproofing materials and installation are specified in Division 07 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing." After ducts have been connected and grouted, and before backfilling, dampproof joints and connections and touch up abrasions and scars. Dampproof exterior of manhole chimneys after mortar has cured at least three days.


260543 - 12


12/7/10

H.

Hardware: Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, and cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated.

I.

Fixed Manhole Ladders: Arrange to provide for safe entry with maximum clearance from cables and other items in manholes.

J.

Field-Installed Bolting Anchors in Manholes and Concrete Handholes: Do not drill deeper than 3-7/8 inches for manholes and 2 inches for handholes, for anchor bolts installed in the field. Use a minimum of two anchors for each cable stanchion.

K.

Warning Sign: Install "Confined Space Hazard" warning sign on the inside surface of each manhole cover.

3.5

INSTALLATION OF HANDHOLES AND BOXES OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE A.

Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Use box extension if required to match depths of ducts, and seal joint between box and extension as recommended by the manufacturer.

B.

Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C.

Elevation: In paved areas and trafficways, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other handholes 1 inch above finished grade.

D.

Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in the enclosure.

E.

Field-cut openings for ducts and conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

F.

For enclosures installed in asphalt paving and subject to occasional, nondeliberate, heavyvehicle loading, form and pour a concrete ring encircling, and in contact with, enclosure and with top surface screeded to top of box cover frame. Bottom of ring shall rest on compacted earth. 1. 2.

Concrete: 3000 psi, 28-day strength, complying with Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete," with a troweled finish. Dimensions: 10 inches wide by 12 inches deep.


260543 - 13


12/7/10

GROUNDING A.

3.7

Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. 2.

3.

B. 3.8

Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of underground ducts and utility structures. Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and test for outof-round duct. Provide mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest. Test manhole and handhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance. CLEANING

A.

Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout ducts.

B.

Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material. END OF SECTION 260543


260543 - 14


12/7/10

SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

1.3

Identification for raceways. Identification of power and control cables. Identification for conductors. Underground-line warning tape. Warning labels and signs. Instruction signs. Equipment identification labels. Miscellaneous identification products.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B.

Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.

C.

Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.

1.4


Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.

B.


C.

Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D.

Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E.

Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260553 - 1


12/7/10

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B.

Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C.

Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D.

Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.


POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A.

Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B.

Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: 1. 2.

C.

Black letters on an orange field. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V: 1. 2.

Black letters on an orange field. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- high letters on 20-inch centers.

D.

Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

E.

Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

F.

Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

G.

Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits More Than 600 V: 4-inch- wide black stripes on 10-inch centers diagonally over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches wide. Stop stripes at legends.


260553 - 2


12/7/10

H.

Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.

I.

Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. 2.

2.2

Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer.

ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A.

Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B.

Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less: 1. 2.

Black letters on an orange field. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

C.

Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

D.

Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches wide; compounded for outdoor use.

2.3

POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A.

Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B.


C.

Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.

D.




260553 - 3


12/7/10

E.

Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

F.

Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

2.4

CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A.

Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide.

B.


C.

Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

D.

Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

E.

Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

F.


2.5


FLOOR MARKING TAPE A.

2.6

2-inch- wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay. UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A.

Tape:


260553 - 4

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1. 2. 3. B.

Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.

Tag: Type ID: 1.

2. 3. 4. 5. 2.7

Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

Color and Printing: 1. 2. 3.

C.

12/7/10

Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service. Overall Thickness: 5 mils. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil. Weight: 28 lb/1000 sq. ft.. 3-Inch Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 70 lbf, and 4600 psi.

WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A.

Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B.

Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: 1. 2. 3.

D.

Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: 1. 2. 3.

E.

Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.

Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches.

Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:


260553 - 5


2.8

12/7/10

Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."

INSTRUCTION SIGNS A.

Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. 1. 2. 3.

B.

2.9

Engraved legend with black letters on white face. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.

Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A.

2.10 A.

Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. CABLE TIES General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 1. 2. 3. 4.

C.

Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.

Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. Color: Black.

Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F.


260553 - 6


12/7/10

Color: Black.

MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A.

Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B.

Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.


INSTALLATION A.

Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B.

Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C.

Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D.

Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E.

Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

F.

System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

G.

Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

H.

Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below: 1. 2.

I.

Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.


260553 - 7

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 J.

3.2

12/7/10

Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application. IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A.

Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and stencil 4inch- wide black stripes on 10-inch centers over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- high black letters on 20-inch centers. Stop stripes at legends. Apply to the following finished surfaces: 1. 2. 3.

Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches of a floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.

B.

Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal-Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: Self-adhesive vinyl labels. Install labels at 10-foot maximum intervals.

C.

Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 10-foot maximum intervals.

D.

Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. 2. 3.

E.

Emergency Power. Power. UPS.

Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1.

Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors. a. b.

Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: 1) 2) 3)

c.

Phase A: Black. Phase B: Red. Phase C: Blue.

Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or


260553 - 8


12/7/10

taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. F.

Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use nonmetallic plastic tag holder with adhesivebacked phase tags, and a separate tag with the circuit designation.

G.

Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

H.

Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.

I.

Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections. 1. 2. 3.

J.

Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. 1. 2.

Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.

K.

Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

L.

Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Metalbacked, butyrate warning signs. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d.

Power transfer switches. Controls with external control power connections. Generator. All systems cabinets.


260553 - 9


12/7/10

M.

Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

N.

Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer.

O.

Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1.

Labeling Instructions: a.

b. c. d.

2.

Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 11/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label Stenciled legend 4 inches high. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

Equipment to Be Labeled: a.

b. c. d. e.

Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. Variable-speed controllers. Contactors. END OF SECTION 260553


260553 - 10


12/7/10

SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes the following lighting control devices: 1. 2. 3.

B.


1.3

Indoor occupancy sensors. Lighting contactors. Emergency shunt relays.

Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy sensors, and manual light switches.

DEFINITIONS A.

LED: Light-emitting diode.

B.

PIR: Passive infrared.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A.


B.

Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors. 1.

Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.

C.


D.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

260923 - 1


12/7/10


1.6

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. COORDINATION

A.

Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.


INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS A.


B.


C.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3.

D.

Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. Sensor Switch, Inc. Watt Stopper (The).

General Description: Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate relay unit. 1.

2. 3.

4.

Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70. Mounting: a. b. c.

Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door.


260923 - 2

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 5. 6. 7. E.

Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operation of the sensor. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; keep lighting off when selected lighting level is present.

Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by using a combination of PIR and ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage. Particular technology or combination of technologies that controls on-off functions shall be selectable in the field by operating controls on unit. 1. 2.

3.

2.2

12/7/10

Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.

LIGHTING CONTACTORS A.


B.


C.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by the following: 1.

D.

Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, combination type with fusible switch, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508. 1.

2. 3. 4. E.

Square D; Schneider Electric.

Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current). Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the point of installation. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250. Provide with control and pilot devices as indicated on Drawings scheduled, matching the NEMA type specified for the enclosure.

BAS Interface: Provide hardware interface to enable the BAS to monitor and control lighting contactors. 1.

Monitoring: On-off status.


260923 - 3


12/7/10

Control: On-off operation

EMERGENCY SHUNT RELAY A.


B.


C.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2.

D.

Description: Normally closed, electrically held relay, arranged for wiring in parallel with manual or automatic switching contacts; complying with UL 924. 1.

2.4

Lighting Control and Design, Inc. Jonson Controls

Coil Rating: 120 277 V.

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A.

Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B.

Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C.

Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


SENSOR INSTALLATION A.

Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.


260923 - 4


12/7/10

CONTACTOR INSTALLATION A.

3.3

Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads, to eliminate structureborne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators. WIRING INSTALLATION

A.

Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch.

B.

Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpowerlimited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

C.

Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.4

IDENTIFICATION A.

Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. 2.

B. 3.5

Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor.

Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. 2.

B.

After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays.

Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work.


260923 - 5


12/7/10

ADJUSTING A.

3.7

Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit occupied conditions. Provide up to four visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. DEMONSTRATION

A.

Coordinate demonstration of products specified in this Section with demonstration requirements for low-voltage, programmable lighting control system specified in Division 26 Section "Network Lighting Controls."

B.

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 260923


260923 - 6


12/7/10

SECTION 262200 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1000 kVA: 1.

1.3

Distribution transformers.

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer indicated.

B.

Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1.

C.

Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following: 1.

Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. b.

2. 3.

The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

262200 - 1


12/7/10

D.


E.


F.


G.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.4



Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the International Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B.

Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.

C.

Source Limitations: manufacturer.

D.


E.

Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."

1.5

Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single


1.6

Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity. COORDINATION

A.

Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.


262200 - 2


12/7/10

Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided.


MANUFACTURERS A.


B.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. 2. 3.

2.2

Square D; Schneider Electric. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS A.

Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.

B.

Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.

C.

Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps. 1. 2.

2.3

Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. Coil Material: Copper.

DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS A.

Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

B.

Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C.

Cores: One leg per phase.

D.

Enclosure: Totally enclosed, nonventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2. 1.

E.

Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250. 1.

F.

Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.

Finish Color: Gray.

Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and four 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity.


262200 - 3


12/7/10

G.

Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.

H.

Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger: 1. 2.

I.

K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561 requirements for nonsinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by designated K-factor. 1. 2.

J.

Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels. Tested according to NEMA TP 2.

Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion corresponding to designated K-factor. Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate.

Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance. 1. 2. 3.

Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and output terminals. Include special terminal for grounding the shield. Shield Effectiveness: a. b. c.

Capacitance between Primary and Secondary Windings: Not to exceed 33 picofarads over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz. Common-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 120 dBA at 0.5 to 1.5 kHz; minimum of minus 65 dBA at 1.5 to 100 kHz. Normal-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 52 dBA at 1.5 to 10 kHz.

K.

Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.

L.

Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Minimum of 3 dBA less than NEMA ST 20 standard sound levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91.

M.

Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Maximum sound levels, when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91, as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

9 kVA and Less: 3dBA Below NEMA standard. 30 to 50 kVA: 3dBA Below NEMA standard. 51 to 150 kVA3: dBA Below NEMA standard. 151 to 300 kVA: 3dBA Below NEMA standard. 301 to 500 kVA: 3dBA Below NEMA standard. 501 to 750 kVA: 3dBA Below NEMA standard. 751 to 1000 kVA: 3dBA Below NEMA standard.


262200 - 4


12/7/10

IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A.

2.5

Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution and / or buck-boost transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91.

B.

Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct sound-level tests on equipment for this Project.


EXAMINATION A.

Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer.

B.

Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.

C.

Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.

D.

Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.

E.


3.2

INSTALLATION A.

Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer. 1.

B.

Brace wall-mounting transformers as specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.

Construct concrete bases and anchor floor-mounting transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."


262200 - 5


12/7/10

CONNECTIONS A.

Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B.

Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.4


Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B.

Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

C.

Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1.

D.


Tests and Inspections: 1.

Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

E.

Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.

F.

Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of transformer connections. 1. 2. 3.

G.

Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration. Perform 2 follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at 4 months and the other at 11 months after Substantial Completion. Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning observations after remedial action.

Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.


262200 - 6


12/7/10

ADJUSTING A.

Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results.

B.

Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.

3.6

CLEANING A.

Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. END OF SECTION 262200


262200 - 7


12/7/10

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.


1.3

Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

DEFINITIONS A.

SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

B.

TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

1.4


Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7. 1.

1.5

The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B.

Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 1

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 5. 6. 7. 8.

12/7/10

Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

C.

Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

D.

Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following: 1. 2. 3.

E.

Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

Field Quality-Control Reports: 1. 2. 3.

Test procedures used. Test results that comply with requirements. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements.

F.

Panelboard Schedules: balancing.

G.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. 2.

1.6

For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load

Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.


Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1.

Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 2


12/7/10

B.

Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

C.

Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D.


E.

Comply with NEMA PB 1.

F.


1.7


Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B.

Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407.

1.8


Environmental Limitations: 1.

2.

Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a.

B.

Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows: 1.

C.

Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F.

Ambient temperatures within limits specified.

Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. 2. 3.

Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission. Comply with NFPA 70E.

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 3


12/7/10

COORDINATION A.

1.10 A.

Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.

1.11 A.


EXTRA MATERIALS Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Keys: five spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types: Two spares for each panelboard. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS A.

Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets. 1.

Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. b. c. d. e.

2.

Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, Grade 316 stainless steel. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.

Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 4

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 3. 4. 5. 6.

Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections. Finishes: a.

b. c. 7.

Panels and Trim: galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other components.

Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent protective cover.

B.

Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.

C.

Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

D.

Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated from box. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as suitable for nonlinear loads. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections.

Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

E.

12/7/10

Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extracapacity neutral bus.

Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 5


12/7/10

F.

Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

G.

Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit rating by an NRTL.

H.

Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

2.2

DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3.

Siemens General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B.

Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

C.

Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 1.

For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

D.

Mains: Circuit breaker.

E.

Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt on circuit breakers.

F.

Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

G.

Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.

H.

Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, mechanically held, general-purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard. 1. 2.

2.3

Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary and secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection. External Control-Power Source: 120-V branch circuit.

LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 6


12/7/10


Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

C.

Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

D.

Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.

E.

Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

F.

Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, mechanically held, general-purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard. 1. 2.

Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary and secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection. External Control-Power Source: 120-V branch circuit.

G.

Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

H.

Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.

2.4

DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A.


B.


C.

General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1.

2. 3.

Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with frontmounted, field-adjustable trip setting. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or fieldreplicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 7

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 a. b. c. d. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Instantaneous trip. Long- and short-time pickup levels. Long- and short-time time adjustments. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip). Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240V, single-pole configuration. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. b. c.

d. e.

f. g. h.

i. j. k. l. m. n. D.

12/7/10

Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. Ground-Fault Protection: Remote-mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. Communication Capability: Din-rail-mounted communication module with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control." Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of rated voltage. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage with fieldadjustable 0.1- to 0.6-second time delay. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts and "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuitbreaker contacts. Alarm Switch: Single-pole, normally open contact that actuates only when circuit breaker trips. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function with other upstream or downstream devices. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on or off position. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.

Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 8

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1. 2. 3.

2.5

12/7/10

Fuses, and Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Fuses." Fused Switch Features and Accessories: Standard ampere ratings and number of poles. Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open and normally closed contact(s) that operate with switch handle operation.

ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES A.

Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B.

Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.


EXAMINATION A.

Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407.

B.

Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C.

Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D.


3.2

INSTALLATION A.

Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.

B.

Equipment Mounting: Install panelboards on concrete bases, 4-inch nominal thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of base. For panelboards, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 9


12/7/10

C.

Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

D.

Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

E.

Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

F.

Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 1.

Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

G.

Install filler plates in unused spaces.

H.

Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.

I.

Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.

J.

Comply with NECA 1.

3.3

IDENTIFICATION A.

Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B.

Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C.

Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D.

Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4


Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B.

Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C.

Perform tests and inspections.

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 10


D.


Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. 2.

E.

12/7/10

Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. Test continuity of each circuit.


Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a.

b. c.

Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. Instruments and Equipment: 1)

Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

F.

Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G.

Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5

ADJUSTING A.

Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B.

Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated

C.

Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes. 1.

Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 11


3. 4.

3.6

12/7/10

Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.

PROTECTION A.

Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 262416

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 12


12/7/10

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.


1.3

Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. Snap switches.

DEFINITIONS A.

EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B.

GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C.

Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D.

RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E.

UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A.


B.

Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.

C.

Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.

D.


E.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

WIRING DEVICES

262726 - 1


12/7/10


Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.

B.


C.


1.6

COORDINATION A.

Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 1.

Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.


MANUFACTURERS A.

Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

2.2

Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).

Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts. GFCI RECEPTACLES

A.

General Description: Straight blade, feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped. GFCI Receptacle shall have SafeLock protection. If critical components are damaged and ground fault protection is lost or if mis-wired, power to receptacle is disconnected.

B.

Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1.


WIRING DEVICES

262726 - 2


Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c.

2.3

12/7/10

Cooper; GF20. Pass & Seymour; 2095. Pass & Seymour PlugTail; PT2095 with PTRA6STR connector.

SWITCHES A.

Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. Switches shall be Federal Specification, WC896 compliant. Prewired pigtail connectors that accommodate Fed Spec requirements and switches are approved. Must be crimped and welded terminal fight angle application within the connector.

B.

Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. 2.

Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.

2.4

Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way). Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224 (four way). Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four way). Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1 (single pole), PS20AC2 (two pole), PS20AC3 (three way), PS20AC4 (four way). Pass & Seymour PlugTail; PT20AC1 (single pole), PT20AC3 (three way) with PTS6STR series connector.

WALL PLATES A.

Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 1. 2. 3.

B.

2.5

Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in "wet locations."

Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weatherresistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover. FINISHES

A.

Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color. 1.

Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White.

WIRING DEVICES

262726 - 3


12/7/10


INSTALLATION A.

Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.

B.

Coordination with Other Trades: 1.

2.

3. 4. C.

Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

Conductors: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. Existing Conductors: a. b. c.

D.

Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.

Device Installation: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.

WIRING DEVICES

262726 - 4

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 9. E.

12/7/10

When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

Receptacle Orientation: 1.

Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left.

F.

Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G.

Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

H.

Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

3.2

IDENTIFICATION A.

Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1.

3.3

Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with white-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.


Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. 2.

B.

Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 262726

WIRING DEVICES

262726 - 5


12/7/10

SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

Section Includes: 1. 2.

1.3

Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). Enclosures.

DEFINITIONS A.

NC: Normally closed.

B.

NO: Normally open.

C.

SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

1.4


Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1.

1.5

The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. Current and voltage ratings. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

262816 - 1


B.

12/7/10

Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.

Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C.


D.

Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. 2. 3.

E.

Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

Field quality-control reports. 1. 2. 3.

Test procedures used. Test results that comply with requirements. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements.

F.

Manufacturer's field service report.

G.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. 2.

1.6

Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.


Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1.

Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.


262816 - 2


12/7/10

B.

Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.

C.

Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D.


E.


1.7


Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1.

B.

Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.8

Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.

Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission. Comply with NFPA 70E.

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.


MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A.


B.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation or comparable product by one of the following:


262816 - 3


12/7/10

General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

C.

General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

D.

Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

E.

Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

F.

Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field-adjustable settings: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Instantaneous trip. Long- and short-time pickup levels. Long- and short-time time adjustments. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

G.

Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

H.

Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker and trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse compartment door.

I.

Ground-Fault, Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

J.

Ground-Fault, Equipment-Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: protection (30-mA trip).

K.

Features and Accessories: 1. 2. 3.

4.

5. 6.

With Class B ground-fault

Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zerosequence current transformer/sensor. Communication Capability: Circuit-breaker-mounted communication module with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.


262816 - 4

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 2.2

12/7/10

Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional time delay. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts. Alarm Switch: One NC contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic ground-fault trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Integrally mounted, self-powered; 120-V ac 24-V dc.

ENCLOSURES A.

Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 7.


EXAMINATION A.

Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B.


3.2

INSTALLATION A.

Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements.

C.

Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D.

Install fuses in fusible devices.


262816 - 5

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 E. 3.3

12/7/10

Comply with NECA 1. IDENTIFICATION

A.

Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. 2.

3.4

Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.



B.


C.


D.

Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. 2.

E.


Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. Test continuity of each circuit.


Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a.

b.

c.

Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.


262816 - 6


Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. malfunctioning controls and equipment.

12/7/10

Replace damaged and

F.

Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G.

Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5

ADJUSTING A.

Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B.

Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges. END OF SECTION 262816


262816 - 7


12/7/10

SECTION 264113 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A. 1.3

Section includes lightning protection for structures structure elements building site components. SUBMITTALS

A.


B.

Shop Drawings: For air terminals and mounting accessories. 1. 2.

Layout of the lightning protection system, along with details of the components to be used in the installation. Include indications for use of raceway, data on how concealment requirements will be met, and calculations required by NFPA 780 for bonding of grounded and isolated metal bodies.

C.

Qualification Data: certification by UL.

D.

Certification, signed by Contractor, that roof adhesive is approved by manufacturer of roofing material.

E.


F.

Comply with recommendations in NFPA 780, Annex D, "Inspection and Maintenance of Lightning Protection Systems," for maintenance of the lightning protection system.

G.

Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features, including the following: 1.

For qualified Installer and manufacturer.

Include data on listing or

Ground rods with inspection test wells.

LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES

264113 - 1


12/7/10


Installer Qualifications: Certified by LPI as a Master Installer/Designer, trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B.

System Certificate: 1. 2. 3.

C.

1.5

UL Master Label. LPI System Certificate. UL Master Label Recertification.

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 780, "Definitions" Article. COORDINATION

A.

Coordinate installation of lightning protection with installation of other building systems and components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures and building materials, metal bodies requiring bonding to lightning protection components, and building finishes.

B.

Coordinate installation of air terminals attached to roof systems with roofing manufacturer and Installer.

C.

Flashings of through-roof assemblies shall comply with roofing manufacturers' specifications.


LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A.

Comply with UL 96 and NFPA 780.

B.

Roof-Mounted Air Terminals: NFPA 780, Class I, aluminum unless otherwise indicated. 1.

Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

2.

East Coast Lightning Equipment Inc. ERICO International Corporation. Harger. Heary Bros. Lightning Protection Co. Inc. Independent Protection Co. Preferred Lightning Protection. Robbins Lightning, Inc. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc.

Air Terminals More than 24 Inches Long: With brace attached to the terminal at not less than half the height of the terminal.


264113 - 2


12/7/10

Single-Membrane, Roof-Mounted Air Terminals: Designed specifically for singlemembrane roof system materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 roofing Sections.

C.

Main and Bonding Conductors on roof: Aluminum.

D.

Ground Rods: Copperweld; 3/4 inch in diameter by 10 feet long.

E.

Down Conductors: Copper

F.

Heavy-Duty, Stack-Mounted, Lightning Protection Components: Solid copper.


INSTALLATION A.

Install lightning protection components and systems according to UL 96A and NFPA 780.

B.

Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections. Avoid sharp bends.

C.

Conceal the following conductors: 1. 2. 3. 4.

System conductors. Down conductors. Interior conductors. Conductors within normal view of exterior locations at grade within 200 feet of building.

D.

Cable Connections: Use crimped or bolted connections for all conductor splices and connections between conductors and other components. Use exothermic-welded connections in underground portions of the system.

E.

Cable Connections: Use exothermic-welded connections for all conductor splices and connections between conductors and other components. 1.

Exception: In single-ply membrane roofing, exothermic-welded connections may be used only below the roof level.

F.

Air Terminals on Single-Ply Membrane Roofing: Comply with roofing membrane and adhesive manufacturer's written instructions.

G.

Bond extremities of vertical metal bodies exceeding 60 feet in length to lightning protection components.

H.

Bond lightning protection components with intermediate-level interconnection loop conductors to grounded metal bodies of building at 60-foot intervals.


264113 - 3


12/7/10

CORROSION PROTECTION A.

Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate corrosion in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from junction of such materials.

B.

Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions cause deterioration or corrosion of conductors.

3.3


Notify Architect at least 48 hours in advance of inspection before concealing lightning protection components.

B.

UL Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain a UL Master Label for system.

C.

LPI System Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain an LPI System Certificate. END OF SECTION 264113


264113 - 4


12/7/10

SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.


B.


1.3

Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. Emergency lighting units. Exit signs. Lighting fixture supports.

Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps.

DEFINITIONS A.

BF: Ballast factor.

B.

CRI: Color-rendering index.

C.

CU: Coefficient of utilization.

D.

HID: High-intensity discharge.

E.

LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

F.

Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

G.

RCR: Room cavity ratio.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

INTERIOR LIGHTING

265100 - 1

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6.

7. 8.

Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. Ballast. Energy-efficiency data. Air and Thermal Performance Data: For air-handling lighting fixtures. Furnish data required in "Submittals" Article in Division 23 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles." Sound Performance Data: For air-handling lighting fixtures. Indicate sound power level and sound transmission class in test reports certified according to standards specified in Division 23 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles." Life, output, and energy-efficiency data for lamps. Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests of each lighting fixture type, outfitted with lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project. a.

b.

B.

Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring.

Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Lighting fixtures. Suspended ceiling components. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached. Other items in finished ceiling including the following: a.

5. D.

Sprinklers.

Perimeter moldings.

Samples for Verification: Interior lighting fixtures designated for sample submission in Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule. Each sample shall include the following: 1. 2.

E.

For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by the manufacturer. Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. 1.

C.

12/7/10

Lamps: Specified units installed. Accessories: Cords and plugs.

Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, signed by product manufacturer.

INTERIOR LIGHTING

265100 - 2


12/7/10

F.

Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

G.


H.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

I.

Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

1.5


1.6

Comply with NFPA 70. COORDINATION

A.

1.7

Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, firesuppression system, and partition assemblies. WARRANTY

A.

Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.

2.

B.

Special Warranty for Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast manufacturer agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. 2.

C.

Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast Batteries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.

Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty Period for Electromagnetic Ballasts: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.

Special Warranty for T5 and T8 Fluorescent Lamps: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by lamp manufacturer agreeing to replace lamps that fail in materials or workmanship, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.

INTERIOR LIGHTING

265100 - 3


12/7/10

Warranty Period: five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

EXTRA MATERIALS A.

Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.

Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.


MANUFACTURERS A.

In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

B.

In Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1.

2.2

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.

HID Fixtures: NEMA LE 5B.

B.

Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

C.

Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

D.

Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

E.

Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Comply with UL 1598.

Where LER is specified, test according to

White Surfaces: 85 percent. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.

INTERIOR LIGHTING

265100 - 4

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 F.

Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 1.

G.

2.3

12/7/10

Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.

Electromagnetic-Interference Filters: Factory installed to suppress conducted electromagneticinterference as required by MIL-STD-461E. Fabricate lighting fixtures with one filter on each ballast indicated to require a filter. BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS

A.

Electromagnetic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029. Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

Electronic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

2.4

Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F for single-lamp ballasts. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life. Low-Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy-encapsulated models designed to minimize audible fixture noise.

Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. Sound Rating: A. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 15 percent. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less. Power Factor: .90 or higher. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. Protection: Class P thermal cutout. Retain subparagraph and associated subparagraphs below for bi-level ballasts.

EXIT SIGNS A.

Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B.

Internally Lighted Signs: 1. 2.

Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power pack. a. b.

Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.

INTERIOR LIGHTING

265100 - 5

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 c.

d. e. f.

g.

2.5

12/7/10

Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates coderequired test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and flashing red LED.

EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A.

Description: Self-contained units complying with UL 924. 1. 2. 3.

4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

9.

2.6

Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of 15 minutes when power is restored after an outage. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates coderequired test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and flashing red LED.

HID LAMPS A.

Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, with a minimum CRI 70, and color temperature 4000 K.

B.

Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.

INTERIOR LIGHTING

265100 - 6

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 C. 2.7

12/7/10

Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 4000 K. LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A.

Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channeland angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B.

Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

C.

Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage.

D.

Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

E.

Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.


INSTALLATION A.

Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture.

B.

Support for Lighting Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid as a support element. 1. 2. 3.

4.

C.

Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 1. 2. 3.

D.

Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.

Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.

Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities.

INTERIOR LIGHTING

265100 - 7


3.2

12/7/10

Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B.

Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. END OF SECTION 265100

INTERIOR LIGHTING

265100 - 8


12/7/10

SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.


B.


1.3

Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays. Poles and accessories. Luminaire lowering devices.

Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings.

DEFINITIONS A.

CRI: Color-rendering index.

B.

HID: High-intensity discharge.

C.

Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

D.

Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination.

E.

Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above.

1.4

STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION A.

Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.

B.

Live Load: Single load of 500 lbf, distributed as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.

C.

Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf/sq. ft., applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

265600 - 1

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 D.

Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire, calculated and applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4. 1. 2.

1.5

12/7/10

Wind speed for calculating wind load for poles exceeding 50 feet in height is 150 mph. Wind speed for calculating wind load for poles 50 feet or less in height is 150 mph

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area, and verification of indicated parameters. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories. Details of installation and construction. Luminaire materials. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories. a.

b.

6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. B.

For indicated luminaires, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer. Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

Photoelectric relays. Ballasts, including energy-efficiency data. Lamps, including life, output, and energy-efficiency data. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for components involved. Anchor bolts for poles. Manufactured pole foundations.

Shop Drawings: 1. 2. 3.

Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer. Design calculations, certified by a qualified professional engineer, indicating strength of screw foundations and soil conditions on which they are based. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring.

C.

Samples for Verification: For products designated for sample submission in Exterior Lighting Device Schedule. Each sample shall include lamps and ballasts.

D.

Pole and Support Component Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of poles, certifying that products are designed for indicated load requirements in AASHTO LTS-4 and that load imposed by luminaire has been included in design.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

265600 - 2


12/7/10

E.

Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

F.


G.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and poles to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

H.


1.6


Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B.

Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.

C.


D.

Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."

E.


1.7


Package aluminum poles for shipping according to ASTM B 660.

B.

Store poles on decay-resistant-treated skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation. Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.

C.

Handle wood poles so they will not be damaged. Do not use pointed tools that can indent pole surface more than 1/4 inch deep. Do not apply tools to section of pole to be installed below ground line.

D.

Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on fiberglass and laminated wood poles until right before pole installation. Handle poles with web fabric straps.

E.

Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. For poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

265600 - 3


12/7/10

WARRANTY A.

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain, perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage. 1. 2. 3. 4.

5.

1.9

Warranty Period for Luminaires: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty Period for Lamps: Replace lamps and fuses that fail within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion; furnish replacement lamps and fuses that fail within the second 12 months from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty Period for Poles: Repair or replace lighting poles and standards that fail in finish, materials, and workmanship within manufacturer's standard warranty period, but not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion.

EXTRA MATERIALS A.

Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. Ballasts: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. Globes and Guards: 10 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.


MANUFACTURERS A.

In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

B.

In Exterior Lighting Device Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1.

2.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

265600 - 4


2.2

12/7/10

Basis of Design Product: The design of each item of exterior luminaire and its support is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.

Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B.

Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.

C.

Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

D.

Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

E.

Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.

F.

Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.

G.

Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.

H.

Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

I.

Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.

J.

Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3.

White Surfaces: 85 percent. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

K.

Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

L.

Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

265600 - 5

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 M.

Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1.

2.

Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel. a.

N.

Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. 2. 3.

4.

Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. a.

2.3

12/7/10

Color: As scheduled on the plans.

FLUORESCENT BALLASTS AND LAMPS A.

Low-Temperature Ballast Capability: Rated by its manufacturer for reliable starting and operation of indicated lamp(s) at temperatures 0 deg F and higher.

B.

Ballast Characteristics: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum. Sound Rating: A, except B for HO ballasts. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1, energy-saving, high power factor, Class P, automatic-reset thermal protection. Case Temperature for Compact Lamp Ballasts: 65 deg C, maximum. Transient-Voltage Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41 Category A or better.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

265600 - 6


12/7/10

C.

Low-Temperature Lamp Capability: Rated for reliable starting and operation with ballast provided at temperatures 0 deg F and higher.

D.

Fluorescent Lamps: Low-mercury type. Comply with the EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1.

2.4

BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS A.

Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open-circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer.

B.

Auxiliary, Instant-On, Quartz System: Factory-installed feature automatically switches quartz lamp on when fixture is initially energized and when momentary power outages occur. System automatically turns quartz lamp off when HID lamp reaches approximately 60 percent of light output.

C.

High-Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type with solid-state igniter/starter and capable of open-circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Igniter/starter shall have an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case temperature of 90 deg C. 1.

Instant-Restrike Device: Integral with ballast, or solid-state potted module, factory installed within fixture and compatible with lamps, ballasts, and mogul sockets up to 150 W. a. b.

2. 2.5

Restrike Range: 105- to 130-V ac. Maximum Voltage: 250-V peak or 150-V ac RMS.

Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 40 deg F.

HID LAMPS A.

Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, with a minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.

B.

Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.

C.

Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 4000 K.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

265600 - 7


12/7/10

POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.

Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4. 1.

2.

Wind-Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure, permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in Part 1 "Structural Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection" Article, with a gust factor of 1.3. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be used in pole selection strength analysis.

B.

Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support components. 1. 2. 3.

Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: fabrication, unless stainless-steel items are indicated. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.

Hot-dip galvanized after

D.

Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

E.

Power-Installed Screw Foundations: Factory fabricated by pole manufacturer, with structural steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M; and with top-plate and mounting bolts to match pole base flange and strength required to support pole, luminaire, and accessories.

F.

Breakaway Supports: Frangible breakaway supports, tested by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, according to AASHTO LTS-4.

2.7

PRESTRESSED CONCRETE POLES A.

Poles: Manufactured of cast concrete. 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

Shape: Square, tapered. Mounting Provisions: Embedded. Finishing: Capped at top and plugged at bottom. Seat each steel reinforcing strand with epoxy adhesive. Grounding: Continuous copper ground wire cast into pole. Terminate at top of pole and attach to 24-inch lightning rod.

Cure with wet steam and age for a minimum of 15 days before installation.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

265600 - 8


12/7/10

C.

Fabricate poles with a hard, nonporous surface that is resistant to water, frost, and road and soil chemicals and that has a maximum water-absorption rate of 3 percent.

D.

Cast aluminum nameplate into pole wall at approximately 5 feet above ground line, listing name of manufacturer, Project identifier, overall height, and approximate weight.

E.

Pole Brackets: Comply with ANSI C136.13.

F.

Finish Color: Provided by color material complying with ASTM C 979, uniformly impregnated throughout the pole concrete. Color material shall provide a uniform, stable, permanent color and be as follows: 1. 2.

G.

Inert, and carbon free. Unaffected by environmental conditions and contaminants including, but not limited to, UV solar radiation, salts, and alkalis.

Finish Texture: Standard form.


LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION A.

Install lamps in each luminaire.

B.

Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports. 1.

C. 3.2

Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer.

Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. POLE INSTALLATION

A.

Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their mounting provisions on the pole.

B.

Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and underground features, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings: 1. 2. 3.

C.

Fire Hydrants and Storm Drainage Piping: 60 inches. Water, Gas, Electric, Communication, and Sewer Lines: 10 feet. Trees: 15 feet.

Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

265600 - 9

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 D.

Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level recommended by pole manufacturer. 1. 2. 3. 4.

E.

Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding concrete grout firmly packed to fill space. Install base covers, unless otherwise indicated. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch- diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole.

Embedded Poles with Tamped Earth Backfill: Set poles to depth below finished grade indicated on Drawings, but not less than one-sixth of pole height. 1. 2.

F.

12/7/10

Dig holes large enough to permit use of tampers in the full depth of hole. Backfill in 6-inch layers and thoroughly tamp each layer so compaction of backfill is equal to or greater than that of undisturbed earth.

Embedded Poles with Concrete Backfill: Set poles in augered holes to depth below finished grade indicated on Drawings, but not less than one-sixth of pole height. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Make holes 6 inches in diameter larger than pole diameter. Fill augered hole around pole with air-entrained concrete having a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days, and finish in a dome above finished grade. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch- diameter pipe to make a drain hole through concrete dome. Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole. Cure concrete a minimum of 72 hours before performing work on pole.

G.

Poles and Pole Foundations Set in Concrete Paved Areas: Install poles with minimum of 6inch- wide, unpaved gap between the pole and the edge of adjacent concrete slab. Fill unpaved ring with pea gravel to a level 1 inch below top of concrete slab.

H.

Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable).

3.3

CORROSION PREVENTION A.

Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.

B.

Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap.

3.4

GROUNDING A.

Ground metal poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

265600 - 10

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1. 2. B.

Install grounding electrode for each pole, unless otherwise indicated. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding system.

Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 1. 2. 3.

3.5

12/7/10

Install grounding electrode for each pole. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations.


Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B.

Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source. 1.

C.

Verify operation of photoelectric controls.

Illumination Tests: 1.

Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST standards. Comply with the following IESNA testing guide(s): a. b. c. d. e.

D.

3.6

IESNA LM-5, "Photometric Measurements of Area and Sports Lighting." IESNA LM-50, "Photometric Measurements of Roadway Lighting Installations." IESNA LM-52, "Photometric Measurements of Roadway Sign Installations." IESNA LM-64, "Photometric Measurements of Parking Areas." IESNA LM-72, "Directional Positioning of Photometric Data."

Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. DEMONSTRATION

A.

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain luminaire lowering devices. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 265600

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

265600 - 11


12/7/10

SECTION 280500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

1.3

Electronic safety and security equipment coordination and installation. Sleeves for raceways and cables. Sleeve seals. Grout. Common electronic safety and security installation requirements.

DEFINITIONS A.


B.


1.4

SUBMITTALS A.

1.5

Product Data: For sleeve seals. COORDINATION

A.

Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electronic safety and security equipment: 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

280500 - 1


12/7/10

C.

Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electronic safety and security items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

D.



SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES A.


B.


C.

Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel. 1.

Minimum Metal Thickness: a. b.

2.2

For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

SLEEVE SEALS A.

Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1. 2.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product name or designation or comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d.

3. 4. 5.




280500 - 2


12/7/10

GROUT A.

Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.


COMMON REQUIREMENTS INSTALLATION

FOR

ELECTRONIC

SAFETY

AND

SECURITY

A.

Comply with NECA 1.

B.

Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

C.

Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D.

Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electronic safety and security equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E.

Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2

SLEEVE INSTALLATION PENETRATIONS

FOR

ELECTRONIC

SAFETY

AND

SECURITY

A.

Electronic safety and security penetrations occur when raceways, pathways, cables, wireways, or cable trays penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B.


C.


D.


E.


F.



280500 - 3


12/7/10

G.

Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

H.

Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry 1.

Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I.

Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

J.

Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

K.

Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L.

Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using cast-iron pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

M.

Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.3


Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B.

Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4

FIRESTOPPING A.

Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electronic safety and security installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." END OF SECTION 280500


280500 - 4


12/7/10

SECTION 280513 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.3

Low-voltage control cabling. Control-circuit conductors. Fire alarm wire and cable. Identification products.

DEFINITIONS A.

Basket Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of wire mesh bottom and side rails.

B.

BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

C.

Channel Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of a one-piece, ventilated-bottom or solid-bottom channel section.

D.

EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

E.

IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

F.

Ladder Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of two longitudinal side rails connected by individual transverse members (rungs).

G.

Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.

H.

Open Cabling: Passing telecommunications cabling through open space (e.g., between the studs of a wall cavity).

I.

RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

J.

Solid-Bottom or Nonventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of integral or separate longitudinal side rails, and a bottom without ventilation openings.

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

280513 - 1


12/7/10

K.

Trough or Ventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of integral or separate longitudinal rails and a bottom having openings sufficient for the passage of air and using 75 percent or less of the plan area of the surface to support cables.

L.

UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.

For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type used: a. b. c.

B.

Nominal OD. Minimum bending radius. Maximum pulling tension.

Shop Drawings: Cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between the tray and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure. Load calculations to show dead and live loads as not exceeding manufacturer's rating for tray and its support elements.

C.

Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

D.

Source quality-control reports.

E.


F.

Maintenance Data: For wire and cable to include in maintenance manuals.

1.5


Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL. 1.

B.

Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: supervise on-site testing.

Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to

Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. 2.

Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.


280513 - 2


1.6

12/7/10

Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Test cables upon receipt at Project site. 1. 2.

3. 1.7

Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use opticalfiber flashlight. Test optical fiber cable on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector; include the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.


Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install UTP, optical fiber, and coaxial cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.


PATHWAYS A.

Support of Open Cabling: NRTL labeled for support of Category 6 cabling, designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. 1. 2. 3.

2.2

Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings. Straps and other devices.

BACKBOARDS A.

2.3

Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry". LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE

A.

Paired Lock Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG. 1. 2. 3. 4.

1 pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned copper conductors. PVC insulation. Unshielded. PVC jacket.


280513 - 3

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 5. B.

1 pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned copper conductors. PVC insulation. Unshielded. PVC jacket. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.

Plenum-Rated, Paired Lock Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

2.4

1 pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned copper conductors. PVC insulation. Unshielded. PVC jacket. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.

Paired Lock Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

D.

Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.

Plenum-Rated, Paired Lock Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

C.

12/7/10

1 pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned copper conductors. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation. Unshielded. Plastic jacket. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test.

CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS A.

Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway complying with UL 83.

B.

Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway power-limited cable, concealed in building finishes complying with UL 83.

C.

Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type TW or TF, complying with UL 83.

2.5

FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Comtran Corp. Draka USA. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corporation. West Penn Wire/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies.


280513 - 4


12/7/10

B.

General Wire and Cable Requirements: NRTL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760.

C.

Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, size as recommended by system manufacturer. 1.

D.

Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation. 1. 2. 3.

2.6

Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70, Article 760, Classification CI, for power-limited fire alarm signal service Type FPL. NRTL listed and labeled as complying with UL 1424 and UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.

Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum. Multiconductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70, Type MC, copper conductors, Type TFN/THHN conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor with outer jacket with red identifier stripe, NTRL listed for fire alarm and cable tray installation, plenum rated, and complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating.

IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Brady Corporation HellermannTyton. Kroy LLC. Panduit Corp.

B.

Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

C.

Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2.7

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A.

Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.

B.

Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

C.

Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.

D.

Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A and TIA/EIA-568B.3.


280513 - 5


12/7/10

E.

Factory sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall test the frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphing the results.

F.

Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G.



INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS A.

Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A-7.

B.

Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points.

C.

Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." for installation of conduits and wireways.

D.

Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.

E.

Pathway Installation in Equipment Rooms: 1.

2. 3. 4. 5. F.

3.2

Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood is installed or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead. Extend conduits 3 inches above finished floor. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system.

Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly, and form smooth gap-free corners and joints. FIRE ALARM WIRING INSTALLATION

A.

Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 72.

B.

Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." 1. 2.

Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any other wire or cable.


280513 - 6


12/7/10

Wiring Method: 1. 2. 3.

Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable. Fire-Rated Cables: Use of 2-hour, fire-rated fire alarm cables, NFPA 70, Types MI and CI, is not permitted. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables shall not be installed in the same cable or raceway as signaling line circuits.

D.

Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

E.

Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.

F.

Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and another for supervisory circuits. Colorcode audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red.

G.

Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum one-hour-rated wall, so the loss of one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signals from other floors or zones.

H.

Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch conduit between the fire alarm control panel and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as needed to suit monitoring function.

3.3

CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS A.

Minimum Conductor Sizes: 1. 2. 3.

3.4

Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits, No. 12 AWG.

CONNECTIONS A.

Comply with requirements for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables.


280513 - 7


3.5

12/7/10

Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables. FIRESTOPPING

A.

Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

B.

Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, "Firestopping" Annex A.

C.

Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.6

GROUNDING A.

For communications wiring, comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.

B.

For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.7

IDENTIFICATION A.

3.8

Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.


B.

Perform tests and inspections.

C.


2. 3.

Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for UL or third-party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA/EIA-568B.1. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. Test UTP cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross connection. a.

Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy


280513 - 8


12/7/10

specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. 4.

Optical Fiber Cable Tests: a.

b.

Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568B.1. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests: 1) 2)

Multimode Link Measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in 1 direction according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper. Attenuation test results for links shall be less than 2.0 dB. Attenuation test results shall be less than that calculated according to equation in TIA/EIA568-B.1.

D.

Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.

E.

End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F.

Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 280513


280513 - 9


12/7/10

SECTION 283100 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

1.3

Fire-alarm control unit. Manual fire-alarm boxes. System smoke detectors. Nonsystem smoke detectors. Heat detectors. Notification appliances. Magnetic door holders. Remote annunciator. Addressable interface device. Digital alarm communicator transmitter. Radio alarm transmitter. System printer.

DEFINITIONS A.

LED: Light-emitting diode.

B.

NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

1.4

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.

Noncoded, FMG-placarded addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only.

B.

Noncoded addressable system, with automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors and multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only.

1.5

SUBMITTALS A.

General Submittal Requirements:

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

283100 - 1


12/7/10

Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications: a. b. c.

Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level IV minimum. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.

B.


C.

Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. attachments to other work. 1. 2. 3. 4.

5.

6. 7. D.

Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and

Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits. Include battery-size calculations. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Include voice/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout, grounding schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.

Delegated-Design Submittal: For smoke and heat detectors indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. 2.

Drawings showing the location of each smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the detector. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72.

E.


F.


G.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1.

Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.


283100 - 2


Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter. Record copy of site-specific software. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of the same name and include the following: a. b. c. d.

5. 6. 7. H.

Frequency of testing of installed components. Frequency of inspection of installed components. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. Manufacturer's user training manuals.

Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit. Copy of NFPA 25.

Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: 1. 2. 3. 4.

1.6

12/7/10

Software operating and upgrade manuals. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. Device address list. Printout of software application and graphic screens.


Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

B.

Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level IV technician.

C.

Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system from single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as, an extension of existing system.

D.


E.

NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL.

F.

NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarm company.

G.

NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 in the form of a placard by an FMG-approved alarm company.

H.

NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by AHJ.


283100 - 3


12/7/10


Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated: 1. 2.

1.8

Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of fire-alarm service. Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Owner's written permission.

SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT A.

Comply with UL 864.

B.

Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years.

C.

Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software. 1.

1.9

Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

EXTRA MATERIALS A.

Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 1 unit. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 1 unit. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than 1 unit of each type. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 3 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than 1 unit of each type. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamperproofed components. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: Two of each type installed. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system.


283100 - 4


12/7/10


MANUFACTURERS A.

2.2

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by GE. SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A.

Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

B.

Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

C.

Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders. Activate voice communication system. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode. Activate smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighter smoke-control system panel. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors. Activate emergency lighting control. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. Record events in the system memory. Record events by the system printer.

Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1. 2.

D.

Manual stations. Heat detectors. Flame detectors. Smoke detectors. Duct smoke detectors. Verified automatic alarm operation of smoke detectors. Automatic sprinkler system water flow. Heat detectors in elevator shaft and pit.

Valve supervisory switch. Low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe sprinkler system.

System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions: 1. 2. 3.

Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.


283100 - 5

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. E.

2.3

12/7/10

Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit. Break in standby battery circuitry. Failure of battery charging. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system. Trouble signal-initiating devices and actions.

System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. Record the event on system printer. FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT

A.

General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit: 1.

Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, complying with UL 864 and listed and labeled by an NRTL. a.

b. 2.

Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status. a. b.

3. B.

Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allow for adjustment of sensitivity at fire-alarm control unit. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device.

Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.

Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu. 1. 2.

C.

System software and programs shall be held in flash electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and printer.

Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 3 line(s) of 80 characters, minimum. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of Smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.

Circuits: 1.

Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: Class A.


NFPA 72,

283100 - 6

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 a. b. c. d. 2. D.

12/7/10

Initiating Device Circuits: Style D Style E. Notification Appliance Circuits: Style Z. Signaling Line Circuits: Style 7. Install no more than 40 addressable devices on each signaling line circuit.

Serial Interfaces: four RS-232 ports for printers.

Smoke-Alarm Verification: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm-verification" signal at fire-alarm control unit. Activate an NRTL-listed and -approved "alarm-verification" sequence at fire-alarm control unit and detector. Record events by the system printer. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified. Cancel fire-alarm control unit indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.

E.

Notification Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound voice recorded message with a slow whoop.

F.

Fire Shutter Controls: Fire shutter devices that are controlled by smoke detectors in smoke barrier walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system.

G.

Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory, and print out the final adjusted values on system printer.

H.

Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.

I.

Voice/Alarm Signaling Service: Central emergency communication system with redundant microphones, preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators provided as a special module that is part of fire-alarm control unit. 1.

Indicated number of alarm channels for automatic, simultaneous transmission of different announcements to different zones or for manual transmission of announcements by use of the central-control microphone. Amplifiers shall comply with UL 1711 and be listed by an NRTL. a.

b. c.

Allow the application of and evacuation signal to indicated number of zones and, at same time, allow voice paging to the other zones selectively or in any combination. Programmable tone and message sequence selection. Standard digitally recorded messages for "Evacuation" and "All Clear."


283100 - 7

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 d.

2. 3.

12/7/10

Generate tones to be sequenced with audio messages of type recommended by NFPA 72 and that are compatible with tone patterns of notification appliance circuits of fire-alarm control unit.

Status Annunciator: Indicate the status of various voice/alarm speaker zones and the status of firefighters' two-way telephone communication zones. Preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators shall automatically transfer to backup units, on primary equipment failure.

J.

Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events. Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble) and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications. Also print system reset event, including same information for device, location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printing of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events.

K.

Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitters and digital alarm radio transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source. 1.

L.

Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch. 1.

M.

2.4

Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the powersupply module rating.

Batteries: Sealed lead calcium.

Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions. MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A.

General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box. 1.

2. 3.

Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation.


283100 - 8


2.5

12/7/10

Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.

SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS A.

General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors: 1. 2. 3. 4.

5. 6. 7.

Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. Detectors shall be four-wire type. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated and poweron status. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit. a. b. c.

B.

Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: 1. 2.

Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector: a. b. c. d. e.

C.

Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at fire-alarm control unit for 15 or 20 deg F per minute. Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be settable at fire-alarm control unit to operate at 135 or 155 deg F. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.

Primary status. Device type. Present average value. Present sensitivity selected. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

Ionization Smoke Detector: 1. 2.

Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:


283100 - 9

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 a. b. c. d. e. D.


Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A. 1. 2.

Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector: a. b. c. d. e.

3. 4. 5. 6. 2.6

12/7/10


Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the supplied detector. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

HEAT DETECTORS A.

General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.

B.

Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F per minute unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2.

C.

Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: temperature of 190 deg F. 1. 2.

D.

Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed

Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

Continuous Linear Heat-Detector System: 1.

Detector Cable: Rated detection temperature 155 deg F. NRTL listed for "regular" service and a standard environment. Cable includes two steel actuator wires twisted


283100 - 10


2. 3.

4.

2.7

12/7/10

together with spring pressure, wrapped with protective tape, and finished with PVC outer sheath. Each actuator wire is insulated with heat-sensitive material that reacts with heat to allow the cable twist pressure to short- circuit wires at the location of elevated temperature. Control Unit: Two-zone or multizone unit as indicated. Provide same system power supply, supervision, and alarm features as specified for fire-alarm control unit. Signals to Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Any type of local system trouble shall be reported to fire-alarm control unit as a composite "trouble" signal. Alarms on each detection zone shall be individually reported to central fire-alarm control unit as separately identified zones. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A.

General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Individually addressed, connected to a signaling line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

B.

General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections. 1.

C.

Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a singlemounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens. 1.

Rated Light Output: a. b.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. D.

75 110 177 cd. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.

Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined with guards in place. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, white.

Voice/Tone Notification Appliances: 1. 2. 3.

Appliances shall comply with UL 1480 and shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL. High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W. Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W.


283100 - 11


2.8

Mounting: Flush. Matching Transformers: location.

12/7/10

Tap range matched to acoustical environment of speaker

REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR A.

Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of firealarm control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing. 1.

B.

2.9

Mounting: Surface cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1.

Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights shall match those of fire-alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals. ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A.

Description: Microelectronic monitor module, NRTL listed for use in providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

B.

Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to elevator controller to initiate elevator recall.


EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A.

Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.

B.

Equipment Mounting: Install fire-alarm control unit on concrete base with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1. 2. 3. 4.

C.

Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing: 1.

Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing.


283100 - 12

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

12/7/10

Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for heat-detector spacing. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high ceiling areas shall be determined according to Appendix A in NFPA 72. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 5 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting fixture.

D.

Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct.

E.

Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler rating and location.

F.

Single-Station Smoke Detectors: Where more than one smoke alarm is installed within a dwelling or suite, they shall be connected so that the operation of any smoke alarm causes the alarm in all smoke alarms to sound.

G.

Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler waterflow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.

H.

Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.

I.

Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 inches below the ceiling.

J.

Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

K.

Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Surface mounted, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

L.

Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

3.2

CONNECTIONS A.

For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system. 1.

B.

Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire-alarm system in this Section before making connections.

Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet from the device controlled. Make an


283100 - 13


12/7/10

addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 3.3

Alarm-initiating connection to smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighter smoke-control system panel. Alarm-initiating connection to stairwell and elevator-shaft pressurization systems. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems. Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency lighting control. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler system. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt trip breaker. Supervisory connections at fire-pump power failure including a dead-phase or phasereversal condition. Supervisory connections at fire-pump engine control panel.

IDENTIFICATION A.

Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B.

Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

3.4

GROUNDING A.

3.5

Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.

Install a


Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.

B.


C.


D.



Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.


283100 - 14

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Shop 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 a.

b.

2. 3.

4. 5. 6.

12/7/10

Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

E.

Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

F.

Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G.


H.

Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

I.

Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

3.6

DEMONSTRATION A.

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system. END OF SECTION 283100


283100 - 15


December 7, 2010

SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

B.


2. 3. 4.

1.3

Protecting existing vegetation to remain. Removing existing vegetation. Clearing and grubbing. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities abandoning site utilities in place. Temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures.

Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utility services, construction and support facilities, security and protection facilities, and temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures. Division 01 Section "Execution" for field engineering and surveying. Division 02 Section "Structure Demolition" for demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements. Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for partial demolition of buildings or structures.

DEFINITIONS A.

Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

B.

Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

C.

Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing inplace surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow.

SITE CLEARING

311000 - 1

City of Marco Island December 7, 2010 Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 D. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing inplace surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow. Its appearance is generally friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials. E.

Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other vegetation to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings.

F.

Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.

1.4

MATERIAL OWNERSHIP A.

1.5

Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. SUBMITTALS

A.

Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing. 1. 2.

B.

1.6

Use sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each tree or other plants designated to remain.

Record Drawings: Identifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. 1.7

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.

Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations. 1. 2.

B.

Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.

SITE CLEARING

311000 - 2

City of Marco Island December 7, 2010 Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect. C.

Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where indicated.

D.

Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing.

E.

Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentationcontrol and plant-protection measures are in place.

F.

The following practices are prohibited within protection zones: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. Parking vehicles or equipment. Foot traffic. Erection of sheds or structures. Impoundment of water. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated.

G.

Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.

H.

Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.

I.

Soil Stripping, Handling, and Stockpiling: Perform only when the topsoil is dry or slightly moist.


MATERIALS A.

Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 1.

Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available on-site.


PREPARATION A.

Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B.

Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated.

SITE CLEARING

311000 - 3

City of Marco Island December 7, 2010 Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 1. 3.2

Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A.

Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B.

Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.

C.

Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

D.

Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

3.3

TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION A.

General: Protect trees and plants remaining on-site according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

B.

Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.

3.4

EXISTING UTILITIES A.

Owner will arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures before site clearing, when requested by Contractor. 1.

B.

Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing.

Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned in place. 1. 2.

Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.

C.

Locate, identify, and disconnect utilities indicated to be abandoned in place.

D.

Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

SITE CLEARING

311000 - 4

City of Marco Island December 7, 2010 Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1. Notify Architect not less than seven days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. E. 3.5

Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed. CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A.

Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. 1. 2. 3. 4.

B.

Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1.

3.6

Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. Grind down stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade. Use only hand methods for grubbing within protection zones. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.

Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

TOPSOIL STRIPPING A.

Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B.

Strip topsoil to depth of 6 inches in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. 1.

C.

Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water. 1. 2. 3. 4.

3.7

Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.

Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches. Do not stockpile topsoil within protection zones. Dispose of surplus topsoil. Surplus topsoil is that which exceeds quantity indicated to be stockpiled or reused. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil.

SITE IMPROVEMENTS A.

Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new construction.

SITE CLEARING

311000 - 5

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated. 1.

2.

3.8

December 7, 2010

Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut along line of existing pavement to remain before removing adjacent existing pavement. Sawcut faces vertically. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain with two coats of antirust coating, following coating manufacturer's written instructions. Keep paint off surfaces that will remain exposed.

DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A.

Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.


SITE CLEARING

311000 - 6


December 7, 2010

SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

B.

Related Sections: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

1.3

Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade. Subbase course for concrete walks, pavements. Subbase course and base course for asphalt paving. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures. Excavating well hole to accommodate elevator-cylinder assembly.

Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary controls, utilities, and support facilities; also for temporary site fencing if not in another Section. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for granular course if placed over vapor retarder and beneath the slab-on-grade. Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, 27, 28, and 33 Sections for installing underground mechanical and electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical structures. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, stripping topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities. Division 31 Section "Dewatering" for lowering and disposing of ground water during construction. Division 31 Section "Excavation Support and Protection" for shoring, bracing, and sheet piling of excavations.

DEFINITIONS A.

Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. 2.

Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

EARTH MOVING

312000 - 1


December 7, 2010

B.

Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C.

Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

D.

Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

E.

Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water.

F.

Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1.

2.

Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.

G.

Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

H.

Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

I.

Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

J.

Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.

K.

Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For each type of the following manufactured products required: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Geotextiles. Controlled low-strength material, including design mixture. Geofoam. Warning tapes.

EARTH MOVING

312000 - 2


December 7, 2010

Samples for Verification: For the following products, in sizes indicated below: 1. 2.

Geotextile: 12 by 12 inches. Warning Tape: 12 inches long; of each color.

C.


D.

Material Test Reports: For each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill as follows: 1. 2.

E.

1.5

Classification according to ASTM D 2487. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698,ASTM D 1557.

Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earth moving operations. Submit before earth moving begins. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: ASTM D 3740 for testing indicated.

B.

Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.6

Qualified according to ASTM E 329 and


Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during earth moving operations. 1. 2.

B.

Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing earth moving indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract. 1.

Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect.

C.

Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before beginning earth moving operations.

D.

Do not commence earth moving operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures, specified in drawings are in place.

E.

Do not commence earth moving operations until plant-protection measures specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" are in place.

EARTH MOVING

312000 - 3


December 7, 2010

The following practices are prohibited within protection zones: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. Parking vehicles or equipment. Foot traffic. Erection of sheds or structures. Impoundment of water. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated.

G.

Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.

H.

Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.


SOIL MATERIALS A.

General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B.

Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

C.

Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

D.

Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

E.

Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

F.

Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.

G.

Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.

H.

Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate.

EARTH MOVING

312000 - 4


December 7, 2010

GEOTEXTILES A.

Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

2.3

Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. Grab Tensile Strength: 157 lbf; ASTM D 4632. Sewn Seam Strength: 142 lbf; ASTM D 4632. Tear Strength: 56 lbf; ASTM D 4533. Puncture Strength: 56 lbf; ASTM D 4833. Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. Permittivity: 0.5 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.

ACCESSORIES A.

Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Red: Electric. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. Orange: Telephone and other communications. Blue: Water systems. Green: Sewer systems.


PREPARATION A.

Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving operations.

B.

Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations.

C.

Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.

EARTH MOVING

Remove

312000 - 5


December 7, 2010

DEWATERING A.

Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B.

Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1.

3.3

Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

EXPLOSIVES A.

3.4

Explosives: Do not use explosives. EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A.

Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions. 1. 2.

B.

Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be classified as earth and rock. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross sectioned by Architect. The Contract Sum will be adjusted for rock excavation according to unit prices included in the Contract Documents. Changes in the Contract Time may be authorized for rock excavation. 1.

3.5

If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without exceeding the following dimensions:

Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation.

EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A.

Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1.

Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

EARTH MOVING

312000 - 6


3.

B.

Pile Foundations: Stop excavations 6 to 12 inches above bottom of pile cap before piles are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced material. Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces.

Excavations at Edges of Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones: 1.

2.

3.6

December 7, 2010

Excavate by hand to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A.

3.7

Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A.

Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. 1.

B.

Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated. 1.

C.

Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line.

Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit.

Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of

pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade. 1. 2.

For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe or conduit circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill.

EARTH MOVING

312000 - 7


3.8

December 7, 2010

For flat-bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A.

Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Architect. 1.

3.9

Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by Architect.

STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A.

Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1.

3.10 A.

BACKFILL Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

B. 3.11

Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. Removing concrete formwork. Removing trash and debris. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A.

Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B.

Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

EARTH MOVING

312000 - 8


December 7, 2010

C.

Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings.

D.

Trenches under Roadways: Provide 4-inch- thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase course.

E.

Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while removing shoring and bracing.

F.

Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the pipe or conduit. 1.

Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

G.

Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.

H.

Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.12

SOIL FILL

A.

Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B.

Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

C. 3.13 A.

Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.

Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud and frost. SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. 2.

Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

EARTH MOVING

312000 - 9


December 7, 2010

COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A.

Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B.

Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C.

Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698, ASTM D 1557: 1. 2. 3. 4.

3.15 A.

GRADING General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. 2.

B.

C.

3.16 A.

Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 95 percent.

Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances.

Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1.

Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch.

2. 3.

Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.

Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE Subdrainage Pipe: Specified in Division 33 Section "Subdrainage."

EARTH MOVING

312000 - 10


Subsurface Drain: Place subsurface drainage geotextile around perimeter of subdrainage trench. Place a 6-inch course of filter material on subsurface drainage geotextile to support subdrainage pipe. Encase subdrainage pipe in a minimum of 12 inches of filter material, placed in compacted layers 6 inches thick, and wrap in subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches. 1.

C.

Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated, to within 12 inches (300 mm) of final subgrade, in compacted layers 6 inches thick. Overlay drainage backfill with one layer of subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches. 1. 2.

3.17

December 7, 2010

Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. Place and compact impervious fill over drainage backfill in 6-inch- thick compacted layers to final subgrade.

SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS

A.

Place subbase courseon subgrades free of mud and frost.

B.

On prepared subgrade, place subbase course and base course under pavements and walks as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6.

C.

Install separation geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. Place base course material over subbase course under hot-mix asphalt pavement. Shape subbase course and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. Place subbase course and base course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. Place subbase course and base course] that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. Compact subbase course and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase course and base course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches wide, of satisfactory soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

EARTH MOVING

312000 - 11

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 3.18 A.

December 7, 2010

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. 2. 3.

Determine prior to placement of fill that site has been prepared in compliance with requirements. Determine that fill material and maximum lift thickness comply with requirements. Determine, at the required frequency, that in-place density of compacted fill complies with requirements.

B.

Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C.

Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

D.

Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect.

E.

Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1.

2. 3. F.

3.19

Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for every 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for every 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.

When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. PROTECTION

A.

Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B.

Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

EARTH MOVING

312000 - 12

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1. C.

Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact.

Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1.

3.20

December 7, 2010

Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A.

Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

B.

Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect. 1.

Remove waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.


EARTH MOVING

312000 - 13


December 7,2010

SECTION 312319 - DEWATERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

Section includes construction dewatering.

B.

Related Sections: 1. 2.

1.3

Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, backfilling, site grading, and for site utilities. Division 31 Section "Excavation Support and Protection" for shoring, bracing, and sheet piling of excavations.


Dewatering Performance: Design, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and maintain dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control hydrostatic pressures and to lower, control, remove, and dispose of ground water and permit excavation and construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades. 1.

2.

3. 4. 5. 1.4

Delegated Design: Design dewatering system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. Continuously monitor and maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion control, stability of excavations and constructed slopes, that excavation does not flood, and that damage to subgrades and permanent structures is prevented. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means. Accomplish dewatering without damaging existing buildings, structures, and site improvements adjacent to excavation. Remove dewatering system when no longer required for construction.

SUBMITTALS A.

Shop Drawings: For dewatering system. Show arrangement, locations, and details of wells and well points; locations of risers, headers, filters, pumps, power units, and discharge lines; and means of discharge, control of sediment, and disposal of water.

DEWATERING

312319 - 1


December 7,2010

Include layouts of piezometers and flow-measuring devices for monitoring performance of dewatering system. Include a written plan for dewatering operations including control procedures to be adopted if dewatering problems arise.

B.

Delegated-Design Submittal: For dewatering system indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

C.

Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

D.


E.

Other Informational Submittals: 1.

1.5

Photograph or Videotape: Existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by dewatering operations.


Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer that has specialized in design of dewatering systems and dewatering work.

B.

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning dewatering. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

C.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.

Review methods and procedures related to dewatering including, but not limited to, the following: a.

b. c. d. e. f. g.

DEWATERING

Inspection and discussion of condition of site to be dewatered including coordination with temporary erosion control measures and temporary controls and protections. Geotechnical report. Proposed site clearing and excavations. Existing utilities and subsurface conditions. Coordination for interruption, shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. Construction schedule. Verify availability of Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. Testing and monitoring of dewatering system.

312319 - 2


December 7,2010


Interruption of Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt any utility serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility according to requirements indicated: 1. 2.

B.

Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data. 1. 2.

C.

Notify Architect and Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of utility. Do not proceed with interruption of utility without Architect's and Owner's written permission.

Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for dewatering. The geotechnical report is included elsewhere in the Project Manual.

Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey adjacent existing buildings, structures, and site improvements, establishing exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations. 1.

During dewatering, regularly resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction.


PREPARATION A.

Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by dewatering operations. 1. 2.

Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding site and surrounding area. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation.

DEWATERING

312319 - 3


December 7,2010

Install dewatering system to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1.

Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

C.

Provide temporary grading to facilitate dewatering and control of surface water.

D.

Monitor dewatering systems continuously.

E.

Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering.

F.

Protect and maintain temporary erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" during dewatering operations.

3.2

INSTALLATION A.

Install dewatering system utilizing wells, well points, or similar methods complete with pump equipment, standby power and pumps, filter material gradation, valves, appurtenances, water disposal, and surface-water controls. 1. 2.

Space well points or wells at intervals required to provide sufficient dewatering. Use filters or other means to prevent pumping of fine sands or silts from the subsurface.

B.

Before excavating below ground-water level, place system into operation to lower water to specified levels. Operate system continuously until drains, sewers, and structures have been constructed and fill materials have been placed or until dewatering is no longer required.

C.

Provide an adequate system to lower and control ground water to permit excavation, construction of structures, and placement of fill materials on dry subgrades. Install sufficient dewatering equipment to drain water-bearing strata above and below bottom of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations. 1.

Do not permit open-sump pumping that leads to loss of fines, soil piping, subgrade softening, and slope instability.

D.

Reduce hydrostatic head in water-bearing strata below subgrade elevations of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations.

E.

Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner that avoids endangering public health, property, and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water and sediment in a manner that avoids inconvenience to others. Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other flow-control devices as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

F.

Provide standby equipment on site, installed and available for immediate operation, to maintain dewatering on continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails. If dewatering

DEWATERING

312319 - 4


December 7,2010

requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of dewatering system, restore damaged structures and foundation soils at no additional expense to Owner. 1.

G. 3.3

Remove dewatering system from Project site on completion of dewatering. Plug or fill well holes with sand or cut off and cap wells a minimum of 36 inches below overlying construction.

Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering operations. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Observation Wells: Provide, take measurements, and maintain at least the minimum number of observation wells or piezometers indicated; additional observation wells may be required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. 2.

3. B.

Observe and record daily elevation of ground water and piezometric water levels in observation wells. Repair or replace, within 24 hours, observation wells that become inactive, damaged, or destroyed. In areas where observation wells are not functioning properly, suspend construction activities until reliable observations can be made. Add or remove water from observation-well risers to demonstrate that observation wells are functioning properly. Fill observation wells, remove piezometers, and fill holes when dewatering is completed.

Provide continual observation to ensure that subsurface soils are not being removed by the dewatering operation.


DEWATERING

312319 - 5


December 7, 2010

SECTION 313116 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.


B.


1.3

Soil treatment with termiticide.

Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood preservative treatment by pressure process. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for custom-fabricated metal termite shields.


1.4

Service Life of Soil Treatment: Soil treatment by use of a termiticide that is effective for not less than five years against infestation of subterranean termites. SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For termiticide. 1.

Include the EPA-Registered Label for termiticide products.

B.

Product Certificates: For termite control products, signed by product manufacturer.

C.

Qualification Data: For Installer of termite control products.

D.

Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for Owner's record information, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Date and time of application. Moisture content of soil before application. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.

TERMITE CONTROL

313116 - 1

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 5. 6. 7. E.

3. 4. 5.

1.5

Date and time of application. Brand name and manufacturer of borate. Quantity of undiluted borate used. Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used. Areas of application.

Bait-Station System Application Report: After installation of bait-station system is completed, submit report for Owner's records information, including the following: 1. 2.

G.

Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used. Areas of application. Water source for application.

Wood Treatment Application Report: After application of borate is completed, submit report for Owner's record information, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

F.

December 7, 2010

Location of areas and sites conducive to termite feeding and activity. Dated report for each monitoring and inspection occurrence indicating level of termite activity, procedure, and treatment applied before time of Substantial Completion. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide. Quantities of termite bait used. Schedule of inspections for one year from date of Substantial Completion.

Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located, and who employs workers trained and approved by bait-station system manufacturer to install manufacturer's products.

B.

Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides according to the EPA-Registered Label.

C.

Source Limitations: Obtain termite control products through one source.

D.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" to schedule application of termiticide products.

1.6


Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the EPA-Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

TERMITE CONTROL

313116 - 2


December 7, 2010

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs before construction.

B.

Apply borate treatment after framing, sheathing, and exterior weather protection is completed but before electrical and mechanical systems are installed.

C.

Install bait-station monitoring system during construction to determine areas of termite activity.

D.

Install bait-station system after construction, including landscaping, is completed.

1.8

WARRANTY A.

Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. 1.

1.9


MAINTENANCE SERVICE A.

Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' continuing service including monitoring, inspection, and re-treatment for occurrences of termite activity. Provide a standard continuing service agreement. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period; and terms for future renewal options.


MANUFACTURERS A.


B.


Termiticides: a. b. c. d. e.

Aventis Environmental Science USA LP; Termidor. Bayer Corporation; Premise 75. Dow AgroSciences LLC; [Dursban TC] [Equity]. FMC Corporation, Agricultural Products Group; [Talstar] [Prevail FT] [Torpedo]. Syngenta; Demon TC.

TERMITE CONTROL

313116 - 3


December 7, 2010

SOIL TREATMENT A.

2.3

Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA-Registered Label. WOOD TREATMENT

A.

Borate: Provide an EPA-registered borate complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution for spray application and a gel solution for pressure injection, formulated to prevent termite infestation in wood. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum diffusible borate concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA-Registered Label.


EXAMINATION A.

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of soil, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. 1.

3.2

Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

PREPARATION A.

General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's written instructions for preparation before beginning application of termite control treatment. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and around foundations.

B.

Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer. 1.

Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

TERMITE CONTROL

313116 - 4


December 7, 2010

APPLICATION, GENERAL A.

3.4

General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products. APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT

A.

Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly. 1.

2.

3.

4. 5.

Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Underground-supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab, and around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; also along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations as previously indicated. Treat adjacent areas including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases. Apply overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground. Masonry: Treat voids. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated.

B.

Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.

C.

Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until groundsupported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions.

D.

Post warning signs in areas of application.

E.

Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application.

3.5

APPLYING BORATE TREATMENT A.

Application: Mix wood treatment borate solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of borate, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, so that wood framing, sheathing, siding, and structural members subject to infestation receive treatment.

TERMITE CONTROL

313116 - 5


December 7, 2010

Framing and Sheathing: Apply borate solution by spray to bare wood for complete coverage. Wood Members Thicker Than 4 Inches: Inject borate gel solution under pressure into holes of size and spacing required by manufacturer for treatment.


TERMITE CONTROL

313116 - 6


December 7, 2010

SECTION 315000 - EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

Section includes temporary excavation support and protection systems.

B.


1.3

Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation " for recording preexisting conditions and excavation support and protection system progress. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utilities and support facilities. Division 31 Section "Dewatering" for dewatering system for excavations.


Design, furnish, install, monitor, and maintain excavation support and protection system capable of supporting excavation sidewalls and of resisting soil and hydrostatic pressure and superimposed and construction loads. 1.

2. 3. 4. 1.4

Delegated Design: Design excavation support and protection system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means. Install excavation support and protection systems without damaging existing buildings, structures, and site improvements adjacent to excavation. Monitor vibrations, settlements, and movements.

SUBMITTALS A.

Shop Drawings: For excavation support and protection system.

B.

Delegated-Design Submittal: For excavation support and protection system indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

315000 - 1


C.

Other Informational Submittals: 1.

2.

Photograph or Videotape: Existing conditions of adjacent construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by the absence of, the installation of, or the performance of excavation support and protection systems. Submit before Work begins. Record Drawings: Identifying and locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions. a.

1.5

December 7, 2010

Note locations and capping depth of wells and well points.


Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.

Review methods and procedures related to excavation support and protection system including, but not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

1.6

Geotechnical report. Existing utilities and subsurface conditions. Proposed excavations. Proposed equipment. Monitoring of excavation support and protection system. Working area location and stability. Coordination with waterproofing. Abandonment or removal of excavation support and protection system.


Interruption of Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt any utility serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility according to requirements indicated: 1. 2.

B.

Notify Architect and Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of utility. Do not proceed with interruption of utility without Architect and Owner's written permission.

Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from the data.


315000 - 2

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1. 2. C.

December 7, 2010

Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for excavation support and protection. The geotechnical report is included elsewhere in the Project Manual.

Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey adjacent existing buildings, structures, and site improvements; establish exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations. 1.

During installation of excavation support and protection systems, regularly resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations and positions for comparison with original elevations and positions. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations or positions occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction.


MATERIALS A.

General: Provide materials that are either new or in serviceable condition.

B.

Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 690/A 690M, or ASTM A 992/A 992M.

C.

Steel Sheet Piling: ASTM A 328/A 328M, ASTM A 572/A 572M, or ASTM A 690/A 690M; with continuous interlocks. 1.

Corners: Roll-formed corner shape with continuous interlock.

D.

Wood Lagging: Lumber, mixed hardwood, nominal rough thickness of size and strength required for application.

E.

Shotcrete: Comply with Division 03 Section "Shotcrete" for shotcrete materials and mixes, reinforcement, and shotcrete application.

F.

Cast-in-Place Concrete: ACI 301, of compressive strength required for application.

G.

Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

H.

Tiebacks: Steel bars, ASTM A 722/A 722M.

I.

Tiebacks: Steel strand, ASTM A 416/A 416M.


315000 - 3


December 7, 2010


PREPARATION A.

Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards that could develop during excavation support and protection system operations. 1.

B.

Shore, support, and protect utilities encountered.

Install excavation support and protection systems to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1.

Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

C.

Locate excavation support and protection systems clear of permanent construction so that forming and finishing of concrete surfaces are not impeded.

D.

Monitor excavation support and protection systems daily during excavation progress and for as long as excavation remains open. Promptly correct bulges, breakage, or other evidence of movement to ensure that excavation support and protection systems remain stable.

E.

Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by installing excavation support and protection systems.

3.2

SOLDIER PILES AND LAGGING A.

Install steel soldier piles before starting excavation. Extend soldier piles below excavation grade level to depths adequate to prevent lateral movement. Space soldier piles at regular intervals not to exceed allowable flexural strength of wood lagging. Accurately align exposed faces of flanges to vary not more than 2 inches from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment.

B.

Install wood lagging within flanges of soldier piles as excavation proceeds. Trim excavation as required to install lagging. Fill voids behind lagging with soil, and compact.

C.

Install wales horizontally at locations indicated on Drawings and secure to soldier piles.

3.3

SHEET PILING A.

Before starting excavation, install one-piece sheet piling lengths and tightly interlock to form a continuous barrier. Accurately place the piling, using templates and guide frames unless otherwise recommended in writing by the sheet piling manufacturer. Limit vertical offset of


315000 - 4


December 7, 2010

adjacent sheet piling to 60 inches. Accurately align exposed faces of sheet piling to vary not more than 2 inches from a horizontal line and not more than 1:120 out of vertical alignment. Cut tops of sheet piling to uniform elevation at top of excavation. 3.4

TIEBACKS A.

Tiebacks: Drill, install, grout, and tension tiebacks. Test load-carrying capacity of each tieback and replace and retest deficient tiebacks. 1. 2.

3.5

Test loading shall be observed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for design of excavation support and protection system. Maintain tiebacks in place until permanent construction is able to withstand lateral soil and hydrostatic pressures.

BRACING A.

Bracing: Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other permanent work. If necessary to move brace, install new bracing before removing original brace. 1. 2. 3.

3.6

Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete work unless otherwise approved by Architect. Install internal bracing, if required, to prevent spreading or distortion of braced frames. Maintain bracing until structural elements are supported by other bracing or until permanent construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures.

REMOVAL AND REPAIRS A.

Remove excavation support and protection systems when construction has progressed sufficiently to support excavation and bear soil and hydrostatic pressures. Remove in stages to avoid disturbing underlying soils or damaging structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities. 1. 2. 3.

B.

Remove excavation support and protection systems to a minimum depth of 48 inches below overlaying construction and abandon remainder. Fill voids immediately with approved backfill compacted to density specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Repair or replace, as approved by Architect, adjacent work damaged or displaced by removing excavation support and protection systems.

Leave excavation support and protection systems permanently in place.



315000 - 5


December 7, 2010

SECTION 330500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1


1.2


A.

This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.

1.3

Piping joining materials. Transition fittings. Dielectric fittings. Sleeves. Identification devices. Grout. Flowable fill. Piped utility demolition. Piping system common requirements. Equipment installation common requirements. Painting. Concrete bases. Metal supports and anchorages.

DEFINITIONS A.

Exposed Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions.

B.

Concealed Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

C.

ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

D.

CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.

E.

PE: Polyethylene plastic.

F.

PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES

330500 - 1

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.

Product Data: For the following: 1. 2.

B. 1.5

December 7, 2010

Dielectric fittings. Identification devices.

Welding certificates. QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Steel Support Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B.

Steel Piping Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. 2.

C.

1.6

Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current.

Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B.

Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

B.

Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting if devices are applied to surfaces.

C.

Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. requirements are specified in Division 03.


Formwork, reinforcement, and concrete

330500 - 2

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

December 7, 2010

PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A.

Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1.

ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. a. b.

2.

Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

E.

Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

F.

Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

G.

Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. 2. 3. 4.

H. 2.2

ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.

Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer. TRANSITION FITTINGS

A.

Transition Fittings, General: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.


330500 - 3

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 B. AWWA Transition Couplings NPS 2 and Larger: 1.

2.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.

3. C.

2.

Description: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling for underground pressure piping.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a.

3.

Spears Manufacturing Co.

Description: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cementjoint or threaded end.

Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: 1.

2.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c.

3. E.

Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. Dresser, Inc.; DMD Div. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Div. JCM Industries. Smith-Blair, Inc. Viking Johnson.

Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: 1.

D.

December 7, 2010

Colonial Engineering, Inc. NIBCO INC. Spears Manufacturing Co.

Description: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union. Include brass or stainlesssteel threaded end, solvent-cement-joint plastic end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.

Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping:


330500 - 4

City of Marco Island December 7, 2010 Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. 3.

2.3

Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. Fernco, Inc. Mission Rubber Company. Plastic Oddities.

Description: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.

DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A.

Dielectric Fittings, General: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

B.

Dielectric Unions: 1.

2.

Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.

3.

Description: Factory fabricated, union, NPS 2 and smaller. a. b.

2.4

Capitol Manufacturing Co. Central Plastics Company. Epco Sales, Inc. Hart Industries, International, Inc. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

Pressure Rating: [150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum] [250 psig (1725 kPa)] at 180 deg F (82 deg C). End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded ferrous.

SLEEVES A.

Mechanical sleeve seals for pipe penetrations are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."


330500 - 5

City of Marco Island December 7, 2010 Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. C.

Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

D.

Cast-Iron Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

E.

Molded PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F.

PVC Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

G.

Molded PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

2.5

IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A.

General: Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 33 Sections. If more than single type is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option.

B.

Equipment Nameplates: stamped. 1. 2.

C.

Metal permanently fastened to equipment with data engraved or

Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data. Location: Accessible and visible.

Stencils: Standard stencils prepared with letter sizes complying with recommendations in ASME A13.1. Minimum letter height is 1-1/4 inches for ducts, and 3/4 inch for access door signs and similar operational instructions. 1. 2. 3.

Material: Fiberboard Stencil Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd-gloss black enamel, unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form. Identification Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Lettering: Manufacturer's standard preprinted captions as selected by Architect.

E.

Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. 1.

F.

Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions of flow, or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.

Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive vinyl tape, at least 3 mils thick.


330500 - 6

City of Marco Island December 7, 2010 Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1. Width: 1-1/2 inches on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 6 inches; 2-1/2 inches for larger pipes. 2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated. G.

Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2inch sequenced numbers. Include 5/32-inch hole for fastener. 1. 2. 3.

Material: 0.032-inch- thick, polished brass. Size: 1-1/2 inches in diameter, unless otherwise indicated. Shape: As indicated for each piping system.

H.

Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire-link or beaded chain; or brass S-hooks.

I.

Plasticized Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with mat finish suitable for writing. 1. 2. 3.

J.

Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in piped utility identification with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, letters, and terms indicated for proper identification, operation, and maintenance of piped utility systems and equipment. 1.

2.6

Size: 3-1/4 by 5-5/8 inches Fasteners: Brass grommets and wire. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT OPERATE.

Multiple Systems: Identify individual system number and service if multiple systems of same name are indicated.

GROUT A.

Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout. 1. 2. 3.

Characteristics: Post hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. Design Mix: 5000-psi,28-day compressive strength. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.


PIPED UTILITY DEMOLITION A.

Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" and Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.

B.

Disconnect, demolish, and remove piped utility systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.


330500 - 7

City of Marco Island December 7, 2010 Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. 2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping. Fill abandoned piping with flowable fill, and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. 3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational. 5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. C.

3.2

If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality. PIPING INSTALLATION

A.

Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 33 Sections specifying piping systems.

B.

Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on the Coordination Drawings.

C.

Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D.

Install piping to permit valve servicing.

E.

Install piping at indicated slopes.

F.

Install piping free of sags and bends.

G.

Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

H.

Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

I.

Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

J.

Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

K.

Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1.

Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.


330500 - 8

City of Marco Island December 7, 2010 Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. 2.

Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.

L.

Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

M.

Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing-in requirements.

3.3

PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A.

Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 33 Sections specifying piping systems.

B.

Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C.

Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D.

Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. 2.

Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

E.

Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

F.

Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

G.

Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved-end pipe coupling with coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

H.

Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813 water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy (0.20 percent maximum lead content) complying with ASTM B 32.

I.

Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

J.

Pressure-Sealed Joints: Assemble joints for plain-end copper tube and mechanical pressure seal fitting with proprietary crimping tool to according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

K.

Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:


330500 - 9

City of Marco Island December 7, 2010 Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 appendixes. 3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. 5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix. L.

Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

M.

Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

N.

Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. 1. 2.

O.

3.4

Plain-End PE Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. Plain-End PE Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions. PIPING CONNECTIONS

A.

Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3.

3.5

Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. Install dielectric fittings at connections of dissimilar metal pipes.

EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A.

Install equipment level and plumb, unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location.

C.

Install equipment to allow right of way to piping systems installed at required slope.

3.6

PAINTING A.

Paint all exposed pipe utility systems, equipment, and components.


330500 - 10

City of Marco Island December 7, 2010 Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 3.7

IDENTIFICATION A.

Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow. 1. 2. 3.

Stenciled Markers: According to ASME A13.1. Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for hot noninsulated piping. Locate pipe markers on exposed piping according to the following: a. b. c. d. e.

B.

Equipment: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major item of equipment. 1.

2.

C.

3.8

Near each valve and control device. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for equipment and terminal units. Mark each pipe at branch if flow pattern is not obvious. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors or enter inaccessible enclosures. At manholes and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4 inch high for name of unit if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch high for distances up to 72 inches and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths of size of principal lettering. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish among multiple units, inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.

Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices that become visually blocked by work of this or other Divisions. CONCRETE BASES

A.

Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. 1. 2. 3.

Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of base. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.


330500 - 11

City of Marco Island December 7, 2010 Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 03 Section. 3.9

ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A.

Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B.

Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor piped utility materials and equipment.

C.

Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.10

GROUTING

A.

Mix and install grout for equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B.

Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C.

Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D.

Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E.

Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F.

Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G.

Place grout around anchors.

H.

Cure placed grout.



330500 - 12


December 7, 2010

SECTION 333000 –WATER DISTRIBUTION PART 1 GENERAL . 1.1 DESCRIPTION A.

Domestic water distribution system, complete, including piping, valves, fittings, appurtenances, tapping into existing domestic water distribution line as the water source, and necessary accessories.

B.

Provide labor, materials, necessary equipment and services to complete the water distribution system installation work, as indicated on the drawings, as specified herein or both.

C.

The water distribution source is a domestic water main. All equipment is to be marked and colored so as to conform to all applicable laws, rules, regulations, and conventions concerning water distribution.

D

The work includes proper testing of the installation of the system per the specifications.

1.2 RELATED WORK A.

All applicable provisions of the Bidding and Contract Requirements, and Division 1 General Requirements shall govern the work under this Section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A.


B.

Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, method of field assembly, and components.

C.


D.

Operation and maintenance data.

E.

As-builts.

1.4 JOB CONDITIONS A.

Become familiar with site conditions. Should utilities not shown on the plans be found during excavations, promptly notify Architect and Owner’s representative for instructions on how to proceed.

WATER DISTRIBUTION

333000 -1


December 7, 2010

Make necessary adjustments in the layout as may be required to connect to existing water mains, should such pipe mains not be located exactly as shown, and as may be required to work around existing work.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The work shall conform to the latest requirements of local, state, and federal agencies, as appropriate. B.

Contractor shall verify all underground utilities 72 hours prior to commencement of work.

C.

Notify Architect and Owner’s project representative 24 hours in advance of starting the work.

D.

Notify Architect’s project representative if variances are found between the Drawings and the code requirements.

E.

Contractor shall repair or replace all items damaged by the work. Contractor shall coordinate the work with other contractors where required.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Water-Distribution Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water-distribution service according to requirements indicated: 1. 2.

1.2

Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service. Do not proceed with interruption of water-distribution service without Owner's written permission.

COORDINATION A.

Coordinate connection to water main with utility company.


PIPE AND FITTINGS A.

Copper Tube; Ductile-Iron Pipe; PVC Pipe: 1.

As indicated on the Drawings.

WATER DISTRIBUTION

333000 -2


December 7, 2010

JOINING MATERIALS A.

2.3

: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. PIPING SPECIALTIES

A.

2.4

Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined. GATE VALVES

A. 2.5

As indicated on the Drawings. GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES

A.

Tapping-Sleeve Assemblies: 1.

B.

Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve boxes. Include top section, adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over valve and with a barrel 1.

C.

2.6


Operating Wrenches: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut.

Indicator Posts: UL 789, FMG-approved, vertical-type, cast-iron body with operating wrench, extension rod, and adjustable cast-iron barrel of length required for depth of burial of valve. CORPORATION VALVES AND CURB VALVES

A.

Manufacturers: 1.

B.


Service-Saddle Assemblies; Corporation Valve: 1. As indicated on the Drawings.

C.

Curb Valves: 1. As indicated on the Drawings.

WATER DISTRIBUTION

333000 -3


Service Boxes for Curb Valves: Similar to AWWA M44 requirements for cast-iron valve boxes. Include cast-iron telescoping top section of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over curb valve and with a barrel. 1.

2.7

December 7, 2010

Shutoff Rods: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and slotted end matching curb valve.

BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A.

Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers: 1. As indicated on the Drawings.

B.

Double Detector Check Valve Assemblies: 1. As indicated on the Drawings.


EARTHWORK A.

3.2

Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. PIPING APPLICATIONS

A.

General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following applications.

B.

Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping.

D.

Flanges, unions, and special fittings may be used, instead of joints indicated, on aboveground piping and piping in vaults.

E.

Underground water-service piping 2 inch to 4 inch shall be any of the following: 1. As indicated on Drawings

3.3

VALVE APPLICATIONS A.

General Application: 1. As indicated on Drawings.

WATER DISTRIBUTION

333000 -4


December 7, 2010

PIPING INSTALLATION A.

Water-Main Connection: Tap water main according to requirements of water utility company and of size and in location indicated.

B.

Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

C.

Install PE pipe according to ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 645.

D.

Install PVC, AWWA pipe according to ASTM F 645 and AWWA M23.

E.

Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 36 inches.

F.

Extend water-service piping and connect to water-supply source in locations and pipe sizes indicated. 1.

G.

3.5

Terminate water-service piping at locations until indicated systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to -water-piping systems when those systems are installed.

Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use restrained-joint piping, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports. JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A.

Make pipe joints according to the following: 1.

3.6

As indicated on Drawings.

ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION A.

Anchorage, General: Install water-distribution piping with restrained joints. Anchorages and restrained-joint types that may be used include the following: 1. As indicated on Drawings.

B.

Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. Include anchorages for the following piping systems: 1. 2.

C.

Gasketed-Joint, Ductile-Iron, Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA C600. Gasketed-Joint, PVC Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA M23..

Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces of installed ferrous anchorage devices.

WATER DISTRIBUTION

333000 -5


December 7, 2010

VALVE INSTALLATION A.

AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.

B.

UL/FMG, Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. Install each underground valve and valves in vaults with stem pointing up and with vertical cast-iron indicator post.

C.

MSS Valves: Install as component of connected piping system.

D.

Corporation Valves and Curb Valves: Install each underground curb valve with head pointed up and with service box.

3.8

Install each

BACKFLOW PREVENTER INSTALLATION A.

Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks. Install according to requirements of plumbing and health department and authorities having jurisdiction.

B.

Do not install backflow preventers that have relief drain in vault or in other spaces subject to flooding.

C.

Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

D.

Support larger backflow preventers, valves, and piping near floor and on brick or concrete piers.

3.9

CONNECTIONS A.

Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 2 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B.

Connect water-distribution piping to utility water main. Use tapping sleeve and tapping valve.

3.10

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after thrust restraints have been installed. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water.

B.

Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one-and-one-half times working pressure for two hours. 1.

C.

As indicated on Drawings.

Prepare reports of testing activities.

WATER DISTRIBUTION

333000 -6

City of Marco Island Instrumentation Building 100% Construction Document Specifications Astorino Project No. N001039.00 3.11 A.

3.12 A.

IDENTIFICATION Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground water-distribution piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. Underground warning tapes are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." CLEANING Clean and disinfect water-distribution piping as follows: 1. 2.

3. B.

December 7, 2010

Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction.

Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities.


WATER DISTRIBUTION

333000 -7


December 7, 2010

SECTION 333050 – SANITARY SEWERAGE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION: Outside, underground sanitary sewer system, complete, ready for operation, including all gravity flow lines, manholes, cleanouts, frames, covers, structures, appurtenances, and connections to new building and structure, service lines, existing sanitary sewer lines, and existing sanitary structures, and all other incidentals.

1.2 RELATED WORK: A. Maintenance of Existing Utilities: Division 1. B. Excavation, Trench Widths, Pipe Bedding, Backfill, Shoring, Sheeting, Bracing: Division 2, EARTHWORK. C. Concrete Work Reinforcing, Placement and Finishing;

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Products Criteria: 1. Multiple Units: When two or more units of the same type or class of materials or equipment are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer. 2. Nameplates: Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name, or identifiable trademark, securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast integrally with equipment, stamped, or otherwise permanently marked on each item of equipment. B. Comply with the rules and regulations of the Public Utility having jurisdiction over the connection to Public Sanitary Sewer lines and the extension, and/or modifications to Public Utility Systems.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

SANITARY SEWERAGE

333050 -1


December 7, 2010

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01340, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS. B. Manufacturers' Literature and Data: Submit the following as one package: 1.

Pipe, Fittings, and, Appurtenances.

2. Jointing Material. 3. Cleanouts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 4.3.4 WASTEWATER SYSTEM WW 1. Ductile Iron Pipe Approved Products/Manufacturers for flanged, push-on and mechanical joint pipe (1) American Cast Iron Pipe Company (2) U.S. Pipe (3) McWayne Corporation (Atlantic States, McWayne, Pacific States, Clow Water Systems) (4) Griffin Approved Products/Manufacturers for flexible joint restraint pipe: (1) American – Flex-Ring, Lok Ring; push-on joint pipe with Fast Grip Gasket (sizes 4”-16”) (2) US Pipe – TR Flex; push-on joint pipe with Field Lock 350 Gasket (sizes 4”-24”) (3)McWayne Corporation – Super-Lock (4) Griffin – Snap Lok, Bolt Lok Minimum Non Flanged Minimum Special Pipe Size Pressure Class Thickness Class 3", 4" 350 51 6"-16" 350 50 20” 300 50 24" 250 50 30” and larger 200 50 Minimum Special Thickness Class 53 is required for flanged pipe. Pipe must be ceramic epoxy lined with ‘PROTECTO 401”, or ‘PERMITE 9043 type 2” or lined with “Polybond Plus.” The lining must be factory applied and warranted by the pipe manufacturer. Toruseal or Flange-Tyte gaskets are required for flanged pipe. WW 2. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe (Pipe to be color-coded green) Approved Products/Manufacturers: A. Push-on Joint Pipe, AWWA C-900, SDR-18, 150 psi, NSF61 or AWWA C-905, SDR-25, 165 psi, NSF-61 (14”- 24”): (1) JM Pipe* (2) Diamond* (3) CertainTeed* (4) NAPCO* (5) IPEX** (6) National Plastic** (7) Freedom Plastics (C900 only)** * No Pipe deflection at the joint allowed **Up to two (2) degrees deflection at pipe joint allowed. B. Restrained Joint PVC Pipe: (1) CertainTeed CERTA Lok, C-900/RJ, SDR14, NSF61 (sizes 4”-12”) C. Service Pipe Up to 6” PVC Schedule 40 and 80, NSF61: (Color: White or Green) (1) Heritage Plastics South Inc. (2) JM Pipe (3) Freedom (4) Accord Industry SANITARY SEWERAGE

333050 -2


December 7, 2010

(5) Charlotte WW 3. Exposed Steel Pipe (A53 Grade B, ERW, minimum 0.500” wall thickness, AWWA C200; flange shall be Class D per AWWA C204. Interior shall be lined with Permite 9043 Type II. Exterior shall be:Primer 3 mils Tnemec Zinc 90-97, intermediate 4-6 mils Tnemec 66, top coat 2 mils Tnemec 74 (black). Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) Custom Fab WW 4. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipe (AWWA C906, Min. 40 Feet Standard Lengths, Min. DR 11, DIPS Size) Approved Products Manufactures: (1) CP Chem (2) JMM (3) IPEX (4) Polypipe WW 5. PVC Cement (Certified for both Schedule 40 and Schedule 80) Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) Harvey’s Wet Set PVC Cement #018430 (2) Christy’s Red Hot Blue Glue WW 6. Thread Sealant Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) E-Z Weld 777 by Fry Technology (2) Pipe Fit, FPPI (3) Teflon Tape (all manufacturers) WW 7. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Gravity Mains and Laterals Pipe (Color: Green), ASTM-3034, SDR-26 Pipe within Wellfield Protection Zones 1 & 2 must meet the requirements of C-900, SDR-18, 150 psi. Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) JM Pipe (2) Diamond (3) NAPCO (4) Freedom Plastics (5) Accord Industries WW 8. Gate Valves Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) Mueller 2360 (2) American Series 2500 (MM, FF) (3) Kennedy Ken-Seal II (4) M & H 4067 (5) Clow F-6100, F-6102 (6) US Pipe Metroseal WW 9. Tapping Valves Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) American 2500TM (2) Mueller T-2360 (3) US Pipe Metroseal (4) M & H 4751-NRS (5) Clow F-6114 WW 10. Check Valves Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) M & H 159-02 (2) Mueller 2600-6-01 (3) Kennedy 106LW (4) Clow 5382 (5) American 50SC (lever & weight) WW 11. Screw Type (2) Piece Valve Boxes and Lid (Lid marked “sewer”) Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) East Jordan Iron Works 8560 with 4” Skirt Lid (0680045) (2) Bingham/Taylor 4905 with 4” Skirt Lid (4906) SANITARY SEWERAGE

333050 -3


December 7, 2010

Note: Drop lid to weigh minimum 24 lbs. WW 12. Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Prevention Assemblies (to be owned by PBCWUD, must be USC Approved) Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) AMES 4000 SS (Required for plant installations) (2) WILKINS 975XL (3) WILKINS 375 (3” and Larger) (4) AMES C400 / C500 Note: All Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Prevention Assemblies which are included on the latest "List of Approved Backflow Prevention Assemblies" as published by the University of Southern California may be used for private water services. WW 13. Mechanical Joint Ductile Iron Tapping Sleeves (Ceramic epoxy lined) Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) M & H 1174 (2) American 2800 Series (3) Mueller H-615 (4) Clow 5205 (5) US Pipe MJ WW 14. Stainless Steel Tapping Sleeves (Stainless steel flange required) Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) Dresser Style 360 (2) Ford FTSS (3) Cascade CST-EX (4) JCM 432, JCM 452 for larger than 24” (5) Power Seal Model 3490 (6) Smith Blair WW 15. Mechanical Joint Restraining Devices Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) EBAA Iron Megalug 1100, 1100SD (for DIP) (2) EBAA Iron 2000PV, 2000SV (PVC) (3) Romac Grip Ring (for PVC only) (4) Ford Uniflange Series 1400 (for DIP) (5) Star Grip (for DIP and PVC) (6) Sigma (DIP and PVC) WW 16. Pressure Pipe Bell Restraint Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) Ford Uniflange Series 1390 (DIP and PVC) (2) EBAA Iron Series 1700, 1100 HD (DIP) (3) EBAA Iron Series 1600, 2800 (PVC) (4) Star 1100C (PVC) (5) EBAA Iron Series 1600 TD (PVC and DIP) WW 17. Pressure Pipe Bell Joint Leak Clamps (No Set Screws Allowed) Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) Smith Blair Type 274 (2) Ford Style FBC (3) Romac Style 516 WW 18. Ductile Iron Flanged Adapters Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) Ford Uniflange 400 (2) EBAA Iron 2100 Megaflange (3) Smith Blair 912 (4) Power Seal Model 3521 WW 19. Ductile Iron Fittings Approved Products/Manufacturers: A. Both ends mechanical joints and flangedjoints (1) Tyler SANITARY SEWERAGE

333050 -4


December 7, 2010

(2) US Pipe (3) American (4) Union Foundry (5) Star (6) Sigma (7) Clow B. Flexible Restraint Fittings (1) American – Flex Ring, Lok Ring (2) US Pipe – TR Flex (3) Griffin – Snap Lok (4) McWayne Corporation – Super Lock C. Welded on Outlet Tees for pipes large than 24” non-flanged pipe. The welded on branch size shall not exceed ½ of the main pipe size. Welding shall be performed and tested by the pipe manufacturer. (1) American (2) US Pipe AWWA C-110, AWWA C-153 “bare” ductile iron fittings must be ceramic epoxy lined with “Protecto 401” or “Permite 9043 Type 2” or lined with “Polybond Plus.” The lining must be factory applied and/or warranted by the fitting manufacturer. Toruseal or Flange-Tyte gaskets are required for flanged fittings. WW 20. Follower Glands Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) Tyler (2) US Pipe WW 21. Casing Pipe Spacers Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) Cascade (2) APS Spacing System (3) RACI (4) BWM WW 22. Pipe Adapter Couplings (for use on existing facilities) Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) Fernco (2) Indiana Seal (3) Dallas (4) Atlas WW 23. Pipe Transition Couplings - SDR-35 PVC to DIP or to PVC C900 Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) Harco (2) Flow Control (3) NYOPLS (4) WAGER WW 24. Corporations Stops Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) Ford FB500-TA (2) AY McDonald 3131B (3) Mueller B-200313-10 WW 25. Corporation Stops for ARV and Pressure Gauge Installations Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) Ford FB 500 (2) AY McDonald 3131 B (3) Mueller B2996 WW 26. Service Saddles Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) JCM 402 (2) Smith Blair 313 (3) Romac 202 (4) Ford F202 (5) Power Seal Model 3417 SANITARY SEWERAGE

333050 -5


December 7, 2010

WW 27. Manhole Adjustment Rings Approved Products/Manufacturers: A. Existing Manholes only, (max. 4”height adjustment) (1) Manhole Systems MS-101 (2) Roblyn Series 2300, 2400 (3) Andrews Metal Products, Inc. #2, #5 B. New manholes, max 12” total ring height (1) Brick chimney, field installed (2-5 courses of bricks) (field-applied corrosion barrier systems required). (2) Precast reinforced concrete rings (4,000psi), field-installed for cast-in liner and for field appliedcorrosion barrier systems. Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) Tri-County (2) U.S. Precast WW 28. Manhole Frame and Cover (Gravity Sewer) Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) U.S. Foundry 465KD, 420 KD (2) Vulcan V1344, V1144-2 Note: The frames must be machined to accept inflow protectors. WW 29. Rigid Manhole to PVC Pipe Connectors (“Sand Collar”) Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) Harco SDR 35 WW 30. Manhole Flexible Pipe Connector Sleeves (Cast-in) Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) Chardon Rubber Company Lockjoint (for use in structures without Cast-in liner) (2) A-LOCK Products Inc: sealing gasket for lower invert in outside drop manholes with Cast-in liner WW 31. Manhole Flexible Pipe Connector Sleeves (for use in structures with Cast-in liners and Cast-in “turn-back”). Approved Manufacturer: (1) NPC Kor-N-Seal (Double ridge sleeve with two stainless steel bands) WW 32. Manhole Inflow Protectors Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) Southwestern Packing and Seals "Rainstopper PBC-1" (2) L.F. Manufacturing, Inc. "Rain Guard LFNSV" (3) Knutson Enterprises Manhole Insert Note: All Protectors must have Stiffening Ribs and pre-approved valve design. WW 33. Paint for Exposed Ductile Iron Pipe Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) SunTec – Primer 801 Rustking, Top Coat –860A Rustking Acrylic Gloss (Black), (2) coats at 3 mils each. (2) MAB Ply Tile epoxy tar coating, three coats are required at 8-10 mils each. WW 34. Cleanout Castings Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) U.S. Foundry No. 7621 (2) Russco C-762 WW 35. Line Stop Tapping Sleeve Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) JCM 440 WW 36. PVC Fittings (Gravity Mains and Laterals), ASTM 3034 SDR 35. Approved Products/Manufacturers: (1) HARCO (2) VASSALLO (3) MULTI (4) PTI (STI Style) WW 37. Above Ground Utility Markers Approved Products/Manufacturers SANITARY SEWERAGE

333050 -6


December 7, 2010

(1) Rocal, Inc. #RI-4PLPC 12-6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 BUILDING SERVICE LINES: A. Install sanitary sewer service lines to point of connection within approximately 1500 mm (5 feet) outside of buildings where service is required and make connections. Coordinate the invert and location of the service line with the Contractor installing the building lines. B. Connections of service line to building piping shall be made after the new sanitary sewer system has been constructed, tested, and accepted for operation by the Resident Engineer. The Contractor shall install all temporary caps or plugs required for testing. C. When building services have not been installed at the time when the sanitary sewer system is complete, provide temporary plugs or caps at the ends of all service lines. Mark the location and depth of the service lines with continuous warning tape placed 300 mm (12 inches) above service lines. 3.2 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEMS: A. Comply with all rules and regulations of the public utility. B. The connection to the existing utility shall comply with the standard details and specifications of the public utility company, except as specifically modified on the plans and specifications. 3.3 PIPE SEPARATION: A. Horizontal Separation - Water Mains and Sewers: 1. Existing and proposed water mains shall be at least 3 meters (10 feet) horizontally from any proposed gravity flow and pressure (force main) sanitary sewer or sewer service connection. 2. Gravity flow mains and pressure (force) mains may be located closer than 3 meters (10 feet) but not closer than 1.8 m (6 feet) to a water main when: a. Local conditions prevent a lateral separation of ten feet; and b. The water main invert is at least 450 mm (18 inches) above the crown of the gravity sewer or 600 mm (24 inches) above the crown of the pressure (force) main; and c. The water main is in a separate trench separated by undisturbed earth. 3. When it is impossible to meet (1) or (2) above, both the water main and sanitary sewer main shall be constructed of push-on or mechanical joint ductile iron pipe. The pipe for the sanitary sewer main shall comply with the specifications for pressure (force) mains, and the water

SANITARY SEWERAGE

333050 -7


December 7, 2010

main material shall comply with Section 02713, Water System. The sewer shall be pressure tested as specified for pressure (force) mains before backfilling.

B. Vertical Separation - Water Mains and Sewers at Crossings:

1. Water mains shall be separated from sewer mains so that the invert of the water main is a minimum of 600 mm (24 inches) above the crown of gravity flow sewer or 1200 mm (48 inches) above the crown of pressure (force) mains. The vertical separation shall be maintained within 3 meters (10 feet) horizontally of the sewer and water crossing. When these vertical separations are met, no additional protection is required. 2. In no case shall pressure (force) sanitary main cross above, or within 600 mm (24 inches) of water lines. 3. When it is impossible to meet (1) above, the gravity flow sewer may be installed 450 mm (18 inches) above or 300 mm (12 inches) below the water main, provided that both the water main and sewer shall be constructed of push-on or mechanical ductile pipe. Pressure (Force) sewers may be installed 600 mm (24 inches) below the water line provided both the water line and sewer line are constructed of ductile iron pipe. The pipe for the sewer shall conform to the requirements for pressure sewers specified herein. Piping for the water main shall conform to Section 02713, WATER SYSTEM. 4. The required vertical separation between the sewer and the water main shall extend on each side of the crossing until the perpendicular distance from the water main to the sewer line is at least 3 meters (10 feet).

3.4 GENERAL PIPING INSTALLATION: A. Lay pipes true to line and grade. Gravity flow sewer shall be laid with bells facing upgrade. B. Do not lay pipe on unstable material, in wet trench or when trench and weather conditions are unsuitable for the work. C. Support pipe on compacted bedding material. Excavate bell holes only large enough to properly make the joint. D. Inspect pipes and fittings, for defects before installation. Defective materials shall be plainly marked and removed from the site. Cut pipe shall have smooth regular ends at right angles to axis of pipe. SANITARY SEWERAGE

333050 -8


December 7, 2010

E. Clean interior of all pipe thoroughly before installation. When work is not in progress, open ends of pipe shall be closed securely to prevent entrance of storm water, dirt or other substances. F. Lower pipe into trench carefully and bring to proper line, grade, and joint. After jointing, interior of each pipe shall be thoroughly wiped or swabbed to remove any dirt, trash or excess jointing materials. G. Do not lay sewer pipe in same trench with another pipe or other utility. Sanitary sewers shall cross at least 600 mm (2 feet) below water lines. H. Do not walk on pipe in trenches until covered by layers of shading to a depth of 300 mm (12 inches) over the crown of the pipe. I.

Warning tape shall be continuously placed 300 mm (12 inches) above sewer pipe

J. Install gravity sewer line in accordance with the provisions of these specifications and the following standards: 1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping: ASTM D2321.

3.5 CLEANOUTS: A. 150 millimeters (6 inches) in diameter and consisting of a ductile iron 45 degree fitting on end of run, or combination Y fitting and l/8 bend in the run with ductile iron pipe extension, water tight plug or cap and cast frame and cover flush with finished grade. Center-set cleanouts, located in unpaved areas, in a 300 by 300 by 150 mm (12 by 12 by 6 inch) thick concrete slab set flush with adjacent finished grade. B. The top of the cleanout assembly shall be 50 mm (2 inches) below the bottom of the cover to prevent loads being transferred from the frame and cover to the piping.

3.6 SETTING OF GATE VALVES: A. Avoid setting valves under pavement except where shown on the drawings. B. Clean valve interior before installation. C. Set valve plumb, restrain ends of valves when indicated on the drawing. D. Set valve box cover flush with the finished grade. Valve box shall be centered over the operating nut.

SANITARY SEWERAGE

333050 -9


December 7, 2010

3.7 INSPECTION OF SEWERS: Inspect and obtain the Engineer's approval. Thoroughly flush out before inspection. Lamp test between structures and show full bore indicating sewer is true to line and grade. Lip at joints on the inside of gravity sewer lines are not acceptable.

3.8 TESTING OF SANITARY SEWERS: A. Gravity Sewers and Manholes (Select one of the following): 1. Air Test: Vitrified Clay Pipe ASTM C828. PVC Pipe, Uni-Bell B-6. The line shall be pressurized to 4 psi and allowed to stabilize. After pressure stabilization, the pressure shall be dropped to 3.5 Psi greater than the average back-pressure of any groundwater above the sewer. The minimum test time shall be as specified in Uni-Bell B-6. 2. Exfiltration Test: a. Subject pipe to hydrostatic pressure produced by head of water at depth of 900 mm (3 feet) above invert of sewer at upper manhole under test. In areas where ground water exists, head of water shall be 900 mm (3 feet) above existing water table. Maintain head of water for one hour for full absorption by pipe body before testing. During one hour test period, measured maximum allowable rate of exfiltration for any section of sewer shall be 11 L (3.0 gallons) per hour per 30 m (100 feet). b. If measurements indicate exfiltration is greater than maximum allowable leakage, take additional measurements until leaks are located. Repair and retest. 3. Infiltration Test: If ground water level is greater than 900 mm (3 feet) above invert of the upper manhole, infiltration tests are acceptable. Allowable leakage for this test will be the same as for the exfiltration test.


SANITARY SEWERAGE

333050 -10


December 7, 2010

SECTION 444253 - OIL / WATER SEPARATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.

SCOPE The work covered in this section includes furnishing all labor, material, equipment and incidents to install complete and ready for operation, a corrugated plate oil water separation device as shown on drawings and as specified herein.

1.2 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A.

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publication: B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250 and 800 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications: A-36 Structural Steel A-53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded Seamless A283 Low and Intermediate Steel Plate of Structural Quality American Welding Society (AWS) Publications: D1.1-84 Structural Welding Code, Steel A5.1 Mild Steel Arc-Welding Electrodes Standard Welding Terms and Definitions Standard Welding Symbols Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Publication: American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Steel Construction Manual, 8th Edition

1.3

SUBMITTALS

A.

Submit the following before fabrication

B.

Shop Drawings: Shop drawings for oil water separator and accessory equipment including principle dimensions and location of fittings. Data shall include weight and distribution of weight with the unit empty and filled with water.

OIL/WATER SEPARATORS

444253-1


December 7, 2010

C.

Test results, signed by the manufacturer, which indicate the oil water separator is capable of handling specified effluent concentration, pH, fluid temperature and concentration of oil and grease. Tests on this model shall have been done within the last 3 years.

D.

Provide calculations of oil water separator loading rate at the design flow rate.

E.

Submit the following verification after fabrication:

1. Written verification on the fabricator’s letterhead that surface preparation and coating application were performed in accordance with the specification and coating specification and system manufacturer’s printed recommendations; 2. That the unit was hydraulically leak tested for a period of at least 4 hours before further surface preparation and coating; 3. That the surface preparation and coating process was performed at a facility owned and operated by the manufacturer; 1.4 A.

1.5

MANUFACTURER’S SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE'S REPORT AND CERTIFICATE Submit service representative's complete signed report of results of the inspection, operation, adjustment, and tests. Report shall include detailed descriptions of points inspected, tests and adjustments made, quantitative results obtained if such are specified, and suggestions for precautions to be taken to ensure proper maintenance. Include the manufacturer’s certificate that equipment conforms to specified requirements and is ready for permanent operation and that nothing in installation will render manufacturer's warranty null and void. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING MATERIALS

A.

Delivery and Storage: Inspect materials delivered to site for damage; unload and store with minimum handling. Store materials on site in enclosures or under protective coverings. Protect materials not suitable for outdoor storage to prevent damage during periods of inclement weather, including subfreezing temperatures, precipitation, and high winds. Store materials susceptible to deterioration by direct sunlight under cover and avoid damage due to high temperatures. Do not store materials on ground. Store and protect materials according to manufacturer recommendations.

B.

Handling: Handle the oil water separator in such a manner as to ensure delivery to final location in sound, undamaged condition. Take special care not to damage interior and exterior surfaces of the inclined plate clarifier. Make satisfactory repairs to damaged material(s) at no cost. Carry and do not drag materials. Handle the oil water separator according to manufacturers’ information.

1.6 A.

QUALITY ASSURANCE: Inspection: Examine each component of the oil water separator for compliance with requirements specified. Redesign or modification of equipment to comply with specified requirements, or necessary redesign or modification following failure to meet specified requirements, shall receive particular attention for adequacy and suitability. This element of inspection shall encompass visual examinations and dimensional measurements. Noncompliance


444253-2


December 7, 2010

with specified requirements, or presence of one or more defects preventing or lessening maximum efficiency of the oil water separator’s operation, shall constitute cause for rejection. B.

WELDER QUALIFICATIONS:

1.

Welders shall be previously qualified by passing the tests prescribed in the AWS Standard Qualification Procedure, or by passing such other tests as the Engineer may accept.

2.

Welders shall have been tested within the past twenty four months and their qualifications shall be considered as remaining in effect unless the welder is not engaged in a given process of welding for a period exceeding six months.

PART 2 - OIL/WATER SPECIFICATIONS

SEPARATOR

DESIGN

CRITERIA

AND

MANUFACTURING

2.1

Oil/Water Separator Applications & Performance

A.

Applications: The oil water separator shall be used to separate entrained oil droplets from a wastewater stream having a flow rate of * gallons per minute. The unit is baffled to dissipate hydraulic flow through the system. A sand trap is incorporated in the inlet baffle compartment to collect and allow for removal of heavy settleable solids. The oil droplets coalesce from entrainment as the laminar flow moves through the corrugated plates. The oil collects on the ceiling of the flow channel, coalesces into larger droplets and flows upward due to the differential in specific gravity of the oil and water mixture.

B.

Performance: The oil water separator shall remove 100% of oil droplets 60 micron or larger at the designed flow rate. Calculations showing flow rate, plate pack area oil droplet buoyancy shall be provided to demonstrate that the specified oil water separator will remove 100% of oil droplets larger than 60 microns.

C.

OIL WATER SEPARATOR Manufacturing specification

D.

The manufacturer of the oil water separator and related components shall have been manufacturing oil water separators of the following specified design for at least five years. The oil water separator and components shall be fabricated and assembled at the steel fabrication facility owned and operated by the manufacturer. Sandblasting and coating operations shall also be performed at the manufacturers’ facility. The manufacturer shall maintain a quality control staff to perform quality assurance checks during fabrication and assembly.

E.

Corrugated plates shall be set at a minimum of 45 degrees above the horizontal plane and the space between plates shall be at least 0.75 inches.

F.

The maximum flow rate through the inclined plate pack shall not exceed 0.40 gallons per minute per square foot of horizontal projected area. (Horizontal projected area of an inclined plate set at 45° is 70% of the total surface area).


444253-3


December 7, 2010

G.

To ensure full utilization of all plate areas. Velocities through the unit shall be kept below 1 FPS. Flow velocity calculation shall be submitted for feed ducts, feed bay and plate separators.

H.

The oil water separator shall be provided with minimum 4 inch freeboard at design flow rate.

I.

The minimum plate spacing shall be 0.75 inches. Plates shall be fabricated of fiber reinforced plastic. The plates shall be supported by dividers constructed of stainless steel, Teflon or molded plastic inserts.

J.

The plates shall be a minimum of 0.06 inches thick FRP. The plates shall have a resin rich surface to prevent fiber show. The plates shall be produced by contact molding or machine extrusion, "hand or spray lay-up fabrication" will not be acceptable.

K.

The plates shall be 42" wide supported on the sides and center, such that unsupported distances shall not exceed 12". Settling plates wider than 48" shall be supported on 12" center or provide documentation and test results that the plates will withstand a load of 100% filled with sludge, specific gravity 1.4 or above, with all water drained from the separator, without plate collapsing. Manufacturer shall provide a minimum of five installation references with at least five years service without failure.

L.

Gasket materials utilized in the plate construction shall be Viton or Teflon. All assembly clips shall be constructed of Teflon.

M.

Inlet and outlet shall be flanged connections drilled to ANSI B16.1.

N.

The oil overflow weir and the final effluent weir shall have adjustable weir plates.

O.

All outlets shall be flanged fittings and there shall be outlets for the sand trap, sludge collection area, oil collection weir and final effluent.

P.

The unit shall be equipped with a cover constructed in easily removal sections and at least one section shall have a 4" flange to vent accumulated gases.

2.3

STRUCTURAL

A.

All structural and tank steel stresses shall be within the allowable limits shown in the Steel Construction Manual of the American Institute of Steel Construction, Eighth Edition.

C.

Oil Water Separator shall be fabricated from ASTM A-36 steel.

D.

All exterior welds shall be continuous seal weld or the weld must be caulked before surface coating.

2.4 A.

TESTING All seal welds shall be visually checked for continuity, pinholes, and voids.


444253-4


December 7, 2010

B.

The entire unit shall be shop-hydrostatically tested. Documentation of hydrostatic test shall be provided.

2.5

SURFACE PREPARATION AND COATING

A.

Surface Preparation: The steel surfaces must be dry and clean in accordance with the following requirements. Remove all grease, oils and contaminants as outlined in SSPC SP1. Remove all weld splatter and grind burrs on cut edges and rough welds smooth. Blast clean all surfaces after fabrication in accordance with SSPC SP10 with profile depth of 1.5-2.0 mils. Apply first primer before any rust bloom forms.

B.

Caulking: All exterior non-seal welding joints shall be filled with rubber caulking before painting.

C.

Exterior Surfaces:

1.

Shop First Coat: Apply one coat average dry film thickness of two mils minimum, of a highbuild catalyzed epoxy. Apply to all steel surfaces except the areas within 2 inches adjacent to field welds and surfaces specified to be hot-dip galvanized. The paint shall be Hempel 4563U.

2.

Shop Finish Coat: Apply one coat average dry film thickness of 1.0 mils minimum, of a polyurethane paint. Recoat at time interval recommended by the manufacturer, the final coat shall be Hempel 5595U.

3.

Third Coat: Field touch-up of damaged and unpainted areas shall be the same as specified first and second coats at the same film thickness.

4.

The total dry film thickness shall be an average of 4 mils.

D.

Interior Surfaces:

1.

Shop First Coat: Apply one coat average, dry film thickness of four mils, of an immersion grade high-build catalyzed epoxy. Apply to all steel surfaces except the areas within 2 inches adjacent to field welds and surfaces specified to be hot-dip galvanized. The paint shall be Hempel 15409.

2.

Shop Finish Coat: Apply one coat average, dry film thickness of 4 mils, of an immersion grade high-build catalyzed epoxy. Recoat at time interval recommended by the manufacturer, the final coat shall be Hempel 15409.

3.

Third Coat: Field touch-up of damaged and unpainted areas shall be the same as specified first and second coats at the same film thickness. (Liquid Contact).

4.

The dry film thickness shall be an average of 6 mils.


444253-5


December 7, 2010

PART 3 - DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING MATERIALS 3.1

DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A.

3.2

Inspect materials delivered to site for damage; unload and store with minimum handling. Store materials on-site in enclosures or under protective coverings. Protect materials not suitable for outdoor storage to prevent damage during periods of inclement weather, including subfreezing temperatures, precipitation and high winds. Store material susceptible to deterioration by direct sunlight under cover and avoid damage due to high temperatures. Do not store materials directly on ground. If special precautions are required, prominently and legibly stencil instruction for such precautions on outside of equipment or its crating. Store and protect materials according to manufacturers recommendations. HANDLING

A.

Handle the oil water separator in such a manner as to ensure delivery to final location in sound, undamaged condition. Take special care not to damage interior and exterior surfaces of oil water separator and associated supports and pipe coatings or linings. Make satisfactory repairs to damaged material(s) at no cost. Carry and do not drag materials. Handle oil water separator according to manufacturers information.


INSTALLATION

A.

Oil water separator to be installed as indicated and as recommended by the manufacturer. Equipment delivered to the site in advance of installation to be stored per the manufacturer’s requirements. Make all connections as required to make the oil water separator fully operational. Do not weld tank surfaces, interior or exterior, it will permanently damage the interior lining. If welding has inadvertently occurred, the interior surface affected shall be abrasively ground to white metal and two coats of Hempel 15409 applied, with air dry between coatings.

B.

Field Inspection Services: Examine each component of the oil water separator for compliance with requirements specified. Redesign or modification of equipment to comply with specified requirements, or necessary redesign or modification following failure to meet specified requirements, shall receive particular attention for adequacy and suitability. This element of inspection shall encompass visual examinations and dimensional measurements. Noncompliance with specified requirements, or presence of one or more defects preventing or lessening maximum efficiency of the oil water separator operation, shall constitute cause for rejection.

C.

Start-Up Testing: Manufacturer’s field representative shall inspect and test unit and certify that the installation has been performed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and that the system is ready for operation by others. Inspection shall consider, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Soundness (without cracked or otherwise damaged parts). 2. Completeness in all details, as specified. OIL/WATER SEPARATORS

444253-6


December 7, 2010

Correctness of settling alignment, set points and relative arrangement of each component. Confirm that the unit is level within ¼" side to side and end to end. Inspect unit for leakage. Inspect coating integrity to insure installation contractor has applied touch-up paint to all scratches, blemishes and/or coating discontinuity that occurred during shipping and installation.

PART 5 - SUGGESTED MANUFACTURER The oil water separator shall be 220 gal model manufactured by: Hoffland Environmental, Inc. 10391 Silver Springs Road Conroe, Texas 77303

(936) 856-4515 phone / (936) 856-4589 fax e-mail: [email protected] Or

ACO Environmental USA Ray Wofford (770) 331-7999 e-mail: ACOUSA.com



444253-7